Copyright: Copyright


Help Contents
Contents

Origin Basics

The Worksheet

Working with Excel in Origin

The Matrix

Importing and Exporting Data

Plotting:  The Basics

Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types

Plotting:  Graph Layers

Plotting:  The Axes

Plotting:  Customizing the Graph

Plotting:  Customizing the Page Display

Creating Your Graphic Presentation

Printing

Data Analysis

Curve Fitting

Setting Your Preferences

Programming and Special Topics

References

Links to Microcal Software Web Site


Origin Basics

Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace

Working with a Project

Working with Child Windows

Customizing Origin


The Worksheet

Shortcut Menus in the Worksheet

Performing Basic Worksheet Operations

Entering and Deleting Data in the Worksheet

Viewing Worksheet Data

Selecting Worksheet Data

Controlling the Worksheet's Display Properties

Controlling the Properties of the Columns

Associating Script with a Worksheet

Aligning Objects with the Page Grid

Extracting Data from the Worksheet

Saving a Worksheet as a Template

Deleting a Worksheet from a Project


Working with Excel in Origin

Limitations When Working with Excel in Origin

Starting New Projects with a Workbook Window Already Open

Opening a Workbook in Your Project

Saving a Workbook Separately from the Project

How the Origin Workspace Changes When a Workbook is Active

Working with Workbook Windows

Working with Workbook Data

Plotting Workbook Data

Managing Projects that Include Workbooks

Troubleshooting Problems Using Excel in Origin


The Matrix

Opening a Matrix Window

Shortcut Menus in a Matrix

Setting the Matrix Data Properties

Setting the Matrix Dimensions and XY Coordinates

Setting the Matrix Values

Viewing the Matrix Values

Customizing the Display Properties of a Matrix

Importing Data into a Matrix

Matrix Operations

Converting a Worksheet into a Matrix

Converting a Matrix into a Worksheet

Saving a Matrix Window

Saving a Matrix as a Template


Importing and Exporting Data

Importing

Exporting

Exchanging Data Between Worksheets


Plotting:  The Basics

Shortcut Menus in the Graph Window

Plotting Terminology

Creating a Graph when a Worksheet is Active

Creating a Graph when a Matrix is Active

Creating (or Adding Data to) a Graph when the Graph Window is Active

Plotting Functions

Adding Error Bars to Your Graph

Adding a Date/Time Stamp to Your Graph

Graph Windows and Graph Templates


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types

2D Line, Scatter, and Line + Symbol Graphs

2D Bar and Column Graphs

Area, Polar, and 2D Waterfall Graphs

Pie Charts

Vector Graphs

High-Low-Close Charts

Ternary Graphs

Multiple Layer Graphs

Indexed Size (Bubble) and Color Mapped Graphs

3D XYY Graphs

3D XYZ Graphs

3D Surfaces

Contour Graphs


Plotting:  Graph Layers

Understanding Layers

Controlling the Display of Elements Associated with a Layer

Origin's Built-in Multiple Layer Graph Templates

Adding New Layers to the Graph

Deleting Layers

Hiding Layers

Linking Layers and Axes

Merging Existing Graph Windows

Converting a Multiple Layer Graph Window into Multiple Graph Windows

Arranging Layers on the Page

The Layer Tool


Plotting:  The Axes

General Tips on Editing the Axes

Axes and Axes Titles

Ticks and Tick Labels

Reference Section:  The Axis Dialog Box

Creating a Time Series Graph


Plotting:  Customizing the Graph

Data Plots:  General Tips

Data Plots:  Customizing Specific Elements

Legends and Color Scales

Text Labels and Other Annotations

Working with Objects in Your Graph

Exchanging Graphics Between Graph Windows


Plotting:  Customizing the Page Display

Setting the Page Orientation

Available Page Viewing Modes:  Speed vs. Accuracy

Other Ways to Increase Redraw Speed

Setting the Dimensions of the Graph Page

Setting the Page Color and Other Page Display Preferences

Controlling the Display of Graph Legends on the Page

Changing the View of the Page

Duplicating the Page Layout in all Your Graph Windows


Creating Your Graphic Presentation

Using the Layout Page Window

Sharing Your Origin Graph with Another Application

Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page

A Note on Making Slides


Printing

Checking Your Display Options Before Printing

Previewing Before Printing

A Note About Displaying and Printing Fonts

Printing to the Printer

Printing to a PostScript File

Troubleshooting Printing Problems


Data Analysis

Selecting the Active Data Plot for Analysis

The Results Log

Data Exploration Tools

Masking Data from Analysis

Simple Math

Statistics

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

Data Smoothing and Filtering

Baseline and Peak Analysis

Other Utilities


Curve Fitting

Before You Begin

Linear Fitting From the Menu

Linear Fitting Using the Tools

Nonlinear Curve Fitting from the Menu

The Nonlinear Least Squares Fitter

Using the Fitter with the Network Version of Origin

Fitting Strategies

The Function Definition File


Setting Your Preferences

Starting Origin with a Specific File

Adjusting How Origin Starts by Modifying the Command Line

Controlling the Default Window Type when You Open a New Project

Setting Your Preferences with the Options Dialog Box

Customizing the Color Palette

Creating Custom Colors from the Color Buttons

Customizing Templates


Programming and Special Topics

LabTalk Programming

Making a Custom User Interface


References

References


Links to Microcal Software Web Site

Link to Microcal Software Web Site


Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace

When you start Origin®, it opens a new project, displaying a worksheet window in Origin's workspace.  The worksheet is one type of 'child' window available in Origin.  Other types of child windows are:  graph, layout page, function graph, Excel workbook, matrix, and notes windows.  The child windows are movable and resizeable.  Each child window has its own menu structure, which is displayed when the window is active.

Having various child windows allows you to simultaneously view different visual representations of your data, such as data in a worksheet versus a graph, simplifying data manipulation and analysis.

When you save a project, all your work in the current session is saved as an Origin project.  This includes all the child windows on your screen (including minimized and hidden child windows), all the child windows in other Project Explorer folders, and the datasets that make up the information in the child windows.  If you were to delete the child window before saving the project, it is lost to Origin and is no longer a part of your project.  When you open the project, you access all the related information simultaneously.

In addition to saving projects, you can also save a child window separately as a file, or save a template as a file.  Origin uses the following file extensions for project, child window, and template files.

Origin can only display one project at a time.  To view multiple projects, you must start multiple instances of Origin by double-clicking on the Origin 6.x program icon.

File Extensions

Project, file extension is OPJ, cannot save as template.

Document (pre-version 4.0), file extension is ORG, cannot save as template.

Graph, file extension is OGG, template extension is OTP.

Worksheet, file extension is OGW, template extension is OTW.

Excel Workbook, file extension is XLS, cannot save as template.

Layout Page, cannot save as file, template extension is OTP.

Matrix, file extension is OGM, template extension is OTM.

Function Graph, file extension is OGG, template extension is OTP.

Notes, file extension is TXT, cannot save as template.

More:

The Menu Bar

Shortcut Menus

The Project Explorer

Toolbars

Tools

The Status Bar

Tip of the Day

The Worksheet Window

The Excel Workbook Window

The Matrix Window

The Graph Window

The Function Graph Window

The Layout Page Window

The Notes Window

The Results Log

LabTalk

The Script Window


The Menu Bar

The current menu structure is dependent on the type of child window that is active, though some menu commands are available independent of the active child window.

In addition, Origin offers two menu levels.  Select Format:Menu to open a submenu in which you can change Origin's menu level.  The submenu contains the following menu level options:

•	Full Menus

Select Format:Menu:Full Menus to display all menu commands.

•	Short Menus

Select Format:Menu:Short Menus to display limited menu commands.

Of special interest in the menu bar is the Undo menu command, the Recently Opened Files list, and the shortcut keys.  Each of these topics are addressed in the following sections.

More:

Using the Undo Menu Command

The "Recently Opened Files" List

Using the Shortcut Keys


Using the Undo Menu Command

To undo the previous Origin action, select Edit:Undo.  Though not available for all Origin actions, this menu command is available for most worksheet and graph manipulations.  The menu command is shaded when unavailable.


The "Recently Opened Files" List

The five most recently opened project, child window, and Excel workbook files are listed at the bottom of the File menu, above the Exit menu command.  Double-click on the listed file to open the respective project, child window, or Excel workbook file.  If you double-click on a project and you have made changes to your current project, Origin asks if you want to save the changes before closing the current project.


Using the Shortcut Keys

Shortcut keys are available for some Origin menu commands.  The shortcut key sequence is listed to the right of the menu command.  For example, to zoom in on an active graph window, select View:Zoom In or select CTRL+I to use the shortcut key.  Shortcut keys are not active if the menu is open.


Shortcut Menus

Shortcut menus contain frequently used menu commands for a distinct area.  They are available by placing the pointer on the distinct area of the child window and right-clicking.  For example, by right-clicking on a column heading in the worksheet window, the entire Plot menu is available via the shortcut menu.


The Project Explorer

The Project Explorer is a tool to help you organize your Origin projects.  It is particularly useful if you are working with a project that contains more than a few child windows.  You can use the Project Explorer to develop a folder structure for organizing the child windows in your project.  You can also use the Project Explorer to control the view of your workspace.

The Project Explorer behaves like a toolbar in the Origin workspace.  It can dock to the edge of the workspace (the default position is the bottom edge of the workspace), or it can be viewed as a floating window.

Note:  When you first open a project created in a version prior to Origin 6, and that project has minimized child windows, Origin opens the Hiding Minimized Windows dialog box.  This dialog box allows you to open your minimized windows as hidden windows in Origin 6.  Doing so improves the project loading speed.

More:

Building a Folder Structure in the Project Explorer

Controlling the View of Your Workspace Using the Project Explorer

Viewing the Properties of Project Explorer Folders

Viewing the Properties of Child Windows

Finding a Child Window in Your Project

Closing the Project Explorer to Maximize Your Workspace

Saving Your Project with Project Explorer Folders


Building a Folder Structure in the Project Explorer

The left side of the Project Explorer displays the folder structure in your current project.  The top folder is called the project folder.  The project folder is always named after your project file name.  Thus, when you open a new project, the Project Explorer displays an Untitled project folder.  If you open a project created in a version prior to Origin 6, the Project Explorer displays the name of your project as the project folder.

In addition to displaying a project folder in the Project Explorer, you can use the left side of the Project Explorer to create any number of subfolders in your project.

To build a folder structure on the left side of the Project Explorer, right-click on the project folder and select New Folder from the shortcut menu.  A "NewFolder" folder displays beneath the project folder on the left side of the Project Explorer, as well as on the right side.  The "NewFolder" on the right side of the Project Explorer is currently active for editing.  Type the desired folder name and press ENTER.  To create additional subfolders that are a level below the Project Explorer folder, repeat this same process.  To create a subfolder that is a level below the newly created folder, make this new folder active and open its shortcut menu by right-clicking on the folder on either side of the Project Explorer.  Select New Folder from the shortcut menu and then type the desired name in the "NewFolder" text on the right side of the Project Explorer and press ENTER.

Once you have created one or more subfolders from your project folder, you can move child windows between folders.  To move a child window from the project folder to a subfolder, first make the project folder active.  Then select the child window icons on the right side of the Project Explorer (SHIFT+click for a range, CTRL+click for nonadjacent selection) and drag them into the desired folder that displays on either the left or the right side of the Project Explorer.  To view the child window icons in their new location, click on the destination folder.


Controlling the View of Your Workspace Using the Project Explorer

So far this Project Explorer discussion has been limited to adding folders and moving child window icons between folders.  However, the Project Explorer has significantly more power than this.  The Project Explorer also controls the view of your workspace.  By default, only the child windows in the active Project Explorer folder display in your workspace.  For projects with lots of child windows, this allows you to focus on specific child windows in a clutter-free workspace.

To control the view of the child windows in your workspace, right-click on a Project Explorer folder or right-click in a blank space on the left side of the Project Explorer.  Select View:View Mode to alter the view mode.  (Alternatively, select View:View Windows:View Mode from the Origin menu bar.)

Select None to display no child windows in the workspace.  This workspace view mode is useful if you want to quickly look through your Project Explorer folders, without waiting for the workspace to update the child window display.

Select Windows in Active Folder (default) to view only those child windows in the currently selected folder in your workspace.

Select Windows in Active Folder & Subfolders to view all the child windows in the currently selected folder, plus all those in any subfolders, in your workspace.


Viewing the Properties of Project Explorer Folders

To view the properties of a Project Explorer folder, right-click on the folder in the Project Explorer and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  The Properties dialog box lists the folder name and its Project Explorer path, the folder size, as well as the date it was created and last modified.


Viewing the Properties of Child Windows

To view the properties of a child window in your project, right-click on the child window icon on the right side of the Project Explorer and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  The Properties dialog box lists the child window name, label, type, location and size.  You can edit the child window label from this dialog box.  The Properties dialog box also lists the number of dependents, the date the window was created and last modified, and its current view state.

A note about dependents:  If a worksheet contains data that is displayed in a graph window, the worksheet's Properties dialog box lists a single dependent.  Additionally, the Dependents column on the right side of the Project Explorer notes the dependency in the respective worksheet window icon's row.  This information is useful when you are either altering or deleting data in the worksheet, or if you are considering deleting the worksheet window from the project.  It informs you that another child window is dependent on the data in the worksheet.

A note about the hidden view state:  To further maximize the use of your workspace, you can hide windows from view - without deleting them from the project.  To hide a window in the workspace, double-click on the child window icon on the right side of the Project Explorer.  To return the child window to the normal view mode, double-click again on the child window icon.  These view controls are also available by right-clicking on the child window icon in the Project Explorer, or by right-clicking on the child window title bar.


Finding a Child Window in Your Project

If you have organized your child windows into a number of Project Explorer folders, the Project Explorer's Find dialog box helps you locate child windows.  To open this dialog box, right-click on the Project Explorer folder that you want to start your search from and select Find from the shortcut menu.  If you are unsure of the child window location within your Project Explorer folder structure, right-click on the project folder and select Find.

The Start From view box lists the Project Explorer folder that you are currently starting your search from.  When the dialog box opens, this view box lists the folder that was active when you selected Find.  When you click Find, Origin starts searching from this folder, and will include subfolders in the search if the Include Subfolders check box is selected.  Origin searches the fields specified in the Search In group.  When Origin finds a child window based on your search criteria, Origin activates the Project Explorer folder that contains the window.  To continue your search, click Find Next.

To start searching from a different Project Explorer folder, you can select a new folder from the Project Explorer and then re-direct activity back to the dialog box and click Reset Start From.  Additionally, at any time during your search, you can click Reset Start From.  When you click Reset Start From, Origin updates the Start From view box with the new Project Explorer folder, and then starts the search at this location (when you click Find) based on the criteria specified in the dialog box.


Closing the Project Explorer to Maximize Your Workspace

Because the Project Explorer uses some of your workspace, you may want to close the Project Explorer, even if you have already created a folder structure.  To close the Project Explorer, click the Project Explorer close button, select View:Project Explorer to de-select the command, or click the Project Explorer button on the Standard toolbar.

When you close the Project Explorer, Origin continues to use your Project Explorer folder structure and view settings to display child windows in your workspace.  Thus, if you are working with a project that contains Project Explorer subfolders, and the Project Explorer view mode is set to view only the active folder's child windows, then Origin will display the child windows in your currently active Project Explorer folder.

To access child windows in other folders, you can re-activate the Project Explorer by selecting View:Project Explorer or by clicking the Project Explorer button on the Standard toolbar.  Alternatively, when the Project Explorer is closed (or open), you can select Window:Folders:Folder Name to view the child windows in the selected Project Explorer folder.  The window list at the bottom of the Window menu updates to reflect the child windows in the Folder Name folder.

The window list at the bottom of the Window menu displays the first nine child windows in the current Project Explorer folder (assuming you are viewing only the active folder contents in the workspace).  You can click to activate a child window from this list.  If you have more than nine windows in your current Project Explorer folder and you want to view a window that is not currently listed in the window list at the bottom of the Window menu, select Window:More Windows.  This menu command opens the Windows dialog box.

The Windows dialog box can be resized by clicking and dragging on the edge of the dialog box.  The dialog box displays the names (and/or labels), window type, and current status of all the windows in the current Project Explorer folder, or the current folder and subfolders, depending on your Project Explorer viewing mode.

The Windows Dialog Box

To activate a window:

Double-click on the window in the list box or click once on the window and click Activate.  Click Close to close the dialog box and view the active window.

To sort the windows:

To sort the windows alphabetically by name (or label), or by window type or state, click the associated button at the top of the list box.

To minimize or restore a window:

Select the window from the list box and click Minimize Window or Restore Window.

To close a window so that it is no longer part of the project:

Select the window from the list box and click Close Window.  To verify closure, click Yes in the Attention dialog box.  To disable the display of the Attention dialog box, select the Disable Close Prompt check box.


Saving Your Project with Project Explorer Folders

The contents and organization of the Project Explorer is specific to your current Origin project.  When you save your project, the Project Explorer file structure is saved with the project.

Note:  Keep in mind that the Project Explorer folders are not saved to individual projects - they are all part of the same Origin project file.


Origin Basics - Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace - Toolbars
Toolbars

Origin provides a number of toolbars.  A toolbar can be displayed as a floating toolbar that can be positioned anywhere in the Origin workspace.  Alternatively, a toolbar can be docked to the edge of the workspace.  Toolbars contain shortcut buttons for frequently used menu commands.  For example, the Cut button on the Edit toolbar serves as an alternative to the Edit:Cut menu command.

Toolbar button accessibility is dependent upon which child window is active.  If the child window activity changes to a different child window type, a toolbar button is not displayed unless it is also active with that child window type.

To control which toolbars are open, select View:Toolbars.  This menu command opens the Toolbars dialog box.  Select the check box beside the toolbar you want to display.

More:

Customizing Toolbars

Creating Toolbar Buttons to Run LabTalk Script


Customizing Toolbars

In addition to adding Origin's default toolbars to your workspace, you can add and remove buttons from any of the default toolbars, or create new toolbars containing a single button or a combination of buttons from the default toolbars.

To add and remove buttons from any of Origin's default toolbars, enter the toolbar editing mode by opening the Customize Toolbar dialog box.  You can now drag toolbar buttons between toolbars.  To remove a button from a toolbar, drag the button off the toolbar (not on to another toolbar) and release the mouse button.  To add a button to a toolbar, select the Commands tab on the Customize Toolbar dialog box.  Select the toolbar which displays the button by default, from the Categories list box.  Then drag the desired button onto any of the toolbars.

To create a new toolbar, you can drag a button into the workspace or into the toolbar region (not on to another toolbar).  Alternatively, click New on the Toolbars tab of the Customize Toolbar dialog box.  Type the desired name in the New Toolbar dialog box and click OK.  Now select the Commands tab and drag the desired buttons onto the new toolbar.


Creating Toolbar Buttons to Run LabTalk Script

Origin provides two methods for running LabTalk® script from toolbar buttons.  The Custom Routine button on the Standard toolbar runs the [Main] section of the CUSTOM.OGS LabTalk script file.  You can customize this section of the OGS file to automate an Origin task.

In addition to the Custom Routine button, you can create your own buttons to run any specified section of a LabTalk script file.


Tools

Origin features several tools including the Layer, Pick Peaks, Baseline, Smoothing, Linear Fit, Polynomial Fit, and Sigmoidal Fit tools.  These tools are accessed from the Tools menu.


Origin Basics - Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace - The Status Bar
The Status Bar

Origin provides a status bar which displays program information and help text (not to be confused with Origin's online Help).  The status bar displays at the bottom of the Origin program window.  To display the status bar, select View:Status Bar.  This menu command is checked when the status bar is displayed.


Tip of the Day

When Origin is started, a dialog box opens displaying a "Tip of the Day".  These tips provide information on using various features in Origin.  To disable the Tip of the Day display, clear the Show Tips on Startup check box in the Tip of the Day dialog box.

To open the Tip of the Day dialog box during an Origin session, select Help:Tip of the Day.


The Worksheet Window

The worksheet window is organized into vertical columns and horizontal rows.  At the intersection of each column and row is a cell.  Each cell can contain a single numeric, text, numeric and text, date, or time value.  Origin projects can contain multiple worksheets.


The Excel Workbook Window

The Excel workbook window adds the power of Origin's plotting functionality to Excel.  To use this feature, you must have Excel installed on your computer, either locally or as a networked version.  Then, from within Origin, you can open an existing Excel workbook or create a new Excel workbook.

When the Excel workbook window is active in Origin, a combination menu bar displays, showing Origin's File, Plot, and Window menus and Excel's Edit, View, Insert, Format, Tools, Data, Accounting, and Help menus.  In addition, a combination of Excel toolbars and Origin toolbars are available.  Shortcut menus are also available from the Excel workbook window.  If you right-click in the workbook window, an Excel shortcut menu displays.  If you right-click on the title bar of a workbook window, an Origin shortcut menu displays.  For more information on using Excel in Origin, Click Here.


The Matrix Window

The matrix window provides a row and column container of Z values that can map to X and Y coordinates and is used to plot contour maps and surface graphs.  The matrix has no column headings.  Columns are enumerated, as are rows.


Origin Basics - Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace - The Graph Window
The Graph Window

The graph window is a container and editor for creating graphs.  Each project supports multiple graph windows.  A graph window is always associated with a single printable page, which can contain up to 50 sets of axes, or layers.

More:

The Page

Layers

Objects


Origin Basics - The Graph Window - The Page
The Page

Each graph window contains a single page.  The page serves as a backdrop for the various graphic objects (for example, axes, text, and data plots) used to create graphs.  Origin provides a number of page display options to enhance the graphs and optimize the screen display.


Layers

A typical graph generally includes a set of X, Y coordinate axes, one or more data plots, and associated text and graphic labels.  Origin combines these three components into a movable, resizable unit called a layer.  You can place up to 50 layers on a page and move or size each one.

In a multiple layer graph, one layer can be linked to another layer.  Layers are linked to establish mathematical relationships between the axis scales in the two layers, or to establish relationships between layer size and placement.  Origin provides a number of layer display options to enhance the graph and optimize the screen display.


Objects

Each graph is composed of a variety of graphic elements, referred to as objects.  To alter an object, double-click or right-click on it.  Alternatively, click on the object and select Format:Object.  A dialog box opens to edit the object's display.


The Function Graph Window

The function graph window is a customized graph window providing visual display and manipulation of functions.  The user-defined function must be of the form y=f(x).


Origin Basics - Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace - The Layout Page Window
The Layout Page Window

The layout page window acts as a "display panel" for graphs and worksheets created in other child windows.  The graphs and worksheets displayed in the layout page window are pictures, or objects.  Arrange the pictures in the layout page window to create a custom graphic.


The Notes Window

Use the notes window as a log to record information as you conduct research.  Notes windows can be saved either individually, or within a project.


Origin Basics - Topography of an Origin Project and Workspace - The Results Log
The Results Log

Origin automatically routes results from most commands on the Analysis menu as well as results from the Baseline, Linear Fit, Polynomial Fit, and Sigmoidal Fit tools to the Results Log.  Each entry in the Results Log includes a date/time stamp, the project file location, the dataset, the type of analysis performed, and the results.


LabTalk

Origin is based on a scripting language called LabTalk.  LabTalk is a full-featured programming language that provides access to most of Origin's functionality.

In an Origin session, you have the option of utilizing LabTalk script in your application.  This option is particularly useful when you are using Origin for repetitive tasks, such as importing and plotting many data files.  Tasks can be automated by creating objects (buttons) with the necessary LabTalk script associated with them.  Click the button to perform the desired function.  You can also create toolbar buttons to run sections of script files.


The Script Window

The Script window is a text editor with the additional feature of carrying out LabTalk script execution.  The Script window is not a child window.  The Script window is most useful for executing single line or short scripts, or for troubleshooting longer scripts before storing and executing elsewhere.

To open the Script window, select Window:Script Window.  Alternatively, click the Script Window button on the Standard toolbar or press ALT+3 (on the keyboard, not the numeric keypad).


Working with a Project

Opening a Project

Saving a Project

Appending Projects

Closing a Project

Exiting Origin


Opening a Project

A new project is created each time you start Origin.  To change projects:

Select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.  Select Project from the Window Type list box and click OK.  Origin opens a new project.  If a project was already open when the menu command was selected, Origin prompts you if you want to save changes to the current project before opening the new project.

Select File:Open to open a previously saved project.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select 'Project (*OPJ)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Select the desired file from the list box and click Open to close the dialog box and open the project.  If you have made changes to your current project, Origin asks if you want to save the changes before closing the current project.

Note:  When you first open a project created in a version prior to Origin 6, and that project has minimized child windows, Origin opens the Hiding Minimized Windows dialog box.  This dialog box allows you to open your minimized windows as hidden windows in Origin 6.  Doing so improves the project loading speed.

More:

Opening Pre-Version 4.0 Documents


Opening Pre-Version 4.0 Documents

To open a pre-version 4.0 project (document), select File:Open.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select 'Old Version (*.ORG)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Select the desired file from the list box and click Open to close the dialog box and open the document.  If you have made changes to your current project, Origin asks if you want to save the changes before closing the current project.


Saving a Project

To save a project to the current file name, select File:Save Project.  If the project has not been previously saved, this menu command opens the Save As dialog box displaying the default file name, UNTITLED.OPJ, in the File Name text box.  Type the desired file name in the text box (specify the path) and click Save to save the project.

To save the project to a new file name, select File:Save Project As.  This menu command also opens the Save As dialog box.

More:

Automatically Creating a Backup

Saving a Pre-Version 4.0 Document


Automatically Creating a Backup

To automatically create a backup of the currently saved project before re-saving, select Tools:Options.  This menu command opens the Options dialog box.  Select the Open/Close tab and then select the Backup Project Before Saving check box.  Click OK.  Origin will automatically create a backup of the currently saved project file before re-saving.  The backup project is named BACKUP.OPJ.


Saving a Pre-Version 4.0 Document

Pre-version 4.0 projects (documents) can be saved as projects or documents.  If you intend to re-open the file in a pre-version 4.0 software, you must save the file as a document.

Saving a Pre-Version 4.0 Document as a Project

To save the document as a project, select File:Save Project As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Select 'Project (*.OPJ)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.

Saving a Pre-Version 4.0 Document as a Document

To save the pre-version 4.0 document as a document, select File:Save Project As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Select 'Version 3.x (*.ORG)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.


Appending Projects

The contents of one project can be added to the currently opened project by selecting File:Append or by right-clicking on a Project Explorer folder and selecting Append Project from the shortcut menu.  Both commands open the Open dialog box.  Select the desired file extension from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box and click Open.

Independent of whether you have developed a Project Explorer folder structure, and independent of whether the Project Explorer is open, Origin opens the Appending Project dialog box, providing options on how the selected project appends to your current project.

Select the Create in New Folder radio button to append the project so that the appended project's project folder becomes a subfolder of the currently active Project Explorer folder.  The appended project's subfolders are then added to the project folder maintaining the original folder structure.

Select the Append to this Folder radio button to append the project so that the contents (if any) of the appended project's project folder adds to the currently active Project Explorer folder.  The appended project's subfolders are then added as subfolders of the currently active Project Explorer folder, maintaining the original folder structure.

If duplicate child window names exist between projects, Origin automatically changes the name of the appended child window by adding an "A" to the window name:

AWindowName


Closing a Project

To close a project without exiting from Origin, select File:Close.  If you have made changes to the current project, Origin prompts you if you want to save the changes.


Exiting Origin

To exit Origin, select File:Exit.  Alternatively, click on the Origin icon in the upper-left corner of the Origin window and select Close.  If you have made changes to the current project, Origin prompts you if you want to save the changes.  Additionally, if you have made changes to the Script window, Origin also prompts if you want to save changes to it.


Working with Child Windows

A child window is made active by clicking anywhere on the child window or by selecting the child window from the window list at the bottom of the Window menu.

More:

Opening a Child Window from a File

Renaming a Child Window

Arranging Child Windows

Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring Child Windows

Hiding Child Windows

Deleting Child Windows

Refreshing Child Windows

Duplicating Child Windows

Saving a Child Window


Opening a Child Window from a File

Individual child windows within the project can be saved (and re-opened) separate from the project in which they were created.  To open a saved child window, select File:Open.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  From the Files of Type drop-down list, select:

'Worksheets (*.OGW)' to open a worksheet window.

'Graphs (*.OGG)' to open a graph, layout page, or function graph window.

'Matrix (*.OGM)' to open a matrix window.

'Text (*.TXT)' to open a notes window.

More:

Opening an Excel Workbook Window


Opening an Excel Workbook Window

To open an existing workbook in Origin, select File:Open Excel or click the Open Excel button on the Standard toolbar.  Both the menu command and toolbar button open the Open dialog box with 'Excel (*.XLS)' selected from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Select the desired workbook file and click Open.


Renaming a Child Window

To rename a child window, select Window:Rename.  Alternatively, right-click on the child window title bar and select Rename from the shortcut menu.  Both menu commands open the Rename dialog box.

Note:  The Excel workbook window can only be renamed from the workbook's Properties shortcut menu command.

The Rename Dialog Box

1)	The Name Radio Button and Text Box

Rename the child window by selecting the Name radio button and typing a new name in the associated text box.

The window name cannot start with a numeral.  If a leading numeral is typed in the Name text box, Origin inserts an "A" before the numeral in the window name.

Origin ignores any spaces between characters in the Name text box.

2)	The Label Radio Button and Text Box

Replace the child window name on the title bar with a label, by selecting the Label radio button and typing a label in the associated text box.  This option gives you more flexibility in the naming convention since it allows more characters and accepts special characters (for example, an underscore and dollar sign).  It also allows spaces between characters.

This option does not actually rename the window.  Rather, it keeps the name of the window hidden and displays the new label.  Internally, Origin still references the actual window name in dialog boxes.  If you use LabTalk, you also must use the actual window name.

3)	The Both Name and Label Radio Button

Rename the child window by selecting the Both Name and Label radio button.  Type the text you want to display into both the Name text box and the Label text box.  Origin displays both the name and the label, separated by a hyphen, in the window title bar.  For example, if Name is "Test1" and Label is "Lot#52", then Origin displays "Test1 - Lot#52" in the window title bar.


Arranging Child Windows

Child windows can be moved or resized in the Origin project.  In addition, Origin includes menu commands for positioning child windows.

Select Window:Cascade to arrange all open windows in an overlapping pattern in which the title bar of each window is visible.

Select Window:Tile Horizontally or Window:Tile Vertically to arrange all open windows side-by-side so that all windows can be viewed simultaneously.


Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring Child Windows

Minimize a child window by clicking the Minimize button in the upper-right corner of the window.  Double-click on the minimized window to restore the child window.

Maximize a child window by clicking the Maximize button in the upper-right corner of the window.  Origin displays the window using the entire workspace available.

Restore a child window to its original dimensions by clicking the Restore button in the upper-right corner of the window.


Hiding Child Windows

To maximize the use of your workspace, you can hide windows from view - without deleting them from the project.  To hide a window in the workspace, double-click on the child window icon on the right side of the Project Explorer.  To return the child window to the normal view mode, double-click again on the child window icon.  These view controls are also available by right-clicking on the child window icon in the Project Explorer, or by right-clicking on the child window title bar.


Deleting Child Windows

Delete a child window by clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner of the window.  Before closing the window, Origin prompts for verification that you want to close the window.

Note:  You can also delete a child window, or selected child windows, from the Project Explorer.  To do this, select the child window icons representing the child windows that you want to delete from the right side of the Project Explorer.  Right-click in the selection and select Delete Window(s) from the shortcut menu.  Before closing the window(s), Origin prompts for verification.


Refreshing Child Windows

Whenever you change the contents of a graph window or a worksheet, or expose a part of a child window that was hidden, Origin automatically redraws the affected portion of the window.  Occasionally, a portion of the window may not refresh correctly.  Whenever this occurs, select Window:Refresh to refresh the active child window.

Note:  To control the percentage of the window that must be exposed before Origin automatically redraws the window, edit the No Redraw (% Covered) combination box on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Duplicating Child Windows

Duplicate the worksheet, graph, function graph, and layout page child windows by selecting Window:Duplicate when the desired window is active.  When a duplicate window is created, Origin names the window using the default window name syntax:

DefaultWindowNameN

where N is assigned the lowest available number not used by other window names (of the same type) in the project.


Saving a Child Window

In addition to saving projects (or documents), windows can be saved to a file.  When a window is saved to a file, the window can be opened in any other Origin project.  To save the active window to a file, select File:Save Window As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Origin automatically lists the correct file extension for the active window type in the Save as Type drop-down list.


Customizing Origin

Origin provides a broad range of customization options.  It is easiest to understand the customization features if they are divided into categories:

Customizing your results.

Customizing Origin's startup conditions, the project you are working in, or future projects.

Customizing the software's appearance or functionality.

Information about customizing the project you are working in includes setting options or preferences for a variety of features, and altering or creating templates for Origin to use.  It also includes customizing how Origin starts.  For information on this type of customization, Click Here

Information about customizing the software includes customizing Origin's toolbars and creating buttons on child windows to automate tasks.  For information on customizing the toolbars, see  Customizing Toolbars.  For information on creating buttons on child windows, Click Here or contact Microcal Software™ about Origin Professional.


Shortcut Menus in the Worksheet

Worksheet shortcut menus are available by right-clicking in the following worksheet locations:

•	The worksheet window title bar.

•	The upper-left corner of the worksheet window.

•	A row heading.

•	Selected rows.

•	A column heading.

•	Selected columns.

•	One cell.

•	Several cells in a row.

•	Several cells in a column.

•	A block of cells.

•	White-space to the right of the columns.


Performing Basic Worksheet Operations

To help you organize your worksheet data, Origin provides menu commands and tools to add, delete, and arrange columns, and to insert and delete rows.  Additionally, you can transpose the columns and rows in your worksheet.

More:

Adding Columns

Inserting Columns

Deleting Columns

Moving Columns

Changing the Column Width

Inserting Rows

Deleting Rows

Changing the Row Heading Width

Transposing the Columns and Rows


Adding Columns

To add columns to the worksheet, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select Column:Add New Columns.

•	Click the Add New Columns button on the Standard toolbar.

•	Right-click inside the worksheet window but to the right of the worksheet grid.  Select Add New Column from the shortcut menu.

The Column:Add New Columns menu command opens the Add New Columns dialog box in which you specify the number of columns to add to the worksheet.  The Add New Columns button on the Standard toolbar and the Add New Column shortcut menu command add one column to the worksheet.  Each method adds the Y column(s) to the right of the last worksheet column.  Each new column is named alphabetically (A, B, C, ... X, Y, Z, AA, BB, CC, ...), starting with the first letter that is not already used as a column name in the worksheet.

Note:  You do not need to add columns to the worksheet before importing data.  Origin automatically adds columns to the worksheet to hold all the datasets in the file.


Inserting Columns

To add a single column to a specific location in the worksheet, highlight the column located to the immediate right of where you want to insert the column and select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.  The new column inserts to the immediate left of the highlighted column.  The new column is designated as a Y column, independent of the designation of the highlighted column.  Each new column is named alphabetically, starting with the first letter that is not already used as a column name in the worksheet.

To insert n columns in a specific location in the worksheet, perform the single insertion method n times.  Alternatively, highlight n columns to the immediate right of where you want to insert the new columns and then select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.


Deleting Columns

To delete one or more columns from the worksheet, highlight the column(s) and select Edit:Delete or right-click and select Delete.  Note that when you delete columns (datasets) from the worksheet, any other visual representation of the datasets will also be deleted from the project.  For example, if you delete a column of data that also displays as a data plot in a graph window, the data plot is deleted from the graph window.

Note:  To clear the column values but retain the columns, select Edit:Clear.


Moving Columns

To move the highlighted column to the first (leftmost) position in the worksheet, select Column:Move to First.  To move the highlighted column to the last (rightmost) position in the worksheet, select Column:Move to Last.  If more than one column is selected, the selected columns move, maintaining their existing order.

You can also move columns using the buttons on the Column toolbar:

To open the Column toolbar, select View:Toolbars and select the Column check box.  To use these buttons, highlight the desired column(s) and click the appropriate button.


Changing the Column Width

To change the width of a column, double-click on the column to open the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Type the desired value in the Column Width text box.  This text box value is in units of characters.


Inserting Rows

To insert a single row in a specific location in the worksheet, highlight the row that is directly below where you want to insert the new row and then select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.  The new row inserts above the highlighted row.

To insert n rows in a specific location in the worksheet, perform the single insertion method n times.  Alternatively, highlight n rows directly below where you want to insert the new rows and then select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.


Deleting Rows

To delete one or more rows from the worksheet, highlight the row(s) and select Edit:Delete or right-click and select Delete.  After deleting the selected rows, the rows below the selection move up in the worksheet.

Note:  To clear the cell contents but retain the row(s), select Edit:Clear instead of Edit:Delete.


Changing the Row Heading Width

To change the width of the row headings, double-click inside the worksheet window but to the right of the worksheet grid.  This action opens the Worksheet Display Control dialog box.  The Row Heading Width text box value (in the Worksheet Measurement group) controls the row heading width for the worksheet.  The text box value is in units of 1/15 of the cell height.


Transposing the Columns and Rows

To transpose the columns and rows in the active worksheet, select Edit:Transpose.  This menu command exchanges the worksheet columns with rows, and the rows with columns.

Prior to transposing, if the worksheet contains more row values than columns, Origin adds the necessary columns to the worksheet during the transpose process.  Origin names these added columns alphabetically, starting with the first letter that is not already used as a column name in the worksheet.

Prior to transposing, if the worksheet contains more columns than row values, Origin maintains the extra columns in the worksheet.  This default behavior can be altered by selecting a new option from the Delete Empty Columns After Worksheet Transpose drop-down list on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Note:  To transpose the columns and rows in your worksheet, each of the columns in the worksheet must be of the same "display type."  For example, each of the columns must be set to "Text and Numeric" type, or "Numeric" type.  The column display type is set from the Display drop-down list in each column's Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Double-click on a column heading to open this dialog box.  In the default Origin worksheet, each column is set to the "Text and Numeric" display type.


Entering and Deleting Data in the Worksheet

The Origin worksheet supports many different data types, including numeric, text, numeric and text, time, date, month, and day of week.  The following section provides general information for bringing your data into an Origin worksheet.  However, for a detailed discussion on entering and viewing particular data types, see  Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats.

Origin provides several ways to add data to the worksheet:

•	Entering data using the keyboard.

•	Importing a file.

•	Pasting data from another application using the Clipboard.

•	Pasting data from another (or the same) Origin worksheet using the Clipboard.

•	Creating a dataset based on row numbers or random numbers.

•	Using a function to set column values.

•	Setting incremental X values.

More:

Entering Data using the Keyboard

Importing Data

Exchanging Data through the Clipboard

Filling Columns with Row Numbers or Random Numbers

Using Functions to Set Column Values or Mathematically Transform Values

Assigning Incremental X Values

Inserting Data within a Column

A Note on Missing Values in the Worksheet

Deleting Data

Exporting Data


Entering Data using the Keyboard

To enter data into the worksheet, type the value in the desired cell.  Press ENTER (or ↓) to move to the next cell in the same column, or press TAB (or →) to move to the next cell in the next column.  Alternatively, click with the mouse in the next cell you want to enter a value (you are not limited to a neighboring cell).

Use the following keys to move the active cell around the worksheet.

Keys Used for Worksheet Navigation

ENTER:  Move the cell activity one cell down.

Left Arrow or SHIFT+TAB:  Move the cell activity one cell to the left.  If the currently active cell is in the leftmost column of the worksheet, move the cell activity to the rightmost column in the previous row.

Right Arrow or TAB:  Move the cell activity one cell to the right.  If the currently active cell is in the rightmost column of the worksheet, move the cell activity to the leftmost column in the next row.

HOME:  Move the cell activity to the first cell in the column.

END:  Move the cell activity to the last cell in the column.

PAGE DOWN:  Move the cell activity one page down.

PAGE UP:  Move the cell activity one page up.

CTRL+HOME:  Move the cell activity to the leftmost cell in the first row of the worksheet.

CTRL+END:  Move the cell activity to the rightmost cell in the last row of the worksheet.

CTRL+PAGE DOWN:  Move the cell activity one page to the right.

CTRL+PAGE UP:  Move the cell activity one page to the left.

CTRL+Down Arrow:  Move the cell activity to the cell with the last value in the column.

CTRL+Up Arrow:  Move the cell activity to either the cell with the last value in the column, or to the column's first cell, whichever is the first one upward from the current cell.

CTRL+Left Arrow:  Move the cell activity to the cell in the leftmost column in the same row.

CTRL+Right Arrow:  Move the cell activity to the cell in the rightmost column in the same row.

If you make an error when typing data, or want to change a value in a cell, select the cell and type the correct value.  Origin automatically overwrites the value in the cell.

To edit a cell value, select the cell and then press F2 or click at the desired position to locate the cursor (to prevent overwriting).  Use the following keys to edit the cell value.

Editing a Cell Value

DELETE:  Delete one value to the right of the cursor, or delete all highlighted values.

BACKSPACE:  Delete one value to the left of the cursor or delete all highlighted values.

HOME:  Move the cursor to the leftmost position in the cell.

END:  Move the cursor to the rightmost position in the cell.

Left Arrow:  Move the cursor one character to the left.

Right Arrow:  Move the cursor one character to the right.

To exit the cell editing mode, press the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, ENTER, or TAB keys.  This action also moves the cell activity to the new location.


Importing Data

Data can be imported from ASCII, Lotus, Excel, dBASE, DIF, LabTech, and Sound files, vectors and matrices from Mathematica, and Kaleidagraph data files.  Axon Scope Binary Files (*.ABF) and Axon binary data files (*.DAT) can also be imported into Origin.  The data import menu commands are listed in the File:Import menu when the worksheet is active.


Exchanging Data through the Clipboard

In addition to adding data to a worksheet by importing a data file, data can be pasted or paste linked from another application into an Origin worksheet using the Clipboard.  Furthermore, data can be exchanged between Origin worksheets, or within a single Origin worksheet.  This is discussed in more detail in Pasting Data into Origin, Copying Worksheet Data, and Exchanging Data Between Worksheets.


Filling Columns with Row Numbers or Random Numbers

To quickly fill a column, or a selected range of cells, with either the associated row number, uniform random numbers, or normal random numbers, perform one of the following operations after selecting the desired cells:

•	To fill with row numbers, click the Set Column Value According to Row Number button on the Worksheet Data toolbar.  Alternatively, select Column:Fill Column With:Row Numbers or right-click and select Fill Column With:Row Numbers.

•	To fill with uniform random numbers, click the Set Column Values with Uniform Random Numbers button on the Worksheet Data toolbar.  Alternatively, select Column:Fill Column With:Uniform Random Numbers or right-click and select Fill Column With:Uniform Random Numbers.

•	To fill with normal random numbers, click the Set Column Values with Normal Random Numbers button on the Worksheet Data toolbar.  Alternatively, select Column:Fill Column With:Normal Random Numbers or right-click and select Fill Column With:Normal Random Numbers.

For the normal random number fill, the mean and the standard deviation are controlled by the NORMAL_MEAN and NORMAL_SIGMA variables in the [FillColumn] section of the ORIGIN.INI file.  By default, these variables are set to 0 and 1, respectively.  For the uniform random number fill, the minimum and maximum numbers generated are determined by the UNIFORM_MIN and UNIFORM_MAX variables.  By default, these variables are set to 0 and 1, respectively.

Note:  The ORIGIN.INI file is located in your Origin folder and can be edited with a text editor.


Using Functions to Set Column Values or Mathematically Transform Values

To create or transform datasets using any mathematical expression recognized by Origin, perform one of the following operations after selecting a worksheet column or a range of cells in a column:

•	Select Column:Set Column Values.

•	Right-click and select Set Column Values from the shortcut menu.

•	Click the Set Column Values button on the Worksheet Data toolbar.

The Set Column Values Dialog Box

1)	Select a Worksheet Range

After you select a column or a range of cells in a column and then open this dialog box, the beginning and ending row numbers in your worksheet column selection are automatically displayed in the For Row (i) and To text boxes.  To alter the selection range, type new values in these text boxes.  After editing this dialog box and clicking OK, calculated values are entered only in the cells that fall within the selection range.

2)	Select the Function(s) and Dataset(s)

The Add Function and Add Column drop-down lists and associated buttons are provided to help you build the desired expression in the ColumnName= text box.  Instead of typing the proper function and dataset syntax directly in the ColumnName= text box, you can select functions and datasets from these drop-down lists.

The Add Function drop-down list includes Origin's built-in mathematical and statistical distribution functions.  To view the details of a function, select the function from the drop-down list.  A function summary including a description of the function arguments displays in the left view box.  To select a function so that it displays in the ColumnName= text box, click the Add Function button after selecting it from the drop-down list.  How the function displays in the ColumnName= text box depends on whether any text was highlighted in the text box prior to selecting the function.  If text was highlighted in the text box, then that text becomes the (last) argument for the selected function.  If no text was highlighted, then the function displays at the last active cursor location in the text box.

The Add Column drop-down list includes an entry for each of the columns in the active worksheet.  Select a column from the drop-down list and then click the Add Column button.  If text was highlighted in the ColumnName= text box, Origin overtypes this text with the selected column name.  Otherwise, Origin adds the column name at the last active cursor location in the text box.

3)	Complete the Expression in the ColumnName= Text Box

The expression you type in this text box is used to fill the selected worksheet column cells with values.  The expression can include any datasets (columns) in the project as well as any of Origin's built-in functions.  The Add Function and Add Column controls provide an easy method for adding mathematical and statistical distribution functions and datasets from the same worksheet to the expression.  However, you can use any of Origin's built-in functions, following the syntax described in the LabTalk online Help file.  You can also access datasets from other worksheets using the WorksheetName_ColumnName syntax.  For example, to specify the C column in the Data3 worksheet, you can type Data3_C.  In addition to datasets and functions, you can use any operators recognized by Origin, as well as any defined variables.

The variable i can be used in an expression to indicate the row number.  For example, the expression col(A)=i fills column A with row number values.

Note:  Do not include a semicolon after the expression entered in the Set Column Values dialog box.

4)	The OK Button

Click this button to close the dialog box and set the values for the selected cells according to the specified expression in the ColumnName= text box.

5)	The Undo/Redo Button

Click this button to undo/redo the last change made to the expression in the ColumnName= text box.


Assigning Incremental X Values

Origin provides a quick way of entering X values that have a regular increment (for example, 1, 2, 3, ... , 5, 10, 15, ...) by using the For all Worksheet Columns dialog box.  This option is available only if the worksheet has no X columns.  To open the For all Worksheet Columns dialog box, select Format:Set Worksheet X.


Inserting Data within a Column

To insert a cell in a column, select the cell that is directly below where you want to insert the new cell and then select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.  The new cell inserts above the selected cell.

To insert n cells in a column (or in a series of columns) perform the single insertion method n times.  Alternatively, select n cells directly below where you want to insert the new cells and then select Edit:Insert or right-click and select Insert from the shortcut menu.


A Note on Missing Values in the Worksheet

When spreadsheet programs first appeared on computers it was recognized that there was a need for a special number that was Not-A-Number which would - when used in a calculation - generate itself.  Origin has such a number and its internal value is -1.23456789E-300.  Because this value is out of the range of numeric assignment, Origin provides a way to enter a missing value in a worksheet and use it in calculations.

Origin displays missing values in a worksheet as "--".  However, do not confuse this display (output) with what you enter as a missing value (input).  If a worksheet column is set to numeric type, then typing any text (for example, "missing" or "--") will set the cell's value to a missing value.  For column types other than numeric, you must manually enter missing values by typing something that Origin recognizes as invalid for that column type.  For example, Origin will display "--" when you type "13" in a cell of a column set to Month.

Additionally, if you leave any cells blank within a range of data in a column, Origin automatically sets those cell values as missing values.  To view the "--" display, you may need to force Origin to update its display by clicking the Refresh button on the Standard toolbar.

To set a missing value in an equation, for example, in the Set Column Values dialog box, divide anything by zero.  For example, 1/0.


Deleting Data

To clear the entire contents of a worksheet, select Edit:Clear Worksheet.  An Attention box opens confirming your menu selection.

To delete a range of cells from the worksheet, select the desired cells and select Edit:Delete.  The Edit:Delete menu command can also be used to delete a selected column or row from the worksheet.  When the Edit:Delete menu command is selected, the worksheet values, as well as the worksheet cells, are deleted.

Data can be deleted from the worksheet without deleting the corresponding cells.  To accomplish this, select the cells containing the data you want to delete and press the DELETE key.  Missing values (--) fill the selected cells.  Alternatively, select Edit:Clear to delete the values from the selected cells.


Exporting Data

To save your worksheet data to an ASCII file, select File:Export ASCII.  This menu command opens the Export ASCII dialog box.  The worksheet name displays in the File Name text box.  You can type a new name for the file and choose a new destination folder.  After clicking Save, Origin opens the ASCII Export into File dialog box, allowing you to control the export options.  For more information, see Exporting Worksheet Data.


Viewing Worksheet Data

The worksheet provides viewing controls to help you focus in on the data you are particularly interested in.  These controls include an option to display only a selected range of data in the worksheet.  The data that isn't selected is hidden from view in the worksheet, but not deleted.  Furthermore, in addition to providing scroll bars in the worksheet, Origin provides a "go-to-row" option so that you can quickly access rows of data.

Note:  Origin provides tools for selecting and masking data from analysis.  For information on masking worksheet data, see Masking Data from Analysis.

More:

Setting the Worksheet Display Range

Scrolling to a Specified Row Number


Setting the Worksheet Display Range

Origin provides an option to modify the display range of the worksheet without deleting the hidden cell values.  This option allows you to view, analyze, and plot a selected display range of worksheet values.  After setting the worksheet display range, all worksheet operations are performed on the display range only.

More:

Setting the Beginning of the Display Range

Setting the End of the Display Range

Resetting to Full Range


Setting the Beginning of the Display Range

To set the beginning of the display range, select a cell, a range of cells, or a worksheet row, and select Edit:Set As Begin or right-click and select Set As Begin from the shortcut menu.  Values in the cells above the selected cells are hidden from view, though they are not deleted.


Setting the End of the Display Range

To set the end of the display range, select a cell, a range of cells, or a worksheet row, and select Edit:Set As End or right-click and select Set As End from the shortcut menu.  Values in the cells below the selected cells are hidden from view, though they are not deleted.


Resetting to Full Range

To set the display range back to the full worksheet range, select Edit:Reset to Full Range.


Scrolling to a Specified Row Number

To view a specific row in the worksheet, select View:Go to Row or right-click inside the worksheet window but to the right of the worksheet grid and then select Go to Row from the shortcut menu.  Type the desired row number in the Go to Row dialog box and click OK.


Selecting Worksheet Data

Many of Origin's plotting and analysis features act on the data that is currently selected in the active worksheet.  The worksheet's data selection methods are reviewed in the following sections.

More:

Selecting the Entire Worksheet

Selecting Adjacent Columns

Selecting Nonadjacent Columns

Selecting Rows

Selecting Cells


Selecting the Entire Worksheet

To select all the columns in the worksheet, perform one of the following operations:

•	Point to the blank space in the upper-left corner of the worksheet, so that the mouse pointer changes to an arrow, and click the left mouse button.

•	Click to select the first column heading and then drag to the last column in the worksheet.  Release the mouse button to select all the columns.  (Note:  Origin does not automatically scroll the columns.)

•	Click to select the first column heading, scroll the worksheet to display the last column, and then hold down the SHIFT key and click on the last column heading.


Selecting Adjacent Columns

To select adjacent columns in the worksheet, perform one of the following operations:

•	Click to select the first column heading in the desired range and then drag to the last column in the desired range.  Release the mouse button to select the columns.  (Note:  Origin does not automatically scroll the columns.)

•	Click to select the first column heading in the desired range, scroll the worksheet to display the last column in the desired range, and then hold down the SHIFT key and click on this last column heading.


Selecting Nonadjacent Columns

To select nonadjacent columns in the worksheet, click to select the first column heading and then hold down the CTRL key while selecting additional column headings.


Selecting Rows

To select a row range, perform one of the following operations:

•	Click to select the first row heading in the desired range and then drag to the last row in the desired range.  Release the mouse button to select the rows.

•	Click to select the first row heading in the desired range, scroll the worksheet to display the last row in the desired range, and then hold down the SHIFT key and click on this last row heading.


Selecting Cells

To select a range of cells in the worksheet, click-and-drag to select the cells.


Controlling the Worksheet's Display Properties

Like other child windows, the attributes of the worksheet can be customized, including the display of the column and row headings, the worksheet grids, and the cell text.  These basic worksheet display options are configured in the Worksheet Display Control dialog box.  To open the Worksheet Display Control dialog box, perform one of the following operations:

•	Double-click inside the worksheet window but to the right of the worksheet grid.

•	Select Format:Worksheet when the worksheet is active.

•	Right-click inside the worksheet window but to the right of the worksheet grid and then select Properties from the shortcut menu.

The Worksheet Display Control Dialog Box

1)	The Text Group

Select a color for the text in the worksheet cells and headings from the associated drop-down lists.  Select the Use Default check box to set both the worksheet cells and heading text to white.  The Use Default text color (white) can not be customized.  Do not select this check box if the base color of the worksheet is white.

Select the Use System Fonts check box to use the Windows system font for the worksheet cells and headings.  To specify a different font, clear this check box and select the desired font from the Font drop-down list.  Select the point size for the selected font from the Pt Size drop-down list, and select the Bold check box to bold the display in the worksheet cells and headings.

2)	The Heading Options Group

Column headings can contain column names and labels.  The Column Name and Column Label check boxes in the Headings group enable or disable the display of column names and labels in the worksheet.  However, individual column names and labels are assigned in the column's respective Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  For more information on the Worksheet Column Format dialog box, see  Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats.

To enable the multiple line option for the display of the column name, select the Multiline Name check box.  If this check box is selected, the column name will display on more than one line only if a period (.) is inserted before the text to appear on the next line in the Column Name text box of the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.

Note:  To view the second line of the column name and the column label in the column label field, increase the column heading height in the Worksheet Measurement group.

Select the Row check box to enable the display of row numbers.

Select the Background check box to customize the background and divider line color for the column and row headings, separate from the worksheet page color.  Select the desired colors from the associated drop-down lists.

3)	The Worksheet Measurement Group

The height of the column headings and width of the row headings can be changed by typing new values in the associated text boxes.  When including a column label, it is necessary to increase the column heading height to view both the column name and label.  Origin will prompt to automatically increase the Column Heading Height value if text is added to the Column Label text box in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.

Note:  The Row Heading Width text box only applies to the row heading width, not the column width.  To change the width of a column, see  Changing the Column Width.

Select the Gap From Top text box to add a gap between the worksheet column headings and the worksheet title bar.  A gap can be added to accommodate text or buttons above the worksheet grid but within the worksheet window.

4)	The Grids Group

The option to display vertical and horizontal grids in the worksheet is set in the Grids group.  The grid line width can also be configured from the associated drop-down list.

5)	The Page Color Button

Click Page Color to open the Page Color dialog box.  The Page Color dialog box provides control over the background color for the active worksheet.


Controlling the Properties of the Columns

The properties of a worksheet column can be customized to reflect the data that the column contains.  Furthermore, each column in a worksheet can have distinct properties.  These column properties include - but are not limited to - the column name and label, the column's designation (X, Y, Z, error, label), the type of data the column contains, and the column's data display format.  The following sections review these column properties.

More:

Naming Columns and Adding Labels

Designating a Column as X, Y, Z, Error, Label, or None

Setting up a Worksheet with Multiple X Columns

Setting up a Worksheet without X Columns

Working with Error Columns in the Worksheet

Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats

A Note on Controlling the Display of Numeric Data

A Note on Dates and Times in Origin


Naming Columns and Adding Labels

By default, Origin names columns alphabetically, starting with the leftmost column in the worksheet.  You can, however, rename a column by double-clicking on the column to open the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Type the desired name in the Column Name text box.  For column naming conventions, see "The Column Name Text Box"  Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats.

In Origin, a column name is more than a visual identification on the worksheet column.  The column name becomes part of the dataset name that it contains.  Origin names datasets using the following convention:  WorksheetName_ColumnName.  For example, if the worksheet name is Data1 and the column name is A, then the dataset in column A is named Data1_A.  Origin uses this dataset naming convention in various locations.  For example, the graph window's Layer n dialog box uses this notation.  Additionally, this notation is often used when writing scripts using LabTalk.

The column label exists to provide additional information about the dataset held in the associated column.  If a column label exists, the label will display in the default legend for most of the graph templates, instead of the column name or dataset name.  Type the desired label in the Column Label text box.

Note:  When importing ASCII data into a worksheet, Origin automatically creates column labels using the first and second line of header text, if it exists.


Designating a Column as X, Y, Z, Error, Label, or None

The columns in a worksheet are related to one another by their column designation and their location.  Each worksheet column has one of seven column designations:  X, Y, Z, L (label), X error, Y error, or disregarded.  The column designation determines how the selected data will plot - as X values, Y values, Z values, data labels (text annotations associated with specific XY coordinates), error bars, or not at all (disregarded).

Note:  Though Origin does not restrict you from changing column designations, you should avoid changing designated Z, label, X error, or Y error columns to Y columns.  Changing these columns to Y columns could result in unexpected plotting results.

To change the designation of a column, perform one of the following operations:

•	Right-click on the column heading and select Set As:Designation.

•	Select the column and then select Column:Set as Designation.

•	Select the column and then click the desired button on the Column toolbar.

•	Double-click on the column heading to open the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Select the desired column designation from the Plot Designation drop-down list.

•	Select the column and then select Format:Column.  This menu command opens the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Select the desired column designation from the Plot Designation drop-down list.

Note:  To change the designation of multiple columns, highlight the desired columns and then right-click in the selection range and select Set As:Designation.

Available Column Designations

X, Y, Z:  In a worksheet with one designated X column, the X column provides X values for all Y and Z columns in the worksheet, independent of column locations in the worksheet.

For a worksheet with more than one designated X column, each X column provides X values for all Y and Z columns that are located to the right of the X column (but to the left of an additional X column).  In the case of nonadjacent column selection, the selected X column provides X values for the selected Y and the selected Z columns.  If an X column isn't included in the selection, Origin finds the first X column to the left of the selected Y column or Z column.  If none exists, Origin looks to the right of the selected Y column (Origin will not look to the right for an X column associated with a Z column).

Label:  Text or numeric values in a label column plot as data labels for the associated Y column values immediately to the left of the label column.  In the case of nonadjacent column selection, the selected label column provides data labels for the selected Y column.  If more than one Y column is selected, Origin finds the selected column located closest to the left of the label column.

For more information on data labels, see Data Labels.

Disregard:  Disregarded columns are not plotted, even if selected in the worksheet.

X Error:  In a worksheet with one designated X column, values in an X error column set the size of the X error, independent of column locations in the worksheet.

For a worksheet with more than one designated X column, values in an X error column set the size of the X error for the first X column to the left of the X error column.  If none exists, Origin looks to the right of the selected X error column.  In the case of nonadjacent column selection, the selected X error column provides the X error values for the selected X column.  If more than one X column is selected, Origin looks to the left for a selected X column and if none exists, then to the right.  If an X column isn't included in the selection, Origin finds the first X column to the left of the selected X error column.  If none exists, Origin looks to the right of the selected X error column.

Y Error:  Values in the Y error column set the size of the Y error for the first Y column to the left of the Y error column.  In the case of nonadjacent column selection, the selected Y error column provides the Y error values for the selected Y column located closest to the left of the Y error column.


Setting up a Worksheet with Multiple X Columns

To set up a worksheet with multiple X columns, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select the entire worksheet, or the desired range of columns, and then right-click in the selection range and select Set As:XYY, XYXY, XYYXYY, or XYYYXYYY.

•	Select the desired column or columns (hold down the CTRL key for nonadjacent column selection) and then select Column:Set As X or right-click in the selection and select Set As:X.

When a worksheet has multiple X columns, Origin creates an association between the X and Y columns.  All Y columns to the right of an X column are automatically associated with that X column.  Origin illustrates the association by designating the first X column as X1, with the associated Y columns designated Y1.  The second X column is designated X2, and its corresponding Y values are Y2.

When any Y1 column is selected for plotting, it will automatically plot against the column designated as X1.  Similarly, columns designated as Y2 will automatically plot against the column designated as X2.  (For exceptions when selecting nonadjacent columns, see Designating Columns as X, Y, Z, Error, Label or None.


Setting up a Worksheet without X Columns

Worksheets can be created that contain no X columns.  To set the worksheet up without an X column, select the column(s) currently designated as X and change the designation to Y, or to the desired designation.

When you select one or more Y columns from a worksheet that has no X column and select Plot:Graph Type, Plot:Template, or click a button on one of the plotting toolbars, Origin plots the Y data against the corresponding row number, or against the default X values.

More:

Creating Default X Values

Displaying Default X Values


Creating Default X Values

To set default X values for a worksheet with no X column, select Format:Set Worksheet X.  This menu command opens the For all Worksheet Columns dialog box.  Use this dialog box to set the initial X value and the X increment for the active worksheet.

The Set Worksheet X menu command provides a quick way to set worksheet X values that have a regular increment (for example, 1, 2, 3, ... or 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 ...), because you do not have to enter each value separately.  This menu command is not available if the worksheet already contains an X column.


Displaying Default X Values

To display the default X values in the worksheet, select View:Show X Column.  This menu command is operative even if you did not create default X values using the Format:Set Worksheet X menu command.  In this case, Origin uses an initial X value and increment of 1.

Note:  The View:Show X Column menu command is not available if the worksheet already contains an X column.


Working with Error Columns in the Worksheet

Origin supports both X and Y error columns.  When you plot datasets by selecting the desired columns and then selecting a plotting method, Origin uses the values in the error column to set the size of the error bar.

For a discussion on error column associations and worksheet column selections, see Designating Columns as X, Y, Z, Error, Label or None.


Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats

In addition to naming, adding a label, and setting the designation of a column, you can specify the type of data the column contains, as well as the format of the data.  The column's data type can be set to numeric, text, text and numeric, time, date, month, or day of week.  The available data formats are dependent on the column type selection.

To specify a column's data type and format, perform one of the following operations:

•	Double-click on the column heading.

•	Select the column and then select Format:Column.

•	Right-click on the column heading and select Properties from the shortcut menu.

Each of these operations open the column's Worksheet Column Format dialog box.

The Worksheet Column Format Dialog Box

1)	The Column Name Text Box

The column name must be one word (although it can be displayed on multiple lines) and must begin with a letter.  The name is also restricted to 11 characters.

To display the name on multiple lines, include a period (.) before the text to appear on the next line.  Additionally, select the Multiline Name check box in the Worksheet Display Control dialog box

2)	The Enumerate All to the Right Check Box

Select this check box to use the name in the current column as the base name for all columns to the right, and then number each of these columns, starting with the current column.  For example, if the current column is named "test" and this check box is selected, then the current column is renamed "test1", the first column to the right is renamed "test2", etc.

3)	The Options Group

The column designation, display type, display format, and associated sub-formats are configured in this group.

The column designation determines how the selected data will plot - as X values, Y values, Z values, data labels (text annotations associated with specific XY coordinates), error bars, or not at all (disregarded).  To change a column designation, select the desired designation from the Plot Designation drop-down list.  After clicking OK, the column heading displays the new designation.

Specify the type of data that the column contains by making a selection from the Display drop-down list.  For example, if the column contains date values, select Date from the drop-down list.

Available Column Data Types

Numeric:  Accepts only numeric values.

Text:  Accepts any alphanumeric characters.  Values in a text column are treated as text, and can not be used in calculations.

Time:  Accepts only 24-hour clock values.  Enter hours:minutes:seconds:fractions-of-second, separated by colons.

Date:  Accepts only calendar-accurate date values.  Enter numeric or text values separated by a space, slash, or hyphen.  For example, 1/18/99 or Mon Jan 18 1999 are both valid entries.  Origin will only display possible dates.  For example, 2/31/99 and Thursday 1/18/99 are not actual calendar dates, and thus are invalid entries.  Additionally, if a date entry is incomplete, Origin assumes the current date for the missing information.  For example, Origin will assume 1/18 is 1/18/99, if the current year is 1999.

For more information on working with date values, see  A Note on Dates and Times in Origin.

Month:  Accepts only month values.  You can enter months as numeric values (1 - 12) or text values.  The latter can be abbreviated to one character, as long as the character represents a unique month.  For example, N for November, but Jun for June.

Day of week:  Accepts only days of the week.  Enter numerically (0 - 6) or as text values (M or Mon, T or Tue, etc.).

Text & Numeric:  This is the default data type for all column designations except for "label."  Accepts any alphanumeric characters.  However, the text values are treated as missing values for all worksheet operations (such as plotting data points and performing mathematical operations), except where cell values are retrieved as text (such as plotting a data label).

Note:  The default column type in Origin 6.0 worksheets is Text & Numeric, whereas the default column type in previous versions was Numeric with an internal data type of Double(8).  This change was made because columns of type Text & Numeric are more flexible than columns of type Numeric for operations such as importing or copying and pasting numeric data that contains text characters, or for transposing worksheets that contain both text and numeric data.

If you are planning on sharing your Origin project with a colleague who has Origin 4.1, you should not use the Text & Numeric column type.  Doing so could cause a loss in data when the project is opened in Origin 4.1.  To ensure that all columns in all new worksheets are Numeric type instead of Text & Numeric, select the Use Numeric as Preferred Column Type check box on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Another reason that you might want to use the Numeric column type instead of the default Text & Numeric column type, is to minimize memory usage.  Data that is stored in columns of type Text & Numeric use slightly more memory than data that is stored in columns of type Numeric Double(8).

In general, the usage of this additional memory will not be a problem but you should be aware that you do have options.  First, you can change any Text & Numeric column to type Numeric Double(8).  An approximate 20% savings in memory can be realized by making this switch.  Second, you can specify that Origin should, by default, make all columns in new worksheets be of type Numeric Double(8).  To do this, select the Use Numeric as Preferred Column Type check box on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box.  Finally, if you need to save even more memory (upwards of an additional 50%), you can change columns to have a type of Numeric with an internal data type of Float(4).  However, usage of internal data types less than Double(8) may cause problems with various math operations.

After selecting a column data type, you can specify the display format options for the data type.  The available options differ depending upon the current Display selection.

To apply the settings in the Options group to all columns to the right in the worksheet, select the Apply to All Columns to the Right check box.

If Numeric or Text & Numeric are Selected from the Display Drop-down List:

Use the Format drop-down list to choose between the decimal, engineering, and scientific display formats.  In the worksheet, the display formats differ as listed below.

Numeric Display Format Types Available when the Display is Numeric or Text & Numeric

Decimal:1000:  1, 1000, 1E6, 1E9.
The threshold for conversion to scientific notation is controlled on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Scientific:1E3:  1E0, 1E3, 1E6, 1E9.

Engineering:1k:  1.0, 1.0k, 1.0M, 1.0G.

Decimal:1,000:  1, 1,000, 1E6, 1E9.
The threshold for conversion to scientific notation is controlled on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

The Numeric Display Drop-down List and Text Box

Select Default Decimal Digits to display all digits in a worksheet cell as determined by the Number of Decimal Digits combination box value on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box.

Select Set Decimal Places = from the Numeric Display drop-down list to control the display of the number of digits after the decimal place (supersedes the Number of Decimal Digits setting on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box).  Type the desired decimal place value (n) in the associated text box.  This value determines the maximum number of digits displayed after the decimal point.  If the field is blank, the default value is used, which is 5 (for Double (8) internal data types).

Select Significant Digits = from the Numeric Display drop-down list to control the number of digits displayed.  Type the desired significant digit value in the associated text box.

The Internal Data Drop-down List (for Numeric only)

This selection sets the maximum size for each worksheet value, in bytes.  The default data type is Double(8), which allocates eight bytes of storage space to each value.  Double is the only data type that supports missing values.  It is also the only data type that will work with all math and fitting operations.  The Float(4) data type allocates four bytes of storage space per value.  The Integer(2) data type allocates two bytes of storage space per value.  The Long(4) data type allocates four bytes of storage space per value.  However, the value is stored as an integer.

You should always set the internal data type before you enter the data.  Otherwise, you run the risk of losing some data precision.

If Time is Selected from the Display Drop-down List:

The Format drop-down list provides a display selection of hours, minutes, seconds, fractions-of-second, and an AM/PM indicator.  For information on working with time data, see  A Note on Dates and Times in Origin.

If Date is Selected from the Display Drop-down List:

The Format drop-down list provides a display selection of date values.  The entire date value - month, day, and year - is always preserved, but specific sections of the date can be displayed.

The first two date formats from the drop-down list display your Windows regional date setting (the first item is the short regional format and the second is the long regional format).  You can customize these Windows regional settings and thus access the custom format in Origin.

Origin's date formats are listed below these regional formats.

The last two date formats in the drop-down list are Origin's available custom date formats.  To customize these date formats, edit the Custom Date Formats group on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Origin provides flexibility when entering date values into a worksheet cell.  For example, to enter January 20, 1999, you could enter 1/20/99, 1.20.99, 1-20-99, 1,20,99, etc.  You could also enter Wednesday, January 20, 1999 or January 20, 1999.  Each entry is accepted and Origin displays the date based on the Format drop-down list selection.  For more information on working with date data, see  A Note on Dates and Times in Origin.

If Month is Selected from the Display Drop-down List:

Three month display formats are available:  J abbreviates the month to a single letter, Jan abbreviates to three letters, and January displays the entire month.  For information on working with month data, see  A Note on Dates and Times in Origin.

If Day of Week is Selected from the Display Drop-down List:

Three day of week display formats are available:  M abbreviates the day to a single letter, Mon abbreviates to three letters, and Monday displays the entire word.  For information on working with day of week data, see  A Note on Dates and Times in Origin.

4)	The Column Width Group

Type the desired column width in the associated text box.  The text box value is in units of characters.  Select the Apply to All check box to apply this width to all the columns in the worksheet.

5)	The Column Label Text Box

If text is entered in the Column Label text box, it will be displayed in the graph legend instead of the column name.  The maximum number of characters in a one line column label is 63.  There are no restrictions on the characters entered.  The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Undo buttons are available for editing the column label.

After you click OK to close the Worksheet Column Format dialog box, an Attention prompt asks if you want to display the column labels.  If you click No, you can activate the display later by selecting Format:Worksheet and selecting the Column Label check box.


A Note on Controlling the Display of Numeric Data

When a worksheet column is set to Numeric type or to Text & Numeric type in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box (as opposed to Text, Time, Date, Month, or Day of Week), Origin offers two display settings for numeric cell values:

•	The format of the numeric data (decimal, scientific, or engineering).

•	The number of digits.

For both of these display settings, Origin uses a combination of two dialog box controls, the Worksheet Column Format dialog box and the Options dialog box.

•	In the Worksheet Column Format dialog box, the Options group controls the data display for the respective worksheet column.  To open this dialog box, double-click on the desired worksheet column heading.

•	In the Options dialog box, the Numeric Format tab controls the data display for all numeric data, depending on the selections made in each column's respective Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  To open this dialog box, select Tools:Options.

More:

Controlling the Display Format for Numeric Data

Controlling the Number of Digits Displayed

A Note on the Displayed Cell Value Versus the Actual Cell Value


Controlling the Display Format for Numeric Data

For each column of Numeric data, you can establish the data display format from the Format drop-down list in the Options group of the respective Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Origin offers Decimal:1000, Scientific:1E3, Engineering:1k, and Decimal:1,000.  If you select either Decimal:1000, Engineering:1k, or Decimal:1,000, Origin uses additional display controls from the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box.  These additional controls are the Upper Threshold Power and the Lower Threshold Power combination boxes.  By default, these control values are set to 6 and -3, respectively.  This means that as long as your data does not exceed the range of 1x10-3 to 1x106, the data will display using the format selected from the Format drop-down list in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  If your data exceeds either the lower or upper conversion thresholds (less than 1x10-3 or greater than 1x106), then the data is displayed in scientific notation, independent of your selection from the Format drop-down list.


Controlling the Number of Digits Displayed

In addition to controlling the display format of your Numeric data, you can control the number of digits displayed.  For each column of numeric data, the number of digits displayed is controlled from the Numeric Display drop-down list in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  However, an additional control on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box also affects the number of digits displayed.  Origin provides controls in both the Worksheet Display Control and the Options dialog boxes to allow you to individually control the number of digits displayed in a column, or to globally control the number of digits displayed in all (or some) of your worksheet columns.

When you select Default Decimal Digits from the Numeric Display drop-down list in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box, the maximum number of digits Origin will display after the decimal point in each cell of that column is determined by the Number of Decimal Digits selection in the Options dialog box.  By default, this value is 5.  Thus, for that worksheet column, no more than 5 digits will display after the decimal point in each cell.  Because the Default Decimal Digits selection in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box is the default option for Origin worksheet columns set to either numeric or to text and numeric, Origin will display no more than 5 digits after the decimal point in all worksheet columns (in which the default selection isn't altered).

If you want to make sure that a specific number of digits always display after the decimal point for the cells in a given column, you can modify the Numeric Display drop-down list setting in the respective Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  In this case, select Set Decimal Places from the drop-down list and then enter the desired number of digits (n) in the associated text box.  This setting ensures that n digits always display after the decimal point for all the cells in this column.

Alternatively, if you know exactly how many significant digits there are in your column of data, you can display only the significant digits in your data by selecting Significant Digits from the Numeric Display drop-down list and then entering the number of significant digits (n) in the associated text box.  This setting ensures that only n significant digits display in each of the cells in this column.


A Note on the Displayed Cell Value Versus the Actual Cell Value

When you import or enter your data into a worksheet, Origin will display the data in each cell based on your "number of digits" setting.  However, the actual data values are stored, and when you perform calculations on your data, the actual data values are used, not the displayed values.  Additionally, when you use the Data Reader tool to view the XY coordinates of a data point in a graph, Origin displays the actual X and Y data values for the data point, not the displayed worksheet values.


A Note on Dates and Times in Origin

Origin is Year 2000 Compliant.

Origin can handle dates based upon the Gregorian Calendar and times in hours:minutes:seconds.  Origin can handle the following date range:

When entering four digits for the year, Origin handles a date range of:

1/1/0100 to 12/31/9999.

When entering two digits for the year, Origin handles a date range of:

0 to 44 = 2000 to 2044

45 to 99 = 1945 to 1999

Origin's mathematical system for dates and time is based on Astronomical Julian Day Numbers which defines -4712 January 1, 12 hours Greenwich Mean Time as zero.  Origin uses a 12 hour offset in order to have 0 hours coincide with midnight.  No assumptions are made about time zones or any time shifting scheme (such as Daylight Savings).

For example, 11 June 1998 at 21:23:01 has an Origin Julian Day Number of 2450975.890984.

Add .5 (Origin's 12 hour offset) to get the true Julian Day Number of 2450976.390984.

More:

Dates and Times in the Worksheet

Date and Time Math Operations


Dates and Times in the Worksheet

Origin's worksheet supports Date as a column type with various specific date display formats, and Time as a column type with various specific time display formats.  Additionally, there are Month and Day of Week column types and display formats.

Note that when working with these column types and formats, there is a difference between the formatted text that displays in the worksheet column and the underlying numeric value that is used for plotting and calculations.

Dates and Times in the Worksheet

Type (Display Setting)	Format	Typing this ...	Displays this ...	Numeric Value
Date	06/12/1998 Friday, June 12, 1998 06/12/1998 hh:mm	6-12-98 6/12/98 6.12.98 12:30	06/12/1998 Friday, June 12, 1998 06/12/1998 12:30	2450976 2450976 2450976.5208333
Time	hh:mm hh:mm pm	6 3 a	06:00 03:00 AM	.25 0.1354167
Month	January Jan	Ja 10	January Oct	1 10
Day of Week	Monday Mon	Friday 2	Friday Tue	5 2
Note that Origin has some flexibility on what is accepted as input and displays according to the selected format while internally maintaining a numeric value.  When you import from an ASCII file, Origin may initially treat a column as Text that should be Date or Time values.  By changing the column type, Origin converts the data just as if it had been typed into the worksheet.

In the preceding table, the internal numeric values are Julian Day Numbers for Date and Time columns and ordinal numbers for Month and Day columns.  These internal numerical values become important when performing math operations with any of the Date/Time column types.

Note:  When you enter a two digit value for the year, Origin uses an implied year range:

0 to 44 = 2000 to 2044

45 to 99 = 1945 to 1999

If you select a two digit year date display format from the Worksheet Column Format's Format drop-down list (for example, MM/DD/YY), and then enter a four digit year that is outside of this implied year range, Origin will display all four digits in the year.  For example, if you select MM/DD/YY, and then type 3/4/2045 in a worksheet cell, Origin will display 3/4/2045.  However, if you type 3/4/1945 in a worksheet cell, Origin will display 3/4/45.  In the first case, the four digit year was outside of the implied range, so Origin displayed all four digits to avoid confusion.  In the second case, the four digit year was within the implied range, so Origin displayed the two digit year.


Date and Time Math Operations

Dates and Time:

If you create a worksheet with column A containing Date values and column B containing some measured values, you could create a third column (C) which contained the elapsed Time between each element (row) by using the following formula for the (column C) Set Column Values dialog box:

col(A)[i]-col(A)[i-1]	(for i = 2 to last row of A)

If you then convert the elapsed Time column to a Numeric column type, the elapsed time values will represent the number of days.  For example, 30.2765 days would be 30 days, 6 hours, 38 minutes and 9.6 seconds.

(Using 1 day = 24 hours = 1440 minutes = 86400 seconds.)

For more information, see  Using Functions to Set Column Values or Mathematically Transform Values.

Month:

Months are enumerated from January (1) to December (12).  Numbers greater than 12 representing months are handled by a modulus function when converted to Month.  For example, 46 is converted to October because mod(46,12) is 10, and 10 is October (December is 0 in this case).  However, you can not type values outside the range 1 to 12 into a cell in a Month column.  If you do so, Origin displays a missing value in the cell.

Day:

Days are enumerated days of the week from Sunday (0) to Saturday (6).  Numbers greater than 6 representing days are handled by a modulus function when converted to Day.  For example, 46 is converted to Thursday because mod(46,7) is 4, and 4 is Thursday.  However, you can not type values outside the range 0 to 6 into a cell in a Day column.  If you do so, Origin displays a missing value in the cell.


Associating Script with a Worksheet

When repetitive or complex tasks are performed on a worksheet, such as importing data, performing calculations, or plotting data, it can be useful to create a LabTalk script to perform the tasks.  Doing so can allow you to perform a series of tasks automatically when a pre-set execution condition is met, such as clicking a button on the worksheet or importing data into the worksheet.  For instructions on creating programmed objects, see Making a Custom User Interface.

There are a few basic ways to associate LabTalk script with a worksheet.  You can add an object to a worksheet window and then enter script in the object's Label Control dialog box.  The worksheet can then be saved as a template for future use.  Because the object exists in the worksheet window, it is saved with the template.  For information on saving templates, see  Saving a Worksheet as a Template.

In addition to programming an object on a worksheet, you can associate LabTalk script with a worksheet using the Worksheet Script dialog box (see the following section).  This programming method is not as powerful as associating script with an object, as you have less options for script execution.  However, the script in the Worksheet Script dialog box is also saved with the worksheet template, allowing you to access the script by opening a new worksheet based on the custom template.

Additionally, you can associate LabTalk script with a worksheet by customizing a user-defined button on the Commands tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog box (View:Toolbars).  You can specify that the button only be available when a worksheet is active, and you can specify a section of a LabTalk script file that will be executed whenever the button is clicked.

More:

The Worksheet Script Dialog Box


The Worksheet Script Dialog Box

To open the Worksheet Script dialog box, select Tools:Worksheet Script when the desired worksheet is active.  The LabTalk script that is entered in this dialog box is associated with the active worksheet.  The method of script execution is controlled within the dialog box.  Save the worksheet as a template and the associated worksheet script is saved as well.

The Worksheet Script Dialog Box

1)	The Run Script Automatically After Group

Select the Import check box to execute the worksheet script each time you import ASCII data into the worksheet.

Select the Changes in Dataset check box to run the script whenever a change is made to the dataset specified in the associated text box.

2)	The Script Box

Type the desired LabTalk script in this text box.  The script should follow the same syntax conventions as a LabTalk script file.  For more information, see the LabTalk Help File.

3)	The Do It Button

Click this button to immediately execute the script in the script box.  Additionally, the script and execution method are set as the default settings for the worksheet.

4)	The Update Button

Click this button to set the script and execution method as the default settings for the worksheet.


Aligning Objects with the Page Grid

The Tools toolbar (View:Toolbars) provides a series of tools to add text labels and other labeling objects to Origin's child windows.  To aid in the placement of these objects on the page of a worksheet window, enable the display of the page grid by selecting View:Show Grid.  This menu command is checked when the grid is displayed.  To ensure that objects that are placed on the worksheet page align with the grid when the object is moved, select Format:Snap to Grid.  This menu command is checked when selected.


Extracting Data from the Worksheet

The Extract Worksheet Data menu command directs Origin to locate data in the worksheet based on a user-specified conditional expression.  The located data values are extracted, that is, they are copied and pasted to another worksheet.

To extract data from a worksheet, select Analysis:Extract Worksheet Data.  This menu command opens the Extract Worksheet Data dialog box.

The Extract Worksheet Data Dialog Box

1)	Select a Worksheet Range

Specify a range of worksheet rows in the From and To text boxes.  If you selected a range of rows or a column before selecting the menu command, then the From and To text box values reflect your selection.

2)	Type an Expression

Type a conditional expression into the If text box.  You can use any of the logical and relational operators listed below.  Additionally, you can use any arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /, ^).

To use a worksheet column in the expression, use the col( ) notation and type the column name or number in the parentheses.  To indicate a row number, use the variable i.  To continue an expression on to the next line, press ENTER.

To extract worksheet data using text criteria, use the following syntax:

col(ColumnName)[i]$=="text"

For example:

col(Station)[i]$=="Northwest"

Origin uses a case insensitive filter when extracting data using a text criteria.

Logical and Relational Operators

>:  greater than

>=:  greater than or equal to

<:  less than

<=:  less than or equal to

==:  equal to

!=:  not equal to

&&:  and

||:  or

3)	The Do It Button

Click this button to evaluate the conditional expression for all cells in the selected rows.  For each worksheet cell that satisfies the conditions of the expression, Origin copies the data in that entire row to a new worksheet which Origin creates.

4)	The Update Formula Button

Click this button to set the specified formula as the default formula for this worksheet.

5)	The Put into Worksheet Text Box

Type a name in this text box for the worksheet that will receive the extracted values.  Origin will create this worksheet.

More:

A Note About the Row Number [i]


A Note About the Row Number [i]

In the Set Column Values and the Extract Worksheet Data dialog boxes, columns are specified using the col( ) function or the WorksheetName_ColumnName notation.  The row numbers of a worksheet are specified using the variable i.

If i is not used in the expression, Origin assumes that the same i is used for all the columns involved in the given expression.

For example:

col(C)=col(A)-col(B)

is interpreted as:

col(C)[i]=col(A)[i]-col(B)[i]

where the notation col(C)[i] refers to the ith row of column C, and the equation is repeated for all rows in the given range.

If i is used explicitly in the expression, the assumption of a common i is overridden.

For example:

col(C)=col(B)[i+1]-col(B)[i]

calculates the increment between each row in column B, and puts this value into column C.  The equation is repeated for all rows in the given range.


Saving a Worksheet as a Template

Worksheets are created from templates.  A worksheet template file (*.OTW) provides instructions on constructing a worksheet window.  The template file determines such things as the number of columns, column designations, formulas associated with a column, and script associated with the worksheet.

To save the active worksheet as a template, select File:Save Template As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Specify a name (and folder) for the template.  The OTW extension is automatically added.

To create a worksheet based on a specific template, select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.  Select Worksheet from the Window Type list box.  Select the desired template from the Template drop-down list.  Alternatively, click the Open Template button on the Standard toolbar.


Deleting a Worksheet from a Project

When you delete a worksheet, you delete the worksheet window from the project, as well as all the data contained in the worksheet.  Any other visual representations of that data are also deleted from the project.  Thus, any data plots based on the deleted worksheet data are deleted from the respective graph windows.

To delete a worksheet from the project, perform one of the following operations:

•	Click the Close Window button in the upper-right corner of the worksheet.

•	Right-click on the worksheet window icon in Project Explorer and select Delete Window from the shortcut menu.

•	Click on the worksheet window icon in Project Explorer and then press DELETE.

Because of the potential for unexpected loss of data, Origin opens a Deletion Confirmation box.

Note:  Hiding a worksheet instead of deleting it allows you to visually remove the worksheet from the workspace, but maintain the window and data in the project.  If you hide the worksheet, you can re-activate its view in the Project Explorer.  For more information on hiding windows, see Hiding Child Windows.


Limitations When Working with Excel in Origin

•	To plot your workbook data in Origin, you must have Excel version 7 (Microsoft Office 95) or later installed on your computer either as a local or network copy.

•	If Excel version 8 (Microsoft Office 97) is installed on your computer when you save a project with links to an external Excel workbook file, or when you save a project with an internal Excel workbook, you will not be able to re-open the project on a computer with Excel version 7 (Microsoft Office 95) installed.  This is an Excel limitation.

•	Origin does not support dynamically linking a formula in a workbook to source data located in another workbook.


Starting New Projects with a Workbook Window Already Open

Origin allows you to customize many interface preferences, including control of the default child window that displays when you start an instance of Origin or open a new project.  To display a new Excel workbook (instead of an Origin worksheet) when you start Origin or open a new project, perform the following:

1)	Select Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active, or Tools:Options when any other child window is active.  Both menu commands open the Options dialog box.

2)	Select the Open/Close tab.

3)	Select Excel Workbook from the Start New Project With drop-down list.

4)	Click OK.

5)	An Attention dialog box prompts "Save as Origin's startup options?".  Click Yes to save the dialog box settings for future Origin sessions.  Click No to use the current dialog box settings for the current Origin session only.


Opening a Workbook in Your Project

Existing workbooks can be opened in an Origin project.  Additionally, a new workbook can be created in a project.

More:

Opening an Existing Workbook

Creating a New Workbook


Opening an Existing Workbook

When you open an existing workbook in Origin, you have the option of opening the workbook as an Excel workbook, or opening the workbook as one or more Origin worksheets.  If you open the workbook as a workbook, you can continue to use Excel's spreadsheet tools to process your data, all within the Origin workspace.  You also have access to Origin's plotting and analysis tools.  When you are ready to save your project, you can save the project with a link to your source workbook, and update the link, or you can save the workbook as part of your Origin project.  When you update the link to a (linked) workbook, the updated workbook is available for other applications or other users.  For detailed information on saving a project that includes a workbook, see  Managing Projects that Include Workbooks.

If you open the workbook as one or more Origin worksheets, you have no access to Excel's spreadsheet tools in Origin.  Furthermore, the data no longer has a connection to the source workbook.  Thus, the changes you make to the data are lost to the original workbook.

To open an existing workbook in Origin, perform the following:

1)	Select File:Open Excel or click the Open Excel button on the Standard toolbar.  Both the menu command and the toolbar button open the Open dialog box with 'Excel (*.XLS)' selected from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Previously opened Excel files also display in the "Recently Used Files" list in the File menu.

2)	Select the desired folder from the Look In drop-down list.

3)	Select the desired workbook file from the list box and click Open.  This action opens the Open Excel dialog box.

4)	To open the workbook as a workbook, select the Open as Excel Workbook radio button.  To open the workbook as one or more Origin worksheets, select the Open as Origin Worksheet(s) radio button.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box and open the workbook or worksheet(s).

If you select the Open as Excel Workbook radio button, Origin creates and names the workbook Bookn, where n is the lowest available number without duplicating a window name.  Additionally, Origin displays the full path and file name of the linked Excel source file.

If you select the Open as Origin Worksheet(s) radio button, Origin creates a worksheet window for each sheet selected from the Worksheets list box (in the Open Excel dialog box) and names the worksheet(s) SheetName.  For example, if Sheet1 and Sheet2 are selected from the Worksheets list box, Origin names the resultant worksheets Sheet1 and Sheet2.  Origin sets the column type for each of the worksheet columns to Text & Numeric.

•	If a workbook sheet includes formulas to calculate values, Origin displays the calculated values in the resultant worksheet.

•	If a workbook sheet contains links to another workbook sheet, the links are broken in the worksheet.  The data displays in the worksheet as it last displayed in the workbook sheet.

The Open Excel Dialog Box

1)	The Open as Excel Workbook Radio Button

Select this radio button to open the existing Excel workbook as a workbook.  This option allows you to use Excel tools when the workbook is active in Origin.

2)	The Open as Origin Worksheet(s) Radio Button

Select this radio button to open the selected sheet(s) of the existing Excel workbook as an Origin worksheet(s).  The data displays in the worksheet(s) and loses its association with Excel.

3)	The Worksheets List Box

If the existing Excel workbook contains multiple sheets and the Open as Origin Worksheet(s) radio button is selected, then the available workbook sheets display in this list box.  Select the sheets to open as worksheets from this list box.  Click to select a single sheet, SHIFT+click to select a range of sheets, or CTRL+click to select nonconsecutive sheets.

4)	The Do Not Show this Dialog Box Check Box

Select this check box to prevent this dialog box from opening when you select an Excel file from the Open dialog box (File:Open Excel or the Open Excel button on the Standard toolbar), or when you select an Excel file from the "Recently Used Files" list in the File menu.  When this check box is selected and you click OK, Origin automatically opens future Excel files using the last selection in the dialog box.  For example, if the Open as Excel Workbook radio button is selected and the Do Not Show this Dialog Box check box is selected, then after clicking OK, Origin opens future Excel workbooks as workbooks.  If the Open as Origin Worksheet(s) radio button is selected and the Do Not Show this Dialog Box check box is selected, then after clicking OK, Origin opens all sheets in future Excel workbooks as worksheets.

To re-enable the display of this dialog box, select the Opening Excel Files check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active, or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).


Creating a New Workbook

To create a new workbook in Origin, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select File:New to open the New dialog box.  Select Excel from the Window Type list box and click OK.

•	Click the New Excel button on the Standard toolbar.

Origin creates and names the new workbook Bookn, where n is the lowest available number without duplicating a window name.  The Bookn workbook contains four sheets, Sheet1 through Sheet4.


Saving a Workbook Separately from the Project

Like other child windows, workbook windows can be saved separately from the project.  To save the active workbook to a *.XLS file, perform one of the following operations:

•	Right-click on the workbook title bar and select Save Workbook As from the shortcut menu.

•	Select File:Save Window.

Both menu commands open the Save As dialog box with 'Excel (*.XLS)' selected from the Save as Type drop-down list.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box and click Save.


How the Origin Workspace Changes When a Workbook is Active

When a workbook is active in Origin, the workspace includes both Origin and Excel tools.

More:

The Menu

Toolbars

The Status Bar

The Shortcut Menus


The Menu

When a workbook is active, the following Origin menus are available:  File, Plot, Window.

When a workbook is active, the following Excel menus are available:  Edit, View, Insert, Format, Tools, Data, Accounting, Help.

Locations of Origin Menu Commands when a Workbook is Active

•	To open the (Origin) Options dialog box when a workbook is active, select Window:Origin Options.

•	To open the (Origin) Toolbars dialog box when a workbook is active, select Window:Origin Toolbars.

•	To open the (Origin) Help file when a workbook is active, right-click on the workbook title bar and select Help Contents from the shortcut menu.


Working with Excel in Origin - How the Origin Workspace Changes When a Workbook is Active - Toolbars
Toolbars

When a workbook is active, both the Origin and Excel Standard toolbar display.

All buttons on Origin's Standard toolbar are active except the Refresh and Duplicate buttons.

Origin's 2D Graphs, 2D Graphs Extended, and 3D Graphs toolbars are available if open.  To open these toolbars when a workbook is active, select Window:Origin Toolbars.  This menu command opens the Toolbars dialog box.  Select the desired toolbar check boxes and click Close.

All buttons on Excel's Standard toolbar are active except the New Workbook, Open, Save, Print, and Print Preview buttons.

All other Excel toolbars that are open are available.

Note:  Origin includes a toolbar spacer that stabilizes the toolbar region when child window activity is changed in Origin.  The toolbar spacer is the reserved space for toolbars located below the menu bar.  The height of the toolbar spacer is determined by the maximum height required to display all the selected docked toolbars for any of the child windows in the project.  Because the Excel toolbars display when a workbook is active, the workbook window (if open in the project) generally "determines" the height of the toolbar spacer.  If you have switched child window activity from the workbook to any other child window, and you want to manually reset the toolbar region for the currently active child window, right-click on the toolbar spacer and select Hide Toolbar Spacer from the shortcut menu.


Working with Excel in Origin - How the Origin Workspace Changes When a Workbook is Active - The Status Bar
The Status Bar

When a workbook is active, the status bar displays descriptions of both Origin and Excel tools.


The Shortcut Menus

When a workbook is active, Origin provides a combination of Origin and Excel shortcut menus.  Excel shortcut menus are available within the workbook.  The Origin shortcut menu is available from the workbook window title bar.

Origin Shortcut Menu Commands Available from the Workbook Title Bar

Save Workbook As:  Saves the active workbook to a file.  Opens the Save As dialog box.

Update Origin:  Updates Origin for the following conditions:

If you rename a workbook sheet that contains data that is plotted in a graph window, this shortcut menu command updates the connection between the data plot and its source sheet.  After selecting the command, Origin opens the Associate Excel Worksheet dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to re-establish the connection between the data plot and the sheet.  For more information, see  Renaming Sheets in the Workbook.

Occasionally, the workbook window, or other windows containing workbook data, may become inactive.  This condition is apparent when the window containing workbook data has a blank display.  To reactivate the window and restore its display, select this shortcut menu command.

Help Contents:  Opens the Contents tab of Origin's online Help file.

Properties:  Opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to rename the workbook window and control how the workbook is saved when you save your project.

This dialog box also lists the workbook sheets that contain plotted data, and the associated Origin index numbers.  Index numbers are included in the names of data plots that contain workbook data.  For more information on Origin index numbers, see  How Origin Denotes Plotted Workbook Data.


Working with Workbook Windows

The workbook window is a special type of Origin child window.  As a child window, you can rename, arrange, save, or delete the workbook window.  You can also open multiple workbook windows within an Origin project.  Like the worksheet child window, you can view data in a workbook window and view the graphic representation of the data in a graph window.  However, the workbook window also has features that are distinct from other child windows.  The following sections review these distinct workbook window features.

More:

Renaming the Workbook

Renaming Sheets in the Workbook

Deleting Sheets from the Workbook

Creating a Matrix from the Workbook


Renaming the Workbook

To rename a workbook window, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Type a new name in the Window Title text box and click OK.  If the workbook is saved externally to the project, the full path and file name also display in the title bar.


Renaming Sheets in the Workbook

If you rename a sheet in a workbook from which you have already plotted data, Origin loses the association between the data plot and its source Excel workbook sheet.  To re-establish the connection between the data plot and the workbook sheet, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Update Origin from the associated shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Associate Excel Worksheet dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to inform Origin of the new sheet name.  For example, if Sheet1 was renamed Sample1, select Sample1 from the Excel Worksheets list box.  Click OK to re-establish the connection between the data plot and the workbook sheet.  If you do not update Origin manually during the session, Origin will prompt you to update Origin after you save your project.

The Associate Excel Worksheet Dialog Box

1)	The Excel Worksheets List Box

When you rename a workbook sheet that contains plotted data, Origin must be informed of the new sheet name.  Select the new sheet name from the Excel Worksheets list box.

2)	The Remove Button

If you delete or rename a workbook sheet from which data is plotted, click this button to delete the associated data plots from all graph windows.

3)	The OK Button

Click this button to update Origin with the re-association indicated in the Excel Worksheets list box.

Note:  If you have renamed multiple workbook sheets that contain plotted data, Origin re-opens this dialog box automatically after clicking OK.  Edit the dialog box for the workbook sheet specified in the text at the top of the dialog box.


Deleting Sheets from the Workbook

If you delete a workbook sheet from which data is plotted in a graph window, you must update Origin with this change.  Right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Update Origin from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Associate Excel Worksheet dialog box.  Click the Remove button to update Origin and remove all data plotted from the (deleted) sheet.


Creating a Matrix from the Workbook

To create a matrix and fill the matrix with the highlighted workbook data, select Window:Create Matrix.  This menu command opens a new matrix window and fills the matrix with the highlighted data, so that the data displays in the matrix identical to its display in the workbook.


Working with Workbook Data

When a workbook is the active child window, except for Origin's plotting features, Excel provides the visual interface to access workbook data.  Thus, when a workbook is active, the Format, Tools, and Data menus are all Excel menus.  However, Origin does provide access to the workbook data using LabTalk, Origin's built-in scripting language.  Use LabTalk to run Excel macros, invoke Visual Basic Application Functions, and read or set cell values.  For more information on reading or setting data values using LabTalk, see the LabTalk Help File.

More:

Running Excel Macros in Origin

Invoking Visual Basic Application Functions in Origin


Running Excel Macros in Origin

Excel macros can be run from Origin using LabTalk.  LabTalk includes commands with option switches, as well as object properties and methods.  Origin uses an excel object method to run Excel macros from Origin.  For the Excel macro to run properly, you must supply the correct arguments using the excel object method.  LabTalk will accept no more than five arguments.  Additionally, the workbook containing the Excel macro must be the active window.

To run the macro, type the following in the Script window and press ENTER:

Excel.RunRange(SheetName,RangeName,Arg1,Arg2,…,Arg5)

Where SheetName is the name of the sheet containing the macro, RangeName is the name of the cell on the sheet where the macro starts (for example, C6), and Argn are the correct arguments for the macro (not exceeding five arguments).

The return value after executing the excel object method comes from the macro.


Invoking Visual Basic Application Functions in Origin

In addition to Excel macros, you can invoke Visual Basic application functions in Origin.  As with macros, these functions are invoked using LabTalk's excel object.  For the Visual Basic application function to run properly, you must supply the correct arguments with the excel object method.  LabTalk will accept no more than five arguments.  Additionally, the workbook containing the Visual Basic application function must be the active window.

To run the Visual Basic application function, type the following in the Script window and press ENTER:

Excel.Run(FunctionName,Arg1,Arg2,…,Arg5)

Where FunctionName is the Visual Basic application function, and Argn are the correct arguments for the function (not exceeding five arguments).

The return value after executing the excel object method comes from the function.


Plotting Workbook Data

Origin provides a broad range of methods for creating graphs from workbook data.  The plotting method you use is dependent on whether you want to create a new graph window or add workbook data to an existing graph window.

•	To create a new graph from your workbook data, see  Creating a Graph from Workbook Data.

•	To add workbook data to an existing graph window, see  Adding Workbook Data to an Existing Graph Window.

Once the graph is created from the workbook data, you have full access to Origin's graphic customization features.

Note:  Occasionally, the workbook or graph window containing workbook data becomes inactive.  This condition is apparent when the window containing workbook data has a blank display.  To restore the display in the window, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Update Origin from the shortcut menu.

More:

How Origin Denotes Plotted Workbook Data

Creating a Graph from Workbook Data

Adding Workbook Data to an Existing Graph Window


How Origin Denotes Plotted Workbook Data

References to plotted Excel workbook data are found in the same locations as are references to plotted Origin worksheet data.  These locations include the data list at the bottom of the Data menu, the graph legend, and the Layer n dialog box.

The Excel workbook dataset naming convention is similar to the Origin worksheet dataset naming convention, but includes information on the sheet number in the workbook.  Excel workbook datasets are named using the following syntax:

WorkbookName_ColumnName@SheetNumber

Where WorkbookName is the workbook name, ColumnName is the workbook sheet column name, and SheetNumber is the numeric value reflecting the order in which data was plotted from the sheets in the workbook.

For example, open a new Excel workbook and enter data on Sheet1 through Sheet4.  Then plot the data from the four sheets in the following order:  Sheet1, Sheet4, Sheet2, and Sheet3.  The numeric values of @SheetNumber will be:

Sheet1	no number

Sheet2	@3

Sheet3	@4

Sheet4	@2

(When referencing the first plotted sheet, Origin does not use @1.)

To verify the @SheetNumber value for each sheet that contains plotted data, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  The workbook sheets and their associated @SheetNumber values display in the Sheet Name / Origin Index list box.

As with Origin worksheets, the data list at the bottom of the Data menu lists each of the data plots included in the active layer of the graph window.  If the Y data is plotted versus X data, both datasets are listed.  If the Y data is plotted versus workbook row number, then Origin lists the starting row number and the increment (in most cases, this value will be one).  For example, if Origin lists the data plot created from data on Sheet1 as 1/1(X), B(Y).  This notation indicates that the column B values in Sheet1 are plotted versus row number.

The graph legend displays either the workbook sheet's column titles, the sheet's column names, or the full dataset name for the data plots.  If column titles are present in the workbook sheet, they are displayed in the legend by default.  If no column titles are present, the column name is displayed by default.  To display the full workbook dataset name instead of the workbook column name, select Format:Page when the graph window is active.  This menu command opens the Plot Details dialog box with the graph icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Legends tab and then select the Full Dataset Name check box and click OK.

As with Origin worksheets, plotted workbook datasets are also displayed in the Layer Contents list box of the Layer n dialog box.  (To open this dialog box, double-click on the layer icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.)  In the Layer Contents list box, Origin displays the workbook dataset that supplies the Y values in the data plot.


Creating a Graph from Workbook Data

When a workbook is active, Origin offers two (visual interface) methods for creating a new graph window from your data.  Use the following information as a guide to help you select a plotting method.

Selecting Your Plotting Method when the Workbook is Active

To use an interactive dialog box to select workbook data and assign its designation (X, Y, Z, etc.) in the data plot, see  Interactively Selecting Cells and Assigning their Plotting Designation (Default Plotting Method).

To plot data into different layers of a graph window, see  Interactively Selecting Cells and Assigning their Plotting Designation (Default Plotting Method).

To plot data into different graph windows, see  Interactively Selecting Cells and Assigning their Plotting Designation (Default Plotting Method).

To highlight your data in the workbook, select the graph type, and directly plot the data without an intermediary dialog box, see Highlighting Data and Using the Default Plot Assignments.

More:

Interactively Selecting Cells and Assigning their Plotting Designation (Default Plotting Method)

Highlighting Data and Using the Default Plot Assignments


Interactively Selecting Cells and Assigning their Plotting Designation (Default Plotting Method)

Method Description

This plotting method uses an interactive dialog box, the Select Data for Plotting dialog box, that allows you to select data from the workbook and assign the desired plotting designation (X, Y, etc.) by clicking a button within the dialog box.  Thus, you can create data plots by selecting and assigning the X values, Y values, and optional Z, error bar, label, and legend title values.  This interactive plotting method also allows you to create multiple data plots that can be displayed in one graph layer, multiple graph layers, or multiple graph windows.  If desired, the interactive dialog box can remain open after plotting, allowing you to add additional data plots to an existing graph window.  You can resize the dialog box (by dragging on its edge) to minimize the amount of screen space it occupies.

How to Activate this Method

This plotting method is the default option after installing and starting Origin.  If the default options have been altered, re-activate this plotting method by performing the following:

Clear the Default Plot Assignments check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

The Select Data for Plotting dialog box opens when you select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on the 2D Graphs, 2D Graphs Extended, or 3D Graphs toolbars, assuming the conditions are met in the "How to Activate this Method" section.  When plotting using this method, each graph type has associated data requirements.  For example, a ternary diagram requires X, Y, and Z data.

Creating One Data Plot

To create a single data plot in a new graph window using Origin's interactive plotting dialog box, perform the following:

1)	With the workbook active, select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on one of the graph toolbars.  Selecting the menu command or the toolbar button opens the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

2)	To specify the X values for the data plot, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the X button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  To plot the Y values versus row number, skip this step.

3)	To specify the Y values for the data plot, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the Y button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  If your graph doesn't require a selection of Z, error bar, label, or legend title values, go to step 6.

4)	If the selected graph type requires Z values, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the Z button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

5)	If the selected graph type requires error bar, label, or legend title values, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the respective button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

6)	Click Plot to create a data plot in a new graph window based on the selections in this dialog box.

To add additional data to an existing graph window using this dialog box, do not click Close after plotting your data.  Leave the dialog box open for future access.  Resize the dialog box to minimize its display.

For more information, see  Adding Data Using the Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box.

Creating Multiple Data Plots

To create multiple data plots in a new graph window using Origin's interactive plotting dialog box, perform the following:

1)	With the workbook active, select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on one of the graph toolbars.  Both the menu command and the toolbar button open the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

2)	To specify the X values for the data plots, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the X button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  To plot the Y values for the data plots versus row number, skip this step.

3)	To specify the Y values for the data plots, perform one of the following operations, or a combination of the following operations:

a.	Highlight multiple Y columns by clicking and dragging through the desired column headings, SHIFT+clicking on a range of columns, or CTRL+clicking on nonadjacent columns.

b.	Highlight a range of data in a column by clicking and dragging through the desired cells.  CTRL+click to select additional cells.

Click the Y button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box after selecting the data.  If your graph doesn't require a selection of error bar, label, or legend title values, go to step 5.

4)	If the selected graph type requires error bar, label, or legend title values, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the respective button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

5)	After making your data selections, select the data plot display method from the Plot Into drop-down list.  Select Single Layer to plot all datasets into a single layer graph.  Select Multiple Layers to plot each data plot into its own layer in the same graph window.  Select Multiple Pages to plot each data plot into its own single layer graph window.

6)	Click Plot to create the graph(s) specified in the Plot Into drop-down list.

To add additional data to an existing graph window using this dialog box, do not click Close after plotting your data.  Leave the dialog box open for future access.  Resize the dialog box to minimize its display.

For more information, see  Adding Data Using the Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box.

The Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box

1)	The Plot Designation Buttons

Assign the selected workbook data to provide:

The X values for a single data plot or for multiple data plots.

The Y values for a single data plot or for multiple data plots.

The Z values for a single data plot.

The Y error bar values for a single data plot.  The error bars are associated with the first selected Y dataset to the left of the error bar data.

The data label values for a single data plot.  The data labels are associated with the first selected Y dataset to the left of the label data.

The legend text for the data plot(s).  If the Scan Data for Legend check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box is selected (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active), Origin automatically assigns a row number for this designation.

2)	The Data Plot Association View Box

This view box displays the data range selections for the X, Y, etc. values.  Except for the Title field, the range is displayed using the following syntax:  StartColNameRowNum:EndColNameRowNum.  The Title field displays the selected row number only.

3)	The Plot Into Drop-down List

This drop-down list is not available when adding data plots to a graph using the Add Plot button.  If you assign multiple Y ranges from the workbook, Origin creates multiple data plots using either the selected X data or the associated row numbers.  Control the display of the data plots from this drop-down list.

Select Single Layer to plot all datasets into a single layer graph.

Select Multiple Layers to plot each data plot into its own layer in the same graph window.

Select Multiple Pages to plot each data plot into its own single layer graph window.

Note:  This drop-down list is not available when adding data plots to a graph using the Add Plot button.

4)	The Close Dialog After Plot Check Box

Select this check box to close the dialog box after clicking Plot.

If this check box is cleared, the dialog box remains open and available when a workbook or a graph window is active.  Edit the dialog box to add additional data plots to the graph, or to create new graphs from the workbook data.  Resize the dialog box to minimize the amount of screen space it occupies.

5)	The Plot Button

Click this button to create one or more data plots based on the selection in the data plot association view box.  The data plots using the graph type that was selected when the dialog box first opened.

6)	The Change Book Button

If you change workbooks after this dialog box is open, the Plot button is replaced by the Change Book button.  Click this button to enable selection of datasets in the currently active workbook.  After clicking this button, the button is replaced by the Plot button.

Note:  This button is only active when you change workbooks.

7)	The Add Plot Button

When the graph window is active, the Plot button is replaced by the Add Plot button.  Click this button to add the current data selection in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box to the graph.

To use this button effectively, first redirect window activity to the workbook window.  Create the new data plot association(s) by selecting data and clicking the plot designation buttons.  Then redirect window activity back to the graph window.  Click the Add Plot button to add the data plot(s) to the active graph layer.

8)	The Use Defaults Button

This button is only available when data is highlighted in the workbook before you select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on one of the graph toolbars.  Additionally, if the previous condition is met, this button is only active when you first open the dialog box.

Click this button to plot the highlighted workbook data using Origin's default plot assignments for the selected graph type instead of establishing plot associations in the dialog box.  After clicking the button, an Attention dialog box prompts to select the Default Plot Assignments check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).  Click Yes to create the data plots from the highlighted workbook data and change the check box status.  Click No to create the data plots but leave the check box status unchanged.

For more information on this plotting method, see  Highlighting Data and Using the Default Plot Assignments.

9)	The Save Settings Button

Click this button to save the selection from the Plot Into drop-down list for future instances of this dialog box in the current Origin session.

10)	The Clear Button

Click this button to clear the current selection in the data plot association view box.

11)	The Close Button

Click this button to close the dialog box without creating a data plot.


Highlighting Data and Using the Default Plot Assignments

Method Description

This plotting method minimizes the steps required to create a graph from a workbook by allowing you to highlight your workbook data and then select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on the 2D Graphs, 2D Graphs Extended, or 3D Graphs toolbar.  The graph is automatically created based on the data selection and Origin's default plot assignments for the selected graph type.  There is no dialog box to serve as an intermediary plotting tool.  However, this plotting method must make assumptions on the designation (X, Y, etc.) of the highlighted data, given the selected graph type.  These assumptions are discussed in the section, "What Data Must be Selected for each Graph Type?" that follows.

How to Activate this Method

This plotting method is not the default option after installing and starting Origin.  To activate this plotting method, perform the following:

Select the Default Plot Assignments check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

The following paragraphs list the data requirements for each of the built-in graph types when plotting workbook data using this method.  Note that in all cases, when you are advised to select a column of data, you can alternatively select a range of a column.  Additionally, for some of Origin's graph types, when selecting multiple columns, the use of row numbers for X values can be activated by holding down the CTRL key when selecting Plot:Graph Type or when clicking the Graph Type button on the 2D Graphs, 2D Graphs Extended, or 3D Graphs toolbar (hold the CTRL key down until the graph is created).  When this option is available, the Result field of refers to the "CTRL key being depressed".

Origin's Default Plot Assignments Using this Plotting Method

For:  2 Point segment, 2D Waterfall, 3D Ribbons, 3D Walls, 3D Waterfall, 3 Point segment, 4 Panel, 9 Panel, Area, Bar, Column, Horizontal 2 panel, Horizontal step, Line, Line+symbol, Polar, Scatter, Spline connected, Stack, Stack bar, Stack column, Vertical 2 panel, Vertical drop line, Vertical step, XYY 3D Bars, Zoom

Select:  One or more columns.

Result:  If one column is selected:  The column supplies the Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If more than one column is selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  All other columns supply the Y values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.  If more than one column is selected and the CTRL key is depressed:  All the columns supply the Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.

For:  Box chart

Select:  One or more columns.

Result:  Each selected column supplies Y values for a separate box.  Column names supply the associated X values.

For:  Double Y Axis

Select:  Two or more columns.

Result:  If two columns are selected:  Both columns supply Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If three or more columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies X values.  All other columns supply Y values.  The data is plotted versus X values.  If three or more columns are selected and the CTRL key is depressed:  All columns supply Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.

For:  Fill area

Select:  Two or three columns.

Result:  If two columns are selected:  Both columns supply Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If three columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies X values.  The other two columns supply Y values.  The data is plotted versus X values.

For:  Floating bar, Floating column

Select:  Two or more columns.

Result:  If two columns are selected and the CTRL key is depressed:  The leftmost column supplies the starting Y values.  The second column supplies the ending Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If three or more columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The second column supplies the starting Y values.  The next column supplies the intermediate Y values (etc.).  The rightmost column supplies the ending Y values.  The data is plotted versus X values.  If three or more columns are selected and the CTRL key is depressed:  The leftmost column supplies the starting Y values.  The next column supplies the intermediate Y values (etc.).  The rightmost column supplies the ending Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.

For:  High-Low-Close

Select:  Three columns or four columns.

Result:  If three columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the high values, the next column supplies the low values, and the last column supplies the closing values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If four columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The second column supplies the high values.  The third column supplies the low values.  The rightmost column supplies the closing values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.

For:  Histogram

Select:  One or more columns.

Result:  A histogram graph is created containing an interlaced histogram for each of the selected columns.

For:  Histogram + Probabilities

Select:  One column.

Result:  A histogram is created for the selected column.  The cumulative counts are also displayed.

For:  Indexed size (Bubble) and color map

Select:  Three columns or four columns.

Result:  If three columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the Y values.  The second column supplies the size values.  The rightmost column supplies the color values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If four columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The second column supplies the Y values.  The third column supplies the size values.  The rightmost column supplies the color values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.

For:  Color map, Indexed size (Bubble)

Select:  Two columns or three columns.

Result:  If two columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the Y values.  The second column supplies the size or color values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If three columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The next column supplies the Y values.  The rightmost column supplies the size or color values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.

For:  Line series

Select:  Two or three columns.

Result:  If two or three columns are selected:  The columns supply the Y values.  Each series of row values comprises a line + symbol data plot.  The data plot's X values are determined by the selected Y column number (1, 2, or 3).  The data plot's Y values are determined by the actual cell values in the selected column.

For:  Pie

Select:  One column.

Result:  The selected column values are summed, and the percentage of the total is determined for each selected value.  The pie chart displays the percentage of the total for each selected value as a pie section.

For:  QC (X bar R)

Select:  One or more columns.

Result:  If one column is selected:  The column supplies the Y values.  The X values are determined by the subgroup number (defined by the subgroup size and the number of column values).  The data is plotted versus X values.  If more than one column is selected:  The selected columns supply the Y values.  The X values are determined by the row number.  The data is plotted versus X values.

For:  Ternary

Select:  Three columns.

Result:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The second column supplies the Y values.  The rightmost column supplies the Z values.  The X, Y, Z data is plotted.

For:  XYAM Vector

Select:  Three columns or four columns.

Result:  If three columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the Y values.  The second column supplies the angle values.  The rightmost column supplies the magnitude values.  The data is plotted versus row number.  If four columns are selected:  The leftmost column supplies the X values.  The second column supplies the Y values.  The third column supplies the angle values.  The rightmost column supplies the magnitude values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.

For:  XYXY Vector

Select:  Four columns.

Result:  The leftmost column supplies the X start values.  The second column supplies the Y start values.  The third column supplies the X end values.  The rightmost column supplies the Y end values.

Creating a Graph with Error Bars

Origin provides two buttons to plot error bars when plotting workbook data using Origin's default plot assignments, the Y Error button  and the XY Error button  on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

To create a graph with Y error bars:

•	Highlight two workbook columns, or a range from two columns, and click the Y Error button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.  Origin uses the row index number for X values, the left column for Y values, and the right column for Y error bar values.  The data displays as a scatter data plot with Y error bars.

•	Highlight three workbook columns, or a range from three columns, and click the Y Error button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.  Origin uses the leftmost column for X values, the second column for Y values, and the rightmost column for Y error bar values.  The data displays as a scatter data plot with Y error bars.

Note, you can create additional data plots with error bars as long as your highlighted workbook data is set up as X, Y1, Y1err, Y2, Y2err, etc.

To create a graph with X and Y error bars:

•	Highlight four workbook columns, or a range from four columns, and click the XY Error button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.  Origin uses the leftmost column for X values, the second column for Y values, the third column for X error bar values, and the last column for Y error bar values.  The data displays as a scatter data plot with X and Y error bars.


Adding Workbook Data to an Existing Graph Window

Highlighting and Dragging Data into the Graph Window

Adding Data Using the Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box

Adding Data Using the Layer n Dialog Box

Adding Data Using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box


Highlighting and Dragging Data into the Graph Window

Method Description

This method of adding data plots to an existing graph window simplifies plotting by allowing you to drag your workbook data into the graph.  There is no dialog box to serve as an intermediary plotting tool.  However, this plotting method must make assumptions on the designation (X, Y, etc.) of the highlighted data.  These assumptions are discussed in the following section, "What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?".  Additionally, the resultant graph type is determined by the Drag and Drop Plot drop-down list selection on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.

How to Activate this Method

This plotting method is available whenever a workbook is active and a graph window is open in the project (excluding minimized and hidden graph windows).

To select the graph type for your data plots created with the drag-and-drop method, select Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active.  Both menu commands open the Options dialog box.  Select the desired graph type from the Drag and Drop Plot drop-down list on the Graph tab.  Select among the following options:

•	Select Line, Scatter, or Line+Symbol to create a line, scatter, or line+symbol data plot.

•	Select Current to display the data plot using the style of the graph template (for example, line or scatter).  If, however, you have created a custom template with data plot style holders, Origin will search for the first available style holder.  If there are no style holders available, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.  For a discussion on data plot style holders, see Attributes Saved with a Graph Template.

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

After selecting the desired data in the workbook, position the mouse at the edge of the selection area.  The mouse display changes to a pointer.  Click-and-drag the data into the desired graph window.

•	If one column (or a range from one column) is highlighted, then this column supplies the Y values for the data plot.  The data is plotted versus row number.

•	If more than one column (or a range from more than one column) is highlighted, the leftmost column supplies the X values.  All other columns supply the Y values.  The data is plotted versus the X values.

•	If more than one column (or a range from more than one column) is highlighted and the CTRL key is depressed while dragging the data, then all the columns supply the Y values.  The data is plotted versus row number.

If the graph window contains multiple layers, the data plot displays in the layer that occupies the physical location where the data was dropped.  If the layers are overlapping, the data plot displays in the active layer.  If the data is dropped on a layer icon, the data plot displays in the associated layer.


Adding Data Using the Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box

Method Description

This method of adding data plots to an existing graph window uses the interactive Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  Use this dialog box to add one or more data plots to a graph.  When adding data to an existing graph window using this dialog box, the data displays using the style of the graph template (for example, line or scatter).  If, however, you have created a custom template with data plot style holders, Origin will search for the first available style holder.  If there are no style holders available, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.  For a discussion on data plot style holders, see Attributes Saved with a Graph Template.

How to Activate this Method

If you already created a graph using the Select Data for Plotting dialog box and if you didn't click Close, then the dialog box is still available for adding data to a graph.  However, if you created a graph using a different plotting method or if you closed the Select Data for Plotting dialog box after creating a graph, then you must open this dialog box to activate this plotting method.

To open the Select Data for Plotting dialog box, make the workbook window active and perform the following:

1)	Clear the Default Plot Assignments check box on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).

2)	Select Plot:Graph Type or click the Graph Type button on the 2D Graphs, 2D Graphs Extended, or 3D Graphs toolbar to open the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

Each graph type has associated data requirements.  For example, a ternary diagram requires X, Y, and Z data.

To Add Data Plots to an Existing Graph Window

To add data plots to an existing graph window using Origin's interactive plotting dialog box, perform the following:

1)	If the Select Data for Plotting dialog box is not already open, then open the dialog box by making the workbook window active and selecting Plot:Graph Type or by clicking the Graph Type button on one of the graph toolbars.

If the Select Data for Plotting dialog box is already open, then make the workbook (that contains the data you want to plot) the active window.  If this workbook is different from the workbook that was active when you opened this dialog box, then the Change Book button displays in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  Click this button to continue.

2)	To clear the current data plot associations in the Select Data for Plotting view box, click Clear.  (You may need to resize the dialog box to access this button.)

3)	To specify the X values for the data plot(s), highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the X button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.  To plot the Y values versus row number, skip this step.

4)	To specify the Y values for a single data plot, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column.

To specify the Y values for multiple data plots, perform one of the following operations, or a combination of the following operations:

a.	Highlight multiple Y columns by clicking and dragging through the desired column headings, SHIFT+clicking on a range of columns, or CTRL+clicking on nonadjacent columns.

b.	Highlight a range of data in a column by clicking and dragging through the desired cells.  CTRL+click to select additional cells.

Click the Y button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box after selecting the data.

5)	If the selected graph type requires Z values, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the Z button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

6)	If the selected graph type requires error bar, label, or legend title values, highlight the desired column of data, or a range of the desired column, and click the respective button in the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

7)	Make the graph window (that you want to add the data plots to) the active window.

8)	Click Add Plot to plot the data into the graph window.  If the graph window contains multiple layers, the data plots display in the active layer.


Adding Data Using the Layer n Dialog Box

Method Description

This method of adding data plots to an existing graph window provides access to all the datasets in all the workbooks in the project.  It also provides access to all the datasets in all the Origin worksheets in the project.  When adding data to a graph window using this method, the data plot displays using the style of the graph template (for example, line or scatter).  If, however, you have created a custom template with data plot style holders, Origin will search for the first available style holder.  If there are no style holders available, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.  For a discussion on data plot style holders, see Attributes Saved with a Graph Template.

If a dataset from a workbook sheet is not listed in the Available Data list of the Layer n dialog box, perform the following:

1)	Make the Excel workbook window that contains the desired dataset(s) the active window.

2)	Right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Update Origin from the shortcut menu.

How to Activate this Method

This method is always available by double-clicking on the respective layer icon in the graph window.

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

When adding data plots to a graph window using this method, the selected dataset supplies the Y values for the data plot.  By default, the X values for the data plot are supplied by the leftmost column in the workbook.

To Add Data Plots to an Existing Graph Window

To add data plots to an existing graph window using the Layer n dialog box, perform the following:

1)	With the graph window active, double-click on the desired layer icon to open the respective Layer n dialog box.

2)	Specify the Y values for a single data plot by highlighting the desired workbook dataset in the Available Data list box.

Specify the Y values for multiple data plots by highlighting the desired workbook datasets in the Available Data list box.  Click-and-drag through the dataset names, SHIFT+click on a range of dataset names, or CTRL+click on dataset names.

3)	Click the ⇒ button to move the selected dataset(s) into the Layer Contents list box.

4)	Click OK.


Adding Data Using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Method Description

This method of adding data plots to an existing graph window provides access to those datasets that reside in the top sheet (when the dialog box was opened) of each of the workbooks in the project.  It also provides access to all the datasets in all the Origin worksheets in the project.  The dialog box allows you to select datasets and specify their designation, overriding the default designations in the workbook.  This plotting method supports line, scatter, line+symbol, column, and area data plots.

Note:  When adding workbook data to an existing graph window, you should use the Select Data for Plotting dialog box instead of the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  For more information, see  Adding Data Using the Select Data for Plotting Dialog Box.

What Data Must be Selected for Each Graph Type?

The line, scatter, line+symbol, column, and area data plots all require the selection of a designated Y dataset in the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  To specify the data plot's X values, select an X dataset, or set the X start value and increment in the Set X Values group in the dialog box.


Managing Projects that Include Workbooks

When you select File:Save Project or File:Save Project As, or when you click the Save Project button on the Standard toolbar, all child windows (including minimized and hidden child windows) that are open in the project are saved as part of the project.  If a workbook window is open in the project, the project can be saved with a link to the source workbook file, or the workbook can be saved internal to the project.

•	Saving the project with a link to the source workbook file allows you to maintain an external Excel file that is updated when changes are made to the associated workbook in Origin.  This source file is also available for use in other applications and can be accessed by other users.

•	Saving the workbook internal to the project enhances the project's portability.  You can open the project on any computer that has Origin and Excel installed and have full access to your workbook data.  For Excel version compatibility information, see  Limitations When Working with Excel in Origin.

More:

Saving the Project with Links to External Excel Workbook Files

Saving the Project with Internal Excel Workbooks

Opening an Origin Project that has Links to External Excel Workbooks

Opening an Origin Project that Contains Internal Excel Workbooks


Saving the Project with Links to External Excel Workbook Files

To ensure that the active workbook will be linked to the current project when the project is saved, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This shortcut menu command opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Select the External radio button in the Save As group.  After selecting this radio button, Origin displays the full path and file name of the linked source Excel file in the File Name group.  If the workbook window was created in Origin, the default path is determined by the Excel path specified on the File Location tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active, or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).

The Workbook Properties Dialog Box

1)	The File Name Group

Type the desired workbook window name in the Window Title text box.

When the External radio button is selected (in the Save As group), Origin displays the full path and file name of the linked source file in the Linked File Path field.

2)	The Save As Group

Select the Internal radio button to save the active workbook internal to the project when the project is saved.  When this radio button is selected and the project is saved, changes made to the workbook in Origin are not reflected in the original source workbook.  Additionally, changes made to the original source workbook file are not reflected in the Origin project.

Select the External radio button to save a link to the active workbook when the project is saved.  Thus, when this radio button is selected and the project is saved, changes made to the workbook in Origin are reflected in the original source workbook.  Additionally, changes made to the original source workbook file are reflected in the Origin project.

Select the Update Automatically check box to automatically update existing links between the workbook display in Origin and the original source workbook when the project is saved.  This check box is only available when the External radio button is selected.

If this check box is cleared, changes made to the workbook in Origin are not reflected in the source workbook file.  Additionally, when the project is re-opened, the workbook changes are not included.

3)	The Sheet Name / Origin Index List Box

When plotting workbook data from multiple sheets, Origin uses an @SheetNumber notation to denote the sheets that contain plotted data.  To determine the numeric value of SheetNumber, Origin numbers the sheets in the order in which they are accessed for plotting.  The workbook sheets and their associated SheetNumber values are listed in this list box.  For more information, see  How Origin Denotes Plotted Workbook Data.

More:

Updating the Linked Source Excel Files

Establishing Links if You Created the Workbook in Origin


Updating the Linked Source Excel Files

To ensure that changes made to an external Excel workbook in Origin are reflected in the source workbook file, you can manually re-save the workbook to the source file name, or you can automatically update the source file when you save your Origin project.

•	To manually re-save the workbook to the source Excel file, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Save Workbook As from the shortcut menu.

•	To automatically update the source Excel file when saving your project, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This shortcut menu command opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Select the Update Automatically check box in the Save As group and click OK.  When you select File:Save Project or File:Save Project As, or when you click the Save Project button on the Standard toolbar, Origin will automatically update the source Excel file.

If you have selected either Before Saving or Before Save Project As from the Saving Excel Workbooks drop-down list on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active, or Tools:Options when any other child window is active), then the Save Excel Workbooks dialog box opens after selecting one of the project saving options.  To update the source Excel file, the associated check box must be selected from the External list box.

The Save Excel Workbooks Dialog Box

1)	The Internal List Box

This list box displays the workbooks in which the Internal radio button was selected from the associated Workbook Properties dialog box.  These workbooks are saved as part of the Origin project file, not as an Excel file with a link to the project.

Note:  All workbooks created by clicking the New Excel button on the Standard toolbar have the Internal radio button selected by default.

2)	The External List Box

This list box displays the workbooks in which the External radio button was selected from the associated Workbook Properties dialog box.  These workbooks are saved as a separate Excel file, with a link to the project.

If the check box next to the workbook is selected, then the source Excel file is updated when the project is saved.  To ensure that this check box is selected by default, select the Update Automatically check box in the workbook's associated Workbook Properties dialog box.

3)	The Show this Dialog Drop-down List

This drop-down list controls the display of this dialog box when you save a project that contains a workbook.

•	Select Never to prevent Origin from opening this dialog box under all circumstances.

•	To re-enable the display of this dialog box, select either Before Saving or Before Save Project As from the Saving Excel Workbooks drop-down list on the Excel tab of the Options dialog box (Window:Origin Options when a workbook is active, or Tools:Options when any other child window is active).

•	Select Before Saving to direct Origin to open this dialog box whenever you select File:Save Project (or whenever you click the Save button on the Standard toolbar), assuming the project includes an Excel workbook.

•	Select Before Saving Project As to direct Origin to open this dialog box whenever you select File:Save Project As, assuming the project includes an Excel workbook.


Establishing Links if You Created the Workbook in Origin

When you click the New Workbook button on the Standard toolbar to open a new workbook in Origin, the Internal radio button is selected by default in the workbook's Workbook Properties dialog box.  To change the workbook's status to external, perform one of the following operations:

•	Right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Select the External radio button and click OK.

•	Right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Save Workbook As from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Type a file name in the associated text box and click OK.

Now when you save your project, a link is saved to the source (external) Excel workbook file.


Saving the Project with Internal Excel Workbooks

To ensure that the active workbook is saved internal to the current project when the project is saved, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This shortcut menu command opens the Workbook Properties dialog box.  Select the Internal radio button in the Save As group.

After changing the status of a workbook from external to internal, Origin will not update the original source Excel file when you select File:Save Project or File:Save Project As, or when you click the Save Project button on the Standard toolbar.  Additionally, any new changes made to the original source Excel file are not reflected in the project.


Opening an Origin Project that has Links to External Excel Workbooks

When you open a project that includes links to external Excel file(s), Origin displays the current Excel workbook(s) in the project.  If Origin can't find the Excel file at the location specified in the Linked File Path field of the workbook's Workbook Properties dialog box, then Origin opens the File Name dialog box.  Type the correct path and file name in this dialog box and click OK.  If the Excel file isn't available, click Ignore (or Ignore All).  Origin opens the project and displays a placeholder for each workbook whose source wasn't available.  Additionally, any data plots created from the workbook(s) are not displayed in the graph window(s).


Opening an Origin Project that Contains Internal Excel Workbooks

When you open a project that includes internal Excel file(s), Origin displays the Excel workbook(s) as they were saved with the project.


Troubleshooting Problems Using Excel in Origin

If Excel Doesn't Close When You Exit Origin

If One of the Windows has a Blank Display

If Excel Fails to Launch from Within Origin


If Excel Doesn't Close When You Exit Origin

If you are working with an Origin project that includes Excel workbooks, Origin closes Excel when you close Origin or when you close the project that includes the workbooks.

If Origin fails to properly close Excel, you must close Excel manually.  To accomplish this, press CTRL+ALT+DELETE.  This action opens the Close Program dialog box.  Select Excel from the list box and click the End Task button.


If One of the Windows has a Blank Display

Occasionally, the workbook window, or other windows containing workbook data, may become inactive.  This condition is apparent when the window containing workbook data has a blank display.  To reactivate the window and restore its display, right-click on the workbook window title bar and select Update Origin from the shortcut menu.


If Excel Fails to Launch from Within Origin

In certain instances, Excel may fail to launch from within Origin.  In most cases, this is due to a problem with the Excel registration entry in Windows.  To rectify this problem, Excel must be un-installed and then re-installed.  For a complete discussion of this issue, see the Technical Services page of Microcal Software's website.

CLICK HERE to start your web browser and display links to the Microcal Software Web site.


Opening a Matrix Window

The matrix window is similar to a worksheet in that it is used to store and manipulate data.  However, in the matrix window, there is an underlying X, Y, Z relationship for each cell.  Each column is associated with an X value, and each row is associated with a Y value (though you can reverse these relationships).  Thus, each cell thus has three values:  one associated with the row, one associated with the column, and the actual value that appears in the cell, which is the Z value.

To open a new matrix, select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.  Select Matrix from the Window Type list box.  Select Origin from the Template drop-down list.  Click OK to open a matrix window based on the ORIGIN.OTM template.

To open a previously saved matrix window, select File:Open.  Select 'Matrix (*.OGM)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Select the desired file and click Open.


Shortcut Menus in a Matrix

Right-click in the following matrix locations to open associated shortcut menus:

•	The matrix window title bar.

•	The upper-left corner of the matrix window.

•	A column or row heading, or any cell or range of cells in the matrix.

•	Outside of the matrix grid.

•	Any object in the matrix window.


Setting the Matrix Data Properties

Origin provides controls to set the internal data type, data format, and data display for a matrix.  To customize these properties, select Matrix:Set Properties when the matrix is active.  This menu command opens the Matrix Properties dialog box.

The Matrix Properties Dialog Box

1)	The Cell Width Text Box

Type the desired cell width in this text box.  This text box value is in units of characters.

2)	The Internal Data Type Drop-down List

This drop-down list sets the maximum size for each matrix cell value, in bytes.  The default data type is Double(8), which allocates eight bytes of storage space to each value.  Double is the only data type that supports missing values.  The Float(4) data type allocates four bytes of storage space per value.  The Integer(2) data type allocates two bytes of storage space per value.  The Long(4) data type allocates four bytes of storage space per value.  However, the value is stored as an integer.

3)	The Data Format Drop-down List

Use the Data Format drop-down list to select between the decimal, engineering, and scientific display formats.  In the matrix, the display formats differ as follows.

Data Format Types

Select:  Decimal:1000

To display:  1, 1000, 1E6, 1E9.
The threshold for conversion to scientific notation is controlled on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Select:  Scientific:1E3

To display:  1E0, 1E3, 1E6, 1E9.

Select:  Engineering:1k

To display:  1.0, 1.0k, 1.0M, 1.0G.

Select:  Decimal:1,000

To display:  1, 1,000, 1E6, 1E9.
The threshold for conversion to scientific notation is controlled on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

4)	The Numeric Display Drop-down List

Select Default Decimal Digits to display all digits in a matrix cell as determined by the Number of Decimal Digits combination box value on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box.

Select Set Decimal Places = to control the display of the number of digits after the decimal place (supersedes the Number of Decimal Digits setting on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box).  Type the desired decimal place value (n) in the associated text box.  This value determines the maximum number of digits displayed after the decimal point.  If the field is blank, the default value is used, which is 5 (for Double (8) internal data types).

Select Significant Digits = to control the number of digits displayed.  Type the desired significant digit value in the associated text box.


Setting the Matrix Dimensions and XY Coordinates

To set the matrix dimensions and the XY mapping relationship, select Matrix:Set Dimensions.  This menu command opens the Matrix Dimensions dialog box.

The Matrix Dimensions Dialog Box

1)	The Dimensions Group

Type the desired number of columns and rows in the associated text boxes.

2)	The Coordinates Group

Type the first and last X and Y values in the associated text boxes.

After clicking OK, Origin will linearly map the matrix in X by columns based on the First and Last X (Columns) values and the number of columns (set in the Dimensions group).  Origin will linearly map the matrix in Y by rows based on the First and Last Y (Rows) values and the number of rows (set in the Dimensions group).


Setting the Matrix Values

To fill the matrix with Z values, select Matrix:Set Values.  This menu command opens the Set Matrix Values dialog box.

The Set Matrix Values Dialog Box

1)	Select the Matrix Column and Row Range

The initial and final cells in the selection range are indicated by column number (j) and row number (i) in the associated 'from' and 'to' text boxes.  Enter new values to change the selection range.  Matrix values are only entered in the cells that fall within the selection range.

2)	Select a Function

The Add Function drop-down list and button are provided to help you build the desired expression in the Cell(i,j)= text box.  Instead of typing the proper function syntax directly in the Cell(i,j)= text box, you can select a function (or functions) from the drop-down list.

The Add Function drop-down list includes Origin's built-in mathematical and statistical distribution functions.  To view the details of a function, select the function from the drop-down list.  A function summary including a description of the function arguments displays in the upper view box.  To select a function so that it displays in the Cell(i,j)= text box, click the Add Function button after selecting it from the drop-down list.  How the function displays in the Cell(i,j)= text box depends on whether any text was highlighted in the text box prior to selecting the function.  If text was highlighted in the text box, then that text becomes the (last) argument for the selected function.  If no text was highlighted, then the function displays at the last active cursor location in the text box.

3)	Complete the Expression in the Cell(i,j)= Text Box

The expression you type in this text box is used to fill the selected matrix cells with values.  The expression can include any of Origin's built-in functions.  The Add Function controls provide an easy method for adding mathematical and statistical distribution functions to the expression.  However, you can use any of Origin's built-in functions following the syntax described in the LabTalk Help File.  In addition to functions, you can use any operators recognized by Origin, as well as any defined variables.

Note 1:  Do not include a semicolon after the expression entered in the Cell(i,j)= text box.

Note 2:  You can reference a single cell in a matrix by using the following syntax:

MatrixName[N*(i-1)+j]

where:

N = the number of columns in the matrix.

i = the row number in the matrix.

j = the column number in the matrix.

4)	The OK Button

Click this button to close the dialog box and set the values for the selected cells according to the specified expression in the Cell(i,j)= text box.

5)	The Undo/Redo Button

Click this button to undo/redo the last change made to the expression in the Cell(i,j)= text box.


Viewing the Matrix Values

Use the scroll bars on the right and bottom edges of the matrix window to view the desired cells.  Alternatively, select View:Go to Row to view a specific matrix row.  This menu command opens the Go to Row dialog box.  Type the desired row number in the associated text box.


Customizing the Display Properties of a Matrix

To customize the text color, style, and heading and grid options of a matrix, double-click in the upper-left corner of the matrix window.  This action opens the Matrix Display Control dialog box.  This dialog box is identical to the Worksheet Display Control dialog box.


Importing Data into a Matrix

To import ASCII data into a matrix, select File:Import ASCII.  This menu command opens the Import ASCII dialog box.  Select the desired data file and click Open to import the file into the matrix.

The values imported into the matrix are assumed to be Z values.  Set the matrix XY mapping relationship in the Matrix Dimensions dialog box after reading in the Z data (Matrix:Set Dimensions).


Matrix Operations

Transposing

Inverting

Shrinking

Expanding

Smoothing

Integrating


Transposing

To transpose the active matrix, select Matrix:Transpose.  This menu command exchanges the matrix columns with rows, and rows with columns.


Inverting

To invert the active matrix, select Matrix:Invert.  This menu command transposes the matrix, and then divides the matrix by its determinant.


Shrinking

Matrix shrinking is a simple averaging of grid points.  To shrink the active matrix, select Matrix:Shrink.  This menu command opens the Shrink into 1x1 for Every dialog box.  Type the column and row shrinkage factors.  For example, if the original matrix is 100 columns by 20 rows, and you type 2 in the Columns and Rows text box, the matrix dimensions after shrinking will be 50 columns by 10 rows.


Expanding

Matrix expansion uses a bilinear interpolation method to add the inserted points.  To expand the active matrix, select Matrix:Expand.  This menu command opens the Expand for Every Cell dialog box.  Type the column and row expansion factors.  For example, if the original matrix is 100 columns by 20 rows, and you type 2 in the Columns and Rows text box, the matrix dimensions after expanding will be 200 columns by 40 rows.


Smoothing

To smooth the active matrix, select Matrix:Smooth.  After clicking OK at the prompt, Origin performs the following:

•	If either the number of columns or the number of rows in the matrix is less than 32, Origin expands the matrix by a factor of two, and then shrinks the matrix by a factor of two.  Origin then repeats this process once more.

•	If either the number of columns or the number of rows in the matrix is greater than 32, Origin shrinks the matrix by a factor of two, and then expands the matrix by a factor of two.


The Matrix - Matrix Operations - Integrating
Integrating

To compute the volume beneath the surface defined by the matrix, select Matrix:Integrate.  Origin performs a double integral over X and Y to compute the volume and reports the value in the Script window.


Converting a Worksheet into a Matrix

Direct Conversion

Expanding Columns During Conversion

2D Binning

Converting Regular XYZ Data

Converting Random XYZ Data


The Matrix - Converting a Worksheet into a Matrix - Direct Conversion
Direct Conversion

To directly convert the active worksheet to a matrix, select Edit:Convert to Matrix:Direct.  This menu command creates a new matrix that contains the same number of rows and columns as the associated worksheet.  Origin fills the matrix with the worksheet values, maintaining the same row and column positions in the matrix.

Note:  To convert the active Excel workbook to a matrix using direct conversion, select the desired Excel workbook data and then select Window:Create Matrix.


Expanding Columns During Conversion

There may be cases where a screen editor which is used to create an ASCII file has an upper limit for the number of characters allowed on a single line.  This upper limit may even be less than the number of columns required in the matrix.  To compensate for this, one row of matrix data can be stored in multiple rows of an ASCII file.  Displaying this type of ASCII file in a matrix requires two steps.  The first step is creating a new worksheet and importing the ASCII file into it.  The second step is expanding the worksheet data into a matrix.  To do this, select Edit:Convert To Matrix:Expand Columns.  This menu command opens a dialog box in which you specify the number of ASCII file rows corresponding to one matrix row.  After clicking OK, Origin copies your worksheet data from the first set of specified rows into the first row of a matrix.  Origin repeats this procedure to convert all rows in the worksheet.

For example, if a matrix of 24 columns is stored in an ASCII file that only allows 8 columns of data to be stored in it, then each row of matrix data (24 different values) would take up 3 rows in the ASCII file.  In this case, you would type 3 in the Expand for Every Row dialog box.  After clicking OK, a new matrix is created with 3 rows of ASCII file data in each row of the matrix.


2D Binning

Often in physical measurements, you may have raw values of two parameters, X and Y, from a sequence of measurements.  An example of such a raw list of values could be paired values of energy and position of particles measured from many events, in a particle physics experiment.  To explore the relationship between the two variables in a 3D graph, you must first construct a matrix by binning the X-Y paired data in two dimensions.  For this purpose, Origin provides a 2D binning tool.

To perform 2D binning, select the desired Y column in your worksheet and select Edit:Convert to Matrix:2D Binning.  Origin will use your selected Y column as Y values, and this column's associated X column as X values.  The 2D Binning menu command opens the Create Bin Matrix dialog box.

Specify the bin limits and bin size for the X and Y variables.  The default values for bin limits are the minimum and maximum values of the X and Y columns.  After clicking OK, a matrix is created by binning the X-Y paired data in two dimensions.

This tool can be versatile in data exploration, where you have values of more than two parameters from a sequence of measurements.  You can explore the dependencies among any two of the parameters at a time, by selecting those two as your X and Y columns and creating a 2D matrix.


Converting Regular XYZ Data

3D data which consists of regular XYZ columns in a worksheet can be converted into a matrix directly.  Regular data is stored in the worksheet with alternating constant X and Y values.  There are a certain number of ordered X values for each Y value, and the same number of ordered Y values for each X value.  (The Z column does not have to be next to the Y column.  Origin looks for the first Y column to the left of the Z column to use in the conversion.)  To convert regular XYZ worksheet data to a matrix, select the Z column and then select Edit:Convert to Matrix:Regular XYZ.  The data is analyzed and put into a new matrix.

When converting regular worksheet data to a matrix, small variations in the data are allowed.  The tolerance for these variations is determined by the LabTalk object property mat.res (matrix resolution).  The default value for mat.res is 10, which allows for up to a 10% variation in the step size in X or Y.  If you have very small variations of data, the default value may be too large (the conversion would still go through).  Likewise, if you have very large fluctuations in your data, then the default value could be too small (the conversion will fail).  Set the value for mat.res in the Script window if your data requires you to.  You can calculate the mat.res value appropriate for your data as:

maximum variation from mean step size * 100 / mean step size

To set the value for mat.res, select Window:Script Window and type the following in the Script window:

mat.res = value    (ENTER)


Converting Random XYZ Data

Random XYZ columns in a worksheet must be converted into a regular grid (a matrix) before they can be used for generating 3D and contour graphs.  The procedure for doing this is called gridding.  Origin can use two gridding methods, correlation (or Kriging) and weighted average.  The correlation method is more accurate but takes longer.  By default, Origin uses the correlation method.

The affect of the gridding parameters depend on the method used, as follows:

Number of Columns/Rows:  Specifies the grid dimensions.

Search Radius:  Minimum number of grid points from the current position used for computing the value of the current cell.  If the given position has less than three points in any of the four adjacent quadrants, the search radius is increased until there are enough points or a boundary is reached.

Smoothness:  Used by correlation (Kriging) method only.  Relates values of points in the search radius to the computed value.  Must be between 0.5 and 1.2. Smaller values generate smoother surfaces.

Gridding Method:  Type of method, either correlation or weighted average.

The correlation method computes a new value for each cell in the regular matrix from the values of the points in the adjoining cells in the matrix that are included within the search radius.  The computation is based on the Kriging method as can be found in Davis, John C., 1986.  Statistics and Data Analysis in Geology.  John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Second edition, pp. 383.

The weighted average method is a simple weighted average of the points with the weight equal to 1/r, where r is the distance of each point from the cell.  If there is no value within the search radius, the radius is increased until at least one point is encountered.  Increasing the search radius means that each point is more inter-related to neighboring points, producing a smoother surface that may lose fine details.


Converting a Matrix into a Worksheet

Direct Conversion

Creating a Worksheet with XYZ Columns


The Matrix - Converting a Matrix into a Worksheet - Direct Conversion
Direct Conversion

To directly convert the active matrix to a worksheet, select Edit:Convert to Worksheet:Direct.  This menu command creates a new worksheet and names the window Datan, where n is the lowest number available (not currently used in a worksheet name) in the project.  The worksheet is created with the same number of rows and columns as the associated matrix.  The first worksheet column is a designated X column by default.  Remaining columns are designated Y.  Origin fills the worksheet with the matrix values, maintaining the same row and column positions in the worksheet.


Creating a Worksheet with XYZ Columns

To convert the matrix to a worksheet with XYZ values, select Edit:Convert to Worksheet:XYZ Columns.  This menu command opens the Convert Matrix to Worksheet dialog box.  To display worksheet values sorted by the X mapping values, select X Constant 1st from the Conversion Type drop-down list.  To display worksheet values sorted by the Y mapping values, select Y Constant 1st from the Conversion Type drop-down list.  After clicking OK, this menu command creates a worksheet with X, Y, and Z columns.  The cell values of the matrix are converted to Z data in the worksheet.  The corresponding X and Y column values in the worksheet are set by the X and Y coordinate mapping information in the matrix.


Saving a Matrix Window

Select File:Save Window As to save a matrix window with all of its data.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  'Matrix (*.OGM)' is selected (by default) from the Save as Type drop-down list.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box and select the desired destination folder.  You do not need to include the file extension in the File Name text box.


Saving a Matrix as a Template

To save a matrix with all formatting and relationships, but without any data, select File:Save Template As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  'Matrix Template (*.OTM)' is selected (by default) from the Save as Type drop-down list.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box and select the desired destination folder.  You do not need to include the file extension in the File Name text box.


Importing

Origin provides tools for importing data into worksheets, including importing a data file into a worksheet, importing multiple ASCII data files into a single worksheet, or importing multiple ASCII data files into multiple worksheets.  If your data is copied to the Clipboard, you can also paste, paste link, or paste transpose your data into an Origin worksheet.  Additionally, Origin provides tools for importing single or multiple ASCII data files into a graph window.

More:

Importing Data into a Graph Window

Importing Data into a Worksheet Window

Pasting Data into Origin


Importing Data into a Graph Window

Importing a Single ASCII File

Importing Multiple ASCII Files


Importing a Single ASCII File

To import a single ASCII file into a graph window, select File:Import ASCII:Single File when the desired graph layer is active.  This menu command opens the Import ASCII dialog box.  Select the desired file and perform one of the following:

•	To import the file using the default import options, click Open.

•	To import the file using custom import options, click Options.  This action opens the ASCII Import Options for Graph dialog box.  For more information on this dialog box, see  Customizing the Default ASCII Import Settings.

When importing a single file into a graph window using this dialog box, Origin assumes the first column of data to be X values, and all subsequent columns to contain Y values.  To specify different XY plotting associations, import the data file by selecting File:Import ASCII:Multiple Files.  For more information, see  Importing Multiple ASCII Files.

A Note on Automatically Displaying Header Information in a Graph

Header information in a data file can be automatically displayed in the graph window by performing the following:

1)	Before importing the data file, create a text label in the desired graph layer.  To create a text label, click on the Tools toolbar and then click in the graph window at the location where you want to display the header information.  This action opens the Text Control dialog box.

2)	In the text box, type header.  This text displays in the lower view box.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

4)	Hold the ALT key down while double-clicking on header text label.  This action opens the Label Control dialog box.  Type header in the Object Name text box.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

6)	Import the ASCII file which includes header information.  The text automatically displays in the newly created text label.


Importing Multiple ASCII Files

To import multiple ASCII files into a graph window, select File:Import ASCII:Multiple Files when the desired graph layer is active.  This menu command opens the Import Multiple ASCII dialog box.

Note:  The Import Multiple ASCII dialog box allows you to import data into a graph or worksheet.  If you open the dialog box when a graph window is active, you can import the data into a worksheet by selecting the Import Each Selected File into a New Worksheet check box.  For more information, see  Importing Multiple ASCII Data Files into a Single or Multiple Worksheets.

The Import Multiple ASCII Dialog Box (Graph Window Active)

1)	Selecting a File for Import

To add a file to the lower list box, double-click on the file in the "File Name" list box, or click on the file in the "File Name" list box and then click Add File(s).

2)	Removing a Selected File

To remove a file from the lower list box, select the file from this list box and then click Remove File(s).

3)	Assigning Plotting Designations

To facilitate plotting your data, Origin includes a Plot Designation Column section in the list of selected files.  You can select a plotting designation arrangement or you can type an arrangement by double-clicking on the default value.  This action opens a combination box from which you can select or type a new arrangement.  Use the following letters to specify a column designation in the arrangement:

X	X values

Y	Y values

Z	Z values

D	disregarded values - these values are not imported

E	Y error values

H	X error values

L	label values

When you type or select a plotting designation arrangement, the arrangement determines the number of columns that are imported, as well as their plotting designations.  If a number is included as a terminating character, it indicates the "repeat unit" in the arrangement.

Example 1:  If you select XY1, Origin imports all the columns.  Origin assumes the first column contains X values and all remaining columns contain Y values.  In this case, the "1" indicates that the last character "Y" is repeated for all remaining columns.

Example 2:  If you select XY2, again Origin imports all the columns.  However, in this case Origin assumes the first column contains X1 values, the second column contains Y1 values, the third column contains X2 values, the fourth column contains Y2 values, and so on.  In this case, the "2" indicates that the last two characters "X" and "Y" are repeated for all remaining columns.

Example 3:  If you select XYE2, Origin imports the file using the following arrangement:  XY(YError)Y(YError)Y(YError)... as "Y" and "E" are repeated.

In addition to assigning plotting designations for each data file separately, you can apply your Plot Designation Column selection for one data file to all the data files in the list box, or to selected data files in the list box.  To apply the selection to all the data files, right-click on the Plot Designation Column selection that you want to apply and select Apply Plot Designation Selection to All from the shortcut menu.

To apply the selection to selected data files, select the data files in the list box and then right-click on the Plot Designation Column selection that you want to apply and select Apply Plot Designation Selection to Selection.

Note that you can also display the data file path from this shortcut menu.

4)	Importing the Selected Files

Click OK to plot all files in the lower list box into the active layer of the graph window, based on the Plot Designation Column settings.


Importing Data into a Worksheet Window

When the worksheet is active, ASCII, Lotus, Excel, dBASE, DIF, LabTech, pCLAMP, and Sound files, Kaleidagraph data, and vectors and matrices from Mathematica can be imported.  To import data into the worksheet, select File:Import:File Type.

When importing ASCII data files, Origin provides tools for importing a single file into a worksheet, or multiple files into a single or multiple worksheets.  Additionally, Origin provides controls to customize the ASCII import settings for both single and multiple file selection.

More:

Importing a Single ASCII Data File into the Worksheet

Customizing the Default ASCII Import Settings

Importing a Range of an ASCII File

Importing Multiple ASCII Data Files into a Single or Multiple Worksheets

Importing Other Supported File Formats into the Worksheet


Importing a Single ASCII Data File into the Worksheet

To import a single ASCII file into the active worksheet, select File:Import:Single ASCII.  This menu command opens the Import ASCII dialog box.

Select the desired ASCII file from the list box and click Open.  Origin uses the default import settings specified in the ASCII Import Options for Worksheet dialog box to import the data file.  In most cases, the default import settings are acceptable for importing your data file.  Origin examines the data file, looks for columns of numbers and ignores anything else.  In some cases, however, you will need to specify the data structure and import settings explicitly.


Customizing the Default ASCII Import Settings

To view the default import settings, click Options in the Import ASCII dialog box or select File:Import:ASCII Options when the Import ASCII dialog box is not open.  The default settings in the ASCII Import Options for Worksheet dialog box can be modified, and the modified settings accessed whenever importing single or multiple ASCII files.

After the import settings are customized in the Import ASCII Options for Worksheet dialog box, click Update Options to continue to use these settings for the current worksheet.  To ensure that these settings remain active for future worksheets, you must save the worksheet as a template.  To save the worksheet as a template, select File:Save Template As.

The ASCII Import Options for Worksheet Dialog Box

1)	The File Structure Group

There are two types of ASCII files:  those in which data are delimited by a character (typically a comma, tab, or white space), and fixed column files that specify the width of columnar fields.  Origin can usually guess the correct file structure when importing a file, but will sometimes have difficulty with very complex files.  You can often solve the problem by specifying the file structure, if known.

For a delimited file, select a delimiting character from the Delimited, Delimiter drop-down list, or select Other from the drop-down list and enter the delimiting character in the associated text box.  If you select Unknown, Origin will search your file, looking for a consistent delimiter.  If the file uses a consistent delimiter, Origin will determine the file structure.

For a fixed column file, specify the width of each columnar field in the associated text box.  Separate each value with a comma.  Origin uses the last number entered to set the width for all remaining columns.  If you enter a single width value, Origin sets all columns to that width.

When the Automatic Determination of Column Types check box is selected, Origin automatically determines whether each column contains text or numeric data, and sets each worksheet column type accordingly.  When the check box is cleared, Origin retains the column type settings of the worksheet into which you are importing data.

Specify the number of lines used for structure testing in the associated text box.  Enter a number which is greater than the header size, but smaller than the size of the file.

2)	The File Header Group

The number of lines that should be ignored before Origin starts importing data is specified in the Skip Main Header, Number of Lines text box.  Select the Auto Determine to Skip more Header Lines radio button to cause Origin to skip lines until it encounters a consistent and recognizable file structure.  You can also select a specific number of sub-header lines to skip by selecting the Specify Known Subheader Lines (0,1...) radio button and editing the associated text box.

When importing a file, Origin looks at the contents of the first few cells to determine if a column contains numeric or non-numeric information.  The When Non-Numeric is Found in Numeric Fields drop-down list selection controls how Origin proceeds if non-numeric information is encountered in a numeric column after the header.  In all cases, Origin accepts missing numeric data which is indicated by the "--" symbol in the imported fileSelect an option from the associated drop-down list.

3)	The # of Columns Group

When the Unknown radio button is selected, Origin imports all columns in the file.  You may also specify x number of columns for Origin to import.  If the file you want to import contains more than x columns, only the first x columns import.  If the file contains less than x columns, the entire file imports.  Origin does not create additional worksheet columns.

4)	The Import Into Worksheet as Drop-down List

This option determines how the imported data is added to the active worksheet.  The New Data option enables overwriting of the existing worksheet data.  The New Columns option adds new columns to the right of the current columns in the worksheet, as necessary, to accommodate the data.  The New Rows option adds new rows to the bottom of the worksheet, as necessary, to accommodate the data.

Note:  If you are importing your data into new columns and a column name in your file duplicates a column name already used in the worksheet, you can append the file's column name into the worksheet column's label field.  To do this, open the Data Import Options for Worksheet dialog box (File:Import:Other Options), and select the Create Column Labels from Header check box.  Now when you plot your data, Origin will automatically include the column label information in the graph legend.

5)	The Import Now Button

Click Import Now to import the ASCII file after you are satisfied with the dialog box settings.  Origin updates the worksheet and opens the Import ASCII dialog box, from which you select an ASCII file.  The file is imported using the current dialog box settings.

6)	The Update Options button

Click Update Options to save the current settings into the active worksheet and close the dialog box.

7)	The Other Options Button

Click Other Options to open the Data Import Options for Worksheet dialog box.  This dialog box provides additional control for importing ASCII files.

Additional ASCII import options are available in the Data Import Options for Worksheet dialog box.  To open this dialog box, click Other Options in the ASCII Import Options for Worksheet dialog box, or select File:Import ASCII:Other Options.

The Data Import Options for Worksheet Dialog Box

1)	The Rename Columns if 1st Line Contains Labels Check Box

If selected, this check box directs Origin to take the first line of the imported file that contains text, and use the text to name the worksheet columns.

2)	The Rename Worksheet to Data File Name Check Box

If selected, this check box directs Origin to change the name of the active worksheet to the name of the imported file.

3)	The Apply New Range to Associated Data Plots Check Box

If this check box is selected, the display range is set to encompass all of the imported data.  If this check box is cleared, the current worksheet display range settings remain in effect.  Clearing this check box lets you view a specific range of data from a series of imported data files.  For example, if you have plotted a column of worksheet data and set the display range from row 10 to row 35, only imported data points in these rows display.  This option has an effect only if you have already plotted data from the worksheet.

4)	The Create Column Labels from Header Check Box

If selected, this check box directs Origin to append the import file column names to the associated worksheet column labels.  Origin automatically displays the column labels after importing the file.

A Note on Importing Your Dataset and Displaying File Labels in the Column Name and Column Label Fields

If your data file includes two lines of column information, such as the following data file, you can display the file's column names (Thrust and Pitch) in the worksheet column name field, and both the file's column names and labels (Thrust and Pitch, Lbs and Deg) in the worksheet column label field.  Doing this allows you to maximize the dataset information displayed by default in the graph legend.

Thrust      Pitch

Lbs           Deg

1               4

2               56

3               42

etc…

To display the file's names and labels in the worksheet, select the Rename Columns if 1st Line Contains Labels check box and the Create Column Labels from Header check box in the Data Import Options for Worksheet dialog box.  After importing the data file, Origin automatically displays both header lines in the worksheet column label fields.

Thrust(X)       Pitch(Y)

Thrust            Pitch

Lbs                Deg

1                    4

2                    56

3                    42

etc…

When you highlight and plot the data, the worksheet's column labels display in the graph legend by default.


Importing a Range of an ASCII File

To import a selected range of an ASCII file, select the Partial Import check box in the Import ASCII dialog box (File:Import:Single ASCII).  After selecting your file and clicking Open, Origin opens the Import Verification dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to specify a range for partial import.

The Import Verification Dialog Box

The path and file name for the data file is displayed at the top of this dialog box.  In addition, the number of columns and rows in the file are displayed in the associated list boxes.

1)	The Partial Import Group

Select the Partial Import check box to import a range of the ASCII file.

Specify the file import range by typing the desired "From" and "To" limits in the Column and Row text boxes.

2)	The Import Data Group

Select the Replace Existing Data from Row 1 Column 1 radio button to replace the existing data in the destination worksheet.

Select the As New Columns from 1st Empty Column radio button to add the import data to the first empty column to the right in the worksheet.  This column is created if necessary.

Select the Append to End of Existing Data from Column 1 radio button to append the import data to the first available row in the worksheet, starting with column 1.


Importing Multiple ASCII Data Files into a Single or Multiple Worksheets

Origin allows you to import multiple ASCII data files into the same worksheet (as new columns), or into separate worksheets.

•	When importing into the same worksheet (as new columns), Origin uses the Import ASCII Options for Worksheet dialog box settings for the active worksheet to determine the data file structure.

•	When importing into separate worksheets, you can select the worksheet template for each data file.  Thus, for each data file, Origin uses the Import ASCII Options for Worksheet dialog box settings for the selected worksheet template to determine the data file structure.

For information on the Import ASCII Options for Worksheet dialog box, see  Customizing the Default ASCII Import Settings.

To import multiple ASCII data files into a worksheet or worksheets, select File:Import:Multiple ASCII when a worksheet is active, or click the Import Multiple ASCII button on the Standard toolbar when any child window is active.  If you click this button when a graph window is active, the Import Multiple ASCII dialog box provides controls to import into a graph window.  However, to re-direct import to a worksheet (or worksheets), select the Import Each Selected File Into a New Worksheet check box.

The Import Multiple ASCII Dialog Box (Worksheet Window Active)

Select the data files for import as discussed in  Importing Multiple ASCII Files.

To import the files into separate columns of the active worksheet, select the Append Each File as New Columns in the Current Worksheet check box.  To import the files into separate worksheets, clear this check box.  When the check box is cleared (importing into separate worksheets), a Template column displays in the list box.  Double-click on a file's Template listing to select a new template from the associated drop-down list.

In addition to assigning a template for each data file separately, you can apply your Template selection for one data file to all the data files in the list box, or to selected data files in the list box.  To apply the selection to all the data files, right-click on the Template selection that you want to apply and select Apply Template Template to All from the shortcut menu.

To apply the selection to selected data files, select the data files in the list box and then right-click on the Template selection that you want to apply and select Apply Template Template to Selection.

Note that you can also set the selection to the default template from this shortcut menu.  The default template is controlled by the Default Multi-ASCII Import Template selection on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Importing Other Supported File Formats into the Worksheet

In addition to importing ASCII files into the worksheet, Origin supports the following file formats.  Import these files by selecting File:Import:File Type.

Import File Formats Supported in the Worksheet

File Type:  Lotus WKS

Extension:  WKS

File Type:  Lotus WK1

Extentsion:  WK1

File Type:  Lotus WK3

Extension:  WK3

File Type:  Excel

Extension:  XLS

File Type:  dBASE

Extension:  DBF

File Type:  DIF

Extension:  DIF

File Type:  LabTech (Binary real and binary integer formats.  Other formats are text-based and are imported as ASCII files.)

Extension:  PRN

File Type:  Sound

Extension:  WAV

File Type:  Kaleidagraph binary data

Extension:  QDA

File Type:  Mathematica (vectors and matrices)

Extension:  Varies

File Type:  pCLAMP (Axon Scope Binary Files and Axon (binary) Data Files)

Extension:  ABF, DAT

A Note about Importing Excel Files

Only Excel Version 4 (or earlier versions) can be imported into Origin.  If you are using a later Excel version, save the file you want to import as an Excel 4.0 file.  Alternatively, if Excel is installed on your computer either as a local or network copy, you can open Excel from within Origin.  For more information on opening Excel in Origin, see Opening a Workbook in your Project.

A Note about Importing pCLAMP Files

To import Axon Scope Binary Files (*.ABF) and Axon (binary) Data Files (*.DAT), select File:Import:pCLAMP.  This menu command opens the pCLAMP Import dialog box.  Select one or more files for import by following the instructions provided in  Importing Multiple ASCII Data Files into a Single or Multiple Worksheets.  After clicking OK, Origin opens the pCLAMP Options dialog box.

If one file was selected from the pCLAMP Import dialog box, then that file's header is read into the pCLAMP Options dialog box.  Origin displays the number of channels, number of episodes, episode size, and channel in the File/Channel Information group.  To import the file in Episode or Channel mode, select the desired radio button from the Import group.  When importing in Episode mode, if the file contains more than one channel you can select the desired channel from the Channel spin box in the File/Channel Information group.  If your file has tag information, you can display that tag information in the Results Log by selecting the Display Tag Info in Results Log check box.  The Results Log will open automatically (if not already open) after importing the file.

If more than one file was selected from the pCLAMP Import dialog box, then all controls are unavailable except the Channels and Episodes radio buttons.  Select the desired radio button and click Import to import the data.

Once your pCLAMP data is imported into Origin, you have full access to Origin's plotting and analysis tools.  Additionally, a special graph template, PCLAMP.OTP, is provided to plot and explore your pCLAMP data.  To open this graph template, select the worksheet data that you want to plot and then select Plot:Template.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select PCLAMP.OTP from your Origin folder and click Open.

The pCLAMP graph window includes two tools to aid in examining regions of your data:  the Scaler object and the X Value Indicator object.

The Scaler Object

The Scaler object is a movable XY scale which displays the current X and Y axis scales.  This object provides an extra display of the current axis scales anywhere in the graph window.  To move the Scaler object, drag the object to the desired location.  To modify the range of the Scaler object, click Resize Scaler on the pCLAMP graph window.  Select the desired Scaler object range in the Set Scaler Range dialog box.  Click OK to close the dialog box and display the modified object.

To customize the display of the Scaler object, double-click on the object to open the Scale Object dialog box.  The Scale Object dialog box provides options to customize the titles, scale, range, color, line width, ticks, gaps, and font of the Scaler object.

The Scale Object Dialog Box

Note:  After making changes to the Scale Object dialog box and clicking OK, you may need to select Window:Refresh to view the changes to the Scaler Object.

1)	The Axis Titles Group

Type the desired Scaler object X and Y axis title in the X Title and Y Title text boxes.  When first plotting your data into the pCLAMP graph window, these Scaler object axis titles display the X and Y axis scale range.

Note:  If you edit the Scaler object range by clicking Resize Scaler, the new X and Y range values replace the Scaler object's axis titles set in the Scale Object dialog box.

Control the display position of the Scaler object's X and Y axis titles by selecting the desired radio button in this group.

2)	The X (and Y) Scale Group

Control the position of the Scaler object's X (or Y) axis by selecting the desired radio button in this group.  To disable the X (or Y) axis display, select Off.

3)	The X (and Y) Range Text Box

Control the Scaler object's X (or Y) range by typing the desired value in this text box.

Note:  You can also change the range by clicking Resize Scaler.

4)	The Color Drop-Down List

Select the desired Scaler object color from this drop-down list.

5)	The Line Width Drop-Down List

Select the desired line width for the display of the Scaler object's axis from this drop-down list.

6)	The X (and Y) Ticks Group

Control the display of major and minor X (or Y) axis ticks in this group.  Set the total number of major ticks in the Number text box.

7)	The Gaps Group

Set the distance between the edge of the page and the Scaler object's X axis in the X to Edge text box.  Set the distance between the Scaler object's X axis title and the X axis in the X to Axis text box.

Set the distance between the edge of the page and the Scaler object's Y axis in the Y to Edge text box.  Set the distance between the Scaler object's Y axis title and the Y axis in the Y to Axis text box.

8)	The Font Group

Select the Dialog radio button to display the Scaler object's axis title using a font which can be adjusted to incremental sizes.  This selection is preferred when displaying a small font size.  Select the Scalable radio button to display the Scaler object's axis title using a font which can be adjusted to any size.  This selection is preferred when displaying a larger font size.

Select the desired font size from the Points text box.  To bold the axis titles, select the Bold check box.

The X Value Indicator Object

The X Value Indicator consists of a vertical line on the graph and an X Value display object.  The display object reflects the X value of the vertical line.  To display the X value within the graph window, drag the line to the desired area.

To edit the display of the vertical line, double-click on the line to open the Arrow Control dialog box.  Select the desired dialog box settings and click OK to close the dialog box and update the vertical line.


Pasting Data into Origin

In addition to adding data to a worksheet by importing a data file, data can be pasted, transposed and pasted, or pasted and linked into the worksheet using the Clipboard.

To paste the current contents of the Clipboard into the selected cell, or range of cells in a worksheet, select Edit:Paste while the worksheet is active.  To paste a single value into the worksheet, click on the desired destination cell and select Edit:Paste.  To paste a range of values, select the cell that is to be the upper-left corner of the range, then select Edit:Paste.

To transpose the data when pasting into the destination cells, select the cell that is to be the upper-left corner of the range, then select Edit:Paste Transpose.

To link the data when pasting into the destination cells, select the cell that is to be the upper-left corner of the range, then select Edit:Paste Link.  This command establishes a DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link with the source data file.  When the source data changes, the data in the Origin worksheet reflects those changes.  When you close an Origin project in which you have established a DDE link, Origin reminds you that this project is linked to another document.  The next time you open the project, Origin opens the Start DDE Link dialog box, allowing you to re-establish the link with the source file.

The Start DDE Link Dialog Box

If you click Yes in the Start DDE Link dialog box when the source application is closed, Origin will re-open the source application and file only if the source application is in the DOS path.  If the source application is not in the DOS path, Origin fails to open the source application when you click Yes and instead opens the Origin file without the external link.  Thus, to ensure that the link to the source file is correctly re-established, open the source application and file and then return to Origin and click Yes in the Start DDE Link dialog box.


Exporting

Exporting Worksheet Data

Creating an ASCII File for Worksheet Data

Copying Worksheet Data


Exporting Worksheet Data

Worksheet data can be exported to another application by creating an export file or by copying the data to the Clipboard.

A Note on Significant Figures in the Worksheet

When you enter a numeric value in a worksheet cell, Origin may round off the displayed value depending on the numeric display settings in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box and the settings on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box.  Origin uses the entered value in calculations.  However, only the rounded off value is exported to a file or copied to the Clipboard.


Creating an ASCII File for Worksheet Data

To save worksheet data to an ASCII file, select File:Export ASCII when the worksheet is active.  This menu command opens the Export ASCII dialog box.  The contents of the active worksheet is saved into a tab-delimited (by default) ASCII file.

After you click Save in the Export ASCII dialog box, the ASCII Export Into dialog box opens.

The ASCII Export Into Dialog Box

1)	The Include Column Names Check Box

When this check box is selected, the column names are copied to the first line of the ASCII file, followed by <CR>, and then the data.  The separator selected from the Separator drop-down list is used to separate the column names and data.

2)	The Include Column Labels Check Box

When this check box is selected (and the Include Column Names check box is selected), the column labels are copied to the second line of the ASCII file, followed by <CR>, and then the data.  If the Include Column Names check box is not selected, then the column labels are copied to the first line of the ASCII data file.

The separator selected from the Separator drop-down list is used to separate the column labels and data.

3)	The Export Selection Check Box

If you want to export a section of the worksheet data, highlight the desired section of data before selecting File:Export ASCII.  If a section of worksheet data is selected, the Export Selection check box will be selected by default.  Do not clear the check box unless you want to export the entire contents of the worksheet.

If you select Edit:Set As Begin and Edit:Set As End to set the worksheet range, the Export Selection check box will not be selected.  Only the displayed worksheet range exports.

4)	The Separator Drop-down List

Select the desired separator (or delimiter) from the Separator drop-down list for the data and column names/labels (if the Include Column Names/Labels check boxes are selected).

More:

Creating an ASCII file for a Range of Data


Creating an ASCII file for a Range of Data

If you want to save a range of worksheet data to an ASCII file, perform one of the following procedures before selecting File:Export ASCII.

•	Highlight the desired range of worksheet data.

•	Delete the rows and columns of data that you do not want to export using the Edit:Delete menu command.  This results in a permanent alteration of your worksheet.

•	Change the display range of the worksheet before exporting the data.  Use the Edit:Set as Begin and Edit:Set as End menu commands to establish the display range for a column or range of columns.  After exporting the desired data range, return the worksheet to the full display range by selecting Edit:Reset to Full Range.


Copying Worksheet Data

To copy worksheet data to another application using the Clipboard, highlight the desired data range and select Edit:Copy.  The worksheet data can then be pasted into another Windows application.


Exchanging Data Between Worksheets

Data can be exchanged between Origin worksheets, or within a single Origin worksheet, via the Clipboard, or by entering commands in the Script window.  When exchanging data via the Clipboard, Origin provides a paste transpose option.

Note:  When you enter a numeric value in a worksheet cell, Origin rounds off the displayed value if the number of digits after the decimal place exceeds the value specified in the Numeric Display text box, when Set Decimal Places is selected from the Numeric Display drop-down list, both of which are located in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Origin uses the entered value in calculations.  However, only the rounded off value is exported to a file or copied to the clipboard.

More:

Using the Clipboard to Exchange Data

Using the Script Window to Exchange Data


Using the Clipboard to Exchange Data

To copy data between or within a worksheet, select the desired data and then select Edit:Copy.  If you copied a single value to the Clipboard, click on the desired destination cell and select Edit:Paste.  If you copied a range of values to the Clipboard, select the cell that is to be the upper-left corner of the range, then select Edit:Paste.

To transpose the data when pasting into the destination cells, select the cell that is to be the upper-left corner of the range, then select Edit:Paste Transpose.  If necessary, Origin adds columns to the worksheet to hold the transposed data.


Using the Script Window to Exchange Data

LabTalk script can be entered in the Script window for immediate execution.  The LabTalk copy command can be used to copy a dataset from one worksheet to another.

Using LabTalk to Copy Datasets

1)	Click New Project on the Standard toolbar to open a new project.

2)	Open a second worksheet by clicking New Worksheet on the Standard toolbar.

3)	Type numeric values in the first four rows of columns A and B in the Data1 worksheet.

4)	Click Script Window on the Standard toolbar to open the Script window.

5)	In the Script window, type the following command and then press ENTER (script is not case-sensitive):

COPY DATA1_A DATA2_A

Execution of this command copies column A of the Data1 worksheet to column A of the Data2 worksheet.  If the script did not execute, check that the Script Execution menu command (Edit:Script Execution) is selected from the Script window menu bar.  Click on the menu command if it is not checked, and then click at the end of the command line.  Press ENTER to execute the script.


Shortcut Menus in the Graph Window

Graph window shortcut menus are available by right-clicking in the following locations:

•	The graph window title bar.

•	A layer icon.

•	The page.

•	A layer.

•	Any labels in the graph window including the axis labels, the legend, and the date/time stamp.

•	Any other labeling objects in the graph window.

•	A data plot.

•	An axis or tick label.


Plotting Terminology

To effectively use this Help file to develop custom graphs, an understanding of Origin terminology is essential.

More:

The Graph Window

The Layout Page Window

Origin Graph Templates


Plotting:  The Basics - Plotting Terminology - The Graph Window
The Graph Window

The Page

The Layer

The Frame

The Graph

The Data Plot

The Worksheet Dataset

The Excel Workbook Dataset

The Matrix


Plotting:  The Basics - The Graph Window - The Page
The Page

Each graph window contains a single editable page.  The page serves as a backdrop for the various graphic elements (for example, layers, axes, text, and data plots) used to create custom graphs.  Every page in a graph window must, by definition, contain at least one layer.  If all layers are deleted from the page, the graph window is deleted.

Warning:  When printing a graph, only the graphics within the page actually print.  Be careful not to position graphic elements (which you want to print) outside the page.


The Layer

A typical graph generally includes at least three elements:  a set of X, Y, Z (for 3D) coordinate axes, one or more data plots, and associated text and graphic labels.  Origin combines these three elements into a movable, sizeable unit called a layer.  To create a custom graph, you can place up to 50 layers on the page.

To move or size a layer, click on an axis to generate a highlighted boundary (which determines the default frame location).  The layer is moved by clicking and dragging to a new location within the page.  The layer is sized by clicking on a boundary control handle and dragging to the desired size (within the page).

The Active Layer

When a page contains multiple layers, operations which act on the layer necessarily act on the active layer.  A layer is made active by performing one of the following steps:

•	Click on the X, Y, or Z axis (or anywhere inside the frame) of the desired layer.

•	Click on the associated layer icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.  When a layer is active, its layer icon is depressed.

•	Click on an object that is attached to the respective layer.  Object attachment is controlled in the object's Label Control dialog box.


The Frame

The frame is a rectangular box that describes the "normal" position of the four XY axes in a (2D graph) layer.  For 3D XYZ graphs, the frame is a rectangular box located outside of the XYZ axes.  For both 2D and 3D graphs, the frame is independent of the axes.  An axis can be offset from the frame.  When you click on an axis to select a layer, the highlighted boundary is drawn along the frame.  Most layer display options such as the layer color, data clipping, and axis grid lines, are delimited by the frame boundaries.  Select View:Show:Frame to display (and print) the frame.  This menu command is page specific.  You must select this menu command for each desired graph window.


The Graph

The single layer graph includes one set of X, Y, Z (for 3D) coordinate axes, one or more data plots, and associated text and graphic elements.  In addition, a graph may contain multiple layers.


The Data Plot

The data plot is the visual display of one or more datasets (or a matrix) in a graph window.  Origin provides the following methods for creating data plots:

•	A data plot can be created from two or more datasets, such as an X and Y column in the worksheet.  Likewise, if an X, Y, and error bar column are selected for plotting, the resultant data plot contains three datasets.

•	A data plot can be created from one dataset and the associated row numbers (referenced as i) of the dataset.  A data plot is created using row numbers if the worksheet containing the selected dataset does not contain a designated X column and does not contain (hidden) default X values.

•	A data plot can be created from one dataset and an incremental X value for that plotting instance.  The incremental X value is defined in the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  Default X values can also be created for all the datasets in the worksheet.  For more information, see Designating a column as X, Y, Z, Error, Label, or None.

•	A data plot can be created from a matrix containing Z values and an X and Y mapping relationship.

The data list at the bottom of the Data menu lists the data plots included in the active layer of the graph window.

The Primary Dataset in the Data Plot

Because more than one dataset can comprise a data plot, Origin lists the primary dataset (in the data plot) at the rightmost position in the data list entry.  The primary dataset determines which dataset subsequent math or editing operations will be performed on.  In addition, if a data plot in the data list is checked (active), you can re-select the data plot in the data list to open the associated tab of the Plot Details dialog box.

The Active Data Plot

To view the data plots displayed in a layer, select Data from the Origin menu bar.  Alternatively, right-click in the desired layer (or on the desired layer icon) to open the associated shortcut menu.  The data list displays at the bottom of these menus.  It lists all the data plots in the current layer.  A check displays next to the active data plot.  To activate a data plot, select the desired data plot from the data list.  Alternatively, select Set as Active from the data plot's shortcut menu.


The Worksheet Dataset

A worksheet dataset is an object consisting of a one-dimensional array that can contain numeric and/or text values.  Thus, each column of worksheet values comprises a dataset.  Each dataset has a unique name formed by combining the worksheet name and the column name, separated by the underscore character, "_".

WorksheetName_ColumnName

In addition, the following information relates to worksheet datasets:

•	When a dataset is created in a worksheet, the data values displayed in the worksheet column are a copy of the dataset held in memory.  When the dataset is plotted, the data plot is also a representation of the actual datasets held in memory.  Whenever the data are modified in the worksheet or graph window, the actual dataset will be affected, and all other representations of the dataset will reflect the changes.

•	Datasets are defined such that, when a dataset is deleted, associated worksheet column values and data plots are also deleted.

•	Datasets may "carry" data plot type information.  For example, if a dataset is plotted as a line+symbol data plot and a new graph window is opened based on a template which has no data plot style association, the dataset displays as a line+symbol data plot when added to the second graph window.


The Excel Workbook Dataset

Origin's Excel workbook dataset naming convention uses the following syntax:

WorkbookName_ColumnName@SheetNumber

where WorkbookName is the workbook name, ColumnName is the workbook sheet column name, and SheetNumber is the numeric value reflecting the order in which data was plotted from the sheets in the workbook.

As with worksheet data, if you alter the values in a workbook dataset, all other representations of the dataset will reflect the changes.  Additionally, if you delete the workbook dataset, the associated data plots are also deleted.

For detailed information on plotting Excel workbook datasets, see Plotting Workbook Data.


Plotting:  The Basics - The Graph Window - The Matrix
The Matrix

The matrix displays a single dataset containing Z values.  Instead of displaying the dataset as a single column in a worksheet, the matrix displays the data in a specified dimension of rows and columns.  The matrix is linearly mapped in X by columns and linearly mapped in Y by rows.

As with worksheet data, if you alter the values in a matrix, all other representations of the dataset will reflect the changes.  Additionally, if you delete the matrix, the associated data plots are also deleted.


Plotting:  The Basics - Plotting Terminology - The Layout Page Window
The Layout Page Window

The layout page window is a special graph window which displays pictures (objects) of worksheets and graphs from other child windows.  To change the appearance of a graph or worksheet in the layout page window, edit the graph or worksheet in the associated child window.


Origin Graph Templates

Origin's graph windows are created from graph template files with the extension *.OTP.  Origin provides built-in templates to create a broad range of graphs.


Creating a Graph when a Worksheet is Active

Origin provides a number of methods to create a graph when a worksheet is active.  The method you select depends on the type of graph you desire and the structure of the worksheet you are plotting from.

Note:  To create a graph from Excel workbook data, see Plotting Workbook Data.

More:

Before You Begin Plotting…

A Quick Reference Guide for Plotting

Highlighting the Worksheet Data and Plotting

Plotting without Highlighting the Worksheet Data


Before You Begin Plotting…

Understanding Column Associations in the Worksheet

Plotting a Range of Data by Setting the Worksheet Display Range


Understanding Column Associations in the Worksheet

Each Origin worksheet column has an associated designation:  X, Y, Z, error bars, labels, or disregarded.  Origin uses these designations to simplify plotting.

•	When a worksheet contains one X column, Origin creates an association between the X column and all the Y columns in the worksheet.  When any Y column is selected for plotting, Origin uses the associated X column values to create the data plot, even if the X values are not selected for plotting.

•	When a worksheet contains multiple X columns, Origin creates multiple associations.  Origin designates the leftmost X column as X1, and all Y columns to the right of the X1 column - but to the left of the next X column - are designated Y1.  The second X column is designated X2, and all Y columns to the right of the X2 column - but to the left of the next X column - are designated Y2, etc.  When any Y1 column is selected for plotting, Origin uses the associated X1 column values to create the data plot, even if the X1 values are not selected for plotting.  Similarly, when any Y2 column is selected for plotting, Origin uses the associated X2 column values to create the data plot.

Though Origin provides these associations to allow you to quickly select your data and create a graph, you are not restricted to using the worksheet column associations when creating graphs.  Origin provides two options for plotting without regard to these associations:  nonadjacent column selection and the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.

When you select columns for plotting that are not associated (using CTRL selection) - for example, an X1 column and a Y2 column - Origin will plot the selected columns of data.  Likewise, if you CTRL select an X1, Y1, and Y2err column, Origin will plot the selected columns of data so that the Y2err column supplies the Y error for the Y1 values.

In addition to disregarding column associations by selecting nonadjacent columns, Origin provides the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  This dialog box allows you to create your own X, Y, Z, error bar, and label associations to create a data plot.  This dialog box allows you to disregard both column designations and associations in the worksheet.


Plotting a Range of Data by Setting the Worksheet Display Range

Origin provides an option to modify the display range of a worksheet.  The worksheet display range determines the data that is included in a data plot when columns are selected for plotting, or when plotting using the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.

To set the beginning of the display range, select a cell, a range of cells, or a worksheet row and select Edit:Set As Begin.

To set the end of the display range, select a cell, a range of cells, or a worksheet row and select Edit:Set As End.


A Quick Reference Guide for Plotting

Use the following section as a quick reference to begin plotting from the worksheet:

Plotting Quick Reference

If you want to:  Select your data in the worksheet and create a graph from a built-in template.

Go to:   Highlighting the Worksheet Data and Plotting.

If you want to:  Select your data in the worksheet and create a graph from your own template.

Go to:   Highlighting the Worksheet Data and Plotting.

If you want to:  Create a data plot by selecting the columns to supply the X, Y, etc. values, independent of the worksheet column designations.

Go to:   Defining One Data Plot.

If you want to:  Create multiple data plots by selecting the columns to supply the X, Y, etc. values, independent of the worksheet column designations.

Go to:   Defining Multiple Data Plots One at a Time,  Defining Multiple Data Plots Using the Worksheet Column Designations, and  Defining Multiple Data Plots Specifying New Designations.


Highlighting the Worksheet Data and Plotting

To plot data using Origin's worksheet column designations and a built-in graph template, highlight one or more columns (or a range from one or more columns) and select Plot:Graph Type or right-click in the selection range and select Plot:Graph Type from the shortcut menu.  For example, select Plot:Scatter to create a scatter graph.  Origin creates a graph window based on the selected template and displays the data plot(s) in the layer.

To plot data using Origin's worksheet column designations and a custom graph template you created and saved, highlight one or more columns (or a range from one or more columns) and select Plot:Template or right-click in the selection range and select Plot:Template from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select the desired graph template from the associated list box and click Open.  Origin creates a graph window based on the selected template and displays the data plot(s) in the layer.

Note:  You need not highlight the X column in the worksheet when plotting using Origin's worksheet column designations.

More:

What if the Worksheet has No X Column?

How the Data Displays in the Graph Window


What if the Worksheet has No X Column?

When you create a graph by highlighting the desired worksheet data and selecting Plot:Graph Type or Plot:Template, and the worksheet has no X column(s), Origin uses the associated row number [i] as the X value for each data point.

Alternatively, default X values can be created for a worksheet with no X column.  To create default X values, select Format:Set Worksheet X when the worksheet is active.  To display the default values, select View:Show X Column.

To assign X values from a column which is not designated as an X column in the worksheet, you must plot using the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  This dialog box may also be used to define incremental X values for the plotting instance.


How the Data Displays in the Graph Window

When you create a graph by highlighting two or more Y columns of data (or a range from two or more Y columns) and select Plot:Graph Type or Plot:Template, Origin plots the data as a data plot group.  The individual data plots in the data plot group all have the same data plot type, based on the template used to create the graph window.  The data plots can be set to increment (automatically plot in an orderly sequence of display styles), based on the display style of the first member of the group.


Plotting without Highlighting the Worksheet Data

When you select Plot:Graph Type with no data highlighted in the worksheet, Origin opens the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  Origin also opens this dialog box when you select Plot:Template and then select the desired template in the Open dialog box.  The Select Columns for Plotting dialog box provides you complete control over plotting worksheet data.

Use the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box to:

•	Select the source X, Y, error bar, and data label datasets for a given data plot, independent of the dataset designation or column order in the worksheet.

•	Select the source X, Y, error bar, and data label datasets for multiple data plots, independent of the dataset designations or column order in the worksheet.

•	Create data plots from different source worksheets.

Note:  The Select Columns for Plotting dialog box is not available for XYZ scatter or trajectory graphs.  For these graph types, you must select your Z data to create the graph.

More:

Reference Section:  The Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Defining One Data Plot

Defining Multiple Data Plots One at a Time

Defining Multiple Data Plots Using the Worksheet Column Designations

Defining Multiple Data Plots Specifying New Designations


Reference Section:  The Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Use the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box to create data plots from datasets that you specify.

The Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

1)	The Worksheet Drop-down List and Associated "Dataset" List Box

Select the source worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets (columns) available in the worksheet display in the associated list box (dataset list box).

2)	The ↔X, ↔Y, etc. Buttons and the Associated Column List Boxes

After selecting a dataset from the dataset list box, click ↔X to set the dataset as the source X values for the data plot currently being defined in the Column list boxes.  Click ↔Y to set the dataset as the source Y values for the data plot currently being defined in the Column list boxes, etc.  After clicking the desired button, the dataset displays in the respective Column list box.

To remove the selected dataset from the Column list box, click the respective button again.  For example, to remove the dataset currently listed in the X Column list box, click ?X.

Note:  A dataset plots as a data label only if the worksheet column display is set to Text (independent of the worksheet cell values).

3)	The X, Y, etc. Buttons

After selecting a dataset from the dataset list box, click X to change the dataset's designation to X.  Click Y to change the dataset's designation to Y, etc.  After clicking the desired button, the dataset designation is updated in the dataset list box.  Changing the dataset designation in this dialog box has no affect on the worksheet column's plotting designation.

4)	The Add Button

Click this button to add the following datasets to the lower view box:

•	Any highlighted data in the dataset list box.  If a Y dataset (or Y datasets) are highlighted and no X datasets are highlighted, Origin adds the selected Y datasets to the lower view box and creates a data plot association using the Set X Values configuration.

•	Any data plot association defined in the Column list boxes.

5)	The Replace Button

Click this button to replace the data plot association that is currently highlighted in the lower view box, with the data plot association that is currently displayed in the Column list boxes.

6)	The Delete Button

Click this button to remove the data plot association that is currently highlighted in the lower view box.

7)	The Lower View Box

This view box displays data plot associations that are created from the Column list boxes or from the dataset list box.

The data plot associations are displayed as follows:

WorksheetName : [From/Step] A(X), B(Y), C(xEr), D(yEr), E(L)

where WorksheetName is the name of the worksheet containing the datasets, and A, B, etc. are the worksheet column names of the selected datasets.

Note:  If no X dataset is selected, then the From and Step values specified in the Set X Values group displays in the data plot association.

•	To change a data plot association displayed in this view box, highlight the desired data plot association.  The plot designations for the data plot association display in the associated Column list boxes.  To change a source of X, Y, etc. values, select the replacement dataset from the dataset list box and click ↔X, ↔Y, etc.  For example, select the replacement Y dataset from the dataset list box and click ↔Y.  To update the data plot association in the view box, click on the Replace button.

•	To delete a data plot association displayed in this view box, highlight the desired data plot association and click Delete.

•	To add a data plot association to this view box, create a data plot association in the Column list boxes or highlight data in the dataset list box.  Click Add to add the selected data plot associations to the view box.

8)	The Set X Values Group

If no dataset is selected for the source X values in a data plot association, Origin uses the From and Step text box values to create incremental X values for that data plot association.

Type the desired start and increment values in the From and Step text boxes.

9)	The OK Button

Click this button to create a graph displaying data plots from the following:

•	All data plot associations listed in the lower view box.

•	The data plot association currently displayed in the Column list boxes.

•	The data plot associations highlighted in the dataset list box.

10)	The Cancel Button

Click this button to exit the dialog box without creating a graph window.


Defining One Data Plot

Use the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box to define the datasets that comprise a data plot.

1)	Select the desired worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets included in this worksheet display in the dataset list box.

2)	Select the dataset for use as the source X values from the dataset list box.  (All the datasets in the list box are available for selection.)

3)	Click the ↔X button to the right of the dataset list box.  This action adds the dataset to the associated Column list box.

4)	Select the dataset for use as the source Y values from the dataset list box.  (All the datasets in the list box are available for selection except the dataset selected for the X values.)

5)	Click the ↔Y button to the right of the dataset list box.  This action adds the dataset to the associated Column list box.

6)	Add error or data label datasets following the same procedure.

7)	Click OK.  A graph window is created based on the selected template.  The selected datasets display as a data plot in the graph window.


Defining Multiple Data Plots One at a Time

Use the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box to define the datasets that comprise multiple data plots.  The same dataset can be assigned to more than one data plot.  However, if you assign a dataset to more than one data plot, the dataset cannot be assigned a different designation in the data plots.

1)	Select the desired worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets included in this worksheet display in the dataset list box.

2)	Select the dataset for use as the source X values (for the first data plot) from the dataset list box.  (All the datasets in the list box are available for selection.)

3)	Click the ↔X button to the right of the dataset list box.  This action adds the dataset to the associated Column list box.

4)	Select the dataset for use as the source Y values (for the first data plot) from the dataset list box.  (All the datasets in the list box are available for selection except the dataset selected for the X values.)

5)	Click the ↔Y button to the right of the dataset list box.  This action adds the dataset to the associated Column list box.

6)	Add error or label datasets following the same procedure.

7)	Click Add to set and display the data plot association in the lower view box.

8)	To create a second data plot association, select the desired worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets included in this worksheet display in the associated list box.

9)	Repeat steps 2-6 to create a new data plot association.  (Note:  If you assign a dataset to more than one data plot, the dataset cannot be assigned a different designation in the data plots.)

10)	Click Add to set and display the data plot association in the lower view box or click OK to plot the current selection in the Column list boxes and the data plot association displayed in the lower view box.

11)	If you clicked Add in step 10, you can now repeat steps 2-6 to create a new data plot association.

12)	Click Add to continue or click OK to plot the defined data plot associations (includes both the lower view box and the current selection in the Column list boxes).


Defining Multiple Data Plots Using the Worksheet Column Designations

This method allows you to plot data that displays in nonadjacent worksheet columns, using the actual worksheet column designations for the selected datasets.  When directed to select an X or Y dataset, the dataset must actually be designated X or Y in the worksheet.

(Note:  You can plot nonadjacent worksheet columns directly from the worksheet by pressing CTRL as you select additional columns.  For more information on column selection, see Selecting Nonadjacent Columns)

1)	Select the desired worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets included in this worksheet display in the dataset list box.

2)	Select an X dataset for use as the source X values from the dataset list box.  For example, select A(X).  Do not click ↔X after the selection.

3)	CTRL + click on the Y datasets for use as the source Y values from the dataset list box.  For example, select C(Y), G(Y), and H(Y).  Do not click ↔Y after the selections.

4)	Click OK.  A graph window is created based on the selected template.  The selected data plot associations display as data plots in the graph window.

Note:  If you select a Y dataset that lists above the X dataset in the dataset list box, Origin plots that Y dataset using the X range and increment established in the Set X Values group.


Defining Multiple Data Plots Specifying New Designations

This method allows you to set designations for the selected datasets.  It also allows you to plot data that displays in nonadjacent worksheet columns.

1)	Select the desired worksheet from the Worksheet drop-down list.  The datasets included in this worksheet display in the dataset list box.

2)	Select a dataset for use as the source X values from the dataset list box.  For example, select C(Y).  Do not click ↔X after the selection.

3)	If the selected dataset in step 2 does not have an X designation, click X while the dataset is selected.  For example, click X when C(Y) is selected to change its display to C(X).

4)	Continue setting the designation of the datasets as X, Y, error bars, or label by selecting the dataset from the dataset list box and clicking X, Y, yEr, xEr, or L.

When setting the designation of datasets using this method, keep in mind that Origin assumes that a Y designated dataset is associated with the first X designated dataset that lists above it in the dataset list box.  Likewise, Origin assumes that an error bar designated dataset is associated with the first Y designated dataset that lists above it in the dataset list box, etc.

5)	After setting the designations of the datasets, highlight the desired datasets in the dataset list box and click OK.  (If the desired datasets are not listed consecutively in the list box, CTRL + click on the datasets.)  A graph window is created based on the selected template.  The data plots in the graph window are created from the designations assigned in the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.


Creating a Graph when a Matrix is Active

When a matrix is active, you can create 3D surface and contour graphs.  Unlike the worksheet, Origin always plots the complete range of matrix values, independent of any data selection.  To plot your matrix data, make the matrix the active window and perform one of the following operations:

•	Click the desired button on the 3D Graphs toolbar (View:Toolbars).

•	Select Plot 3D:Graph Type.

Origin plots the matrix values into the selected graph template.

Note:  A matrix of Z values is linearly mapped in X by columns and linearly mapped in Y by rows.  This eliminates multiple Z values (for example, folded surfaces like a sphere) and restricts the XY range to a rectangular grid.  Additionally, Origin employs a "front to back" rendering mechanism when drawing 3D surfaces so that the data in the front draws over the data in the back.

For information on displaying more than one 3D surface in a graph, or a 3D surface and multiple 3D scatter data plots, see  Displaying Multiple 3D Surfaces or a 3D Surface and Multiple 3D Scatter Data Plots.


Creating (or Adding Data to) a Graph when the Graph Window is Active

Origin provides the following methods for adding data plots to a graph window (without adding a new layer):

Importing data.

•	Adding data using the Layer n dialog box.  This method respects the worksheet column plotting designations.

•	Adding data using the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  This method allows you to disregard worksheet column plotting designations.

•	Adding selected data from the previously active worksheet.

•	Dragging data from the worksheet to the graph.

•	Creating data plots using the Draw Data tool.

For a discussion on combining more than one 3D surface in a graph, or a 3D surface and multiple 3D scatter data plots, see  Displaying Multiple 3D Surfaces or a 3D Surface and Multiple 3D Scatter Data Plots.

For information on adding Excel workbook data to an existing graph window, see Adding Workbook Data to an Existing Graph Window.

More:

Importing Data into the Graph

Adding Data using the Layer n Dialog Box

Adding Data using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Adding Data from the Previously Active Worksheet

Dragging Data from the Worksheet Into the Graph

Creating a Data Plot Using the Draw Data Tool

Displaying Multiple 3D Surfaces or a 3D Surface and Multiple 3D Scatter Data Plots


Importing Data into the Graph

Importing a Single File

Importing Multiple Files


Importing a Single File

To import a single ASCII data file into a graph window, select File:Import ASCII:Single File.  This menu command opens the Import ASCII dialog box.  Select the desired file and click OK.


Importing Multiple Files

To import multiple ASCII data files into a graph window, select File:Import ASCII:Multiple Files.  This menu command opens the Import Multiple ASCII dialog box.  Select one or more files from the list box below the Look In drop-down list and click Add File(s).  To add additional files from another folder, change folders, select the additional files, and click Add File(s).  After selecting the files, you can specify the column plotting designations for each file by double-clicking on the XY text in the Plotting Designation Column.  This action opens a combination box for typing or selecting the ASCII file's column plotting designations.  After completing this process for each ASCII file, click OK.


Adding Data using the Layer n Dialog Box

Datasets which exist in Origin worksheets, Excel workbooks, or matrices can be added to the active layer of a graph window using the Layer n dialog box.  To open the Layer n dialog box, double-click on the desired layer icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.

The Available Data list includes all the datasets available for plotting in the current project.  The Layer Contents list includes all datasets currently plotted in the layer.  To move a dataset into the Layer Contents list, highlight the dataset (or datasets) in the Available Data list and click on the ⇒ button.  To remove a dataset from the Layer Contents list, highlight the dataset (or datasets) in the Layer Contents list and click on the ⇐ button.

When the Layer n dialog box is used to add a Y dataset to the layer, Origin creates a data plot in the active layer using the selected Y dataset and one of the following:

•	The selected Y dataset's associated X dataset in the worksheet.

•	The worksheet's default X values.

•	The associated row numbers (i) if no X dataset exists in the worksheet.

When adding a Z dataset to the layer, Origin creates a data plot using the Z dataset's associated X and Y dataset.  If no X column exists, Origin uses the default X values or the row numbers.

When adding a label or error bar dataset to the layer, Origin adds the selected dataset to the layer.  The label and error bar datasets are positioned in the layer according to their associated X and Y datasets in the worksheet.

Note 1:  Although the Available Data list in the Layer n dialog box lists all the datasets in the project (except for X datasets), when selecting datasets to add to the Layer Contents list you need to consider the current graph template.  For example, if your current graph template is a 2D scatter template, you should avoid adding a Z or matrix dataset to the Layer Contents.  Although Origin doesn't prevent this action, it can yield unexpected results.

Note 2:  When you add data to a graph using the Layer n dialog box, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.  If, however, you have created a custom template with data plot style holders, Origin will search for the first available style holder.  If there are no style holders available, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.

The Layer n Dialog Box

1)	The Available Data List

This list box includes all the datasets in the project that are available for plotting.  All worksheet columns (that are not designated as X or disregarded), temporary datasets, matrices, and Excel workbook columns are listed.  To display a dataset(s) in the layer, select the desired dataset(s) in the Available Data list.  Click the => button to add the dataset(s) to the Layer Contents List.

2)	The Show Current Folder Only Check Box

Select this check box to display the datasets that are located in the currently active Project Explorer folder.  Clear the check box to display all the datasets in the project.

3)	The Layer Contents List

This list box includes all the datasets currently plotted in the layer.  To remove a dataset from the layer, highlight the dataset(s) in the Layer Contents list.  Click the <= button to remove the dataset(s) from the layer.

Note:  If the datasets are part of a data plot group, the dataset names are prefaced with a gn notation, where n is the group number.  (See the Group/Ungroup Button.)

4)	The Up and Down Buttons (Layer Contents)

These buttons allow you to move selected datasets up or down in the Layer Contents list.  The order of the datasets in the Layer Contents list determines the drawing order in the layer.  The dataset at the top of the Layer Contents list plots first in the layer (back), then each dataset plots following the Layer Contents order from back to front.

To display a data plot in front in the layer, select the dataset in the Layer Contents list and move it to the bottom of the list using the down button.

5)	The Delete Button

Click the Delete button to delete all highlighted datasets in the Available Data list.  This action also removes any worksheet columns and data plots associated with the deleted datasets.

6)	The Layer Properties Button

Click on the Layer Properties button to open the Plot Details dialog box with the layer icon selected from the left side of the dialog box.  Edit the tabs in this dialog box to control the layer display.

7)	The Plot Associations Button

Click the Plot Associations button to open the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to plot data disregarding worksheet column designations.

Note:  This button is not available when the current graph template is a 3D template.

8)	The Group/Ungroup Button

Click this button to group or ungroup the selected datasets.  The button is only available when two or more datasets in the Layer Contents list are highlighted.  Grouping datasets allows for automatic incrementing of the data plot color, line type, etc. for the group.

9)	The Edit Range Button

Click the Edit Range button to change the display range for a selected dataset.  This button is only available when one dataset is highlighted in the Layer Contents List.  The Edit Range button opens the Plot Range dialog box.  Specify the starting and ending worksheet rows for displaying the data plot in the graph.

10)	The Show Range Check Box

Select this check box to show the current display range for all datasets included in the Layer Contents list.  The Layer Contents list updates to include the display range of the datasets in the graph (for example, data1_b[1:50]).  The first number in the display range is the worksheet row number of the first data value plotted.  The second number is the row number of the last worksheet value plotted.

11)	The Rescale on OK Check Box

Select this check box to automatically rescale the layer axes to show all the data after the Layer n dialog box is closed.  To maintain the current axes scales, clear the check box.


Adding Data using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Datasets can be added to the active layer of a graph window using the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  The Select Columns for Plotting dialog box allows you to select the designation of the dataset (X, Y, xEr, yEr, or L) irrespective of the column's designation in the worksheet.  The dialog box also enables you to include data from different worksheets in the same graph window.

To open the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box when a graph window is active, perform one of the following:

•	Double-click on the desired layer icon to open the Layer n dialog box.  Click on the Plot Associations button.

•	Press ALT while double-clicking on the desired layer icon.

•	With the desired layer active, select Graph:Add Plot to Layer:Graph Type.  When selecting this menu command to open the dialog box, the resultant plot association plots in the layer as graph type.

Note:  If the last active worksheet window contains highlighted data, the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box does not open.  Rather, the highlighted data is added to the graph (see the following section).

•	Right-click on the desired layer icon and select Plot Associations from the shortcut menu.


Adding Data from the Previously Active Worksheet

If data is highlighted in the previously active worksheet, it can be added to the currently active graph window by selecting Graph:Add Plot to Layer:Graph Type.  This method is ideal for adding a range of data to the graph window.


Dragging Data from the Worksheet Into the Graph

You can drag selected data from a worksheet and plot it by dropping it into a graph window.  When you plot using this method, Origin uses the worksheet column designations to determine how the selected data will plot.  For example, if you select a Y column, or a range of a Y column, and then drag the data into a graph window, Origin will create a data plot using the selected Y data and the associated X data in the worksheet, if an X column exists.  If no X column exists, Origin will plot the selected Y data versus row number or versus the default X values.

To drag data from a worksheet to a graph, select the desired worksheet data and then position the mouse over the edge of one of the cells in the selection range, until the mouse pointer changes.  Then click-and-drag the data into the graph window.  Release the mouse button to complete the process.

To select the graph type for your data plots created with the drag-and-drop method, select the desired graph type from the Drag and Drop Plot drop-down list on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).  Select among the following options:

•	Select Line, Scatter, or Line+Symbol to create a line, scatter, or line+symbol data plot.

•	Select Current to display the data plot using the style of the graph template (for example, line or scatter).  If, however, you have created a custom template with data plot style holders, Origin will search for the first available style holder.  If there are no style holders available, Origin displays the data plot using the style of the graph template.

If you drag multiple Y columns, or a range of multiple Y columns, into a graph, Origin groups the associated data plots.  When data plots are grouped, Origin automatically increments the display properties (depending on graph type) between data plots in the group.


Creating a Data Plot Using the Draw Data Tool

Origin provides an option to create a data plot using the Draw Data tool from the Tools toolbar.  Data plots created with the Draw Data tool can be edited, manipulated, and analyzed in the same way as any other data plot.  To create a data plot using the Draw Data tool, perform the following when a graph window is active:

1)	Click on the Draw Data tool on the Tools toolbar and then point and double-click to create data points at the desired graph layer locations.  The Data Display tool opens (if not already open) and displays the X and Y values for each created data point.

2)	When complete, click on any other Tools toolbar tool to exit the "drawing" mode.

The primary dataset of the data plot created using the Draw Data tool is named Drawn_b where n is 1, 2, etc., depending on the number of data plots created.  To create a worksheet displaying the datasets for this data plot, right-click on the data plot and select Go to Drawn from the shortcut menu.  Alternatively, double-click on the data plot to open the Plot Details dialog box.  Click the Worksheet button.  Both these operations open a Drawn worksheet window containing the A(X) and B(Y) datasets comprising the created data plot.


Displaying Multiple 3D Surfaces or a 3D Surface and Multiple 3D Scatter Data Plots

Origin allows you to plot two surfaces or one surface and multiple 3D scatter data plots in the same graph layer using the Layer n dialog box.  However, when you combine these data plots in a layer, Origin does not perform any calculations concerning the intersections of the data plots, and thus no information can be inferred by any visual indication of an intersection.

For example, while it is possible to display two surfaces in a surface plot, Origin simply draws one surface and then draws the second surface as if the first one didn't exist.  Thus, you can create two hemispheres (from two matrices) and have them draw in the correct sequence so as to appear like a complete sphere, but rotation of this figure may produce a visually confusing image.

Additionally, you can include a 3D surface and 3D scatter points (with or without drop lines) in the same graph layer.  Because the scatter data points and the "corners" of the polygons that represent the 3D surface (Origin uses a polygon rendering method to draw 3D surfaces) occupy the same points in space, the "back to front" drawing method used by Origin does not include a process to further sort the drawing order.  In some cases, the scatter point is drawn first (with its drop line) and subsequently drawn polygons will cover up parts of the scatter data point.  However, in other cases the polygons that share this point in space are all drawn first and the scatter point and drop line are drawn on top.  Another polygon may draw over parts of the drop line from a scatter point, giving the illusion that the drop line intersects the surface at some distance away from the scatter data point.

You can verify that all points lie on the surface by rotating the figure to view the surface edge-on.  Removing perspective will reveal that all the scatter points lie exactly on the surface.


Plotting Functions

Origin provides a tab on the Plot Details dialog box for defining and plotting functions.  Functions can be plotted into one of Origin's standard graph templates or into a custom function graph window that provides additional plotting controls.

More:

Plotting a Function into a Graph Window

Plotting a Function into a Function Graph Window

Creating a Data Plot or Datasets from a Plotted Function

Changing the Function Formula


Plotting a Function into a Graph Window

To add a function to the active graph window, select Graph:Add Function Graph.  This menu command opens the Function tab of the Plot Details dialog box.  The left side of the Plot Details dialog box lists the graphic element structure in the graph window.  The function icon is selected from this tree.

The Function tab provides controls for defining the function.

The (Plot Details) Function Tab

1)	The Density (Total Points) Combination Box

Specify the number of data points to display in the function graph from this combination box.

2)	The Display Curve Check Box

Select this check box to view the function graph in the graph window.

3)	The Function Controls and Function (Fn) Text Box

Common mathematical and statistical distribution functions are available from the function drop-down list.  The view box to the left of the drop-down list displays a function summary including the required arguments for the currently selected function.  After you select a function from the drop-down list, click the Add button to display the function in the Fn text box.

In addition to accessing common built in functions using the function drop-down list and Add button, you can type a function directly in the text box using any operators recognized by Origin.  For multiplication, you must include the multiplication operator (*).  Additionally, you can type in any of Origin's built-in functions that aren't available from the drop-down list, or any functions that you have defined.

The Undo button is provided to return the text in the Fn text box to the previous display.  Thus, click this button to return one step in your editing process.

To complete the editing process, click the Apply or OK button.

Note:  To edit the line properties of the function graph, edit the (Plot Details) Line tab.


Plotting a Function into a Function Graph Window

To plot a function into a graph window with added function controls, click the New Function button on the Standard toolbar.  This action opens a Functionn graph window as well as the Function tab of the Plot Details dialog box.  For information on defining your function in the (Plot Details) Function tab, see Plotting a Function into a Graph Window.

The Function Graph Window

You can edit this graph by double-clicking or right-clicking on any elements in the graph.  Additionally, you can use the following controls to customize the function graph.

1)	The New Function Button

Click this button to add a new function graph to the window.  This action opens the (Plot Details) Function tab.  For information on using this tab, see the previous section.

2)	The Rename Button

Click this button to rename the active function.  To make a function active, right-click on the function and select Set as Active from the shortcut menu.  If the command is unavailable, the function is currently active.  Alternatively, select the desired function from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu or at the bottom of the layer shortcut menu.  A check displays next to the active function (or data plot).

3)	The Polar/Cartesian Button

Click this button to switch between displaying cartesian and polar coordinates.  When the function graph is displayed with polar coordinates, the Set Angular Range button is available.  Click the Set Angular Range button to open the Angular Range dialog box.  Specify the starting and ending angular values, as well as the angular increment.  In addition to setting the angular range, two buttons are provided to display the polar coordinates clockwise or counterclockwise.

4)	The Rescale Button

Click this button to rescale the axes, if needed.  For example, click this button after magnifying the function graph with the Enlarger tool from the Tools toolbar.


Creating a Data Plot or Datasets from a Plotted Function

A function graph displays a curve described by a specified formula.  Thus, the function graph has no discreet values associated with it.  You can, however, create a data plot from a function graph.  You can also create a worksheet with X and Y datasets.

To create a data plot from a function:

Right-click on the function and select Make Dataset Copy of Function from the shortcut menu.  A dialog box opens requesting you enter a Y dataset name for the data plot.  It is recommended that you use the following syntax when typing the Y dataset name:  WorksheetName_ColumnName.  For example, type Function_Test1.  This notation ensures that should you create a worksheet from the data plot, the Y column will be properly named.  After typing the Y dataset name, click OK to close the dialog box.  A FuncCopy graph window opens displaying the data plot derived from your function graph.  The data plot contains the number of points specified in the Density combination box on the (Plot Details) Function tab.

To create a worksheet from the newly created data plot:

After you create a data plot from your function graph, right-click on the data plot and select Create Worksheet DatasetName from the shortcut menu.  Origin opens a worksheet displaying the Y dataset for the data plot.  Origin names the worksheet and Y dataset based on the name you specified for the data plot's Y dataset (see previous section).  To display the data plot's X dataset in the worksheet, select View:Show X Column.


Changing the Function Formula

To change the function formula, double-click on the function in the function graph window to re-open the (Plot Details) Function tab.  Edit the formula in the Fn text box and click OK or Apply.


Adding Error Bars to Your Graph

Origin provides three methods of displaying an error bar data plot:

•	Select Graph:Add Error Bars when the graph window is active.  This menu command creates error bar values by calculating either a specified percent of the dataset value or the standard deviation of the dataset.

•	Use the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box to plot a dataset, independent of its column designation, as error bars.

•	Add an error bar dataset to the worksheet and then add this dataset to the layer.

For information on customizing the error bar display, see Error Bars.

More:

Adding Error Bars using the Add Error Bars Menu Command

Adding Error Bars using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Adding an Error Bar Dataset to the Worksheet

How does the Data List Display an Error Bar Data Plot?


Adding Error Bars using the Add Error Bars Menu Command

Error bars can be added to a graph even if an error bar dataset does not currently exist in the worksheet.  Select Graph:Add Error Bars when the desired data plot and graph window are active.  This menu command opens the Error Bars dialog box.

The Error Bars Dialog Box

1)	The Percent of Data (%) Radio Button and Text Box

Select the Percent of Data (%) radio button to create error bars based on a percentage of each plotted data point.  Enter the desired percent value in the associated text box.  Origin calculates n% of each Y column value (for the plotted data).  An error bar column is added to the worksheet to the immediate right of the active data plot's Y column (primary dataset).  The Percent of Data values are placed in the corresponding rows of this column.  If a worksheet doesn't exist, it is created.  Columns are created for each dataset in the layer.  An error bar column is created to the immediate right of the primary dataset.

2)	The Standard Deviation of Data Radio Button

Select the Standard Deviation of Data radio button to calculate the standard deviation of the primary dataset in the data plot.  Origin adds an error bar column to the immediate right of the active data plot's primary dataset column in the worksheet.  The calculated standard deviation value is added to each cell (up to the maximum row number of the associated dataset).  The standard deviation is used as the source of the error bars in the data plot.


Adding Error Bars using the Select Columns for Plotting Dialog Box

Any worksheet dataset may be displayed as error bars in a data plot using the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.  To open the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box, double-click on the associated layer icon in the graph window.  This action opens the Layer n dialog box.  Click Plot Associations to open the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.

1)	Select the desired data plot association from the lower view box.  The plot designations for the data plot association display in the associated Column list boxes.

2)	Select the desired error bar dataset from the dataset list box and click ?X or ?Y.  This action adds the dataset to the associated Column list box.

3)	To update the data plot association in the lower view box, click Replace.

4)	Click OK to close the Select Columns for Plotting dialog box.

5)	Click OK to close the Layer n dialog box.


Adding an Error Bar Dataset to the Worksheet

Error bars can also be added to a graph window by creating an error bar column in the worksheet, filling the column with values, and then adding the error bar dataset to the layer using the Layer n dialog box.  For instructions on adding data to the layer using the Layer n dialog box, see  Adding Data using the Layer n Dialog Box.


How does the Data List Display an Error Bar Data Plot?

When an error bar dataset is added to a data plot, Origin adds a new "data plot item" to the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  Like all data plots in the data list, this new entry contains a primary dataset (the rightmost dataset).  In this case, the primary dataset is the selected error bar column.

Origin adds the extra data plot to the data list to simplify editing the respective data plot elements.

Thus, if a check displays next to the listed data plot which contains the Y primary dataset, select this data plot from the data list to open the data plot tab (for example, Symbol) of the Plot Details dialog box.  Additionally, select Format:Plot to open the dialog box.

If a check displays next to the listed data plot which contains the yEr (or xEr) primary dataset, select this data plot from the data list to open the Error Bar tab of the Plot Details dialog box.  Additionally, select Format:Plot to open the dialog box.


Adding a Date/Time Stamp to Your Graph

To add a date/time stamp on a graph window, click the Date & Time button on the Graph toolbar (View:Toolbars).  The date/time stamp displays the date and time when the stamp was added.  It displays at the top of the graph window.

To modify the text format of the date/time stamp, double-click on the stamp to open the Text Control dialog box.  Control the font, point size, color, etc., in this dialog box.

To modify the date/time format that displays when you click this button, you must modify a line of LabTalk script.  The Date & Time button runs a script in the [DateTime] section of the STANDARD.OGS file located in your Origin folder.  That script consists of:

label -s -sa -d (.6*page.width) (.05*page.height) -n timestamp $(@D,D10);

The $(@D,D10) is the key to customizing the date/time format.  In the default case, Origin displays the 10th (D10) date format (numbered from zero) from the Origin date format list (which is M/D/YYYY HH:MM:SS).  To view the Origin date format list, double-click on a worksheet column to open the Worksheet Column Format dialog box.  Select Date from the Display drop-down list.  Origin's date formats display in the Format drop-down list (numbered from zero).  Thus, to display a date/time stamp with the format "Jan 2", open the STANDARD.OGS file in a text editor and change D10 to D2.  Save the modified OGS file and click the Date & Time button to display the selected format.

To delete the stamp, click on the stamp to select it and press DELETE.


Graph Windows and Graph Templates

As with all of Origin's child windows, the graph window can be saved to a file (distinct from the project file) and then re-opened in a different project.  To save the active graph window to a file, select File:Save Window As or right-click on the window title bar and select Save Window As.  Both commands open the Save As dialog box.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box.  The graph (.OGG) extension is added automatically.

To open the graph window file in another project, select File:Open when the project is open.  This menu command opens the File Open dialog box.  Select 'Graphs (*.OGG)' from the List Files of Type drop-down list and then select your file and click Open.

A graph template file differs from a graph window file in that templates do not save the data in the graph.  Template files determine all the page and layer characteristics such as page size, number of layers, inclusion of text labels, and data plot style information.  Once a graph window is customized, it can be saved as a template for future use.  To save the active graph window as a template, select File:Template:Save As or right-click on the window title bar and select Save Template As from the shortcut menu.  Both commands open the Save As dialog box.  Type the desired file name in the File Name text box.  The graph template (.OTP) extension is added automatically.

To plot data into your saved template, select your data and then select Plot:Template or right-click in the selection range and select Plot:Template from the shortcut menu.  Both commands open the Open dialog box.  Select your template from the associated list box and click Open.


2D Line, Scatter, and Line + Symbol Graphs

2 Point Segment Graph

3 Point Segment Graph

Horizontal Step Graph

Line Graph

Line Series Graph

Line+Symbol Graph

Scatter Graph

Spline Connected Graph

Vertical Drop Line Graph

Vertical Step Graph


2 Point Segment Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:2 Point Segment or click the 2 Point Segment button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The 2 point segment graph is created from the LINESYMB.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The line connection between points alternates between a straight line and no line (the connection type is set to Segment on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (Format:Plot)).  Thus, every two consecutive data points are connected by a line (the first and second data points, the third and fourth data points, etc.).  The data points are displayed as symbols.


3 Point Segment Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:3 Point Segment or click the 3 Point Segment button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The 3 point segment graph is created from the LINESYMB.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The line connection display alternates between a straight line for three data points, then no line to the next data point, a straight line for three data points, etc. (the connection type is set to Segment 3 on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (Format:Plot)).  Thus, every three consecutive data points are connected by two lines (the first, second, and third data points; the fourth, fifth, and sixth data points; etc.).  The data points are displayed as symbols.


Horizontal Step Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Horizontal Step or click the Horizontal Step button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The horizontal step graph is created from the LINE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each data point in the data plot is connected by a line.  The line connection type is set to a step horizontal connection on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (Format:Plot).  The step horizontal connection creates a right angle connection between data points, with an initial horizontal line.  The data points are not displayed.


Line Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Line or click the Line button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The line graph is created from the LINE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.


Line Series Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of two or three Y columns of values.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Line Series or click the Line Series button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The line series graph is created from the LSER2.OTP template (two Y columns) or the LSER3.OTP template (three Y columns) located in the Origin folder.

Notes

After clicking the Line Series button, Origin creates a new (hidden) worksheet, LineSeriesn.  This worksheet includes two columns that contain the selected Y column numbers (1, 2, or 3) and the associated cell values.

For example, select the three Y columns in the following worksheet and click the Line Series button.

This action produces the following (modified) LineSeries1 worksheet.  (To view the worksheet, double-click on the LineSeries1 worksheet icon on the right pane of the Project Explorer.)

The line series graph emphasizes the trend in values within a worksheet row.  Each series of row values comprises a line + symbol data plot.  The data plot's X values are determined by the selected Y column number (1, 2, or 3).  The data plot's Y values are determined by the actual cell values in the selected column.


Line+Symbol Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Line+Symbol or click the Line + Symbol button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The line+symbol graph is created from the LINESYMB.OTP template located in the Origin folder.


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types - 2D Line, Scatter, and Line + Symbol Graphs - Scatter Graph
Scatter Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Scatter or click the Scatter button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The scatter graph is created from the SCATTER.OTP template located in the Origin folder.


Spline Connected Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Spline or click the Spline Connected button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The spline connected graph is created from the LINESYMB.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each data point in the data plot is connected by a line.  The line connection type is set to a spline connection on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (Format:Plot).  The data points are displayed as symbols.


Vertical Drop Line Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Vertical Drop Line or click the Vertical Drop Line button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The vertical drop line graph is created from the DROPLINE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

This graph type emphasizes the difference in magnitude between data points in a data plot.  The data points are displayed as symbols.  A vertical line displays from each data point symbol to the X axis.


Vertical Step Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Vertical Step or click the Vertical Step button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The vertical step graph is created from the LINE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each data point in the data plot is connected by a line.  The line connection type is set to a step vertical connection on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (Format:Plot).  The step vertical connection creates a right angle connection between data points, with an initial vertical line.  The data points are not displayed.


2D Bar and Column Graphs

Bar Graph

Column Graph

Floating Bar Graph

Floating Column Graph

Stack Bar Graph

Stack Column Graph


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types - 2D Bar and Column Graphs - Bar Graph
Bar Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Bar or click the Bar button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The bar graph is created from the BAR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y value of each data point in the data plot is represented as the length of a horizontal bar.  Each bar has a fixed width, and each worksheet row of bar values is centered at the associated X value.  The X values plot along the vertical axis.

To establish Y=1 as the "floor", or Y value which alters the direction of bar graphs displayed on a logarithmic scale, select the Log Scale use 1 as Floor check box on the Graph tab in the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).  To display a line when Y=0, select the Bar Graph Show Zero Values check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Column Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Column or click the Column button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The column graph is created from the COLUMN.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y value of each data point in the data plot is represented as the height of a column.  Each column has a fixed width, and each "X group" of columns is centered at the associated X value.

To establish Y=1 as the "floor", or Y value which alters the direction of column graphs displayed on a logarithmic scale, select the Log Scale use 1 as Floor check box on the Graph tab in the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

To display a line when Y=0, select the Bar Graph Show Zero Values check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Floating Bar Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least two Y columns of values (or a range from at least two columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Bar/Column:Floating Bar or click the Floating Bar button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The floating bar graph is created from the FLOATBAR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The floating bar graph displays Y values as beginning, intermediate, and ending bar levels for each X value.  The X values plot along the vertical axis.

The first Y dataset provides the starting Y position for each bar graph.  The second Y dataset provides an intermediate level and defines a bar between the starting position and the current position.  The third (fourth, etc.) Y dataset provides an additional intermediate value and defines a bar between the previous intermediate value and the current value.  The final Y dataset provides an ending value and defines a bar between the previous intermediate value and the current value.


Floating Column Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least two Y columns of values (or a range from at least two columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Bar/Column:Floating Column or click the Floating Column button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The floating column graph is created from the FLOATBAR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The floating column graph displays Y values as beginning, intermediate, and ending column levels for each X value.

The first Y dataset provides the starting Y position for each column graph.  The second Y dataset provides an intermediate level and defines a column between the starting position and the current position.  The third (fourth, etc.) Y dataset provides an additional intermediate value and defines a column between the previous intermediate value and the current value.  The final Y dataset provides an ending value and defines a column between the previous intermediate value and the current value.


Stack Bar Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Bar/Column:Stack Bar or click the Stack Bar button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The stack bar graph is created from the BAR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

For each X value, the associated Y values are represented as the length of a bar.  Each bar has a fixed width.  The bars, however, are stacked on each other so that the second bar segment begins at the end of the first bar, etc.  The stack of bars is centered at the associated X value.  The X values plot along the vertical axis.  To unstack the bars, select Graph:Stack Grouped Data in Layer (to de-select the menu command).

To display a line when Y=0, select the Bar Graph Show Zero Values check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Stack Column Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Bar/Column:Stack Column or click the Stack Column button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The stack column graph is created from the COLUMN.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

For each X value, the associated Y values are represented as the height of a column.  Each column has a fixed width.  The columns, however, are stacked on each other so that the second column begins at the end of the first column, etc.  The stack of columns is centered at the associated X value.  To unstack the columns, select Graph:Stack Grouped Data in Layer (to de-select the menu command).

To display a line when Y=0, select the Bar Graph Show Zero Values check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Area, Polar, and 2D Waterfall Graphs

Area Graph

Fill Area Graph

Polar Graph

2D Waterfall Graph


Area Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Area or click the Area button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The area graph is created from the AREA.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

When one Y column of values (or a range from one column) is selected, the area between the data plot and the "From" Y axis value is filled by default.  When more than one Y column of values (or a range from more than one column) is selected, each successive column of values displays as an area graph that is stacked on the previous area graph.  Thus, the upper bounds of the previous area graph becomes the baseline of the next area graph.  To plot each of the data plots so that the area between the data plot and the "From" Y axis value is filled, select Graph:Stack Grouped Data in Layer (to de-select this command).


Fill Area Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of two Y columns of values (or a range from two columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Fill Area or click the Fill Area button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The fill area graph is created from the FILLAREA.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The area between the data plots determined by both Y columns is filled.


Polar Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Polar or click the Polar button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The polar graph is created from the POLAR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The polar graph displays data in terms of the radial position versus the angular value in units of degrees.  The Y value determines the radial position of the data point.  The X value determines the angular value of the data point.

Three buttons are provided in the graph window.  Click Set Angular Range to modify the starting and ending angular values, as well as the increment.  Click the next button to the right to set the first angular value at "3:00" and increment counterclockwise.  Click the next button to set the first angular value at "12:00" and increment clockwise.

Select the Fixed from 0 radio button to display the polar graph with the center of the graph representing a Y value of 0.  Select the Use Y-Axis Range radio button to display the polar graph with the center of the graph representing the Y axis scale "From" text box value (on the Scale tab of the Axis dialog box).

More:

To Modify the Angular Range

To Modify the Circular Grids

To Modify the Radial Grids


To Modify the Angular Range

Click Set Angular Range to open the Angular Range dialog box.  Specify the starting and ending angular values, as well as the angular increment.


To Modify the Circular Grids

Select Format:Axes:Y Axis to open the Y Axis dialog box.  Select the Grid Lines tab.  Horizontal is the active selection in the Selection list box.  Horizontal grids are equivalent to circular grids in a polar graph.  To customize the circular grids, make modifications to this tab when Horizontal is selected from the Selection list box.


To Modify the Radial Grids

Select Format:Axes:X Axis to open the X Axis dialog box.  Select the Grid Lines tab.  Vertical is the active selection in the Selection list box.  Vertical grids are equivalent to radial grids in a polar graph.  To customize the radial grids, make modifications to this tab when Vertical is selected from the Selection list box.


2D Waterfall Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Waterfall or click the Waterfall button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The waterfall graph is created from the WATERFAL.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The waterfall graph is ideal for comparing variations between multiple datasets created under similar conditions.  The graph has a pseudo-3D effect, enabling you to see variations in the Z direction.

Each dataset is displayed as a line data plot which is offset by a specified amount in both the X and Y direction.  To adjust the data plot offset, click the Offset Amount button in the graph window.  This action opens a dialog box in which you control the offset.  Select or clear the offset from the XY Offset drop-down list.  Specify the Y offset in the Total Y Offset (%) text box.  Specify the X offset in the Total X Offset (%) text box.

Click the Reverse Order button in the graph window to switch the order in which the datasets are plotted.  Thus, the first dataset is plotted last, the last dataset is plotted first, etc., providing a different perspective on dataset relations.

To fill the area below each line data plot, click the Fill Area button in the graph window.  This action opens a dialog box in which you control the fill display.  Select the Enable Fill check box to fill the area beneath the data plot with the color specified from the Fill with Color drop-down list.  Select the Side Lines check box to display vertical drop lines at the first and last data points in each of the data plots (using the specified fill color).

Note:  You can also control the fill from the Plot Details dialog box.


Pie Charts

Pie Chart

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of exactly one Y column of values (or a range from one column).

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Pie or click the Pie Chart button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The pie chart is created from the PIE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The selected values are summed, and the percentage of the total is determined for each selected value.  The pie chart displays the percentage of the total for each selected value as a pie section.


Vector Graphs

X, Y, Angle, Magnitude Vector Graph

X, Y, X, Y Vector Graph


X, Y, Angle, Magnitude Vector Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of three Y columns (or a range from three Y columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Vector XYAM or click the Vector XYAM button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The XYAM vector graph is created from the VECTOR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The leftmost Y column controls the Y coordinate of the vector tail (by default).  The second Y column determines the angle of the vector.  The angle is measured counterclockwise from a line parallel to the X axis, bisecting the vector.  The third Y column controls the vector length in units of points.  The Plot Details dialog box provides a control to scale the length of the vector.  Control the angular unit on the Numeric Format tab in the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


X, Y, X, Y Vector Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of two X columns and two Y columns (or a range from these columns).

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Vector XYXY or click the Vector XYXY button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The XYXY vector graph is created from the VECTXYXY.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The leftmost X and Y columns determine the XY coordinate of the tail of the vector.  The second set of X and Y columns determine XY coordinate of the head of the vector.


High-Low-Close Charts

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of exactly three Y column of values (or a range from three columns).  The leftmost Y column contains the high values, the next Y column displays the low values, and the last Y column displays the closing values.  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:High-Low-Close or click the High-Low-Close button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The High-Low-Close chart is created from the HLCLOSE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The chart displays the high and low Y values for a given X value.  These values are connected by a vertical line (the data points aren't displayed).  The close Y value for a given X value displays as a tick on the vertical line.


Ternary Graphs

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of one Z column of values (or a range from one Z column).  The worksheet must also contain Y column values (and typically X column values).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y column in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Ternary or click the Ternary button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The ternary diagram is created from the TERNARY.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Ternary diagrams are used to represent the relative percentage of three components (X, Y, and Z).  Each worksheet row of X, Y, and Z values determines a data point in the ternary diagram.  If the X, Y, and Z values in a worksheet row do not add up to 100, Origin normalizes the data automatically when creating the ternary diagram.  In the ternary diagram, percentage values for the Y component are read from 0% at the lower-right corner of the triangle, to 100% at the peak of the triangle.  Percentage values for the Z component are read from 100% at the lower-left corner of the triangle, to 0% at the peak of the triangle.  Percentage values for the X component are read from 0% at the lower-left corner of the triangle to 100% at the lower-right corner of the triangle.


Multiple Layer Graphs

4 Panel Graph

9 Panel Graph

Double Y Axis Graph

Horizontal 2 Panel Graph

Stack Graph

Vertical 2 Panel Graph


4 Panel Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  Ideally, select four Y columns of values.  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Panel:4 Panel or click the 4 Panel button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The 4 panel graph is created from the PAN4.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each column of Y values plots into a separate layer.  The layers are arranged in two columns and two rows.


9 Panel Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  Ideally, select nine Y columns of values.  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Panel:9 Panel or click the 9 Panel button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The 9 panel graph is created from the PAN9.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each column of Y values plots into a separate layer.  The layers are arranged in three columns and three rows.


Double Y Axis Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least two Y columns of values (or a range from at least two columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Special Line/Symbol:Double Y or click the Double Y Axis button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The double Y axis graph is created from the DOUBLEY.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The double Y axis graph contains two layers.  Layer 2 is linked to layer 1.  The X axis in layer 2 has a straight one-to-one link with the X axis in layer 1.

If two columns of values are selected (or a range of two columns), then one data plot displays in each layer.  Each data point in the data plot is connected by a line.  The default line connection between points is a straight line.  The data points are displayed as symbols.


Horizontal 2 Panel Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  Ideally, select two Y columns of values.  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Panel:Horizontal 2 Panel or click the Horizontal 2 Panel button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The horizontal 2 panel graph is created from the PAN2HORZ.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each column of Y values plots into a separate layer.  The two layers are arranged in two columns and one row.


Stack Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Panel:Stack or click the Stack button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The stack graph is created from the STACK.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each data plot displays in its own layer in a graph window.  The layers are stacked in one column.  The leftmost selected dataset in the worksheet displays in the lower graph layer (layer 1).  The dataset to the right of the leftmost dataset in the worksheet displays in layer 2, etc.  Each child layer is linked to layer 1.  Additionally, the X axis in each child layer has a straight one-to-one link with the X axis in layer 1.

The Y axis titles display the associated worksheet column names.  No tick labels or X axis titles display.

Each data point in the data plot is connected by a line.


Vertical 2 Panel Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column of values (or a range from at least one column).  Ideally, select two Y columns of values.  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Panel:Vertical 2 Panel or click the Vertical 2 Panel button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The vertical 2 panel graph is created from the PAN2VERT.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Each column of Y values plots into a separate layer.  The two layers are arranged in one column and two rows.


Indexed Size (Bubble) and Color Mapped Graphs

Color Mapped Graph

Indexed Size (Bubble) and Color Map Graph

Indexed Size (Bubble) Graph


Color Mapped Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of two Y columns of values (or a range from two Y columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Bubble/Color Mapped:Color Mapped or click the Color Map button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The color map graph is created from the SCATTER.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

For each row, the two Y column values determine the display of the data point.  The leftmost Y column provides the Y data point values.  The second Y column controls the data point symbol color.  Origin finds the minimum and maximum values in the second Y column, creates eight evenly sized ranges of values between the minimum and maximum values, and then associates a color with each range of values.  Each data point color is determined by finding the color associated with the second Y column value in the color map.


Indexed Size (Bubble) and Color Map Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of three Y columns of values (or a range from three Y columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Bubble/Color Mapped:Bubble + Color Mapped or click the Bubble + Color Mapped button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The indexed size (bubble) and color mapped graph is created from the SCATTER.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

For each row, the three Y column values determine the display of the data point.  The leftmost Y column provides the Y data point values.  The second Y column controls the data point symbol size in units of points.  The third Y column controls the symbol color.  Origin finds the minimum and maximum values in the third Y column, creates eight evenly sized ranges of values between the minimum and maximum values, and then associates a color with each range of values.  Each data point color is determined by finding the color associated with the third Y column value in the color map.


Indexed Size (Bubble) Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of two Y columns of values (or a range from two Y columns).  If an X column is present to the left of the Y columns in the worksheet, the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:Bubble/Color Mapped:Bubble or click the Bubble button on the 2D Graphs Extended toolbar.

Template

The indexed size (bubble) graph is created from the SCATTER.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

For each row, the two Y column values determine the display of the data point.  The leftmost Y column provides the Y data point values.  The second Y column controls the data point symbol size in units of points.


3D XYY Graphs

Bar Graph

Ribbon Graph

Wall Graph

3D Waterfall Graph


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types - 3D XYY Graphs - Bar Graph
Bar Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYY:3D Bars or click the XYY 3D Bars button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The XYY 3D bars graph is created from the BAR3D.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y value of each data point is represented as the height of a column.  Each column has a fixed width and is labeled with its worksheet column name on the Z axis.


Ribbon Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYY:3D Ribbons or click the 3D Ribbons button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D ribbons graph is created from the RIBBON.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y value of each data point is represented as the height of a ribbon.  Each ribbon has a fixed width, and is labeled with its worksheet column name on the Z axis.


Wall Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYY:3D Walls or click the 3D Walls button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D walls graph is created from the WALLS.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y value of each data point is represented as the height of a wall.  Each wall has a fixed width, and is labeled with its worksheet column name on the Z axis.


3D Waterfall Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of at least one Y column (or a range from at least one Y column).  Ideally, select at least two Y columns of values (or a range of at least two Y columns).  If the Y column(s) has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYY:3D Waterfall or click the 3D Waterfall button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D waterfall graph is created from the WATER3D.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Y values in each column define an XY face with white fill color.


3D XYZ Graphs

Scatter Graph

Trajectory Graph


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types - 3D XYZ Graphs - Scatter Graph
Scatter Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of one Z column (or a range from one Z column).  If the Z column has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYZ:3D Scatter or click the 3D Scatter Plot button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D scatter graph is created from the 3D.OTP template located in the Origin folder.


Trajectory Graph

Data Requirements

Requires a selection of one Z column (or a range from one Z column).  If the Z column has an associated X column, then the X column supplies the X values.  Otherwise, the worksheet's default X values are used.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot:3D XYZ:3D Trajectory or click the 3D Trajectory button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D trajectory graph is created from the TRAJECT.OTP template located in the Origin folder.


Plotting:  Origin's Built-in Graph Types - 3D Surfaces
3D Surfaces

Bars

Color Fill Surface

Color Map Surface

Wire Frame Surface

Wire Surface

X Constant with Base Surface

Y Constant with Base Surface


Bars

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Bars or click the Matrix 3D Bars button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The (matrix) 3D bars graph is created from the 3DBARS.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values represent the height of the columns (bars).  The associated X and Y values mapped in the matrix determine the XY locations of each column.


Color Fill Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Color Fill Surface or click the 3D Color Fill Surface button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D color fill surface graph is created from the MESH.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of X and Y grid lines with fill colors on the front and the back of the surface.


Color Map Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Color Map Surface or click the 3D Color Map button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D color map surface graph is created from the CMAP.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of X and Y grid lines with fill colors on the front and the back of the surface.  The front of the surface is filled using a color map with associated Z levels.


Wire Frame Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Wire Frame or click the 3D Wire Frame button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D wire frame graph is created from the WIREFRM.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of X and Y grid lines.


Wire Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Wire Surface or click the 3D Wire Surface button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D wire surface graph is created from the WIREFACE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of X and Y grid lines with secondary lines between the grids.


X Constant with Base Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D X Constant with Base or click the 3D X Constant with Base button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D X constant with base graph is created from the XCONST.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of grid lines parallel to the Y axis.  The front surface displays a fill color.  X and Y side walls are also enabled.


Y Constant with Base Surface

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:3D Y Constant with Base or click the 3D Y Constant with Base button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The 3D Y constant with base graph is created from the YCONST.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

The Z values determine a surface of grid lines parallel to the X axis.  The front surface displays a fill color.  X and Y side walls are also enabled.


Contour Graphs

Black and White Lines with Labels Contour

Color Fill Contour

Gray Scale Map Contour


Black and White Lines with Labels Contour

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:Contour - B/W Lines+Labels or click the Contour B/W Lines button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The contour graph with black and white labels is created from the CONTLINE.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Ranges of Z values are denoted on an XY grid using contour lines and associated labels.


Color Fill Contour

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:Contour - Color Fill or click the Contour - Color Fill button on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The contour color fill graph is created from the CONTOUR.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Ranges of Z values are denoted on an XY grid using contour lines and fill colors from a color map.


Gray Scale Map Contour

Data Requirements

Requires that a matrix of Z values is active.

Creating the Graph

Select Plot 3D:Gray Scale Map or click the Gray Scale Map button  on the 3D Graphs toolbar.

Template

The gray scale map graph is created from the CONTGRAY.OTP template located in the Origin folder.

Notes

Ranges of Z values are denoted on an XY grid using a gray scale map.


Understanding Layers

The layer is the fundamental building block for Origin graphs.  Put most simply, a layer is an object consisting of one set of axes.  A layer's axes control how the data plot is displayed in the layer.  Axes have scales that determine the range of data displayed, and tick marks and tick labels that give the data plot meaning.  Origin automatically determines how to scale and label the axes depending on the data plot, but Origin also provides control over the organization and look of the graph.  This fact, and the fact that a graph window can have multiple layers that may themselves be independent of each other or "linked," allows Origin to produce very complex graphs with minimum effort.

More:

Defining the Layer

Reasons for Adding Another Layer to a Graph

Defining the Active Layer

Terminology:  Parent Layer vs. Child Layer


Defining the Layer

A layer is an Origin object that contains one set of controlling axes that may or may not be displayed.  In addition, the layer can contain data plots or labels (objects) that may or may not be displayed.

A layer necessarily resides in a window and a graph window necessarily contains at least one layer.

The page of the Origin graph window can hold up to 50 layers.  Each layer can be moved or sized on the page.  Additionally, each layer has a layer icon located in the upper-left corner of the graph that visually displays whether the layer is active or not.

Finally, a layer possesses properties and methods that are addressable from LabTalk and which can alter the layer's appearance and function.


Reasons for Adding Another Layer to a Graph

In general, new layers are added to a graph for the following reasons:

•	Display the same data plot, but on different axis scales (for example, Celsius and Fahrenheit, or miles and kilometers).

•	Create and arrange multiple graphs within one graph window.

•	Inset a graph within a graph.


Defining the Active Layer

When a layer is active it is receptive to program commands.  All operations, for example plotting or adding text labels, are always performed on the active layer.  Only one layer can be active at a time.

Each layer has an associated layer icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.  The icon appears as a small gray rectangle containing the layer number.  Layer icons tell you which layer is the active layer, and allow you to set the active layer.  When a layer is active, its layer icon depresses.

If the View:Show:Active Layer Indicator menu command is checked, the active layer will also be indicated by highlighted axes.  This menu command is page specific, meaning you must select the menu command for individual graph windows.

Clicking once on a layer icon will cause that layer to become active.  Double-clicking on a layer icon will open the Layer n dialog box for the layer.  Origin provides the following alternative methods to set the active layer:

•	Click on the X or Y axis within the layer.

•	Click anywhere within the frame of the layer.  This procedure may be difficult if multiple layers are not separated spatially.

•	Click on the plot type icon in the legend of the respective layer.

To ensure that a layer can be made active only by clicking on the layer icon, select Format:Page.  This menu command opens the Plot Details dialog box with the page (graph) icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select the Set Active Layer by Layer Icon Only check box.


Terminology:  Parent Layer vs. Child Layer

In a multiple layer graph, you can link layers to ensure that if one layer is moved or resized, other selected layers will move or resize to maintain the original spatial layer arrangement.  Additionally, you can link layers to ensure that a selected layer's axis scale will always update to reflect the axis scale of the layer that it is linked to.

Origin uses specific terminology (child, parent) when referring to a layer that is linked to another layer.  For example, if layer 4 is linked to layer 2, then layer 4 is termed the child layer and layer 2 is termed the parent layer.  The child layer is always linked to the parent layer.  Thus, you can customize the child layer's properties so that the child layer will always move or resize if the parent layer moves or resizes.  Additionally, you can customize the child layer's properties so that the child layer's axes scales will always update to reflect any changes to the parent layer's axes scales.


Controlling the Display of Elements Associated with a Layer

The layer properties are controlled in the Plot Details dialog box when the desired layer icon is selected on the left side of the dialog box.

To open the Plot Details dialog box with the layer icon in the dialog box active, perform one of the following:

•	Click on the X or Y axes of the desired layer (or within the frame) to select the layer.  Select Format:Layer.

•	Press CTRL while double-clicking on the desired layer icon.

•	Double-click on the desired layer icon to open the Layer n dialog box.  Click the Layer Properties button.

•	Right-click on the active layer icon and select Layer Properties from the shortcut menu.

The controls available from the layer's Plot Details dialog box are reviewed in the following sections.

More:

Displaying a Layer Background Color and Adding a Border

Displaying the Layer Frame

Changing the Size of a Layer

Controlling the Display and Scaling of the Objects in a Layer

Increasing the Redraw Speed in a Layer

Controlling the 3D Axis Length, Rotation, and Perspective in a Layer

Controlling the Display of the 3D Planes in a Layer

Viewing a 3D Graph with a Perspective or Orthographic Projection

Hiding Data in the 3D XY Plane


Displaying a Layer Background Color and Adding a Border

You can display a layer color and add a border on the Background tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

The (Layer) Background Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

By default, the layer does not display a background color.  Rather, its display is transparent.  Therefore, any color that is applied to the graph page also displays in each of the layers that it contains.

To add a background color to a layer, open the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Background tab, and then select the desired color from the Color drop-down list (None = transparent).

The layer border is a bounding box outside of the layer frame.  To display the layer border, select a border from the Border Style drop-down list.  Note that the border can be moved and resized independently of the layer.  To do this, click on the border line to select it.  A highlighted boundary with control handles displays.  Move or resize the border in the same way as other objects.


Displaying the Layer Frame

Unless you offset the axes or disable their display, the layer frame is exactly coincident with the X and Y axes in a 2D graph layer.  In a 3D graph, the layer frame displays just outside of the axes.  To temporarily view the layer frame, click on the X, Y, or Z axis.  The highlighted boundary box comprises the frame.  To display the layer frame, select View:Show:Frame.  This menu command is checked when active.

Note:  To hide any data that extends beyond the frame, select the Clip Data to Frame check box on the Display tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.


Changing the Size of a Layer

The layer frame is the bounding box that defines the size and shape of the layer.  To change the layer dimensions, either manually resize the frame, or specify the desired frame dimensions on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Additionally, you can resize a layer so that it returns to the default (maximum) size on the page by selecting the layer, and then selecting View:Maximize Layer.  This menu command provides a fast method for maximizing the dimensions of a layer whose size has been reduced.

When you resize a layer, by default the axis labels, tick labels, legend, and data will scale with the layer (as well as any other objects that are attached to the Layer Frame or Layer and Scales in their respective Label Control dialog box, Format:Label Control).  The scaling of these elements is controlled on the Display tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

More:

Changing the Layer Dimensions by Manually Sizing the Frame

Specifying New Layer Dimensions in the Plot Details Dialog Box


Changing the Layer Dimensions by Manually Sizing the Frame

Activate the layer frame for sizing by clicking on one of the axes in the layer.  Once the frame is active, a sizing box with control handles displays.

•	To size the layer frame, drag a control handle.  When dragging the control handle, an outline of the layer changes size.  The actual layer frame remains at its current size until you release the mouse button and click outside the layer (but within the graph window).

•	To proportionally size the layer frame, press CTRL and then click on a control handle.  Release the CTRL key (while still holding down the mouse button) and drag the layer to the desired size.  Click outside the layer (but within the graph window) to fix the new size.


Specifying New Layer Dimensions in the Plot Details Dialog Box

The layer dimensions are set on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  .

The (Layer) Size/Speed Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

To Specify the Layer Area:

To numerically position or resize the layer, type values in the Left, Top, Width, and Height text boxes.  The Left text box value determines the position of the frame relative to the left side of the page.  The Top text box value determines the position of the frame relative to the top of the page.  The Height and Width text box values determine the size of the frame.  Select the desired units from the Units drop-down list.

•	The % of Page unit is useful for maintaining the same layer size relative to the page size.  When this unit is selected, the Left, Top, Height, and Width text box values are in percentage of the graph page height and width.

•	The % of Linked Layer unit is useful for creating inset graphs.  This unit allows you to specify the frame dimensions and offsets for a child layer in terms of the dimensions of the parent layer frame.  When this unit is selected, the Left, Top, Height, and Width text box values are in percentage of the height and width of the parent layer frame.  (This unit is not available unless the current layer is linked to a parent layer.  For more information, see  Linking Layers and Axes.)

Note:  When the unit selection is changed in the drop-down list, the Left, Top, Height, and Width text box values are automatically updated so that the layer retains the same size and position.

To Increase the Redraw Speed of the Layer:

Select a buffering method from the Graphic Image Caching drop-down list.  Graphic image caching can be used whenever a 2D or 3D graph layer needs to be redrawn without being refreshed.  For example, when a graph window is overlaid by a worksheet window and then brought to the front again, or when the graph window is resized.  For 2D graph layers, select Raster to use caching.  For 3D graph layers, select Raster or Vector.

•	Vector (metafile) buffering provides Origin with a detailed description of how to draw the graph and is fully scaleable.

•	Raster (bitmap) buffering tells Origin how many pixels of what color to draw at what position.  This information is based on a certain resolution and will become distorted when resized.

Note:  If you resize your graph in raster caching mode, the graph may get a rough pixel appearance.  If this occurs, select Window:Refresh to restore the display.

If you select None, Origin redraws the graph layer every time the graph window is moved, brought to the front, or resized.

In addition to graphic image caching, you can use Origin's speed mode to increase the redraw speed of your graph layer.  With speed mode, you can control the number of data points displayed in a graph layer.  This option is most useful when working with large datasets.

Select the Worksheet Data, Maximum Points Per Curve check box to enable speed mode for all the data plots in the layer that are created from worksheet data.  Type the desired value (n) in the associated text box.  If the number of data points in a data plot exceeds n, Origin displays a subset of the data plot that contains n points.  This subset contains evenly spaced data - by the worksheet rows.

For 3D data plots created from a matrix or for contour data in the layer, select the Matrix Data, Maximum Points Per Dimension check box to enable speed mode.  Type the desired value (n, m) in the X and Y text boxes.  If the number of data points in a data plot exceeds n or m, Origin displays a subset of the data plot that contains n and m points.  This subset contains evenly spaced data - by the matrix columns (X) and matrix rows (Y).


Controlling the Display and Scaling of the Objects in a Layer

Origin provides controls to turn on and off the display of the axes, axes labels, legend, and data in the layer - as well as any other objects that are attached to the Layer Frame or Layer and Scales in their respective Label Control dialog box (Format:Label Control).  These controls are provided on the Display tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Additionally, you can control the scale of these objects with respect to the layer on this tab.

The (Layer) Display Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Scale Elements Group

This group determines how the axes, axes labels, legend, data plots, and other objects that are attached to the Layer Frame or Layer and Scales are affected when the layer is resized.  (Note:  Objects created with the Line, Arrow, Curved Arrow, Box, and Circle tools from the Tools toolbar are not affected by this group.)

Select the Scale with Layer Frame radio button to scale the layer elements proportionally with the layer.

Select the Fixed Factor radio button to determine the scale factor of the layer elements.  This scale factor determines the size of the layer elements relative to their original size (for example, font size, symbol size, and line width).  The size of these elements is determined by multiplying their original size by the scale factor when the Fixed Factor radio button is selected.  Type the desired scale factor in the associated text box.

2)	The Show Elements Group

Clear the X Axes, Y Axes, and Z Axes check boxes to hide the X, Y, and Z axes in the layer.  Note that similar controls are provided in the Axis dialog box (the Show Axis check boxes).  If you edit the check boxes on the Plot Details dialog box Display tab, the controls on the Axis dialog box update to reflect your changes.  Similarly, if you edit the check boxes on the Axis dialog box, the controls on the Plot Details dialog box update to reflect your changes.

Clear the Labels check box to hide all axis titles, arrows, text labels, shapes, and objects in the active layer.  (To view the labels in the printout, remember to select the Labels check box before printing.)

Clear the Data check box to hide all data plots in the active layer.  (To view the data in the printout, remember to select the Data check box before printing.)

3)	The Data Drawing Options Group

Select the Clip Data to Frame check box to hide data that extends beyond the layer frame.  If the Clipping Margins settings have been set, select this check box to hide all data outside of the customized clipping margins.

Select the Data on Top of Axes check box to display data plots and symbols superimposed over the layer axes.

Select the Grid on Top of Data check box to display axis grid lines superimposed over data plots and symbols.

Edit the Clipping Margins (%) sub-group to set the clipping margins inside, or outside, the active layer frame.  The default units are in % of the layer frame size.  Type a negative value to clip the data to a point outside the frame.  Type a positive value to clip the data to a point inside the frame.  To clip the data, select the Clip Data to Frame check box.


Increasing the Redraw Speed in a Layer

Origin provides two methods to enhance the redraw speed of the graph layer:  graphic image caching and controlling the number of data points that display in the data plot (speed mode).  Both these methods are available on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Additionally, you can select a graphic image caching method from the layer's shortcut menu.

In addition to enhancing the redraw speed of the layer, you can enhance the redraw speed of the graph page by controlling the display of elements on the graph page, and by controlling the graph page redraw criteria.


Controlling the 3D Axis Length, Rotation, and Perspective in a Layer

Origin provides controls on the Axis tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box to specify the X, Y, and Z axes physical length in relation to the layer frame.  Additionally, controls are provided on this tab to manually set the rotation angle about the X, Y, or Z axes, and to change the perspective angle.

Note:  Complementary tools for controlling the 3D rotation and perspective angle are provided on the 3D Rotation toolbar (View:Toolbars).

The (Layer) Axis Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Setting the X, Y, and Z Axis Length

You can specify the X, Y, and Z axis length in the associated text boxes.  The text boxes are in units of percent of the layer frame.  Thus, to display the X axis at 50% of its full length, type 50 in the X Length text box.

Rotating the Graph About One of the Axes

To manually set the rotation angle about the X, Y, or Z axis, type the desired rotation angle in the associated text box.  This text box value is in units of degrees, independent of the Angular Unit setting on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box.

You can also use the 3D Rotation toolbar buttons to rotate the graph about the axes.

The Rotation Buttons on the 3D Rotation Toolbar

3D Rotation Angle - Select or type a rotation angle (in degrees) for the rotation buttons.

Rotate Counterclockwise - Rotate counterclockwise about the Z axis the specified rotation angle.

Rotate Clockwise - Rotate clockwise about the Z axis the specified rotation angle.

Tilt Left - Tilt the top of the graph counterclockwise the specified rotation angle.

Tilt Right - Tilt the top of the graph clockwise the specified rotation angle.

Tilt Down - Rotate downward about the X axis the specified rotation angle.

Tilt Up - Rotate upward about the X axis the specified rotation angle.

Fit Frame to Layer - Fit the graph to the layer frame.

Restore Rotation - Reset the rotation angles.

Rotating the Tick Labels with the Graph

To rotate the tick labels so that they align with the axes as you rotate the graph, select the Rotate Labels check box.

Changing the Perspective

In addition to rotating the 3D graph, you can change the perspective angle.  When you change the perspective angle you change the effective distance from the observation point.  Type the desired perspective angle (in degrees) in the Perspective Angle text box.  You are limited to a range of 0 to 30 degrees.

You can also use the 3D Rotation toolbar buttons to change the perspective angle.

The Perspective Angle Buttons on the 3D Rotation Toolbar

Increase Perspective - Increase the perspective angle by 3 degrees.

Decrease Perspective - Decrease the perspective angle by 3 degrees.


Controlling the Display of the 3D Planes in a Layer

In 3D graph layers, you can control the position and display of the XY, YZ, and ZX planes.  You can also display the outlines of the front planes in your 3D graphs.

To control the display of the 3D planes, edit the Planes tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

The (Layer) Planes Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

To Specify the Position and Color of the Back Planes

Select the Auto Position check box to automatically re-display the back plane when the graph is rotated such that one of the planes shifts to the front.  When this event occurs, the % Position text box values update.  For example, a text box value displaying 100 before the rotation would display 0 after - if the rotation caused the plane to shift to the front.

To control the position and display color of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes, select the associated check box.  The % Position text box value controls the position of the respective plane, from the bottom of its orthogonal axis, as a percentage of the axis's length.  Select the plane color from the associated Color drop-down list.

To Display the Outlines of the Front Planes

In addition to controlling the display of the back planes, you control the display of the outline of the front planes.  Selecting this option gives your graph a 3D cube effect.  Select the Enable check box to display the front plane outlines.  Control the line display from the associated controls.


Viewing a 3D Graph with a Perspective or Orthographic Projection

You can control the projection of your 3D graph from the Projection drop-down list on the Miscellaneous tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Photographs show a perspective projection.  The effect of perspective is to make railroad tracks look narrower in the distance.  Orthographic projection is an approximation to perspective projection when the viewpoint is located at infinity relative to the objects being imaged.  With orthographic projection, there is no distortion of the coordinates of a point.  In an orthographic projection, the railroad tracks look parallel.


Hiding Data in the 3D XY Plane

You can specify the plotting range on the XY plane of your 3D graph - without changing the axis range - by editing the XY Clipping group on the Miscellaneous tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

The (Layer) Miscellaneous Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Select the Enable check box to hide (clip) all data points with XY coordinates outside the range specified in the % From and % To text boxes.  (Note that the axes will continue to display their current range.)  Customize the clipping area by editing these text box values.  The text box values are in units of percentage of the axes scales.

Note:  For information on the Projection drop-down list on the Miscellaneous tab, see  Viewing a 3D Graph with a Perspective or Orthographic Projection.


Origin's Built-in Multiple Layer Graph Templates

Origin offers a number of multiple layer graph templates.  These include a double Y axis, zoom, stack, horizontal 2 panel, vertical 2 panel, 4 panel, and 9 panel graphs.

For more information on these graph types, see Multiple Layer Graphs.


Adding New Layers to the Graph

Origin provides a number of methods to add layers to your graph window.  Use the following hypertext links to choose an appropriate method.

Quick Reference for Adding New Layers to the Graph

If you want to add a new layer with axes independent of the first layer, see  Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale Independent of the First Layer.

If you want to add a new layer with an automatic link to the first layer, see  Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale which is Linked to the First Layer.

If you want to convert a single layer graph window into a multiple layer graph window, see  Converting a Single Layer Graph into Multiple Layers.  If the single layer graph window contained multiple data plots, each data plot displays in its own layer.

If you want to duplicate a layer from another graph window, including any data and labels it contains, and preserve any axis links, see  Copying Graphs Between Pages.

If you want to add a new layer, or multiple layers, with axes independent of the first layer, see  Adding Layers During Layer Arrangement.

If you want to merge pages into one graph window preserving existing links, see  Adding Layers by Merging Pages.

If you want to use LabTalk script to add a new layer with axes independent of the first layer, see 	 Using LabTalk to Add a Layer.

More:

Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale Independent of the First Layer

Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale which is Linked to the First Layer

Converting a Single Layer Graph into Multiple Layers

Copying Graphs Between Pages

Adding an Inset Graph

Adding Layers During Layer Arrangement

Adding Layers by Merging Pages

Using LabTalk to Add a Layer


Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale Independent of the First Layer

To add a set of XY axes which have a scale independent of the first set of axes, a new layer must be added.  To add a new, independent layer, perform one of the following:

•	Select Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Normal):Bottom X + Left Y.

•	Open the Layer tool by selecting Tools:Layer.  Click the Normal X and Y button on the Add tab.

•	Right-click on the page in the graph window (outside of the layer).  Select New Layer(Axes):(Normal):Bottom X + Left Y from the shortcut menu.

When you add a new layer, the new layer always displays with the default layer size and placement, independent of the current layer arrangement.

To arrange the layers on the page, see  Arranging Layers on the Page.

To add data to the layers, see Creating (or Adding Data to) a Graph when the Graph Window is Active.


Adding a New Set of Axes with a Scale which is Linked to the First Layer

Origin provides a number of menu commands for adding additional layers in which the axes of the new layer have an association (or link) with the axes in the original layer:

•	Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Top X + Right Y

•	Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Top X

•	Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Right Y

Each of these menu commands creates a new layer that is linked to the layer that was active when the menu command was selected (as indicated by the depressed layer icon).  The new layer becomes the child of the parent (active) layer.  The new child layer then becomes the active layer.

For the Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Top X and Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Right Y menu commands, the axis that is not mentioned in the menu command is not displayed.  It will, however, have its scale linked one-to-one with the corresponding axis in the parent layer.

Additionally, new linked layers can be added to the graph window using the Layer tool.  To open the tool, select Tools:Layer.  Click on the Add tab to access the "new layer" buttons.

•	Click the Linked Top X button to add a linked layer displaying a top X axis.

•	Click the Linked Right Y button to add a linked layer displaying a right Y axis.

•	Click the Linked Top X and Right Y button to add a linked layer displaying a top X and right Y axis.


Converting a Single Layer Graph into Multiple Layers

To convert a single layer graph window (that contains multiple data plots) into a multiple layer graph window, click the Extract to Layers button on the Graph toolbar (View:Toolbars).  This action opens the Total Number of Layers dialog box.  Specify the layer arrangement in this dialog box.  Subsequent dialog boxes verify the creation of the layers and their spacing on the page.


Copying Graphs Between Pages

To copy a graph, including any labels or data, from one graph window to another, perform the following steps:

1)	Select the existing layer you want to copy by clicking on the axis to generate a highlighted boundary.

2)	Select Edit:Copy.

3)	Click in the destination graph window.  (Hint:  The location in which you click becomes the upper-left corner of the layer.)

4)	Select Edit:Paste.

For information on arranging the layers, see  Arranging Layers on the Page.


Adding an Inset Graph

An inset graph is a layer which is added to an existing layer in a graph window.  The dimensions of the inset layer are reduced so that the "host" layer remains at least partially visible in the graph window.

Though inset layers can be created manually by adjusting the position and size of two (or more) existing layers, Origin provides two buttons on the Layer tool to automatically create an inset graph.

Open the Layer tool by selecting Tools:Layer.  Click on the Add tab.

•	Click the Linked Inset button to add a linked inset layer displaying a bottom X and left Y axis.  The new layer displays as an inset in the layer that was active when the Linked Inset button was clicked.  The inset layer is created with a link to this layer.  Thus, the inset layer is the child layer of its "host" layer (or parent layer).

•	Click the Linked Inset with Data button to add a linked inset layer displaying a bottom X and left Y axis.  This button functions the same as the Linked Inset button, however the inset layer displays all the data plots that are included in the "host" (or parent) layer.


Adding Layers During Layer Arrangement

Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command

Using the Arrange Tab on the Layer Tool


Plotting:  Graph Layers - Adding Layers During Layer Arrangement - Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command
Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command

To add a single set (or multiple sets) of axes with scales independent of the first layer, perform the following steps:

1)	With the desired graph window active, select Edit:Add & Arrange Layers.  This menu command opens the Total Number of Layers dialog box.

2)	Type a row/column dimension that is greater than the number of layers currently present.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box.


Using the Arrange Tab on the Layer Tool

To add a single set (or multiple sets) of axes with scales independent of the first layer, perform the following steps:

1)	Open the Layer tool by selecting Tools:Layer.

2)	Click on the Arrange tab.

3)	Select the Add New Layers check box.

4)	Type column and row dimensions in the Columns and Rows text boxes that are greater than the number of layers currently present in the active graph window.

5)	Click the Array button to add the layers to the graph.


Adding Layers by Merging Pages

To merge pages into one graph window preserving existing links, select Edit:Merge All Graph Windows.  Prior to selecting this menu command, make the layer that you want to be the parent layer in the new graph window, the active layer.


Using LabTalk to Add a Layer

Enter the following LabTalk command in the Script window to add a new layer to the active graph window:

layer -n  (ENTER)

The layer is added without links to the parent layer.  Additionally, it displays with the default layer size and placement.

For more information on this command, see the LabTalk Help File.


Deleting Layers

To delete a layer, first select the layer by clicking on one of the axes in the layer.  A highlighted boundary with control handles displays around the layer.  After the layer is selected, press DELETE to delete the layer from the graph window.  Alternatively, right-click on the active layer's layer icon and select Delete Layer from the shortcut menu.


Hiding Layers

To reduce the screen redraw time on multiple layer graphs, or to enhance the display of a particular layer in a multiple layer graph, you can hide selected layers from view.  To hide a layer, right-click on the layer icon for the layer that you want to hide and select Hide Layer from the shortcut menu.

Alternatively, to hide all but the active layer, select View:Show:All Layers to de-select the menu command.  The menu command is checked when all the layers are displayed.

Note:  To print the graph including all the layers, turn the layer view on before printing.


Linking Layers and Axes

In multiple layer graphs, you can link layers so that a child layer will be positioned and sized in relation to a parent layer.  Additionally, once layers are linked, you can set up an axis linking relationship between the child and parent layer.  For a discussion on parent and child layers, see  Terminology:  Parent Layer vs. Child Layer.

More:

Linking Layers to Control the Child Layer Position and Size

Linking the Axes Between Layers


Linking Layers to Control the Child Layer Position and Size

To create a link between two layers, make the layer you want to be the child layer active - by clicking on its layer icon.  Select Format:Layer to open the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Link Axes Scales tab, and then select the layer to link to, from the Link To drop-down list.  (Note:  Click the Apply button to ensure that the % of Linked Layer option is available on the Size/Speed tab.)

Now that you've linked the child layer to the parent layer, you can force the child layer to follow the size and position of the parent layer.  To do this, select the Size/Speed tab (the child layer icon must still be selected on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box).  Select % of Linked Layer from the Units drop-down list.  After clicking OK to close the Plot Details dialog box, whenever you make any changes to the parent layer's size or position, the child layer will update to maintain the same spatial relationship when the link was established.

Note:  The parent layer must always have a lower layer number than the child layer.  If necessary, you can change layer numbers with the following LabTalk command:

page.reorder(Layer1, Layer2)  (ENTER)

where Layer1 and Layer2 are layer numbers in the active graph window.  The specified layers exchange layer numbers.

Linking Layers Example

1)	Click the New Graph button on the Standard toolbar.

2)	Select Edit:Add & Arrange Layers.

3)	Type 2 in the Number of Rows text box and click OK.

4)	Click Yes at the Attention prompt.

5)	Click OK in the Spacings in % of Page Dimension dialog box.

6)	Press CTRL while double-clicking on the layer 2 icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.

7)	Select the Link Axes Scales tab.

8)	Select Layer 1 from the Link To drop-down list.  (Note:  Click the Apply button to ensure that the % of Linked Layer option is available on the Size/Speed tab.)

9)	Select the Size/Speed tab.

10)	Select % of Linked Layer from the Units drop-down list.

11)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

Now click on the X axis in layer 1 (bottom layer) to expose the layer's control handles.  Drag on a control handle to resize the layer.  Click off the layer after resizing it.  Note that layer 2 automatically resizes to follow layer 1.


Linking the Axes Between Layers

In addition to linking layers to ensure that the child layer resizes and moves with the parent layer, you can also link layers to control the child layer's axis scale based on the parent layer's axis scale.  To do this, click on the child layer's icon (or the layer that you want to be the child layer) in the upper-left corner of the graph.  Select Format:Layer to open the child layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Link Axes Scales tab.  If you haven't yet linked this layer to a parent layer, then select the parent layer from the Link To drop-down list.  Once you have linked the layers, you can then set up the axes scale links on this tab.

The (Layer) Link Axes Scales Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Linking Layers

Link the current layer (the layer whose icon is selected on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box) to a parent layer from the Link To drop-down list.  The parent layer must always have a lower layer number than the child layer.

Customizing the Axes Link

You can create an "X to X" or "Y to Y" link between the axis scale in the parent and child layer.  The link can be a straight one-to-one relationship, or it can be mediated by a mathematical expression.

This tab contains two groups of identical controls.  The controls in the X Axis Link group create a link between the X axis in the child layer and the X axis in the parent layer.  The controls in the Y Axis Link group do the same for the Y axis in the two layers.

Note 1:  You only have to link the X or the Y axis in a layer, without reference to the left versus right or top versus bottom axis.  This is because the axes within a single layer necessarily share the same scale as they are effectively the same axis.

Note 2:  The axis linking relationship that you specify is limited in terms of presentation by the currently selected axis scale type (the Type drop-down list on the Scale tab of the Axis dialog box).

Note 3:  If you add a layer to your graph by selecting either Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Right Y or Edit:New Layer(Axes):(Linked):Top X, an asterisk (*) displays in the X1 and X2 text boxes (linked right Y) or in the Y1 and Y2 text boxes (linked top X).  This indicates that the respective link is a straight one-to-one relationship.

•	Select the None radio button to remove any link between the axes scales.

•	Select the Straight (1 to 1) radio button to create a 1 to 1 link in which both axes share the scale of the parent layer.

•	Select the Custom radio button to create a mathematical relationship between the axes' scales.  Specify the relationship between the axes' scales in the X1= and X2= (or Y1= and Y2=) text boxes.  These variables specify the "From" and "To" values for the axes of the child layer.  The expression you type in the text box provides the initial and final scale values for the child layer in terms of the parent layer.

In this example, the initial X axis scale value in the child layer equals the initial X axis scale value in the parent layer times 2.  The final X axis scale value in the child layer equals the final X axis scale value in the parent layer times 4.


Merging Existing Graph Windows

Origin provides a quick method of merging several single layer graphs into one multiple layer graph.  After merging, you can rearrange the layers as desired.

More:

Merging

How Merging Affects Linked Layers


Merging

Select Edit:Merge All Graph Windows to copy the contents of the pages in all the graph windows and place them into either:

•	A new merged window, if the old graph windows were retained.

•	The page of the currently active graph window, if the old graph windows were not retained.

Note:  Only graph windows in Project Explorer folders that are being viewed in the workspace are included in the merge operation.  Of these, minimized or hidden graph windows are excluded from the merge operation.

Before merging, Origin asks if you want to keep the old graph windows.  If you click No, Origin will prompt you one final time before continuing with the merge operation.

Origin merges the graph windows by following the graph window order in the Window menu window list.  The first graph window in the list becomes layer 1 in the merged graph window.  The second graph window in the list becomes layer 2 in the merged graph window, etc.  If any graph window includes multiple layers, those layers are added to the merged graph following the layer order in the original graph.

After the merged graph is created, you can exchange the position of any two layers using the Layer tool.  For more information, see  Exchanging Layer Positions with the Layer Tool.

You can also exchange the layer number (not position) of any two layers using the following object method:

page.reorder(Layer1, Layer2)  (ENTER)

where Layer1 and Layer2 are the layer numbers that you want to swap.  For more information, see the LabTalk Help File.

To "undo" a merge operation, click the Extract to Graphs button on the Graph toolbar.


How Merging Affects Linked Layers

Any links that existed between layers before merging are preserved by the Merge All Graph Windows menu command.  Thus, if a graph window contains two layers, and layer 2 is linked to layer 1, then after the merge process this layer linking arrangement will still exist (although the layer numbers may change).

In addition to preserving links, Origin also preserves your custom axis link settings (on the Link Axes Scales tab of the Plot Details dialog box).  If you linked layers spatially by selecting % of Linked Layer from the Units drop-down list on the Size/Speed tab of the Plot Details dialog box, then Origin also maintains the spatial relationship between the two layers.  This can cause an unexpected layer arrangement in the merged graph window.  To avoid this, remove the spatial link between layers before merging by selecting % of Page from the Units drop-down list.


Converting a Multiple Layer Graph Window into Multiple Graph Windows

To convert a multiple layer graph window into multiple graph windows with single layers, click the Extract to Graphs button on the Graph toolbar.  All layers are extracted to individual graph windows, even if a layer is linked to another layer.  The original graph window is not saved during the extraction process.


Arranging Layers on the Page

Origin provides tools to arrange the layers in your multiple layer graph.  Multiple layers can be arranged in a grid, or they can be positioned and sized using custom measurements.

Note:  Origin provides a number of built-in graph templates for creating multiple layer graphs including a series of panel graphs.

More:

Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command

Exchanging Layer Positions with the Layer Tool

Overlaying Layers with the Layer Tool

Arranging Layers with the Layer Tool

Arranging Layers using the Layer's Plot Details Dialog Box

Manually Positioning Layers on the Page


Plotting:  Graph Layers - Arranging Layers on the Page - Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command
Using the Add & Arrange Layers Menu Command

To arrange layers on the page, select Edit:Add & Arrange Layers.  This menu command opens the Total Number of Layers dialog box, prompting you for the number of rows and columns you want to include in the page layout.  Select the dimensions of the layer arrangement and click OK.  This action opens the Spacings in % of Page Dimension dialog box, prompting you for spacing information.  If you are unsure of the desired spacing, leave the settings at the default values.  If needed, re-select the Add & Arrange Layers menu command to adjust the spacing.

When you select the Add & Arrange Layers menu command, Origin requires that you specify a "complete" layer arrangement.  Therefore, if you specify a three by four arrangement and only have 11 layers, Origin will request permission to create an additional layer.  If you decline, Origin arranges the existing layers.  All layers are necessarily the same size after the arrangement process.  If you require layers of non-uniform size or spacing, size the desired layers on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  For information on this tab, see  Specifying New Layer Dimensions in the Plot Details Dialog Box.

Note:  If you have any child layers that are spatially linked to a parent layer (% of Linked Layer is selected from the Units drop-down list on the Size/Speed tab of the child layer's Plot Details dialog box), then Origin maintains the parent/child relationship during layer arrangement.  For example, if your graph window contains five layers and layer 2 is a linked right Y axis of layer 1, then when you select Edit:Add & Arrange Layers and specify a two column by two row arrangement, Origin will arrange the layers such that layer 2 maintains its right Y position with layer 1.


Exchanging Layer Positions with the Layer Tool

You can exchange the physical location of any two layers on your graph using the Swap Layers A and B button on the Arrange tab of the Layer tool (Tools:Layer).  First specify the two layers whose locations you want to exchange in the A and B text boxes.  Then click the button to exchange their locations.  Note that the layers maintain their original layer numbers.

If one or both of the layers is spatially linked to a parent layer (% of Linked Layer is selected from the Units drop-down list on the Size/Speed tab of the Plot Details dialog box), Origin will still exchange the layer locations.  However, Origin will update the Layer Area group on the Size/Speed tab of the linked layer's Plot Details dialog box with the new location.

If one or both of the layers is a parent layer, Origin will still exchange the layer locations.  However, for each child layer of the parent, Origin will change the selection from the Units drop-down list on the Size/Speed tab of the child layer's Plot Details dialog box from % of Linked Layer to % of Page.


Overlaying Layers with the Layer Tool

You can select and move a layer so that it completely overlays in the same position as another layer.  To do this open the Layer tool (Tools:Layer) and select the Arrange tab.  Type the layer number that you want to move in the A text box.  Type the layer number that you want layer "A" to move to in the B text box.  Click the Move Layer A to B button to move layer "A" to the position of layer "B."  If necessary, Origin will resize layer "A" so that it is the same size as layer "B."

Note:  The layer with the higher layer number always displays as the top layer.


Arranging Layers with the Layer Tool

Use the Layer tool to arrange layers on the page of the active graph window.  Select Tools:Layer to open the Layer tool.  Select the Arrange tab to access the layer arrangement controls.

Note:  In the following button descriptions, if you have any child layers that are spatially linked to a parent layer (% of Linked Layer is selected from the Units drop-down list on the Size/Speed tab of the child layer's Plot Details dialog box), then Origin maintains the parent/child relationship during layer arrangement.  For example, if your graph window contains five layers and layer 2 is a linked right Y axis of layer 1, then when you click one of the following buttons, Origin will arrange the layers such that layer 2 maintains its right Y position with layer 1.

•	To arrange the layers in the active graph window in a column, click the Single Column button.  To modify the gap between layers, edit the value in the associated text box and click again on the Single Column button.

•	To arrange the layers in the active graph window in a row, click the Single Row button.  To modify the gap between layers, edit the value in the associated text box and click again on the Single Row button.

•	To arrange the layers in the active graph window into an array, click the Array button.  The dimensions of the array are determined by the values in the associated Columns and Rows text boxes.  To alter the array dimensions, edit the values in the associated text boxes and click again on the Array button.

If the Add New Layers check box is selected, Origin adds the required layers to complete the array.  The size of the existing layers are reduced to accommodate the new layers in the page.

If the Add New Layers check box is cleared, Origin configures the page for the specified number of rows and columns.  However, no new layers are created.  The size of the existing layers are reduced to accommodate potential layers.

For each of these buttons, Origin uses the text box values in the Margins group to set the page margins.  For more information, see  The Layer Tool.


Arranging Layers using the Layer's Plot Details Dialog Box

You can arrange multiple layers in your graph by explicitly specifying the size and location for each layer.  Layer dimensions are specified on the Size/Speed tab of the Plot Details dialog box when the layer icon is selected on the left side of the dialog box.  To open the layer's Plot Details dialog box, click on the desired layer to make it active and select Format:Layer.

The layer frame is the bounding box that defines the size and shape of the layer.  Type values for the width, height and offsets for the layer in the associated text boxes of the Layer Area group.  Select the desired units used to measure the frame from the Units drop-down list.


Manually Positioning Layers on the Page

To move a layer, first select the layer by clicking on an axis to generate a highlighted boundary.  Then click anywhere within the layer and drag to a new location within the page.  Click outside of the layer, but within the graph window, to fix the new location.

To facilitate positioning of the layer in the page, Origin provides an axis grid.  You can use the axis grid to aid in manually positioning axes on the page of the active graph window.  To display the axis grid, select View:Show:Axis Grid.  Select the layer you want to move by clicking on the axis to generate a highlighted boundary.  Move the axis using the grid lines as a guide.  To ensure that the layer's axes position on a grid line, select Format:Snap Axes to Grid.  This menu command is checked when selected.

Note:  To control the spacing of the axis grid, select Tools:Options to open the Options dialog box.  Select the Page tab and type or select the desired value (in pixels) from the Axis combination box.


The Layer Tool

The Layer tool provides easy access to layer procedures including the following:

•	Adding layers to the active graph window.

•	Specifying the axes scale type for added layers.

•	Arranging layers on the page.

•	Specifying the page dimensions.

•	Swapping the page location of two layers.

The Add Tab of the Layer Tool

1)	The Add Tab

The Control Buttons

Click the Normal X and Y button to add a layer with independent axes to the active graph window.

Click the Linked Top X button to add a linked layer displaying a top X axis.  The new layer is linked to the layer that was active when the button was clicked.

Click the Linked Right Y button to add a linked layer displaying a right Y axis.  The new layer is linked to the layer that was active when the button was clicked.

Click the Linked Top X and Right Y button to add a linked layer displaying a top X and right Y axis.  The new layer is linked to the layer that was active when the button was clicked.

Click the Linked Inset button to add a linked inset layer displaying a bottom X and left Y axis.  The new layer displays as an inset in the layer that was active when the Linked Inset button was clicked.  The inset layer is created with a link to this layer.

Click the Linked Inset with Data button to add a linked inset layer displaying a bottom X and left Y axis.  This button functions the same as the Linked Inset button, however the inset layer displays all the data plots that are included in the parent layer.

The X Scale List Box with Spin Buttons

Select the X axis scale for the new layer by clicking on the spin buttons until the desired scale type displays in the list box.

The Y Scale List Box with Spin Buttons

Select the Y axis scale for the new layer by clicking on the spin buttons until the desired scale type displays in the list box.

2)	The Arrange Tab

Click on this tab to access the Arrange options.

The Arrange Tab of the Layer Tool

The Control Buttons

For a discussion on how these buttons handle a child layer that is spatially linked to a parent layer, see  Arranging Layers with the Layer Tool.

Click the Single Column button to arrange the layers in the active graph window in a column.  To modify the gap between layers and set the page margins, edit the value in the Vertical Gap text box and click again on the Single Column button.

Click the Single Row button to arrange the layers in the active graph window in a row.  To modify the gap between layers and set the page margins, edit the value in the Horizontal Gap text box and click again on the Single Row button.

Click the Array button to arrange the layers in the active graph window into an array.  The dimensions of the array are determined by the values in the associated Columns and Rows text boxes.  To alter the array dimensions, edit the values in the associated text boxes and click again on the Array button.  (The text box values in the Margins group determine the page margins when you click the Array button.)

If the Add New Layers check box is selected, Origin adds the required layers to complete the array.  The size of the existing layers are reduced to accommodate the new layers in the page.

If the Add New Layers check box is cleared, Origin configures the page for the specified number of rows and columns.  However, no new layers are created.  The size of the existing layers are reduced to accommodate potential layers.

The Margins Group

To alter the margins of the page, edit the associated text boxes in this group.  To view the changes, click again on either the Single Column, Single Row, or Array button.

The Move Layers Group

To exchange the physical location of any two layers on your graph, specify the layers in the A and B text boxes and then click the Swap Layers A and B button.  For a complete discussion on this, see  Exchanging Layer Positions with the Layer Tool.

To move a layer so that it displays in the same position (and size) as another layer, specify the layers in the A and B text boxes and then click the Move Layer A to B button.  For a complete discussion on this, see  Overlaying Layers with the Layer Tool.


General Tips on Editing the Axes

Each 2D graph layer contains a set of X and Y coordinate axes.  The set of X and Y coordinate axes includes a bottom X, top X, left Y, and right Y axis.  By default, for most 2D graphs only the bottom X and left Y axes display in the layer.  However, you have complete control over the display properties of all four axes in the layer.

3D graphs contain a set of X, Y and Z coordinate axes.  This axes set includes the bottom X, top X, left Y, right Y, front Z, and back Z axis.  Like the 2D graphs, not all the axes may display by default in your 3D graph.  However, you have complete control over the display properties of all six axes in the 3D graph.

The properties of the X, Y, and Z axes are controlled in the respective Axis dialog box.  There are a number of ways to open the Axis dialog box.

•	Double-click on an axis, tick, tick label, or axis break.

•	Right-click on an axis, tick, tick label, or axis break and select Scale, Tick Labels, or Properties from the shortcut menu.

•	Right-click in (or near) the layer containing the axis you want to edit and select Axis from the shortcut menu.  (This shortcut menu command always opens the Axis dialog box with the X axis controls active.)

•	Select Format:Axes:Axis Type or Format:Axis Tick Labels:Axis Tick Label Type.

Once the Axis dialog box is open, controls are available on multiple tabs to edit the currently selected axis.  The currently selected axis is referenced in the Axis dialog box title (for example, Y Axis - Layer 1).  The currently selected axis is also reflected in the Selection list box on the left side of the dialog box (for example, Vertical).

The Axis Dialog Box Displaying the Y Axes Controls

To edit the properties of other axes in your graph layer, you can select the desired icon from the Selection list box.  The icons available from the Selection list box depend on the currently active Axis dialog box tab.

The following icons are provided from the Selection list box:

Horizontal:  This is by default the bottom and top X axes.  However, if you have exchanged the X and Y axes (Graph:Exchange X-Y Axis) or if you are editing an axis of a bar, floating bar, or stacked bar graph, then the Horizontal icon is associated with the left and right Y axes.

Vertical:  This is by default the left and right Y axes.  However, if you have exchanged the X and Y axes (Graph:Exchange X-Y Axis) or if you are editing an axis of a bar, floating bar, or stacked bar graph, then the Vertical icon is associated with the bottom and top X axes.

Z Axes:  This is by default the front and back Z axes.

Bottom:  This is by default the bottom X axis (except if the X and Y axes have been exchanged or if you are editing bar-style graphs).

Top:  This is by default the top X axis (except if the X and Y axes have been exchanged or if you are editing bar-style graphs).

Left:  This is by default the left Y axis (except if the X and Y axes have been exchanged or if you are editing bar-style graphs).

Right:  This is by default the right Y axis (except if the X and Y axes have been exchanged or if you are editing bar-style graphs).

Front:  This is by default the front Z axis.

Back:  This is by default the back Z axis.

After you finish editing the properties of an axis, you can begin editing any other axis in your graph by selecting the appropriate icon from the Selection list box.  To prevent your selections from applying to your graph, click the Cancel button at any time during the editing process (but before clicking Apply).


Axes and Axes Titles

Origin provides controls to completely customize the axes and associated titles to enhance the presentation of your data.  The following Help topics review these options.

More:

Turning On and Off the Display of the Axes and Tick Labels

Changing the Axis Scale and Increment

Changing the Axis Scale Type

Controlling the Axis Rescale Mode

Adding, Deleting, and Formatting an Axis Break in a 2D Graph

Adding a Grid

Adding, Editing, and Positioning an Axis Title

Adjusting the Axis Position

Exchanging the X and Y Axes in a 2D Graph Layer

Linking Axes in Different Layers


Turning On and Off the Display of the Axes and Tick Labels

In general, Origin's 2D graph layers can display a left Y, right Y, bottom X, and top X axis and associated tick labels.  Origin's 3D graph layers can display front Z and back Z axes and tick labels - in addition to the X and Y axes.  Origin provides you complete control over which of these axes and tick labels are displayed in the layer.

Most of Origin's 2D graphs display only the bottom X and left Y axes and tick labels in the layer.  To display the top X axis and right Y axis, perform the following steps.

To display the top X and right Y axes

1)	Double-click on the X axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Title & Format tab.

3)	Select Top from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the Show Axis & Ticks check box.

5)	Select Right from the Selection list box.

6)	Select the Show Axis & Ticks check box.

7)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

Note that in the previous procedure the top X and right Y axes were displayed, but not their associated tick labels.  To turn on the display of the associated tick labels, perform the following steps in the Axis dialog box.

1)	Select the Tick Labels tab.

2)	Select Top from the Selection list box.

3)	Select the Show Major Labels check box.

4)	Select Right from the Selection list box.

5)	Select the Show Major Labels check box.

6)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

To hide any of the axes in your graph layer, open the Axis dialog box and then clear the Show Axis & Ticks check box on the Title & Format tab when the desired axis is selected from the Selection list box.  Similarly, to hide the associated tick labels, clear the Show Major Labels check box on the Tick Labels tab when the desired axis is selected from the Selection list box.

In addition to the controls on the Axis dialog box, Origin provides a shortcut menu command to control the display state of any axis and its tick labels in your graph.  To hide an axis and its tick labels, right-click on the axis or tick labels and select Hide Axis from the shortcut menu.  The axis and tick labels are hidden when this command is checked.  Furthermore, when you select Hide Axis, the Show Axis & Ticks check box on the Title & Format tab and the Show Major Labels check box on the Tick Labels tab of the Axis dialog box are automatically cleared.  Therefore, to display the hidden axis and tick labels, you can reselect the shortcut menu command (which can be difficult because the axis is hidden), or you can re-open the Axis dialog box and select the associated check boxes on the Title & Format tab and the Tick Labels tab.  To turn off the display of an individual tick label, see  The Custom Tick Labels Tab.


Changing the Axis Scale and Increment

When plotting data or importing data into a graph window, Origin displays an X, Y, and Z axis range which includes all data points in the data plot.  To customize the range of data displayed in the graph, you can modify the X, Y, and Z axes scales.

To change the axis scale and customize the increment

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Scale tab.

3)	Select Horizontal, Vertical, or Z Axes from the Selection list box.

4)	Type the desired starting axis scale value in the From text box.

5)	Type the desired final axis scale value in the To text box.

6)	To set the major tick increment for the axis, select the Increment radio button.  Type the desired increment between major ticks in the associated text box.  To specify the number of major ticks displayed on the axis, select the # Major Ticks radio button.  Type the desired number of major ticks in the associated text box.

7)	Specify the number of minor ticks to display between adjacent major ticks in the # Minor Ticks text box.

8)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

More:

Changing the Axis Scale using the Enlarger Tool

Changing the Axis Scale using the Center Shortcut Menu Command

Changing the Axis Scale Using the Axis Zoom In and Axis Zoom Out Shortcut Menu Commands


Changing the Axis Scale using the Enlarger Tool

To change the axis scale and enlarge a desired region of a data plot, use the Enlarger tool from the Tools toolbar.  Click on the Enlarger tool to select it.  Then click-and-drag a rectangle around the desired graph region.  When you release the mouse button, the axes rescale to display only the selected data.

Note:  Though the Enlarger tool is available for 3D graphs, its use is not recommended.  Use an alternative axis scale editing method.


Changing the Axis Scale using the Center Shortcut Menu Command

To change the starting and ending axis scale values so that a selected region of a data plot is centered in the layer, right-click on the desired X, Y, or Z axis location (just outside of the axis) and select Center from the shortcut menu.  Origin rescales the axis so that the X, Y, or Z location that you right-clicked on displays in the center of the graph layer.  For example, if the X axis scale displays from 0 to 10 and you right-click and select Center at tick label 8, Origin rescales the axis so that tick label 8 is at the center of the graph window.

To return the axis scale to the full range, right-click in the axis region and select Rescale to Show All from the shortcut menu.


Changing the Axis Scale Using the Axis Zoom In and Axis Zoom Out Shortcut Menu Commands

To change the starting and ending axis scale values so that a selected region of a data plot is expanded, right-click on the desired X, Y, or Z axis location (just outside of the axis) and select Axis Zoom In from the shortcut menu.  Origin rescales the axis so that the X, Y, or Z location that you right-clicked on displays in the center of the graph layer with an expanded view.  Axis Zoom Out has an opposite affect.

To return the axis scale to the full range, right-click in the axis region and select Rescale to Show All from the shortcut menu.


Changing the Axis Scale Type

The "axis scale type" specifies the type of "ruler" used to determine data point location in the graph.

To change the axis scale type

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Scale tab.

3)	Select Horizontal, Vertical, or Z Axes from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the desired axis scale type from the Type drop-down list.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

To create a graph with an offset reciprocal scale

The offset reciprocal scale type is defined as x' = 1/(x+273.14), where 273.14 is the absolute temperature corresponding to zero degrees Celsius.

1)	Click the New Graph button on the Standard toolbar.

2)	Double-click on the X axis.

3)	Select the Scale tab if it is not already active.

4)	Type 0 in the From text box and 100 in the To text box.

5)	Select Offset Reciprocal from the Type drop-down list.

6)	Type 10 in the Increment text box.

7)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

8)	Select Edit:New Layer (Axes):(Linked): Top X.

9)	Press CTRL while double-clicking on the layer 2 icon located in the upper-left corner of the graph.  This action opens the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

10)	Select the Link Axes Scales tab.

11)	Select the Custom radio button in the X Axis Link group.

12)	In this same group, type 1/(X1+273.14) in the X1 text box.

13)	Type 1/(X2+273.14) in the X2 text box.

14)	Click OK to close the dialog box.


Controlling the Axis Rescale Mode

Origin provides an option to control the conditions under which the axis is rescaled.

To control the axis rescale mode

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Scale tab.

3)	Select Horizontal, Vertical, or Z Axes from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the desired rescale mode from the Rescale drop-down list.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.


Adding, Deleting, and Formatting an Axis Break in a 2D Graph

A single axis break can be added to any X or Y axis in a 2D graph.  An axis break is a gap inserted into an axis to indicate that a range of values is skipped (not displayed in the graph).

To add an axis break

1)	Double-click on the X (or Y) axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Break tab.

3)	Select Horizontal or Vertical from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the Show Break check box.

5)	Type the desired starting break value in the From text box.

6)	Type the desired final break value in the To text box.

7)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

More:

Editing or Removing the Axis Break

Connecting a Line Across an Axis Break


Editing or Removing the Axis Break

To edit or remove an existing axis break, double-click on the axis break.  This action opens the Break tab of the Axis dialog box.  To remove the break, clear the Show Break check box.  To modify the break, edit the options on this tab and click OK.


Connecting a Line Across an Axis Break

To connect the clipped ends of a line or a line+symbol data plot at an axis break, select the Connect Line Across Axis Break check box on the Miscellaneous tab of the page's Plot Details dialog box (Format:Page).  In a line+symbol data plot, the line across the break region displays as a dashed line.


Adding a Grid

Grid lines can be displayed at major and minor ticks for the X, Y, and Z axes.

To add grid lines to the graph

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Grid Lines tab.

3)	Select Horizontal, Vertical, or Z Axes from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the Major Grids and/or the Minor Grids check boxes to display the respective grid.

5)	Customize the grid display in the associated drop-down lists.

6)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

Note:  The grid lines which are displayed from the Axis dialog box differ from the axis and object grids used for alignment.  The grid lines controlled in the Axis dialog box are straight lines that emanate from major and/or minor tick marks.  If displayed in the graph window, these lines also appear in the printed graph.  The axis and object grids are controlled by the View:Show:Grid Type menu commands.  These grids are available to facilitate axis and object placement on the page.  They do not appear in the printed graph.

More:

Displaying the Grid in Front of (or Behind) the Data


Displaying the Grid in Front of (or Behind) the Data

Grid lines can be displayed in front of, or behind, the data in your 2D graphs.  To change the current display, press CTRL while double-clicking on the respective layer icon in the upper-left corner of the graph window.  This action opens the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Display tab.  Select the Grid on Top of Data check box in the Data Drawing Options group to display the grid lines in front of the data.  Clear the check box to display the grid lines behind the data.


Adding, Editing, and Positioning an Axis Title

Origin's graph window templates attach a default title to each axis.  In most cases, the default axis titles are displayed when the graph window is created.

To display an axis title for an axis which currently does not include a title

1)	Select Format:Axis Titles:X (Y or Z) Axis Title to open the Text Control dialog box for the associated axis.

2)	Type the desired title text into the text box and format the text as desired.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box.  The axis title displays near the center of the axis.

To edit an existing axis title

1)	Double-click on the desired axis title to open the associated Text Control dialog box.

2)	Edit the axis title in the text box as desired.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

Axis titles are displayed to the outside of the axis.  The initial distance between the axis tick labels and the axis title is controlled on the Axis tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).  Though you can change the location of an axis title by clicking and dragging on the title, movement of the axis title is restricted to a space near the axis tick labels.  If you attempt to move the axis title outside the accepted range, the axis title will display back in the default location.

If you need to move an axis title outside the accepted region, press ALT while double-clicking on the axis title.  This action opens the object's Label Control dialog box.  Select the Layer Frame radio button in the Attach To group and click OK.


Adjusting the Axis Position

An axis can be moved to a new position relative to the other axes in the layer.

To re-position an axis

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Title & Format tab.

3)	Select Bottom, Top, Left, Right, Front, or Back from the Selection list box.

4)	Select the desired option from the Axis Position drop-down list.  You can offset the axis using the "% From" option, or you can display the axis at a specific X or Y axis location using the "At Position" option.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

More:

Aligning Axes to an Axis Grid


Aligning Axes to an Axis Grid

Origin provides two distinct alignment grids, an object grid and an axis grid.  Use the axis grid to aid in manually positioning axes on the page of the active graph window.  To display the axis grid, select View:Show:Axis Grid.  Select the layer you want to move by clicking on the axis to generate a highlighted boundary.  Move the axis using the grid lines as a guide.  To ensure that the layer's axes position on a grid line, select Format:Snap Axes to Grid.  This menu command is checked when selected.

To control the spacing of the axis grid, select Tools:Options.  This menu command opens the Options dialog box.  Select the Page tab.  Type or select the desired value from the Axis combination box.


Exchanging the X and Y Axes in a 2D Graph Layer

To exchange the X and Y axes so that the X axis becomes the vertical axis and the Y axis becomes the horizontal axis, select Graph:Exchange X-Y Axis when the desired 2D graph window is active.


Linking Axes in Different Layers

Links can be created between axes scales in multiple layer graphs.  The link between axes can be a straight one-to-one link, or a custom link mediated by a mathematical expression.  Axes links are created on the Link Axes tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box (Format:Layer).


Ticks and Tick Labels

Origin provides additional control of ticks and tick labels.  Tick labels are the axis scale values that appear next to major (and minor) tick marks on an axis.

More:

Customizing Ticks

Customizing Tick Labels

Advanced Control over Tick Labels


Customizing Ticks

The display of ticks is controlled in the Axis dialog box.

To control tick display

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Scale tab.

3)	Select Horizontal, Vertical, or Z Axes from the Selection list box.

4)	To set the major tick increment for the axis, select the Increment radio button.  Enter the desired increment between major ticks in the associated text box.  To specify the number of major ticks displayed on the axis, select the # Major Ticks radio button.  Enter the desired number of major ticks in the associated text box.

5)	Specify the number of minor ticks to display between adjacent major ticks in the # Minor Ticks text box.

6)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.

The major tick length is set from the Major Tick Length combination box on the Title & Format tab.  Type or select the desired length in units of .1 point.


Customizing Tick Labels

To customize the tick labels associated with the axes

1)	Double-click on the X, Y, or Z axis to open the respective Axis dialog box.

2)	Select the Tick Labels tab.

3)	Select Bottom, Top, Left, Right, Front, or Back from the Selection list box.

4)	Modify the tick label display as desired, including the type of tick label, font, and color.  You can also display a prefix or suffix with each label.  The Prefix and Suffix text boxes support special formatting commands to customize the label display (for example, superscripts and subscripts).  For information on using special formatting commands, see Customizing Font Styles and Adding Special Characters to Text Labels.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box and view the changes in the graph window.


Advanced Control over Tick Labels

Origin provides advanced control over tick labels.  These options include tick label formatting, alignment, and control over individual tick labels.  To access the advanced tick label control, select the Custom Tick Labels tab of the Axis dialog box.


Reference Section:  The Axis Dialog Box

The tabs of the Axis dialog box provide complete control over the display of the axis-related elements in your graph layer.  After you begin customizing one of the axes, you can edit any other axis in your graph layer by selecting the appropriate icon from the Selection list box.

The Axis dialog box includes an Apply button available from any tab.  Click this button to update the graph based on the settings on the current tab, plus any changes on other tabs since you last clicked Apply.  After updating the graph, you can continue editing the current tab or you can switch to another Axis dialog box tab.

For a general discussion on this dialog box, including:

•	Methods for opening the Axis dialog box.

•	Using the Selection list boxes.

•	Using the Show Axis check boxes.

see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

More:

The Scale Tab

The Title & Format Tab

The Grid Lines Tab

The Break Tab

The Tick Labels Tab

The Minor Tick Labels Tab

The Custom Tick Labels Tab


The Scale Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The From Text Box

Set the initial scale value in this text box.

3)	The To Text Box

Set the final scale value in this text box.

4)	The Type Drop-down List

Select the desired axis scale type from this drop-down list.  The scale type determines the type of "ruler" used to determine data point location.  Origin provides the following axis scale types:

•	Linear scale, standard linear scale:  X'=X.

•	log10 scale, base 10 logarithmic scale:  X'=log(X).

•	Probability scale:  Represents the inverse of a cumulative Gaussian distribution.  Plotting a cumulative Gaussian distribution produces a sigmoidally-shaped curve.  This curve, when displayed on a probability scale, appears as a straight line.  Since probabilities are expressed as percentages, all values must fall between 0 and 100.  The probability scale range is 0.0001 to 99.999.

•	Probit scale:  Like the probability scale, a sigmoidally-shaped curve plots as a straight line.  In this case, however, the scale is linear, and the increment between tick marks is exactly one standard deviation.  The value "5" on the scale shows the mean, or 50% probability.  "6" is one standard deviation away, etc.

•	Reciprocal scale:  Reciprocal scale, where X'=1/X.

•	Offset Reciprocal scale:  Offset reciprocal scale, where X'=1/X+offset.  Offset is defined as 273.14, where 273.14 is the absolute temperature for 0° C.

•	Logit scale, uses the relation:  logit=ln(Y/100-Y).  As with the probability and probit scales, a sigmoidally shaped curve plots as a straight line.

•	ln scale:  natural log scale (base e logarithmic scale).

•	log2 scale:  base 2 logarithmic scale.

5)	The Rescale Drop-down List

Select the desired axis rescale criterion from this drop-down list.

•	Manual:  The axis is not scaleable.  If you try to change the scale or perform an operation which changes the scale (for example, using the Enlarger tool), Origin preserves the From and To values.  If both axes in a 2D graph layer are set to Manual, using the Enlarger tool opens a dialog box asking if you want to change to Normal mode and rescale.  Click Yes to temporarily override the scaling restriction.

•	Normal:  The axis is scaleable.  Alter the axis scale and use the Enlarger tool (for 2D graph layers) without restriction.

•	Auto:  This option is identical to the Normal option, but also allows Origin to automatically scale the axis to accommodate plotted data, if necessary.

•	Fixed From:  The "From" value of the axis is fixed and can only be changed by editing the From text box value in the Axis dialog box.

•	Fixed To:  The "To" value of the axis is fixed and can only be changed by editing the To text box value in the Axis dialog box.

6)	The Increment Radio Button and Text Box

Select this radio button and set the major tick increment for this axis in the associated text box.  Tick labels are placed at each major tick mark.  For example, type 10 to display a major tick mark at every tenth value.

If the scale units for this axis are time series values, then the value in the Increment text box must indicate the increment in appropriate time series terms.

Time Series Step Increment Units and Abbreviations

sec:  s

min:  m

hour:  h

day:  d

week:  w

month:  mo

quarter:  q

year:  y

For time series graphs, set the size of the increment by typing a number followed by an increment unit.  For example, 1month sets a major tick increment of one month.  4Q sets a major tick increment of four quarters.  DO NOT leave a space between the number and the increment unit.

7)	The # Major Ticks Radio Button and Text Box

Select this radio button to set the absolute number of major ticks displayed on the axis.  Type the desired value in the associated text box.

The maximum number of major ticks is controlled on the Axis tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

8)	The # Minor Ticks Text Box

Specify the number of minor ticks to display between adjacent major ticks in this text box.  For example, select the Increment radio button, type 1 in the associated text box, and type 1 in the # Minor Ticks text box to set the tick sub-step to 0.5.  One minor tick will display between each pair of major ticks.

If the scale units for this axis are time series values, then Origin uses the value in the # Minor Ticks text box to automatically determine the most appropriate minor tick labels.  This option is available only if the Enable Minor Labels check box is selected on the Minor Tick Labels tab of the Axis dialog box.

9)	The First Tick Text Box

Specify the position of the first major tick, and the increment for each minor tick, in the First Tick text box.  This text box can be left blank for most graphs.  However, when using calendar-accurate date values as tick labels, you may want to specify the value of the first major tick label to be displayed, and at what value subsequent minor ticks should fall.  For example, if your X axis range runs from 1/1/99 to 12/31/99, you could specify that the first major tick label fall at 1/4/99, and that all subsequent minor tick marks fall on a Monday.

To edit the First Tick text box, type the desired major tick value.  To specify both a major and minor tick value, include a comma after the major tick value, followed by the minor tick value.

When working with date values, Origin recognizes most common date notations.  For example, to create an axis that starts at 1/4/99 and has minor tick marks at all Mondays, enter any of the following in the First Tick text box:

•	1/4/99, Monday

•	1-4-99, Mon

•	Jan 4 1999, M


The Title & Format Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Show Axis & Ticks Check Box

Select this check box to display the axis and ticks for the current axis selection.

3)	The Title Text Box

Type an axis title in this text box.

4)	The Color Drop-down List

Select an axis and tick color from this drop-down list.

5)	The Thickness (pts) Combination Box

Type or select the desired line thickness (in points, where 1 point=1/72 inch) for the axis and ticks from this combination box.

6)	The Major Tick Length Combination Box

Type or select the desired major tick length (in points, where 1 point=1/72 inch) from this combination box.

7)	The Major Ticks Drop-down List

Control the display of the major ticks from this drop-down list.

8)	The Minor Ticks Drop-down List

Control the display of the minor ticks from this drop-down list.

9)	The Axis Position Drop-down List and the Percent/Value Text Box

To change the position of the current axis, select the desired option from this drop-down list.

•	Bottom (X), Top (X), Left(Y), Right (Y), Front (Z), or Back (Z):  Move the axis back to its default location.

•	% from Bottom (Top, etc.):  Offset the axis from its default location.  Type a "percent-of-axis-length" value in the Percent/Value text box.  For axes in 2D graph layers, type a positive value to move the axis away from the center of the page.  Type a negative value to move the axis toward the center of the page.

•	At Position=:  Move the axis to a specific X or Y value.  Select this option from the drop-down list and enter the X or Y value in the Percent/Value text box.

10)	The Apply To Group

Select the Color check box to apply the current selection from the Color drop-down list to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Thickness check box to apply the current selection from the Thickness (pts) combination box to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Ticks check box to apply the current selection from the Major Ticks drop-down list and the Minor Ticks drop-down list to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Tick Length check box to apply the current selection from the Major Tick Length combination box to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).


The Grid Lines Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Major Grids Group

Select the Major Grids check box to display major grids.  Major grid lines are straight lines that emanate from major tick marks.

Select the desired line color and line type from the associated drop-down lists.

Type or select the desired line thickness (in points) from the Thickness (pts) combination box.

3)	The Minor Grids Group

Select the Minor Grids check box to display minor grids.  Minor grid lines are straight lines that emanate from minor tick marks.

Select the desired line color and line type from the associated drop-down lists.

Type or select the desired line thickness (in points) from the Line Thickness (pts) combination box.

4)	The Apply To Group

Select the Grid Lines check box to apply the current selection from the Line Color and the Line Type drop-down lists, and the Thickness (pts) combination box for both the Major Grids and the Minor Grids group to:   This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

5)	The Additional Lines Group

Select the Opposite check box to display a straight line opposite the current axis.  Select the Y=0 (X=0, or Z=0) check box to display a straight line at Y=0 (X=0, or Z=0).


The Break Tab

Note:  You can not add an axis break to the axes in a 3D graph layer.

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Show Break Check Box

Select this check box to display an axis break.

3)	The Break Region Group

The From text box value determines the last value displayed before the axis beak.  The To text box value determines the first value displayed after the axis break.

4)	The Break Position Group

The % of Axis Length text box value determines the position of the break on the axis.  This value is in units of % of axis length.  For example, type 50 in this text box to position an axis break at the mid-point of the axis.  If necessary, Origin will alter the scale on either side of the break to accommodate the specified position.

5)	The Log10 Scale After Break Check Box

Select this check box to set the post-break scale to log10.

6)	The Scale Increment Group

The Before Break and the After Break text box values determine the pre-break and post-break step increment.  Origin draws a major tick mark and a tick label at each step increment interval.

7)	The Minor Ticks Group

The Before Break and the After Break text box values determine the number of minor ticks (between major ticks) before and after the break.  This setting overrides the # Minor Ticks text box value on the Scale tab.


The Tick Labels Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Show Major Labels Check Box

Select this check box to display major tick labels.  This display is also controlled on the Minor Tick Labels tab and the Custom Tick Labels tab.

3)	The Type Drop-down List

Select the desired label type from this drop-down list.  The options are:  numeric, text from dataset, time, date, month, day of week, column headings, and tick indexed dataset.

The default selection in this drop-down list reflects the column type from the worksheet (the Display selection in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box).  When you edit the drop-down list, the worksheet column type remains unchanged.

After selecting the desired option from this drop-down list, you may have to adjust the axis scale and increment on the Scale tab.  For example, to use the Day of Week option as tick labels along the X axis, select the Scale tab and set the scale from 0 to 6, and the step increment to 1.

•	Numeric:  The tick labels are decimal numbers representing the axis scale range.

•	Text from Dataset:  Uses a dataset as the source of the tick labels.  You can select a dataset from any worksheet in the project by typing or selecting the dataset from the Dataset combination box (for example, data1_c).  For each major tick label, Origin checks what the tick label value of numeric type would be (using the settings on the Scale tab).  It then uses that numeric value as a row number, and displays the cell value in the selected dataset at that row number for the tick label.

•	Time:  Displays tick labels in 24-hour clock format, with hour:minute:second:fraction-of-second separated by semicolons.

•	Date:  Displays tick labels as calendar-accurate date values.  For information on date values in the worksheet, see Dates and Times in the Worksheet.

•	Month:  Displays tick labels as month values.  This option accepts numeric or text dataset values.

•	Day of Week:  Displays tick labels as days of the week.

•	Column Headings:  Uses (plotted) worksheet column headings as tick labels.  Plot the desired datasets from the worksheet into the layer.  Select the Column Headings option from this drop-down list.  Origin creates tick labels from the headings of the plotted columns.  The tick labels derived from column headings are positioned along the axis such that the numeric axis scale value equals the column number.  For example, if the numeric axis tick label reads "5," Origin replaces that tick label with the heading of column 5.  (When counting columns, Origin ignores the X column, if there is one.)

•	Tick Indexed Dataset:  As with the Text from Dataset option, the Tick Indexed Dataset option uses a dataset as the source of the tick labels.  You can select a dataset from any worksheet in the project by typing or selecting the dataset from the Dataset combination box (for example, data1_c).  This option differs from the Text from Dataset option in that each dataset value is indexed to sequential major tick positions, starting with the first major tick on the axis.  Thus, the value in row one of the specified dataset displays at the first major tick, the value in row two displays at the second major tick, etc.

4)	The Font Drop-down List

Select the desired major and minor tick label font from this drop-down list.

5)	The Color Drop-down List

Select the desired major and minor tick label color from this drop-down list.

6)	The Bold Check Box

Select the Bold check box to bold major and minor tick labels.

7)	The Point Combination Box

Type or select the desired line thickness (in points) for the major and minor tick labels from the Point combination box.

8)	The Format Drop-down List

This drop-down list controls how the tick labels are formatted.  The drop-down list options differ depending on the selection from the Type drop-down list.

For format information, see Setting Up the Column Data Type and Working with Different Data Formats.

9)	The Divide By Factor Text Box

Each major and minor tick label is divided by the number in this text box.

10)	The Set Decimal Places Check Box and Text Box

To specify the number of decimal places displayed in the numeric tick labels, select this check box and type the desired value in the associated text box.

11)	The Prefix Text Box

Type a prefix in this text box to display before the major and minor tick labels.

Note:  The Prefix and Suffix text boxes support special formatting commands (for example, superscript and subscript).

12)	The Suffix Text Box

Type a suffix in this text box to display after the tick labels.  For example:  mm, μF, K.

13)	The Apply To Group

Select the Font check box to apply the current selection from the Font drop-down list to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Color check box to apply the current selection from the Color drop-down list to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Point check box to apply the current selection from the Point combination box to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).

Select the Bold check box to apply the current selection from the Bold check box to:  This Layer, This Window, or All Windows (in the current project).


The Minor Tick Labels Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Show Major Labels Check Box

To display minor tick labels, major tick labels must be displayed.

Select the Show Major Labels check box to display major tick labels.  The major tick label display is also controlled on the Tick Labels tab and on the Custom Tick Labels tab.

3)	The Minor Labels Group

Select the Enable Minor Labels check box to display minor tick labels.

Select the Minor Labels on Major Ticks check box to display both a minor tick label and a major tick label for each major tick.  This option is only meaningful for time series labels, in which you specify different tick label types for major and minor tick marks.  For example, month and day.

To view both labels in the graph, type a value in the Offset Major by % text box.  The major tick labels move the specified distance away from the center of the page, in units of % of font height.

4)	The Other Options Group

Select the Box Around Labels check box to draw a box around each tick label.

Select the Plus Signs check box to display a plus "+" sign to the left of positive tick labels.

Select the Minus Signs check box to display a minus "-" sign to the left of negative tick labels.


The Custom Tick Labels Tab

1)	The Selection List Box

For a complete discussion on this list box, see  General Tips on Editing the Axes.

2)	The Show Major Labels Check Box

Select the Show Major Labels check box to display major tick labels.  The major tick label display is also controlled on the Tick Labels tab and on the Minor Tick Labels tab.

3)	The Rotation (degree) Text Box

Origin supports arbitrary rotation of tick labels.  Type a positive number in this text box to rotate labels counterclockwise, and a negative number to rotate labels clockwise.  If you are not using one of the vector fonts or TrueType fonts supplied with Windows 95 (or later) or Windows NT, or a typeface scaling software such as Adobe Type Manager, the rotated labels will not display on the screen.  They will, however, print correctly (provided the output device supports text rotation).

4)	The Tick to Label Drop-down List

Select the desired tick alignment option from this drop-down list.

•	Select Next to Ticks to align the left edge of the tick labels with the major ticks.

•	Select Center Between Ticks to align the tick labels equidistantly between adjacent major ticks.

•	Select Center (Default) to center the tick labels with the major ticks.

5)	The Labels Stay with Axis Check Box

Select this check box to ensure that tick labels always draw adjacent to the axis.  When this check box is cleared, the tick labels remain in their default position, even if the axis position is altered.

6)	The Offset in % Point Size Group

Type the desired value in these text boxes to control the horizontal and vertical position of the tick labels relative to the axis (100%=one full font width).

7)	The Special Ticks Group

Up to three tick labels can be customized for each axis:  the initial major tick, the final major tick, and a user-specified axis value.

•	The At Axis Begin Radio Buttons:  Add, remove, or specify an alternate tick label at the initial major tick mark on this axis.

•	The At Axis End Radio Buttons:  Add, remove, or specify an alternate tick label at the final major tick mark on this axis.

•	The Special Radio Buttons:  Add, remove, or specify an alternate tick label at the axis value specified in the At Axis Value text box.  Origin also adds a major tick mark at this value, if necessary.

Special Ticks Group Options

Auto:  The default tick label display settings are used.

Hide:  If there is a tick label displayed at this value, hide it.  Otherwise, do nothing.

Show:  If no tick label is displayed at this value, show one.  Otherwise, do nothing.

Manual:  Display the contents of the Labels text box at this axis value.  Use the %1 notation to include the current tick label at any point in the expression.  For example, if the current tick label reads "19", type %199 in the Labels text box to display "1999".  Use the $(x) notation to include the current tick label in a calculation, where x is the current tick label value.  For example, if the current tick label is "99", type $(1900+x) to display "1999".


Creating a Time Series Graph

Origin is Year 2000 Compliant.

Origin provides a powerful time series tick labeling feature that lets you automatically create axis tick labels with major tick units of seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, quarters, or years.  You can display any date value between 1/1/0100 and 12/31/9999.  Major and minor tick marks can be labeled separately.  For example, you could label the major ticks as years and the minor ticks as months.

The following tutorial illustrates the development of a time series graph.

Setting the Axis Tick Label as Date

1)	Click New Graph on the Standard toolbar to open a new graph window.

2)	Double-click on the X axis tick labels to open the Tick Labels tab of the Axis dialog box.

3)	Select Date from the Type drop-down list.  The Date tick label type specifies that calendar values are to be used as labels.

4)	To establish the tick label format, select Jan 2 from the Format drop-down list.

Setting the Label Options

1)	Select the Minor Tick Labels tab.

2)	Select the Enable Minor Labels check box in the Minor Labels group.  Minor tick marks on this axis will now be labeled.

3)	Select the Minor Label on Major Ticks check box in the Minor Labels group.  Minor tick labels will now display at major tick marks.

4)	Type 110 in the Offset Major by (%) text box in the Minor Labels group.  This will offset the major tick labels 110% of font height away from the axis.

Setting the Axis Range and Increment

1)	Select the Scale tab.

2)	Type 1/1/99 in the From text box, and 2/15/99 in the To text box.

3)	Select the Increment radio button if it is not already selected.

4)	Type 1week in the Increment text box (don't leave a space between "1" and "week").  This establishes a major tick increment of one week.  (Note:  You can specify the following increment values when working with a time series axis (shown with appropriate abbreviations):  sec (s), min (m), hour (h), day (d), week (w), month (mo), quarter (q), year (y).)

5)	To specify a minor tick increment of one day, type 6 in the # Minor Ticks text box.  Origin will draw six minor tick marks between each pair of major ticks.  A convenient feature of minor tick time series labels is that Origin automatically selects the appropriate type of minor tick value, based on the increment setting.  Since the major tick increment in the current example is one week, Origin will use the days of the week as minor tick values.  In other circumstances, Origin might choose to use months or quarters as the minor tick increment.

6)	Click OK to close the dialog box.


Data Plots:  General Tips

This section reviews general tips for customizing your graph.  For reference information on the Plot Details dialog box tabs associated with your data plots, see  Data Plots:  Customizing Specific Elements.

More:

Making a Data Plot Active

Selecting the Data Plot You Want to Edit

Switching Between Graph Types

Controlling the Display Properties of a Group of Data Plots

Controlling the Display Properties of a Data Point

Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot

Using Datasets as a Plotting Enhancement

Clipping the Data Plot to the Frame

Hiding Data Plots

Setting the Data Plot's Display Range

Rescaling the Axes to Display Data that Extends Beyond the Current Axes Range

Connecting Lines Across Missing Data

Displaying Every nth Data Point

Moving a Data Point

Deleting a Data Point

Displaying the Data Plot's Worksheet Data


Making a Data Plot Active

Within a graph layer, only one data plot can be active.  A data plot must be set active before you can use the Data Selector tool from the Tools toolbar, fit a curve, or perform any mathematical operation on the data plot.  The currently active data plot is displayed with a check in the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  This data list includes all data plots in the active graph layer.

To change the active data plot, perform one of the following operations:

•	Click to select the desired data plot from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.

•	Right-click in the layer and select the desired data plot from the data list at the bottom of the shortcut menu.

•	Right-click on the layer icon and select the desired data plot from the data list at the bottom of the shortcut menu.

•	Right-click on the desired data plot in the graph and select Set as Active from the shortcut menu.  (This shortcut menu command is not available if the data plot is already active.)

•	Right-click on the desired data plot in the graph and select the primary dataset name for the data plot from the bottom of the shortcut menu.

•	Click on the data plot type icon in the legend (if the Indicate Active Dataset check box is selected on the Legend tab of the Plot Details dialog box for the graph page (Format:Page).

The data list updates each time you add or remove a data plot from the active layer.  Since the list shows only those data plots in the active layer, the entire list changes whenever you switch the active layer.


Selecting the Data Plot You Want to Edit

All the controls for editing data points, data plots (including data labels and error bars), functions, layers, and the graph page are available in the Plot Details dialog box.  Because this dialog box provides controls for many elements in the graph, it can be opened a variety of ways.  The following operations open the Plot Details dialog box with the data plot controls active:

•	Double-click on the data plot in the graph window.

•	Right-click on the data plot and select Plot Details from the shortcut menu.  Note:  If you right-click in the layer, but not on a data plot, Origin opens the Plot Details dialog box for the first data plot in the Data menu data list.

•	Double-click on the data plot type icon displayed on the left side of the graph legend.  (Double-clicking on the legend text opens the Text Control dialog box.)

•	Right-click in the layer containing the data plot.  Select Plot Details from the shortcut menu.  On the left side of the Plot Details dialog box, click to select the desired data plot icon.  (Note:  If the data plot is part of a group in which the display properties between data plots are incrementing, Origin only allows you to select the first data plot icon of the group.)

•	Click on the graph window to make it the active window.  Select Format:Plot.  On the left side of the Plot Details dialog box, click to select the desired data plot icon.

•	Click on the graph window to make it the active window.  Select Data and then CTRL + click on any data plot in the data list to directly open the Plot Details dialog box with that data plot's controls active.

There are a number of additional methods for opening the Plot Details dialog box with the data plot controls active.  However, they involve additional mouse clicks or menu command selections.  Each of the additional methods require that you first make the desired data plot active.  After activating the data plot, you can open the Plot Details dialog box with the data plot's controls active from the layer's Plot Details shortcut menu command, the Format:Plot menu command, or by re-selecting the data plot from the data list.

Additionally, once the Plot Details dialog box is open, you can activate the data plot controls, independent of how you opened the dialog box.  The left side of the Plot Details dialog box provides a tree structure reflecting the layer, data plot, function, and data point structure in the graph.  You can open the Plot Details dialog box by editing any of these other elements in the graph.  You can then expand the tree on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box by clicking on the plus signs (+) to expose additional graph elements.  For example, if you open the Plot Details dialog box by double-clicking outside of the page, the dialog box displays the controls available for the page.  If you click on the plus sign next to the graph icon on the left side of the dialog box and then select a layer icon, the dialog box displays the controls available for the layer.  Similarly, you can click on the plus sign next to a layer icon to display the data plot icons in the layer.  You can then click on a data plot icon to display its controls in the Plot Details dialog box.

To disable the display of the tree structure, click the >> button in the Plot Details dialog box.  To re-display the tree structure, click the << button.


Switching Between Graph Types

After you plot your data using a particular graph template (for example, a scatter template), Origin allows you to change your graph type selection directly from the graph window.  To change the graph type, perform one of the following operations:

•	Make the desired data plot active and then click the desired graph type button on the 2D Graphs, the 2D Graphs Extended, or the 3D Graphs toolbars.

•	Open the Plot Details dialog box and select the desired data plot icon from the left side of the dialog box.  Select the desired graph type from the Plot Type drop-down list.

•	Right-click on the data plot and select Change to:Graph Type from the shortcut menu.

When you switch graph types using one of these three methods, Origin does not use the associated template to display the new graph type.  Instead, Origin maintains and applies the relevant data plot properties to the new graph type.  For example, if your current graph contains a line and symbol data plot with blue symbols and red lines, and you click the Scatter button on the 2D Graphs toolbar, Origin continues to display the symbols with blue color in the scatter data plot.  Furthermore, if you then click the Line+Symbol button on the 2D Graphs toolbar, Origin again displays the data plot with blue symbols and red lines.

When you switch graph types using one of these methods, if the selected data plot is part of a data plot group in which the display properties between data plots are incrementing, then each of the data plots in the group update with the new graph type.

Additionally, Origin prevents switching between some graph types.  For example, Origin prohibits switching between a line data plot and a ternary data plot, as the line data plot is comprised of XY values and the ternary data plot is comprised of XYZ values.  In the Plot Details dialog box and the data plot shortcut menu, Origin provides only supported graph types.  For the toolbar button method, Origin displays an Attention box when the switch is not supported.


Controlling the Display Properties of a Group of Data Plots

To simplify customizing the display properties of multiple data plots in a layer, Origin provides an option to group selected data plots.  When you group data plots, you can automatically increment specified display properties between data plots in the group.  For example, for a group of column data plots, you can automatically increment the border color and fill pattern (among other attributes) between data plots in the group.  Origin also provides an option to disable this feature, so that you can edit the display properties of grouped data plots independently.

Origin automatically groups data plots when you highlight more than one worksheet or Excel workbook column (or a range from more than one column) and then plot the data using one of Origin's plotting methods.  Furthermore, Origin automatically increments the display properties of the grouped data plots.

You can group data plots that are not currently grouped in the graph window using the Layer n dialog box.  Open the Layer n dialog box by double-clicking on the layer n icon in the graph window.  To create a data plot group in the Layer n dialog box, select the desired datasets from the Layer Contents list and click Group.  To remove the group status for a data plot group in the Layer n dialog box, click on one of the grouped data plots in the Layer Contents list and click Ungroup.

Note:  The following data plot types (and elements) can not be grouped:  3D XYZ scatter, 3D XYZ trajectory, vector graphs, error bars, and data labels.  Furthermore, you can not ungroup the following data plot types:  high-low-close charts, floating bar graphs, and floating column graphs.

When you open the Plot Details dialog box and select a data plot icon on the left side of the dialog box that is part of a data plot group in which the display properties are set to increment automatically, Origin displays the Group tab.  The controls available on this tab are dependent on the current graph type and the display selections that have been made on the associated data plot's Plot Details tabs.

The Group Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Edit Mode Group

Select the Independent radio button to format the display properties of the data plots in the group independently.  When the Independent radio button is selected, the Incremental check boxes are unavailable.  Edit the display of each data plot in the group by selecting the associated data plot icon on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box and then editing the desired controls on each of the tabs.

Select the Dependent radio button to automatically increment the display properties that are selected in the Incremental check boxes, for all data plots in the group.  (See the following section.)

2)	The Incremental Check Boxes

The check boxes that are available in this group are dependent on the current graph type, as well as the display settings for that graph type.  When a check box is selected in this group, Origin increments the display property for each data plot in the group.  For each selected check box, Origin first checks the current selection on the associated tab.  For example, for Symbol Fill Color, Origin checks the Fill Color selection on the Symbol tab.  Origin assigns that selection to the first data plot in the group, and then increments the display property using a pre-set list (for example, the color palette).

If a check box is not selected, then Origin does not increment the associated display property.  Instead, Origin displays each of the data plots using the current selection on the associated tab.  For example, in a grouped column graph in which Dense is selected from the Pattern drop-down list in the Fill group on the Pattern tab, if the Fill Pattern check box on the Group tab is not selected, Origin displays each of the columns with a Dense fill pattern.

The Incremental check boxes are only available if the current selection on the associated tab can be incremented between data plots.  For example, if you select Color Mapping:Dataset from the Fill Color button on the Symbol tab, then the Symbol Fill Color check box on the Group tab is unavailable.  If you want to increment a display property whose check box is unavailable on the Group tab, alter the setting on the associated tab.

3)	The Group Members View Box

This view box displays the current display settings for all the data plots in the group.  The view box updates as you change selections on the Group tab or on the associated data plot tabs.


Controlling the Display Properties of a Data Point

To modify the display of an individual data point, hold the CTRL key down while double-clicking on the data point.  This action opens the Plot Details dialog box for the individual data point.  The tree on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box displays a data point icon beneath the associated data plot icon.  Additionally, the worksheet row index number of the data point displays next to the icon.  Edit the dialog box (for the data point) as desired.

The individual data point can also be displayed in the legend.  For more information, see  Adding an Individual Data Point to the Legend.

After a data point has been edited using the CTRL+double-click option, the data point becomes an Origin object.  If you double-click on the same data point (without holding down the CTRL key), the Plot Details dialog box opens with the data point controls displayed.  To remove the object status from the data point, click once on the data point to generate a highlighted border around the point and press DELETE.  Alternatively, right-click on the data point and select Delete from the shortcut menu.  The data point now displays with the format of the data plot.


Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot

Origin provides a number of options for using color to present your data.  These options are available from the color controls in the Plot Details dialog box.  There are two types of color controls available:  color buttons with associated options and color drop-down lists.

Color buttons and associated options are provided when you are editing a data plot element that can be customized for each data point in a data plot.  Symbols and patterns are examples of elements that can be customized this way.  Color drop-down lists are provided when you are editing a data plot element that can not be customized for each data point.  Lines are examples of data plot elements that can not be customized for each data point in a data plot.

More:

Displaying Your Data Plot Using a Specified Color

Displaying Each Data Point in Your Data Plot Using Sequential Colors in the Color Palette

Using a Selected Dataset to Control the Color of Your Data Plot


Displaying Your Data Plot Using a Specified Color

This option is available from both the color buttons and from the color drop-down lists.  You can display a data plot element using a specified color in the color palette or you can define a new color.  To specify a color from the color palette, click the color button and select Individual Color:Color.  If you're editing a color drop-down list, select the desired color from the drop-down list.

Some of the color buttons and color drop-down lists include an Automatic color option which, when available, is selected by default.  For each color button or drop-down list with this option, the current color associated with Automatic is displayed on the button or in the drop-down list.  Origin selects the Automatic color using the following criteria:

How Origin Determines the Color for "Automatic"

When Automatic is selected for (Fill) Pattern Color, Origin uses the (Border) Color as the source color.

When Automatic is selected for (Drop Lines) Color, Origin uses the Symbol Color as the source color.

When Automatic is selected for Symbol Color, Origin uses the (Line) Color as the source color.  If the data plot does not include a Line tab, then display Black.

When Automatic is selected for (Symbol) Edge Color, Origin uses the (Line) Color as the source color.  If the data plot does not include a Line tab, then display Black.

When Automatic is selected for (Symbol) Fill Color, Origin uses the Default Symbol Fill Color drop-down list selection on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.

When Automatic is selected for (Error bar) Color, Origin uses the symbol Color.  If no symbol exists, (Line) Color.

Some of Origin's color buttons and color drop-down lists also include a None option.  When you select None, the data plot element display is transparent.

In addition to selecting a color, you can create a custom color from the color button options and from some of the color drop-down lists.  To create a custom color, click the color button and select Custom.  Right-click on the Custom button to open the Color dialog box.  After defining a custom color, the color displays in the Custom button.


Displaying Each Data Point in Your Data Plot Using Sequential Colors in the Color Palette

To increment the color of a data plot element (for example, symbol fill color) for all data points in a data plot, click the color button and select Increment.  Then select the first color in the sequence from the associated submenu.  Origin displays the selected sequence on the Increment button.  After clicking OK or Apply, Origin increments the color between data points following the sequence of colors in the color palette.

Note:  This color sequencing option is not available if the data plot is part of a data plot group, and the data plot element color that you want to sequence is set to increment between data plots on the Group tab (for example, Fill Color for grouped bar data plots).  To make the color sequence option available, clear the associated check box on the Group tab.  After editing the color, all data plots in the group reflect your color sequence settings.


Using a Selected Dataset to Control the Color of Your Data Plot

Origin provides three methods for using the values in a specified dataset to control the color of elements in a data plot.  These three methods are available from the data plot element's color button (for example, the Symbol Color button).  In each case, Origin uses the dataset values in the same worksheet row (or Excel workbook row) to control the data plot display.  Thus, for the data point defined by XY values in row 56, Origin uses the value in row 56 of the selected "color control" dataset.

If you control the color of a data plot element based on values in a dataset, and that data plot is part of a (dependent) data plot group, then Origin applies your setting to the first data plot in the group, and increments the setting for each of the remaining data plots in the group.  Origin does this by checking the worksheet column location of the first data plot's Y dataset, and compares this location to the worksheet column location of the "color control" dataset.  If the color control column is n columns to the right of the data plot's Y column, then Origin uses the column which is n columns to the right of each of the remaining data plot's Y columns to control the respective color.

Note:  You can not select a "color control" dataset that is located to the left of the Y or Z data plot column in the worksheet.  If necessary, move the desired worksheet column using the Move Right button on the Column toolbar.

Indexing

This option allows you to select a dataset whose values are used as index numbers for colors in the color palette.  For example, if the selected dataset contains values 2 and 5 in rows 1 and 2 respectively, Origin displays the data point associated with row 1 using the second color in the color palette, and the data point associated with row 2 using the fifth color in the color palette.  If a dataset value exceeds the number of colors in the color palette, Origin displays the data point in black.

To access this option, click the color button and select Indexing:Dataset.

Direct RGB

This option allows you to select a dataset whose values are used as RGB values for the associated data points in the data plot.

To access this option, click the color button and select Direct RGB:Dataset.

RGB values are calculated from triplet components of Red, Green, and Blue.  The Red, Green, and Blue components can have numeric values from 0 to 255.  The RGB value is then computed using the following formula:

RGB = (2560 * Red) + (2561 * Green) + (2562 * Blue)

which is:

RGB = Red + (256 * Green) + (65536 * Blue)

Color Mapping

This option allows you to create a mapping relationship between ranges of 2D Y values or 3D Z values and an associated scale of colors.  The 2D Y values or 3D Z values are then used to determine the data point element colors in the data plot, based on the established color map.

To access this option, click the color button and select Color Mapping:Dataset.  After making this selection, a Color Map/Contours tab displays in the Plot Details dialog box.  Origin automatically creates a color scale with 8 colors (plus a color above and below), and maps the dataset values to these colors by finding the maximum and minimum dataset values, and an increment that results in 8 levels.  To customize this default color map, select the Color Map/Contours tab and assign custom Y or Z value ranges to associated colors.  After color mapping the data plot element, select Graph:New Color Scale (or right-click in the layer and select New Color Scale) to display the color scale and associated dataset mapping relationship in the graph.  (The numeric format of the color scale is set on the (Plot Details) Numeric Formats tab.)  For reference information on the controls available on the Color Map/Contours tab, see  The (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours Tab.

The color mapping option is particularly useful for presenting data in which you have two independent variables and one dependent variable.  You can plot the dependent variable versus one of the independent variables, and then use the second independent variable to color map your data plot.  For example, suppose you measured some response of a sample at various positions along its length, while also varying the temperature of the sample along its length.

Without using the color mapping option, you could present your results in a two layer graph, showing the variation of temperature along the sample length, as well as the measured response.

However, by using the color mapping option, you can plot the measured response of the sample versus position, and use the temperature data to color map the data plot.


Using Datasets as a Plotting Enhancement

Many elements of a data plot can be controlled based on values from another dataset.  For example, you can control the size of the symbols in a scatter data plot based on values in a selected worksheet (or Excel workbook) column.  When you select a dataset to control the display of an element in a data plot, for each data point in the data plot, Origin uses the associated worksheet row value in the specified column.

These "dataset control" options are available from drop-down lists and combination boxes in the Plot Details dialog box.  When the option is available for a specific data plot element, Origin includes Col(Name) entries at the bottom of the drop-down list or combination box, where Name is the worksheet or Excel workbook column name.  Origin only allows access to the current data plot's Y or Z columns in the worksheet, or to columns that are located to the right of these columns.  If you want to specify a column that is currently unavailable because it is located to the left of the Y or Z column, move the desired worksheet column using the Move Right button on the Column toolbar.

Note:  If you control the display of a data plot element based on values in a dataset, and that data plot is part of a (dependent) data plot group, then Origin applies your setting to the first data plot in the group, and increments the setting for each of the remaining data plots in the group.  Origin does this by checking the worksheet column location of the first data plot's Y dataset, and compares this location to the worksheet column location of the "control" dataset.  If the control column is n columns to the right of the data plot's Y column, then Origin uses the column which is n columns to the right of each of the remaining data plot's Y columns to control the respective element's display.

Origin provides dataset control for the following data plot elements:

•	Color (buttons and drop-down lists)

Origin provides three methods for using the values in a specified column to control the color of elements in a data plot:  indexing, direct RGB, and color mapping.  For information on these options, see  Using a Selected Dataset to Control the Color of Your Data Plot.

•	Shape (for symbols, select the Show Construction check box and the Geometric radio button)

When you select a column from the Shape drop-down list, Origin makes the following association between numeric values and symbol shapes:  0 = no symbol, 1 = square, 2 = circle, 3 = up triangle, 4 = down triangle, 5 = diamond, 6 = cross (+), 7 = cross (x), 8 = star (*), 9 = bar (-), 10 = bar (|), 11 = number, 12 = LETTER, 13 = letter, 14 = right arrow, 15 = left triangle, 16 = right triangle, 17 = hexagon, 18 = sphere, 19 = star, 20 = pentagon.  For any numeric values outside of this range (except 56 and 58), no symbol displays.

The numeric values of 56 and 58 display special symbol types:  56 = data markers and 58 = vertical lines that mark the X position of the data point.

•	Interior (for symbols, select the Show Construction check box and the Geometric radio button)

When you select a column from the Interior drop-down list, Origin makes the following association between numeric values and symbol interiors:  0 = no symbol, 1 = solid, 2 = open, 3 = dot center, 4 = hollow, 5 = + center, 6 = x center, 7 = - center, 8 = | center, 9 = half up, 10 = half right, 11 = half down, 12 = half left.  For any numeric values outside of this range, no symbol displays.

•	Size (for symbols)

When you select a column from the Size combination box, the dataset values determine the data point size in units of points.  You can scale those dataset values by selecting or typing a value in the associated Scaling Factor combination box.

•	Angle (for XYAM vector data)

When you select a column from the Angle drop-down list, the dataset values determine the vector angle for each data point in the associated row.  The units are determined by the Angular Unit group on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

•	Magnitude (for XYAM vector data)

When you select a column from the Magnitude combination box, the dataset values determine the vector magnitude in units of points.

Note:  The X End and Y End drop-down lists on the Vector tab of the XYXY vector Plot Details dialog box also list columns for control selection.  However, these vector elements are only controllable via column selection, thus differing from the other controls.

When you control the display of a data plot element based on a selected dataset, the data plot display is not necessarily uniform.  Therefore, the default data plot type icon in the legend will not necessarily provide an accurate representation of the data plot.  The following example illustrates how you can customize the legend so that it better reflects your custom data plot.  In this example, a line + symbol data plot is created with symbols alternating between squares and circles.  A D(Y) column that contains no data is then added to the graph layer as a line + symbol data plot with circle symbols.  Because the column contains no data, the data plot doesn't actually display in the graph layer.  However, its plot attributes can be used to customize the legend display.


Clipping the Data Plot to the Frame

Data plots that extend beyond the layer frame, or beyond the customized clipping margins, can be hidden from view.  To clip the data plot in the active layer, select Format:Layer.  Alternatively, double-click on the layer icon to open the associated Layer n dialog box and then click the Layer Properties button.  Both these actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the layer icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Display tab and then select the Clip Data To Frame check box in the Data Drawing Options group.  To view the clipped data, clear this check box.

To set the clipping margins inside or outside the active layer frame, type the desired margin value percentages in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes in the Data Drawing Options group.  Type a negative value to clip the data plot to a point outside the frame.  Type a positive value to clip the data plot to a point inside the frame.


Hiding Data Plots

Origin provides an option to hide a single data plot, all data plots in the layer except for the selected data plot, or all data plots in the active graph window.

To hide a single data plot, right-click on the desired data plot and select Hide Data Plot from the shortcut menu.  To view the hidden data plot, right-click in the respective layer and select Show All Data from the shortcut menu.

To hide all data plots in the layer except for the selected data plot, right-click on the data plot you want to view and select Hide Others from the shortcut menu.  To view the hidden data plots, right-click in the respective layer and select Show All Data from the shortcut menu.

To hide all data plots in the active graph window, select View:Show:Data.  This action removes the check mark next to the command and hides the data plots in the graph window.  To view all the data plots in the active graph window, reselect View:Show:Data.

Note:  Hiding data plots reduces the screen redraw time.  Additionally, hiding data plots may make it easier for you to see the result of any axis, or axis label, manipulation.  However, if you want the data plot included in a printout, remember to display the data plot before printing.


Setting the Data Plot's Display Range

Origin provides three methods for changing the display range (without changing the axis scale) in the graph window:

•	Change the display range of the data plot by changing the display range of the datasets in the associated worksheet.  However, changing the display range in the worksheet affects all current and future plot instances.

•	Change the display range of the active data plot graphically, using the Data Selector tool from the Tools toolbar.  This method does not affect the worksheet display range and thus does not affect other plot instances of the datasets.

•	Change the display range of a data plot by specifying the starting and ending worksheet row numbers.

More:

Graphically Setting the Display Range

Specifying the Start and End Worksheet Rows


Graphically Setting the Display Range

1)	Right-click on the data plot whose range you want to edit and select Set as Active from the shortcut menu.  If this command is not available, the data plot is already active.

2)	Click on the Data Selector tool in the Tools toolbar.  Data markers appear at both ends of the active data plot.  The Data Display tool also opens.

3)	To mark the data segment of interest, click and drag the markers along the X axis with the mouse.  Release the mouse button when the marker displays at the desired data point.  Alternatively, use the ← and → keys to select a marker.  The CTRL + ← (or →) keys move the selected marker to the next data point.  Perform one of the following actions after you have positioned the data markers to enclose the data segment of interest:

•	Double-click within the selected range in the graph layer.

•	Press ENTER.

•	Click on the Pointer tool in the Tools toolbar.

•	Press ESC.

4)	To set the display range for the data plot, select Data:Set Display Range or select this command from the data plot's shortcut menu.

Note:  To reset the display range of the data plot back to the original range, select Data:Reset to Full Range or select this command from the data plot's shortcut menu.


Specifying the Start and End Worksheet Rows

You can specify the starting and ending worksheet rows for displaying a data plot from the Layer n dialog box or from the data plot's shortcut menu.

•	To access this option from the Layer n dialog box, double-click on the layer icon that includes the data plot whose range you want to edit.  This action opens the Layer n dialog box.  Select the data plot (the primary dataset) from the Layer Contents list and click Edit Range.  (Note:  If the data plot is part of a data plot group, you can not click the Edit Range button without first ungrouping the datasets.  To avoid this, edit the data plot's range using the shortcut menu command as follows.)

•	To access this option from the data plot's shortcut menu, right-click on the data plot whose range you want to edit and select Edit Range.

Both these operations open the Plot Range dialog box.

The Plot Range Dialog Box

The Dataset list box displays the primary dataset for the selected data plot.  Set the display range for this data plot in the From Row Number and the To Row Number text boxes.

Note:  To reset the display range of the data plot back to the original range, select Data:Reset to Full Range or select this command from the data plot's shortcut menu.


Rescaling the Axes to Display Data that Extends Beyond the Current Axes Range

Origin provides an option to reset the axes scale values so that all the data included in the active layer displays within the layer frame.  To reset the axes scale values, select Graph:Rescale to Show All or click the Rescale button on the Graph toolbar.  This operation is most useful when data plots that extend beyond the current axes range are added to the layer, or when the worksheet display range is modified.  The operation has no affect on the "speed mode" setting which is located on the (Plot Details) Size/Speed tab when the layer icon is selected from the left side of the dialog box.  The rescale operation resets the axes scale values only.

Note:  If you have selected Manual from the Rescale drop-down list on the Scale tab of the Axis dialog box, Origin asks you if you want to override the manual rescale setting.  If you click No, the axes will not rescale to show all the data.


Connecting Lines Across Missing Data

Origin provides an option for connecting lines across missing data in line and line + symbol data plots.  To enable this option, click on the desired graph window to make it the active window.  Select Format:Page.  This menu command opens the Plot Details dialog box with the graph page icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select the Connect Line Across Missing Data check box.


Displaying Every nth Data Point

To display every nth data point in a line + symbol or scatter data plot, double-click on the data plot to open the Plot Details dialog box, select the Drop Lines tab, and then select the Skip Pts check box in the Data Points Display Control group.  Specify the data point display frequency in the associated text box.  For example, type 5 in the text box to display every 5th data point as a symbol.  To display a continuous line in a line + symbol data plot with "skip points" enabled, select the (Plot Details) Line tab and then clear the Gap to Symbol check box in the Symbol/Line Interface group.


Moving a Data Point

Select Data:Move Data Points to move a data point in the active data plot.  If this menu command has not previously been selected for the data plot, an Attention dialog box opens stating that the data plot is not set to have movable data points.  Click Yes to enable the option.  A cursor appears on a data point in the data plot.  The Data Reader tool also becomes active and the Data Display tool opens.  Click on the desired data point and drag to the new location with the mouse.  Alternatively, use the ← and → keys to change the active data point.  The ↑ and ↓ keys move the active data point up and down.  Use the CTRL+ ← (and →) keys to move the active data point left and right.

The Data Display tool displays the XY coordinates of the selected data point.

To complete the process, perform one of the following:

•	Press ESC.

•	Click on the Pointer tool in the Tools toolbar.

•	Press ENTER.

The new XY value of the data point is also displayed in the worksheet.


Deleting a Data Point

To delete a data point from the active data plot, select Data:Remove Bad Data Points.  After selecting this menu command, the Data Reader tool becomes active and the Data Display tool opens.  To delete a data point, click on the desired data point and press ENTER.  The data point is deleted from the data plot as well as from the worksheet cell.  In the worksheet, all values below the deleted value shift up one row in the column.


Displaying the Data Plot's Worksheet Data

To display the worksheet associated with a data plot, perform one of the following operations:

•	Right-click on the data plot and select Go to Worksheet from the shortcut menu.

•	Double-click on the data plot to open the Plot Details dialog box and click the Worksheet button.

Origin opens the worksheet containing the data for the data plot.  If no worksheet exists, Origin creates the worksheet.  If the worksheet exists but is "filed" in a different Project Explorer folder than the graph, Origin opens the worksheet in the current (graph) folder.  To remove the display of the worksheet in the graph folder, make the worksheet's Project Explorer folder active, and then re-select the graph folder.


Data Plots:  Customizing Specific Elements

The elements in your data plot (for example, symbols, lines, fills, error bars, and data labels) are all customized in the Plot Details dialog box.  Double-click on the data plot element to open the dialog box with the desired tabs active.  For more information on opening the Plot Details dialog box, see  Selecting the Data Plot You Want to Edit.

More:

Symbols

Lines

Fill Patterns

Column, Bar, and Box Spacing

Pie Slices

Vectors

Contours

3D Surfaces

Error Bars

Data Labels


Symbols

Origin provides access to a broad range of symbols for use in 2D scatter, line + symbol, and ternary graphs; box, histogram and probabilities, and QC statistical charts; as well as in 3D scatter and trajectory graphs.  These symbols are available from the symbol gallery which is accessed by clicking the down arrow next to the Preview box on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.  Click on a symbol in the gallery to select it.  The selected symbol then displays in the Preview box.

The default symbol gallery can be expanded to include characters from the Symbol font set.  To display characters from the Symbol font set in the symbol gallery, select the Symbol Gallery Displays Characters check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.

More:

Displaying Your Bitmaps as Symbols

Constructing Custom Symbols Including Geometric Symbols, Characters from any Font Set, and Row Numbers

Displaying a Box Around Alphabetic Symbols

Using a Dataset to Control the Symbol Display in a Data Plot

Controlling Symbols with Grouped Data Plots

The (Plot Details) Symbol Tab

The (Plot Details) Drop Lines Tab

Working with Symbols in 3D Graphs

The (Plot Details) Edit Control Tab


Displaying Your Bitmaps as Symbols

You can display bitmaps that you have created in other programs as symbols in your graph.  The bitmaps must be less than or equal to 16 x 16 pixels.  If a bitmap is larger than this, Origin will display only the upper-left corner of the bitmap.

To display your bitmap as a data plot symbol, perform the following operations:

1)	Copy your bitmap to the Clipboard.

2)	In Origin, select Tools:Options and then select the Graph tab.

3)	Click on a cell in the User Defined Symbols grid (for example, click on the upper-left cell) and with the mouse still pointing at the cell, press CTRL+V.  This keyboard operation pastes the symbol from the Clipboard into the cell.  (To copy a symbol from a cell in the grid, click on the cell and press CTRL+C.  To delete a symbol from a cell, press CTRL+X.)

4)	Click OK to close the Options dialog box.

5)	Re-open the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.  Your user-defined symbols display at the bottom of the symbol gallery.  Additionally, Origin provides access to your symbols when the Show Construction check box is selected and the associated User Defined Symbols radio button is selected.

All white portions of your bitmap will display as transparent in the data plot symbol.  The black portions of your bitmap, or any colored portions, will display using the color from the Symbol Color button.

Note 1:  On some computers, user-defined symbols may display as black squares in regions of the graph.  If you experience such display problems, try resolving the problem by increasing the setting of your Windows Color Palette.  For example, if your current setting is 256 color, increase the setting to True Color (24 bit).  Additionally, the user-defined symbols display problem might be resolved by updating your printer driver.  To check if the printer driver is causing the display problem, restart your computer in Safe Mode.  If this change resolves the display problem, then consider updating your printer driver.

Note 2:  If you experience printout problems with the user-defined symbols, the problem is most likely related to your printer driver.  Try upgrading or changing your driver to resolve this problem.


Constructing Custom Symbols Including Geometric Symbols, Characters from any Font Set, and Row Numbers

In addition to selecting a symbol from the symbol gallery, you can construct custom symbols.  To construct symbols, select the Show Construction check box on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.  After selecting this check box, a number of controls display beneath the check box that allow you to perform the following operations:

•	Construct a geometric symbol.

•	Select a character from a font set.

•	Select a start character to increment through a font set.

•	Select row numbers.

•	Select a user-defined symbol.

After making your selections from the Show Construction controls, the Preview box displays your selection.


Displaying a Box Around Alphabetic Symbols

When you select the Show Construction check box on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab and then select either the Single Alphabetic or the Incremental Alphabetics radio button, you can display a box around each data point symbol.  To do this, select the Outline check box on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.


Using a Dataset to Control the Symbol Display in a Data Plot

In addition to constructing custom symbols from the Show Construction controls on the Symbol tab, you can also use these controls to assign a worksheet column whose values determine the symbol display on a "point-by-point" basis.  This option is available for geometric symbols and user-defined symbols.  However, it is only available when editing a data plot that is not part of a group, or when editing a data plot that is part of a group in which the Edit Mode is set to Independent on the (Plot Details) Group tab.


Controlling Symbols with Grouped Data Plots

When editing the Plot Details dialog box for grouped data plots that include symbols, Origin provides a Symbol Type check box on the Group tab.  This check box is only available if the selected symbol can be incremented between data plots.

When the Symbol Type check box is selected on the Group tab and you select a symbol from the symbol library on the Symbol tab, Origin increments the symbol between data plots using the following symbol order:  square, circle, up triangle, down triangle, diamond, left triangle, right triangle, hexagon, sphere, star, pentagon, cross (+), cross (x), star (*), bar (-), bar (|), number, LETTER, letter.  If you select the Show Construction check box on the Symbol tab, Origin increments the symbol based on your radio button selection.  For example, if you select the Single Alphabetic radio button and a start character, Origin displays the first member of the data plot group using that start character, and increments the character using the selected font set for each additional data plot in the group.


The (Plot Details) Symbol Tab

The symbols in 2D scatter, line + symbol, and ternary graphs; box, histogram and probabilities, and QC statistical charts; as well as in 3D scatter and trajectory graphs are all controlled from the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.

The Symbol Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Preview Group

Click the down arrow next to the Preview box (not shown) to open the symbol gallery for symbol selection.  Display characters in the symbol gallery by selecting the Symbol Gallery Displays Characters check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.

2)	The Size Combination Box

Type or select the symbol size, in points, from the Size combination box.  If you select a worksheet column from this combination box, a Scaling Factor combination box displays.  Type or select a value to scale the associated column values.  For example, select 0.25 to scale each cell value by 0.25.

3)	The Edge Thickness Drop-down List

Select the desired value from this drop-down list to determine the border width of hollow or open symbols.  Enter n to specify the width of the symbol border as n% of the symbol's half diameter.  Select Default to use the value specified from the Symbol Border Width combination box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.

4)	The Color Buttons

Depending on your symbol selection, either a Symbol Color button displays, or a Symbol Edge Color button and a Symbol Fill Color button display.  Select a color by clicking on the respective button.  For a complete discussion on the available color options, see  Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot.

5)	The Show Construction Check Box and Associated Controls

Select the Show Construction check box to build symbols for your graph, based on your selections from the associated controls.

Select the Geometric radio button to use a symbol from the Shape drop-down list and an interior pattern from the Interior drop-down list.  Select Hollow from the drop-down list to display overlapping data plot elements through the symbol.  Select Open from the Interior drop-down list to prevent overlapping data plot elements from displaying through the symbol (except when None is selected from the Fill Color button, in which case the overlapping elements display).

Select the Single Alphabetic radio button to use the same alphanumeric character for all the points in the data plot.  Select the desired font set and character from the associated controls.

Select the Incremental Alphabetics radio button to use alphanumeric characters incrementing by one for each consecutive data point in the data plot.  Select the desired font set and start character from the associated controls.

Select the Row Number Numerics radio button to use the row number corresponding to the data point as the symbol in the data plot.  Select the desired font set from the associated drop-down list.

Select the User Defined Symbols radio button to display a bitmap that you added to the User Defined Symbols grid on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box.  Your available user-defined symbols display in the Symbol List drop-down list.

When either the Single Alphabetic radio button or the Incremental Alphabetics radio button is selected, the Outline check box is available.  Select this check box to display an outline or box around each data point symbol.


The (Plot Details) Drop Lines Tab

You can add horizontal or vertical drop lines to any 2D data plot type that includes symbols.  You can also add drop lines to the Z axis for 3D scatter and trajectory graphs.  The drop lines controls are available on the (Plot Details) Drop Lines tab.

The Drop Lines Tab (for 2D Data Plot) on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Select the Horizontal or Vertical check boxes to display horizontal or vertical lines from each data point symbol to the bottom X or left Y axis.  (For 3D graphs, select the Parallel to X/Y/Z Axis check boxes.)  Select the desired line style, width, and color from the associated controls.  When you select Automatic from the Color drop-down lists, Origin uses the color selected from the Symbol Color or the Edge Color buttons on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.

Note:  To draw a vertical or horizontal line at a particular X or Y axis location, create a line using the LabTalk Draw command.  For less accurate line placement, use the Line tool available from the Tools toolbar.

For 2D data plots, select the Skip Points check box in the Data Points Display Control group to display a specified frequency of data points.  Type the frequency in the associated text box.  For example, type 5 in the text box to display every 5th data point as a symbol.  This setting also effects the display of the data plot drop lines, symbols, error bars, and data labels.


Working with Symbols in 3D Graphs

You can create 3D scatter or trajectory graphs from XYZ data.  These 3D graphs share similar (Plot Details) Symbol and Drop Lines tabs as the 2D graphs with symbols, except that the 3D Drop Lines tab also includes controls for Z drop lines, but does not include a "skip points" option.  For information about 3D graphics buffering, see Increasing the Redraw Speed in a Layer.

The Plot Details dialog box for 3D scatter and trajectory graphs also includes the option to display XY, ZX, and YZ projections, in addition to the 3D data plot (original).  Thus, for a 3D scatter or trajectory graph, you can control the symbol and drop lines display (as well as the line display) for the data plot and for the projections.

Origin denotes these different display elements on the left side of the Plot Details dialog box.  A data plot icon displays beneath the layer icon, and then four icons display beneath the data plot icon:  the 3D data plot (original), and the three projections.

Whenever the data plot icon is selected on the left side of the dialog box, an Edit Control tab displays (see the following section).  Whenever one of the four data plot element icons is selected from the left side of the Plot Details dialog box, a Symbol, Drop Lines, and Line tab display.  The check boxes next to the data plot element icons determine whether or not the element will display in the data plot.  Select the check box to display the element.

Note:  When you select a data plot element icon on the left side of the dialog box, be careful not to inadvertently clear the icon's check box.  To activate the tabs of a data plot element icon with a selected check box, click on the text next to the icon, not in the check box.


The (Plot Details) Edit Control Tab

The Edit Control tab is provided so that you can quickly display projections in your 3D scatter or trajectory graph, and quickly control their display based on your original 3D data plot settings.  Alternatively, you can use this dialog box for custom edit control.

The Edit Control Tab (for 3D Scatter and Trajectory) on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Select the All Together check box to display and edit the settings on the (Plot Details) Line, Symbol, and Drop Lines tabs for the 3D data plot (original) and the three projections.

Select the Fully Independent check box to edit each of the 3D data plot elements separately.

Select the Original Independent of Projections check box to edit the 3D data plot (original) element separate from the projections.


Lines

Origin provides access to a broad range of line connections and styles for use in 2D line, line + symbol, polar, area, fill area, XYAM vector, XYXY vector, and high-low-close graphs; box and histogram statistical charts; as well as in 3D scatter, trajectory, ribbons, walls, and waterfall graphs.  Line control is available from the (Plot Details) Line tab.

More:

The (Plot Details) Line Tab


The (Plot Details) Line Tab

The controls available on the Line tab are dependent on the current data plot type.  The following reference section reviews all the possible controls on this tab.

The Line Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Symbol/Line Interface Group

Select the Gap to Symbol check box to display a gap between each symbol and associated line for data plots that include both lines and symbols.  To alter the size of this gap, edit the Line Symbol Gap (%) combination box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

When the Gap to Symbol check box is cleared, the Draw Line in Front and Draw Line Behind radio buttons are available, allowing you to control the display of the line through the symbol.  To display the line through the symbol, select the Draw Line in Front radio button.  Alternatively, select the Draw Line Behind radio button to hide the line.

Note:  The Draw Line in Front and Draw Line Behind radio buttons have the same visual effect on a data plot with a symbol interior set to hollow.  The lines always display through the symbol.  To hide the lines, select a new symbol from the symbol gallery or from the Interior drop-down list (Show Construction selected) on the (Plot Details) Symbol tab.

2)	Other Controls

a.	The Connect Drop-down List

Select the desired line connection from this drop-down list.  Note that if you perform an interpolation on your data plot, the line connection type will affect the interpolation results.

The available line connection types are as follows:

No Line:  The data points are not connected.

Straight:  A straight line is displayed between data points.

Segment:  The connection display alternates between Straight and No Line.

Segment 3:  The connection display alternates between Straight for three points, No Line, Straight for three points, etc.

B-Spline:  For a pair of datasets with coordinates [image], [image], Origin makes a smooth curve using a cubic B-spline connection.  The B-spline curve can be described by parametric equations.  Around point [image] it takes the form:

Xi(t)=

and Yi(t)=

where [image].  The coordinates are calculated around each point letting t range from 0 to 1.  This cubic B-spline curve is continuous up to a second order derivative.  Unlike spline curves which pass through the original data points [image], the B-spline curve winds around the original data points without passing through them.  (Origin duplicates the first and last data points so the curve passes through them.)

Note:  One advantage of the B-spline connection is that it does not have any requirements for the original data points, whereas the spline connection requires that the X coordinates be strictly increasing.

Spline:  This option generates a cubic spline connection.  To use the connection, the X values must be discrete and increasing.  Since curvature information is held in memory, the spline resolution remains the same regardless of page magnification.  The SplineStep variable in the ORIGIN.INI file controls the spline calculation increment.  It is expressed in units of .1 point.

Step Horz:  This option generates a right angle connection.  The initial line is horizontal.

Step Vert:  This option generates a right angle connection.  The initial line is vertical.

Step Center:  This option generates a right angle connection.  The angle is midway between the points.

Bezier:  This option generates a Bezier curve.  The Bezier curve is very similar to the B-spline curve.  It can be described by parametric equations around four original data points:

Origin uses four consecutive data points, say [image], i = 1, 2, 3, 4, to construct a section of Bezier curve letting t range from 0 to 1.  The curve always passes through the first and the fourth points, but not the second and third.  The next section of the curve is constructed by [image], i = 4, 5, 6, 7.  The process is repeated until all data points are included (if the total number of points is not a multiple of 4, the remaining points are not used in the connection).  The derivatives of the curve are not continuous over the whole range, but within each section (where t ranges from 0 to 1) the curve is continuous up to the second order derivative.

b.	The Style Drop-down List

Select the style for the connection line from this drop-down list.  At low screen resolutions or in small windows, the dash lines may appear solid.  However, the print out displays the correct line type.

Note:  You can customize the dash patterns in the Origin Dash Lines group on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

c.	The Width Combination Box

Type or select the desired line width from this combination box.  The line width is measured in point size where 1 point=1/72 inch.

d.	The Color Drop-down List

Select the desired line color from this drop-down list.

Note:  You can display the lines and symbols in a line + symbol data plot using different colors.  To do this, select the desired symbol color from the Symbol Color button or from the Edge Color and Fill Color buttons on the Symbol tab, and then select the desired line color from the Color drop-down list on the Line tab.  Alternatively, if you edit the line Color drop-down list first and then click OK or Apply, both the lines and symbols in the data plot will reflect your change.  This is because by default, Automatic is selected from the symbol color buttons, so that the symbol color follows the line color.  To alter this behavior, make a different selection from the symbol color buttons.

e.	The Fill Area Under Curve Check Box and Drop-down List

Select this check box and then select Normal from the associated drop-down list to fill the area denoted by the data plot line and the bottom X axis (assuming the axis position is not offset) for a line and a line + symbol data plot.  For the polar data plot, Origin fills the area denoted by the data plot line and the bottom X axis major grid lines at 0 and 180 degrees.

Select this check box and then select Inclusive Broken by Missing Values from the associated drop-down list to fill the area determined by the data plot and a baseline defined by the first and last data points in the data plot.  If the data plot includes missing values, Origin fills the first segment of the data plot (up to the first missing value), and then fills the second segment of the data plot up the next missing value, etc.  This option is also ideal if you want to fill an enclosed area determined by a data plot.

Select this check box and then select Exclusive Broken by Missing Values from the associated drop-down list to fill the region outside of the area determined by the data plot and a baseline defined by the first and last data points in the data plot.  If the data plot includes missing values, Origin fills the area outside of the first segment of the data plot (up to the first missing value), and then fills the area outside of the second segment of the data plot up the next missing value, etc.  This option is also ideal if you want to fill the region outside of an enclosed area determined by a data plot.

When you select the Fill Area Under Curve check box, Origin displays a Pattern tab in the Plot Details dialog box.  Edit the Pattern tab to customize the fill region.


Fill Patterns

Origin provides access to a broad range of fill patterns for use in 2D bar, column, stack bar, stack column, floating column, floating bar, pie, area, fill area, and polar graphs; box, histogram, stacked histograms, and histogram and probabilities statistical charts; as well as in (XYY...) 3D bars, ribbons, walls, and waterfall graphs.  Fill pattern control is available from the (Plot Details) Pattern tab.  For 3D bars, walls, and waterfall graphs, this control is available from the XY Faces, YZ Faces, and XZ Faces tabs.

More:

The (Plot Details) Pattern (or XY/YZ/XZ Faces) Tab


The (Plot Details) Pattern (or XY/YZ/XZ Faces) Tab

These tabs provide controls to edit the fill region and border in your graph.  If a control is not appropriate for a particular graph type, the control is unavailable on the tab.

The following section reviews the Pattern tab.  However, the XY/YZ/XZ Faces tabs have identical controls.  (Note:  The YZ/XZ Faces tabs have an additional control that is reviewed in this section.)

The Pattern (or XY/YZ/XZ Faces) Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Border Group

Select a border color from the Color button.  For a complete discussion on the Color button options, see  Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot.

Select a line style from the Style drop-down list.

Note:  You can customize the dash patterns available from the Style drop-down list in the Origin Dash Lines group on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Select or type a line width from the Width combination box.  The line width is measured in point size where 1 point=1/72 inch.

2)	The Fill Group

Select the desired fill color from the Fill Color button.  Select None to display a transparent fill.  For a complete discussion on the Fill Color button options, see  Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot.

Select the desired fill pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.

When a pattern is selected from the Pattern drop-down list, the Pattern Color button is available.  Select the desired color from this button.  When Automatic is selected, Origin uses the Border Color button setting for the pattern color.

Type or select the desired fill pattern line width from the Width combination box.  The line width is measured in point size where 1 point=1/72 inch.

3)	The Preview Box

Origin displays your current tab settings in this view box.

4)	The Relation to XY Faces Drop-down List (YZ and XZ Faces tabs only)

Select Same to use the Fill settings on the XY Faces tab for the YZ faces (or XZ faces) of your 3D data plot.  Select Independent to control the fill display of the YZ faces (or XZ faces) independent of the Fill settings on the XY Faces tab.  Select Lighter or Darker to display a lighter or darker shade of the fill color selected on the XY Faces tab for the YZ faces (or XZ faces).


Column, Bar, and Box Spacing

Origin provides controls to customize the spacing between bars, columns, and boxes in 2D bar, column, stack bar, stack column, floating column, and floating bar graphs; box, histogram, stacked histograms, and histogram and probabilities statistical charts; as well as in (XYY...) 3D bars, ribbons, walls, and waterfall graphs.  Spacing control is available from the (Plot Details) Spacing tab.

More:

The (Plot Details) Spacing Tab

Stacking Columns or Bars


The (Plot Details) Spacing Tab

The controls available on the Spacing tab are dependent on the current data plot type.  The following reference section reviews all the possible controls on this tab.

The Spacing Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Box Gap Between Groups Combination Box

This combination box value controls the spacing between the columns, bars, or boxes for each X value, in units of % of the width of the columns, bars, or boxes at each X value.  In the following example, the first graph displays three Y datasets grouped in a column graph with the spacing set to 0%.  In the second graph, the spacing is set to 50%.  The spacing was determined by finding 50% of the width of a set of columns for an X value from the first graph.

2)	The Overlap Combination Box

This combination box is only available if the data plot is part of a data plot group.  Type or select a value from this combination box to overlap the columns or bars at each X value by this amount.  The combination box is in units of % of the width of an individual column or bar.

3)	The Bar Thickness Combination Box

This combination box is only available for (XYY...) 3D bar graphs.  Type or select a value from this combination box to set the thickness of the 3D bars.  The combination box is in units of % of the X axis increment.


Stacking Columns or Bars

To stack grouped bars or columns in the active graph layer, select Plot:Stack Grouped Data in Layer.  This menu command is checked when selected.  Though any graph type can be stacked, this menu command is used mainly with column, bar, and area graphs.  To unstack the data plots, re-select the menu command.

A stacked data plot displays data against a cumulative Y axis scale, with the Y values in each X axis category combined and displayed as subgroups.


Pie Slices

Origin provides Plot Details dialog box controls to customize the pie slice fill, the pie and pie slice geometry, and the pie slice labels.

More:

Retaining the Changes You Make to the Pie Slice Labels

Removing the Boundary Box Around the Pie Chart

The (Plot Details) Pie Geometry Tab

The (Plot Details) Default Labels Tab


Retaining the Changes You Make to the Pie Slice Labels

Default labels display next to each pie slice in a pie chart.  The default label display is determined by the settings on the (Plot Details) Default Labels tab.  You can, however, customize the display of the pie slice labels.  For example, you can click-and-drag to move a label or double-click on a label to change or format the text.  However, when the pie chart's graph window is refreshed, the labels will return to their default location and content (although custom text formatting is retained, for example, font size).

To ensure that all your customizations are retained, edit the (Plot Details) Default Labels tab.  Clear the Associate with Wedge check box in the Position group to prevent Origin from moving the labels back to their default location.  Clear the Display check box in the Contents group to prevent Origin from changing the content back to the default setting.  To keep your changes, you must clear these check boxes before printing or refreshing the graph.


Removing the Boundary Box Around the Pie Chart

To remove the boundary box around the pie chart, select Format:Layer when the pie chart graph window is active.  Select the Display tab, and then clear the X Axes and the Y Axes check boxes in the Show Elements group.  Click OK to close the dialog box.


The (Plot Details) Pie Geometry Tab

The (Plot Details) Pie Geometry tab provides controls to edit the view and rotation of the pie chart, as well as the displacement of individual pie slices.

The Pie Geometry Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The 3D View Group

The View Angle text box determines the view angle of the pie chart.  The units are in degrees.  Type 90 to view the chart as 2D.

The Thickness text box determines the thickness of the pie slices.  The units are in % of the pie chart radius.

2)	The Rotation/Radius Group

The Starting Azimuth (deg) text box determines the location of the first pie slice in the chart.

Select the Counterclockwise check box to display the pie slices in a counterclockwise orientation.

The Rescale Radius text box resizes the pie chart.  The units are in % of the frame.  The frame is the boundary box around the pie chart.  To remove the frame display, see  Removing the Boundary Box Around the Pie Chart.

3)	The Pie Sections Group

To displace a pie slice from the pie chart, select the pie slice's check box in this group.  Specify the displacement for any selected slices from the Displacement text box.  The units are in % of the pie chart radius.


The (Plot Details) Default Labels Tab

The (Plot Details) Default Labels tab provides controls for customizing the labels of the pie chart.

The Default Labels Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Contents Group

When the Display check box is selected, the contents of the pie slice labels are determined by the selections from the associated check boxes.  Select the Values check box to display the worksheet cell values as labels.  Select the Percentages check box to display the percent of the total for each cell value.  Select the Categories check box to display associated X values for each pie slice.  If there is no associated X column, then row numbers display.

If the Display check box is selected, any changes that you make to the label content (for example, by double-clicking on a label to open and edit the Text Control dialog box) will not be retained when the graph window is refreshed.  To customize the label content using the Text Control dialog box, clear the Display check box before making your changes.

2)	The Position Group

When the Associate with Wedge check box is selected, the position of the pie slice labels are determined by the Dist. from Pie Edge text box.  The units of this text box are in % of the pie chart radius.

If the Associate with Wedge check box is selected, any changes that you make to the label locations (for example, by dragging the label) will not be retained when the graph window is refreshed.  To customize the label position by dragging to a new location, clear the Display check box before making your changes.


Vectors

Origin offers two types of vector graphs, XYAM and XYXY.  The XYAM vector graph is composed of X, Y, angle, and magnitude datasets.  The XYXY vector graph is composed of X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 datasets.

More:

Using Color to Represent the Vector Magnitude

The (Plot Details) Vector Tab


Using Color to Represent the Vector Magnitude

For XYAM vector graphs, the length of the vectors are controlled by the values in the magnitude worksheet column (in units of points).  Another option for displaying each vector's magnitude is to use color.  You can establish a mapping relationship between ranges of magnitude values and an associated scale of colors.  You can then use the worksheet magnitude values to determine each vector color in the graph, based on your established color map.  The basic steps you should follow to use color to represent the vector magnitude follow.

1)	On the (Plot Details) Vector tab, select Color Mapping:Col(MagnitudeColumn).  (For more information on color mapping, see  Using a Selected Dataset to Control the Color of Your Data Plot.)

2)	You can set the vector length to a constant value or keep the length mapped to the MagnitudeColumn from the Magnitude combination box.

3)	Select the Color Map tab and customize the magnitude ranges and associated colors.

4)	After you close the Plot Details dialog box, add a color scale legend to your graph by selecting Graph:New Color Scale.  Alternatively, right-click in the layer and select New Color Scale.


The (Plot Details) Vector Tab

The vectors in both XYAM and XYXY graphs are customized on the (Plot Details) Vector tab.

The Vector Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Color Button

Select a vector color from the Color button.  For a complete discussion on the Color button options, see  Customizing the Colors in Your Data Plot.

2)	The Width Combination Box

Type or select the desired vector width from this combination box, in units of points.

3)	The Arrowheads Group

The Length combination box determines the length of the arrowheads.  The units are in points.

The Angle combination box determines the arrowhead angles in degrees.

Select the Closed radio button to display the arrowheads with fill.  Select the Open radio button to display the arrowheads without fill (transparent).

4)	The Position Group (XYAM only)

The XY values can determine the head, midpoint, or tail of the vector.  Select the desired radio button.

5)	The Vector Data Group (XYAM only)

Select the column that contains the vector angle values from the Angle combination box.  Alternatively, select a value from this combination box.  The angle is measured counterclockwise from a line parallel to the X axis, bisecting the vector.  The units are controlled by the Angular Unit setting on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Select the column that contains the vector magnitude values from the Magnitude combination box.  Alternatively, select a value from this combination box.  The units are points.

Select or type a value to proportionally increase or decrease the length of the vectors from the Magnitude Multiplier combination box.  For example, type .5 to draw the vectors at half their original length.  The default value is 1, so that the Magnitude combination box value determines the vector lengths.

6)	The End Point Group (XYXY only)

Select the column that contains the X end point values from the X End drop-down list.  Select the column that contains the Y end point values from the Y End drop-down list.


Contours

Contour graphs are surface graphs of matrix data, plotted in 2D space.  Viewing a contour graph is the same as viewing a 3D surface graph from a point perpendicular to the XZ plane.  In contour graphs, ranges of Z values are distinguished by different colors or gray scale, labeled contour lines, or both.

Origin provides three contour graph types:  color fill, black and white lines and labels, and gray scale maps.  The (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours, Font, and Numeric Formats tabs provide controls for editing your contour graphs.

More:

The (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours Tab

The (Plot Details) Font Tab

The (Plot Details) Numeric Formats Tab


The (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours Tab

The (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours tab provides controls for customizing the contour levels, fill, contour lines, and contour labels for contour graphs.  In addition to contour graphs, this tab is also available when you select Color Mapping:Col(ColumnName) from a data plot element's Color button on the respective tab of the Plot Detail's dialog box.

Note:  To resize a column in the dialog box view box, point the mouse at the edge of a column button until the pointer changes shape.  Then drag to resize the column.

The Color Map/Contours Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	Customizing the Contour or Color Map Levels

Origin displays a default set of Z or Y levels by finding the minimum and maximum Z or Y values plotted in the contour (or other) graph, and then finding a Z or Y increment that results in eight levels.  Two additional levels are added to represent any values outside the minimum and maximum Z or Y values.  Thus, by default there are a total of 10 levels.  The fill color, lines, and labels associated with each level display to the right in the viewing box.

You can add a level to the range by clicking on the level that is directly below where you want the level added.  Click the Insert button in the Level group to add a level.  Origin divides the range for the level you clicked on in half, and assigns the first half of the range to the inserted level.

To delete a level, click on the level to select it and then click the Delete button in the Level group.  When you delete a level, the surrounding levels are not altered.

You can edit an individual level value by double-clicking on the value and typing the desired value.  You can also edit the full range of levels by clicking on the Level button.  This action opens the Set Levels dialog box.

The Set Levels Dialog Box

To customize the minimum or maximum Z or Y level, type the desired value in the associated text box.  Click the Find Min/Max button to automatically set the Minimum and Maximum text box values, based on your Z or Y values.

Additionally, you can customize the range associated with each level or you can specify the number of levels by selecting the appropriate radio button.

If your data is plotted on a logarithmic scale, select the Log Scale check box to establish a logarithmic set of level ranges.

2)	Customizing the Contour or Color Map Fill Colors and Patterns

Once you have set up the ranges of Z or Y values (levels), you can customize the color and fill associated with each level.  For contour graphs, this option is only available if the Enabled check box is selected in the Color Fill Control group.  When this check box is selected, you can display the fills using the contour lines as a boundary, or using the axis grid lines.

You can customize the fill associated with any level by clicking on the respective fill in the viewing box.  This action opens the Fill dialog box for that level.  Select a fill color, pattern, pattern color, and pattern line width from this dialog box.  The pattern line width is in units of points.  Select None from the Fill Color drop-down list for a transparent fill.  To create a custom color, select Custom from the drop-down list and then right-click on the "Custom" text.

You can also customize a range of fills, or all the fills, by establishing the minimum and maximum fill criteria for the associated range.  To customize the fills for a range, select the desired range from the Level column (so that your range is highlighted), and then click the Fill button.  To customize all the fills, click the Fill button when either no level is highlighted, only one level is highlighted, or when all the levels are highlighted.  These actions open the (expanded) Fill dialog box.

The Fill Dialog Box

To customize the colors in the selected range (or for all levels), edit the controls in the Color Generations by Interpolation group.  Select the Limited Mixing radio button to select a minimum level fill color (From) and a maximum level fill color (To) and to fill the levels between these extremes with a linear mix of the two colors.  Select the Introducing Other Colors in Mixing radio button to have Origin automatically introduce complementary colors into the mix.  This option provides fill colors that are more distinct than the Limited Mixing option.

To customize the patterns in the selected range (or for all levels), edit the controls in the Pattern Generations group.  Select the From and To patterns, pattern colors, and line widths.  If the pattern selections are of the same style, then the pattern is interpolated between the levels.  If the pattern selections are not of the same style, then the levels are split in half with the bottom half using the From style and the top half using the To style.  If only one pattern is defined (for example, the From pattern), then that pattern is used for all levels.

The Range group displays the range of levels that are affected by the current dialog box settings.  To alter the range, you must close the dialog box and select the desired range from the Level column of the Color Map/Contours tab and then click the Fill button again.  If you want to edit all the levels, make sure that no more than one level is selected from the Level column (or that all the levels are selected).

3)	Customizing the Contour Lines

To edit the details of a contour line, click on the desired line in the viewing box.  This action opens the Line dialog box.

The Line Dialog Box

Select or clear the Show check box to display or hide the respective line in the contour graph.  When the check box is selected, you can customize the line color, style, and width from the associated controls.

To edit all the contour lines in your graph, click the Line button (on the Color Map/Contours tab).  This action opens the Contour Lines dialog box.

The Contour Lines Dialog Box

The Show Lines group controls the show/hide display of the contour lines.  Select the Keep Current radio button to maintain your selections from the Color Map/Contours tab.  Alternatively, select the Show All or Hide All radio buttons to show or hide all the contour lines.

The Line Properties group allows you to control the display of all the contour lines in your graph.  To do this, select the Apply to All check box.  When the check box is selected, you can customize the color, style, and width - for all the lines - from the associated controls.

4)	Customizing the Contour Labels

To control the display of Z level labels in your contour graph, click to select the desired level check boxes.  To show or hide all the labels in your graph, click the Labels button.  This action opens the Contour Labels dialog box.  To control the numeric format of the labels, see  The (Plot Details) Numeric Formats Tab.

The Contour Labels Dialog Box

Select the Keep Current radio button to maintain your selections from the Color Map/Contours tab.  Alternatively, select the Show All or Hide All radio buttons to show or hide all the contour labels.

Note:  To add labels directly in your graph, right-click on the contour line location where you want to display a label and select Add Contour Label from the shortcut menu.  Additionally, to move a label on a contour line, drag the label to the desired location.

5)	Controlling the Color Map Rescale Mode When the Z or Y Values Change

The Rescale Mode drop-down list allows you to control whether or not the Z or Y levels that are established on the Color Map/Contours tab will update if the currently plotted Z or Y values change, or if new data is plotted into the template.

If you select Normal, Origin will automatically find the minimum and maximum Z or Y values in your dataset, and then create evenly sized Z or Y levels and associated colors.

If you select Manual, the current Z or Y levels and associated colors set on the Color Map/Contours tab will remain fixed, independent of the Z or Y range of your dataset.  To alter the levels and colors, you must edit the Level and Fill controls.

If you select Fixed From, the minimum level will remain unchanged, independent of the Z or Y range of your dataset.  Alternatively, if you select Fixed To, the maximum level will remain unchanged, independent of the Z or Y range of your dataset.


Plotting:  Customizing the Graph - Contours - The (Plot Details) Font Tab
The (Plot Details) Font Tab

When you select any Labels check boxes on the (Plot Details) Color Map/Contours tab, you can customize the font for the labels on the Font tab.  Select the desired font, color, and size from the associated controls.  Additionally, bold, italic, and underline buttons are available.  To enhance the display of the labels on the color contours, select the White Out check box.


The (Plot Details) Numeric Formats Tab

The (Plot Details) Numeric Formats tab provides controls for customizing the display of the numeric values for the color map levels.  This control includes the level values in the Level dialog box, the level list on the Color Map/Contours tab, the contour labels in the graph, and the color scale legend in the graph.

The Numeric Formats Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Numeric Formats Group

Specify the display format for the color map and contour levels from the Format drop-down list.  Select between decimal, engineering, and scientific display.  If you select one of the decimal formats, Origin uses a threshold for conversion to scientific notation.  This threshold is controlled on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Type a value in the Divide by Factor text box to divide all the color map and contour levels by this amount.

Select the Decimal Places radio button to control the display of the number of digits after the decimal place.  Select the desired value from the associated list box.

Select the Significant Digits radio button to control the number of digits displayed.  Select the desired value from the associated list box.

Type a prefix or a suffix to append to the color map and contour level labels in the associated text boxes.  The prefix and suffix display in the graph.  They do not, however, display in the level list on the Color Map/Contours tab.  When you type a prefix or suffix, you can use special formatting commands to control the font style (for example, superscript, subscript, and bold).  For information on controlling the font style, see  Customizing Font Styles and Adding Special Characters to Text Labels.

2)	The Labeling Criteria Group

The Min. Area combination box can be used to set a percent value such that only contours that have a fraction of the total area larger than the set value will have a label associated with them.


Plotting:  Customizing the Graph - Data Plots:  Customizing Specific Elements - 3D Surfaces
3D Surfaces

Origin provides the following surface graph types:  color fill, X or Y constant with base, color map, bars, and wire frames.  The (Plot Details) Side Walls, Wire Frame, Grids, Surface/Projections, and Bars tabs provide controls for editing your surface graphs.

Note:  To customize the XY, YZ, and ZX planes, or the axis length and rotation, edit the Axis tab of the Plot Details dialog box when the layer icon is selected on the left side of the dialog box.

More:

The (Plot Details) Wire Frame (or Grids) Tab

The (Plot Details) Side Walls Tab

The (Plot Details) Surface/Projections Tab

The (Plot Details) Bars Tab


The (Plot Details) Wire Frame (or Grids) Tab

The (Plot Details) Wire Frame (or Grids) tab provides controls for customizing the wire frame or grids for all the surface graphs except the 3D bars.  The controls on the tab are identical for each of these surface graphs, except for the grid and fill color controls.  These controls are dependent on the type of surface graph you are editing.

The Wire Frame (or Grids) Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Enable Grids Drop-down List

Select the grid lines for display in the graph from this drop-down list.

2)	The Grid Line Width

Type or select the desired grid line width from this combination box.  The grid line width is in units of points.

3)	The Grid Color Group

For color fill and X or Y constant with base surfaces, select a grid color from the associated drop-down list.

For color map surfaces, select the Single radio button to display all the grids using the color from the associated drop-down list.  Select the Use Color Map radio button to display the grids using the color map established on the Color Map tab.

For wire frames and wire frame surfaces, select the Single radio button to display the grids using the color from the associated drop-down list.  Select the Dual Color radio button to display additional lines between the surface grid lines.  Type the number of additional lines in the Number of Lines text box.  Select the color for the additional lines from the Second Color drop-down list.

4)	The Surface Group

Select the Back Color check box to display a color on the back side of the surface.  Select the desired color from the associated drop-down list.

5)	The Front Color Drop-down List (color fill and X or Y constant with base only)

Select the surface color from this drop-down list.


The (Plot Details) Side Walls Tab

Side walls are 2D walls that extend from the height of the surface graph down to the bottom of the Z axis range.  X side walls display in the XZ plane.  Y side walls display in the YZ plane.  The (Plot Details) Side Walls tab provides controls for displaying the side walls and customizing their color.

The Side Walls Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

Select the Enable button to display X and Y side walls in the graph.  Select the desired color from the associated drop-down lists.  To hide either the X or Y side walls, select None from the associated drop-down list.


The (Plot Details) Surface/Projections Tab

The Surface/Projections tab provides controls to edit the surface display of a color map surface graph, as well as the top and bottom contour projections.  This tab also provides controls to hide data above or below a specified Z value.

The Surface/Projections Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Surface, Top Contour, and Bottom Contour Controls

To display a fill color on the 3D surface, select the Fill Color check box in the Surface column.  To display the fill color as top or bottom contours, select the Fill Color check box in the Top Contour or Bottom Contour column.

Similarly, to display contour lines with the fill color, select the check box associated with the surface or the desired contour.  Select the contour line color and width from the associated drop-down lists.  The contour line width is in units of points.

2)	The Z Clipping Group

The Z clipping controls allow you to clip the color map surface at the lower or upper axis scale range.  Both controls are in units of % of the Z axis scale.

When the Low (%) text box is set to 0, the surface is not clipped at the low end.  If you type n in this text box, the surface that is associated with the lower n% of the Z axis scale is clipped from view.

When the High (%) text box is set to 100, the surface is not clipped at the high end.  If you type n in this text box, the surface above n% of the Z axis scale is clipped from view.  For example, type 75 to clip the surface associated with the top 25% of the Z axis scale range.


The (Plot Details) Bars Tab

The Bars tab provides controls to customize the display of 3D bar graphs.  These controls include the bar border and fill, as well as the bar widths.

The (3D) Bars Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Border Color Drop-down List

Select a border color from this drop-down list.

2)	The Border Width Combination Box

Type or select a border line width from this combination box.  The border line width is in units of points.

3)	The Fill Color Group

Select the Same for All radio button to display all the bars using the same color.  Select the bar color from the associated drop-down list.

Alternatively, select the Increment radio button to increment the bar color along the Y axis.  Select the start color from the associated drop-down list.  Origin increments through the color palette.

4)	The Bar Widths (%) Group

Type or select a value from the X (Y) Direction combination box to set the thickness of the bars along the X (Y) axis.  The combination box is in units of % of the X (Y) axis increment.


Error Bars

When a data plot includes error bars, the Plot Details dialog box lists an error bars icon beneath the associated data plot icon on the left side of the dialog box.

When the error bars icon is selected, an Error Bar tab displays on the right side of the dialog box.

More:

The (Plot Details) Error Bar Tab


The (Plot Details) Error Bar Tab

The Error Bar tab provides controls to edit the color, line width, and other style properties of the error bars in the data plot, as well as the direction of the error bars.

The Error Bar Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Style Group

Select the desired error bar color from the Color drop-down list.  Select Automatic to ensure that the error bar color follows the associated symbol color in a data plot with symbols, or the associated line color if no symbols exist.

Type or select the error bar line width from the Line Width combination box.  The width is in units of points.

Type or select the error bar cap width from the Cap Width combination box.  The error bar cap width is in units of points.

Select the Through Symbol check box to display error bars through points in the data plot.

Select the Apply to Layer check box to apply the Style group settings to all error bars plotted in the layer.

2)	The Direction Group

Select the Plus check box to draw error bars above the data plot, or pointing away from 0, when the Relative radio button is selected.  This option is most useful when editing error bars in a column graph that includes negative column values.

Select the Minus check box to draw error bars below the data plot, or pointing toward 0, when the Relative radio button is selected.

Select the X Error Bar check box to draw error bars in the X (horizontal) direction.

Select the Absolute radio button to draw plus Y error bars pointing up and minus Y error bars pointing down.  Select the Relative radio button to draw plus Y error bars pointing away from 0 and minus Y error bars pointing toward 0.


Data Labels

Data labels provide a useful way to annotate specific data points or axis scale values in a graph.  Worksheet or Excel workbook column values can be used as data labels in a graph window.  To include worksheet data label values in the graph window, the column containing the data label values must be designated as Label.  Origin plots each data label at the XY position of the associated data point.

Note:  You can use text formatting switches in the cells of a worksheet Label column.  For example, to display a data label in bold font style, type \b(YourLabel) in the worksheet cell.  For a complete description of the text formatting switches, see  Customizing Font Styles and Adding Special Characters to Text Labels.

When a data plot includes data labels, the Plot Details dialog box lists a data labels icon beneath the associated data plot icon on the left side of the dialog box.

When the data labels icon is selected, a Font tab displays on the right side of the dialog box.

More:

The (Plot Details) Font Tab


Plotting:  Customizing the Graph - Data Labels - The (Plot Details) Font Tab
The (Plot Details) Font Tab

The Font tab provides controls to edit the appearance and location of the data labels in the data plot.  Additionally, the Font tab controls the display of contour labels in a contour graph.  The controls available on the Font tab are dependent on the type of data plot element you are editing.

The Font Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Font Drop-down List

Select the desired font from this drop-down list.  The Default font is controlled from the Default drop-down list on the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog box.

2)	The Color Drop-down List

Select the desired color from this drop-down list.

3)	The Size Combination Box

Type or select a size from this combination box.  The size is in units of points.

4)	The Justify Drop-down List

You can center, left justify, or right justify the data labels relative to their associated data points.  For example, select Left to align the left edge of the labels with the XY coordinates of the data point.

5)	The Attach to Axis Drop-down List

Align the data labels by selecting Left Y, Right Y, Top X, or Bottom X from this drop-down list.  The label maintains the orientation set in the Rotate text box, but shifts to the specified axis location.  Select None to align the data labels at the XY coordinate.

6)	The Rotate Text Box

The value in the Rotate text box determines the degree of rotation of the data labels.  Positive values rotate counterclockwise, negative values rotate clockwise.

7)	The X Offset and Y Offset Text Boxes

The value in the X Offset text box determines the horizontal offset of the data labels.  The value in the Y Offset text box determines the vertical offset.  The offset is measured as a percentage of the font height.

8)	The White Out Check Box

Select this check box to display a white background for each data label value.


Legends and Color Scales

The legend is a special text label that identifies each data plot in the associated layer.  The data plot is identified by name and by graph type.  The data plot name is determined by the name of the worksheet column in which the dataset resides.  If the worksheet column includes a label, the label is used to create the legend.  For information on how the legend displays data from Excel workbooks, see How Origin Denotes Plotted Workbook Data.

Note:  When instructed to double-click or ALT + double-click on the legend, DO NOT position the mouse on the data plot type representation when double-clicking.  Instead, double-click on the legend text.

More:

Creating and Updating a Legend

Changing the Legend Text

Displaying Data Plots from Different Layers in One Legend

Adding an Individual Data Point to the Legend

How to Have Complete Control Over the Legend Display

Setting the Active Data Plot using the Legend

Controlling the Width of the Data Plot Type Icons in the Legend

Displaying and Editing Color Scales


Creating and Updating a Legend

The legend is automatically displayed when you select and plot worksheet data.  When additional datasets are added to the layer, the legend will not update to include the new datasets unless the Auto Update check box is selected on the Legends tab of the page's Plot Details dialog box (Format:Page).

In addition, a new legend can be created by selecting Graph:New Legend or by right-clicking in the layer and selecting New Legend from the shortcut menu.  This menu command adds a legend to the active layer.  If a legend already exists in the layer, the menu command updates the legend to reflect the current data displayed in the layer.


Changing the Legend Text

To edit the legend, double-click on the legend text to open the associated Text Control dialog box.  The legend's Text Control dialog box can be customized like any Text Control dialog box, specifying the font style, rotation, and background of the legend.

The default text in the text box includes special formatting commands.  For example, when two data plots are displayed in the layer, the following text appears in the text box:

\L(1) %(1)

\L(2) %(2)

The general syntax for the text in the text box is:

\L(DataListPosition) %(DataListPosition)

Note:  If you open the legend's Label Control dialog box by holding down the ALT key and double-clicking on the legend, you will notice the Link to Variables check box is selected.  This option allows the use of the %( ) substitution notation in the Text Control dialog box of the legend.

The legend's \L( ) switch creates the data plot type representations (or icons).  The "\" character informs Origin that this is an embedded text formatting command.  The "L" control character determines what action to perform.  In this case, the control character instructs Origin to create a data plot type icon.  The number in parentheses indicates a position in the data list, the list of plotted data at the bottom of the Data menu.  Origin determines the current graph type (for example, line) for the data plot at the specified position, and displays the appropriate data plot type icon.

The %( ) substitution notation creates the data plot names for the legend.  The number in parentheses instructs Origin to select the first, second, third, etc. data plot name from the data list.  Origin then displays the associated worksheet column label in the legend.  If no label exists, Origin displays the column name.  (Note:  If the Full Dataset Name check box on the Legend tab of the Plot Details dialog box (graph page icon selected on left side of dialog box) is selected, Origin will always display the dataset name in the legend.)

You can customize the legend text by directly typing any text in the Text Control dialog box.  You can also add special @letter arguments to the %(DataListPosition) notation.  For example, to display the worksheet name instead of the column label, use the following syntax:  %(DataListPosition,@w)

The following section reviews the possible @letter arguments.

@letter Arguments for the Legend

@d = Primary dataset name.

@c = Column name.

@w = Worksheet name.

@l = All lines of column label on separate lines.

@u = First two lines of column label on same line, second label is enclosed in parentheses.

When you customize the legend by directly typing in text or by using the @letter arguments, Origin will overwrite your changes when the legend is updated.  You can, however, rename the legend object (Label Control dialog box) to prevent this behavior.  To open the Label Control dialog box for a legend, hold the ALT key down while double-clicking on the legend.  Type an alternative name in the Object Name text box.

Another option for customizing the legend is to edit the Origin initialization file that defines what the legend will display.  Origin creates graph legends based on the legend variable setting in the [Text] section of the ORIGIN.INI file (located in your Origin folder).  In the ORIGIN.INI file, legend=\L(%d) %%(%d)\r\n, where the string is in C printf format.  This notation can be summarized as follows:

\L(%d) creates a data plot type icon for each data plot in the data list.

%%(%d) creates the text entry for each data plot type icon.

\r\n creates a new line between legend entries.

In the second part of this expression, the @letter notation has been omitted:  %%(%d,@letter)  When @letter is omitted, Origin assumes @u.  @u tells Origin to take the first two lines from the column label field and display them in a single line in the graph legend:

first line (second line)

If no labels exist, Origin displays the column name in the legend by default.

You can customize your legends by modifying the legend assignment statement in the ORIGIN.INI file.  You can use any of the @letter arguments reviewed above.  One advantage for customizing the legend by editing the legend variable is that Origin will not overwrite your custom legend.  However, if the Full Dataset Name check box on the Legend tab of the Plot Details dialog box (graph page icon selected on left side of dialog box) is selected, Origin will always display the dataset name in the legend, independent of the @letter specification in the ORIGIN.INI file.


Displaying Data Plots from Different Layers in One Legend

The default legend displays the data plot type icons and column names of the data plots displayed in the associated layer.  When creating a graph with multiple layers, a legend is created for each layer.  Origin provides the option of displaying data plot type icons and column names of datasets from any, or all, of the layers in the graph window in the same legend.

Use the following syntax to create a legend that includes datasets from other layers:

\L(LayerNumber.DataPlotNumber,DataPointNumber)

where LayerNumber is the layer number displaying the data plot.  If LayerNumber is not specified, the legend layer is the default. DataPlotNumber is the position of the data plot in the data list (when the respective layer is active), and DataPointNumber is the row or index number of the data point in the dataset.

When using the \L(LayerNumber.DataPlotNumber,DataPointNumber) notation to create a legend from multiple layers, you cannot use the %( ) notation to create the data plot names for the legend.  Enter the appropriate names after the \L( ) command in the text box of the Text Control dialog box.

For example, the following graph legend was created by typing the following lines of text in the Text Control dialog box:

\L(1.1,1) Test 1

\L(2.1,1) Test 2


Adding an Individual Data Point to the Legend

Individual data points can be added to the legend.  This is useful when the point has been individually formatted, as described in  Controlling the Display Properties of a Data Point.  Use the following syntax to create a legend that includes an individual point:

\L(LayerNumber.DataPlotNumber,DataPointNumber)

where LayerNumber is the layer number displaying the data plot.  If a LayerNumber is not specified, the legend layer is the default.  DataPlotNumber is the position of the data plot in the data list (when the respective layer is active), and DataPointNumber is the row or index number of the data point in the data plot.

For example, the following graph legend was created by typing the following lines of text in the Text Control dialog box:

\L(1) %(1)

\L(1.1,6) Response


How to Have Complete Control Over the Legend Display

A graph legend can be created displaying data plot icons that are completely independent of the displayed plot details.  Origin allows for complete control over the data plot icons in the legend by using the following syntax in the text box of the legend's Text Control dialog box:

\L(O(SymEdgeColor,Sym,Fill,Size,ColorLn,LineStyle,Gap,LnWidth,SymFillColor))

where:

SymEdgeColor determines the color of the symbol edge in the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the color sequence in the color palette (1=Black, 2=Red, etc.).  To view the complete color sequence, select Format:Color Palette.

Sym determines the symbol shape in the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the symbol shape, where 0 = no symbol, 1 = square, 2 = circle, 3 = up triangle, 4 = down triangle, 5 = diamond, 6 = cross (+), 7 = cross (x), 8 = star (*), 9 = bar (-), 10 = bar (|), 11 = number, 12 = LETTER, 13 = letter, 14 = right arrow, 15 = left triangle, 16 = right triangle, 17 = hexagon, 18 = sphere, 19 = star, and 20 = pentagon.

Fill determines the symbol interior for the symbols in the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the symbol interior, where 0 = solid, 1 = open, 2 = dot center, 3 = hollow, 4 = + center, 5 = x center, 6 = - center, 7 = | center, 8 = half up, 9 = half right, 10 = half down, and 11 = half left.

Size determines the symbol size in the legend.  Type a value for the symbol size in points.

ColorLn determines the line color in the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the color sequence in the color palette (1=Black, 2=Red, etc.).  To view the complete color sequence, select Format:Color Palette.

LineStyle determines the line style for the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the line style sequence in the Style drop-down list on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box (0=Solid, 1=Dash, etc.).

Gap determines the line and symbol gap in the legend.  Type a gap value that corresponds to a % of the symbol diameter.  For example, type 50 to display a gap between the symbol and the line (in the legend) which is 50% of the symbol diameter.

LnWidth determines the line width for the legend.  Type a value for the line width in points.  A value of 0 results in no line display.

SymFillColor determines the color of the symbol fill in the legend.  Type a value corresponding to the color sequence in the color palette (1=Black, 2=Red, etc.).  To view the complete color sequence, select Format:Color Palette.


Setting the Active Data Plot using the Legend

To enable the selection of the active data plot by clicking on the respective data plot type icon in the legend, select Format:Page to open the Plot Details dialog box, select the Legends tab, and then select the Indicate Active Dataset check box.


Controlling the Width of the Data Plot Type Icons in the Legend

To control the width of the data plot type icons in the legend, select Format:Page to open the Plot Details dialog box, select the Legends tab, and then type the desired value in the Symbol Width text box.  The value is in units of % of the font.


Displaying and Editing Color Scales

The color scale is a specialized object that displays a color map and associated Y or Z levels for color mapped or contour data plots.  The color scale displays by default when creating color filled or gray scale contour graphs.  For information about color mapping, see  Using a Selected Dataset to Control the Color of Your Data Plot.

To add a color scale to a graph layer containing a color mapped data plot, select Graph:New Color Scale or right-click in the layer and select New Color Scale.  This menu command is only available if the active data plot is color mapped and a color scale is not already displayed.

The numeric format of the color scale is controlled by the Numeric Formats tab on the Plot Details dialog box (when the data plot icon is active on the left side of the dialog box).  However, to customize the format of the color scale text, double-click on the color scale or right-click and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  Both actions open the Color Scale Control dialog box.

The Color Scale Control Dialog Box

1)	The Text Group

Select the desired font, color, and size from the associated controls.  The Size combination box is in units of points.

2)	The Background Drop-down List

Select the desired background from this drop-down list.  For a discussion on these options, see  Creating Text Labels.

3)	The Reverse Order Check Box

Select this check box to reverse the color map and associated level text order.

4)	The Size and Gaps Group

Set the width of the color scale from the Color Bar Thickness combination box.  Set the gap between the color scale and the associated labels from the Label Gap combination box.  To shift the labels up and down in relation to the color scale, edit the Label Side Offset combination box.  Negative values move the labels up in relation to the color scale, while positive values move the labels down.  All controls in this group are in units of % of font height.

5)	The Set Default Button

Click this button to set the current text settings as the default settings for future color scales in all graph windows in the project.


Text Labels and Other Annotations

Origin provides tools to annotate your graphs with text, lines, arrows, and other shapes.  This section reviews the annotation tools.  For information on moving and arranging annotations, see  Working with Objects in Your Graph.

More:

Creating Text Labels

Customizing Font Styles and Adding Special Characters to Text Labels

Resolving Math Expressions in Text Labels

Linking Text Labels to Data and Variables

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Boxes and Circles

Pasting Graphics from the Clipboard


Creating Text Labels

To place text labels in a child window, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select the Text tool from the Tools toolbar.  Click on the desired location in the graph window.

•	Right-click in the graph window and select Add Text from the shortcut menu.

Both of these actions open the Text Control dialog box.

If you click within a layer the text becomes a part of that layer.  The text is thus attached to the layer frame.  If you move or resize the layer, the text label maintains its size and position with respect to the layer.

If you click outside of any layer the text label will not move or resize when the layer is moved or resized, unless you click and drag the label explicitly.  Use independent labels to create text that won't be moved, like page titles.  For more information on object attachment, see  Objects in Graph Windows.

The Text Control Dialog Box

Note:  You can use the scroll bars or resize this dialog box to enhance the text box view.

1)	The Background Drop-down List

Select the desired text label background from this drop-down list.  Select None to display the label without a background.

2)	The Rotate (deg) Combination Box

To rotate the label, type or select the desired value from this combination box.  Positive values rotate the label counterclockwise.  Negative values rotate it clockwise.

3)	The Size (pts) Combination Box

Type or select the desired font size (in points) from this combination box.  The default point size is determined by the Size combination box value in the Text Tool group on the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Note:  You can also quickly increase or decrease the font size of any selected text labels (CTRL select multiple labels) by clicking the Increase Font or Decrease Font buttons on the Object Edit toolbar (View:Toolbars).

4)	The Font Drop-down List

Select the desired font from this drop-down list.  The default font selection is determined by the Font drop-down list in the Text Tool group on the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog box.

Select Default:FontName to use the font determined by the Default drop-down list on the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog box.

5)	The Use System Font Check Box

Select the Use System Font check box to ignore the settings from the Font drop-down list and the Size combination box.  Instead, use the system font.  The system font provides faster redraw speed and enhanced screen legibility.  However, when this check box is selected, text formatting (for example, italic, bold, and symbol) will not display.

6)	The Center Multi Line Check Box

Select this check box to center the label text.  This option is only useful for multiple line labels.

7)	The White Out Check Box

To draw a separate white background for each line of text in the label, select the White Out check box.

8)	The Apply Formatting to All Labels in Layer Check Box

Select this check box to apply the selection from the Size combination box and the Font and Color drop-down lists to all text labels in the layer.

9)	The Color Drop-down List

Select the desired color from this drop-down list.

10)	The Formatting Buttons and the Text Box

Type the desired text in the text box in the middle of the dialog box.  Press ENTER to start a new line.  Press CTRL+TAB to insert a tab.

To format the text, use the text formatting buttons (Normal, Bold, Italic, Underline, Superscript, Subscript, and Greek Symbols) above the text box.  Click-and-drag to highlight the desired text.  Click on the desired formatting button to apply the format to the highlighted text.  The formatting option displays in the text box as an embedded text formatting command.  However, the lower view box provides a WYSIWYG display of the text.

If you click one of the formatting buttons without highlighting text first, Origin inserts the appropriate formatting commands at the current cursor location.  Begin typing to add the text with the selected formatting.

Note:  The Normal button removes the formatting of the highlighted text.

11)	The View Box

The lower view box provides a WYSIWYG display of the text in the text box.  If the layer that the text label is located in displays with a background color, the layer color displays in the view box.

12)	The Set Default Button

To set the current text settings as the default settings for future text labels in all graph windows in the project, click this button.


Customizing Font Styles and Adding Special Characters to Text Labels

Origin allows you to use special formatting commands to control the display of text labels.  All text labels (those created with the Text tool, the Add Text shortcut menu command, the LabTalk Label command, or any prefixes or suffixes you type in text boxes) as well as text plotted from a Label column will display according to the special formatting rules.

Text formatting commands always begin with a backslash "\", which is followed directly by a control character.  The control character determines the action of the command.  The text to be altered follows the control character, and must be enclosed in parentheses.

\ControlCharacter(text)

When you format text in the Text Control dialog box using the formatting buttons, Origin automatically adds the associated formatting commands around your selected text.  For example, if you type Control, and then highlight the text and click the Bold button, Origin displays \b(Control) in the text box.  However, you can also explicitly use special formatting commands in the Text Control dialog box, a worksheet Label column, or in prefix or suffix text boxes.  The available text formatting commands are reviewed in the following table.

Available Text Formatting Commands

Syntax	Description	Example
\+(text)	Format text as superscript.	super\+(script)
\-(text)	Format text as subscript.	sub\-(script)
\=(text1,text2)	Format text1 as subscript, text2 as superscript.	script\=(sub,super)
\p%pointsize(text)	Change the point size of text.  200 doubles the size, 100 results in no change, etc.	change\p200(point) size
\i(text)	Format text as italics.	\i(italics)
\b(text)	Format text as bold.	\b(bold)
\g(text)	Format text in Greek symbols.	\g(greek)
\ab(text)	Display a bar above text.	\ab(X)
\(ASCII character code)	Displays the specified ASCII symbol.	\(169)
\f:fontname(text)	Displays text using the fontname font.  You can abbreviate fontname, as long as you use enough letters for the name to be unique.	\f:algerian(font)
\cnumber(text)	Displays text in the color located at position number in the Color drop-down lists.	\c2(red) (displays "red" in the color red)
The \g( ) text formatting command uses the symbol font by default.  This setting is controlled from the Greek drop-down list in the Text Tool group on the Text Fonts tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

To use Greek symbols you must have the "symbol" font in your printer, or have font generation software (for example, Adobe Type Manager).

More:

A Note about Mixing Special Formatting Commands

A Note about Displaying the Backslash Character in Text Labels

Accessing the Extended Character Set


A Note about Mixing Special Formatting Commands

Origin supports nested special formatting commands.  For example, type the following text in the Text Control dialog box:

\b(You \i(\-(can) mix) commands)

to display the following label:


A Note about Displaying the Backslash Character in Text Labels

Because the backslash character "\" is used to denote a special formatting command, it can initially seem problematic to display a backslash in your text labels.

For example, if you type the following in a Text Control dialog box:

This file is located at C:\MY FILES

Origin displays:

This file is located at C:MY FILES

Note that the backslash doesn't display.  If an unsupported option or no parenthesis follows the backslash character, then the backslash character is ignored and does not display.

One way to display a backslash character in your text labels is to type \\ in place of \.  Origin will then display the second backslash.  However, another way to display the backslash character is to use the \v( ) special formatting command.

For example, if you type the following in a Text Control dialog box:

This file is located at \v(C:\MY FILES)

Origin displays:

This file is located at C:\MY FILES


Accessing the Extended Character Set

The entire ANSI character set is accessible when typing text in the Text Control dialog box, worksheet column cells set to Label, or when typing prefixes or suffixes in text boxes.  Those ANSI characters not shown on the keyboard can be accessed using the following procedure.

1)	Click at the location in which you want to add the special character in the text box or worksheet cell.

2)	Make sure the Num Lock is on (the light is on) on your keyboard.

3)	Press and hold down the ALT key.

4)	While holding down the ALT key, type 0, followed by the decimal code for the ANSI character (using the number keypad).

5)	Release the ALT key and the character displays (in the Text Control dialog box, it displays in the lower view box).

For the Text Control dialog box and prefix and suffix text boxes, Origin uses the font selected from the associated Font drop-down list to determine the character display in the label.  Thus, if Arial is selected from the Font drop-down list, Origin uses the Arial character set to display the character in the label.  If you want the special character to be derived from a font set other than that selected from the Font drop-down list, you must add the appropriate embedded text formatting command around the special character.  This requirement is most noticeable when adding a special character from the Symbol set.  In most cases, Symbol will not be selected from the Font drop-down list, as your label will include text.  To instruct Origin to display the character associated with the code from the Symbol set, you must perform one of the following steps:

•	Add the \g(SpecialCharacter) embedded text formatting command.

•	Highlight the special character and click the Greek button.

For text that you type in a worksheet column cell set to Label, Origin uses the font selected from the Worksheet Display Control dialog box.

Note:  Each font has a unique ANSI character set.  To find codes for characters from any font sets, use the Windows Character Map (in the Accessories folder).


Resolving Math Expressions in Text Labels

In addition to using special formatting commands, Origin supports substitution notation in the Text Control dialog box.  Use this notation to resolve a mathematical expression to a value in a text label.

The syntax follows:

$(expression)

In this substitution notation, expression is resolved to a value each time the text label is redrawn.  The text label is redrawn whenever you move the label or redraw the graph window.

For example, type the following text in the Text Control dialog box:

The value of X is $(pi^2)

to display the following label (you may need to refresh the window):

The value of X is 9.8696

When using the $(expression) notation in a text label, you must select the Link to Variables (%,$) check box in the associated Label Control dialog box.  To open the Label Control dialog box, hold down the ALT key while double-clicking on the text label.  After selecting the Link to Variables (%,$) check box, click OK.


Linking Text Labels to Data and Variables

Text labels can also display information about your dataset using substitution notation in the associated Text Control dialog box.  For example, the text label could display "The value of x is number." in which number represents a dataset value that is accessed via substitution notation.

The worksheet syntax follows:

%(WorksheetName,ColNumber,RowNumber)

For example, if the cell at row 2, column C, of the Data1 worksheet contains the value 15, then typing the following text in the Text Control dialog box:

The value is %(Data1,3,2).

displays the following label (you may need to refresh the window):

The value is 15.

When using the %(expression) notation in a text label, you must select the Link to Variables (%,$) check box in the associated Label Control dialog box.  To open the Label Control dialog box, hold down the ALT key while double-clicking on the text label.  After selecting the Link to Variables (%,$) check box, click OK.

In addition to displaying worksheet values in text labels, you can include string variables in text labels.  As long as the Link to Variables (%,$) check box in the Label Control dialog box is selected, Origin will substitute the contents of the string variable in the text label.

Origin uses a number of string variables for storing data.  For example, the %X string variable contains the drive and path of the current saved project.  The %G string variable contains the current project name.  If your current project MYPROJECT.OPJ is saved to C:\MYFILES\, then typing the following in the Text Control dialog box:

This project is saved to \v(%X%G).

displays the following label (you may need to refresh the window):

This project is saved to C:\MYFILES\MYPROJECT.

Note that this notation included the \v( ) special formatting command, to display the backslash character.  For more information, see  A Note about Displaying the Backslash Character in Text Labels.


Drawing Lines and Arrows

To add a straight line or arrow to the graph, click on the Line (or Arrow  tool from the Tools toolbar.  Click-and-drag at the desired location in the graph window.  Release the mouse button and the line (or arrow) is displayed.

To add a curved arrow to the graph, click on the Curved Arrow tool from the toolbar.  Click consecutively on the page four times with the mouse.  Place the first click at the beginning of the curve, the second two clicks along the curve, and the final click at the point where you want the arrow head.  After the fourth click, Origin displays the curved arrow.  The points are connected with a Bezier curve.  To create a Bezier curve without an arrow head, clear the Arrow at End check box in the Arrow Control dialog box.

Note:  You can not resize a curved arrow.  You can, however, move the arrow to a new location.

To format the line or arrow, click on the Pointer tool (if not already selected) and then double-click on the desired line or arrow.  This action opens the associated Arrow Control dialog box.

The Arrow Control Dialog Box

1)	The Style Group

Edit this group to control the color, line thickness, and line type.

Select the desired color and line type from the associated drop-down lists.  Type or select the desired thickness (in points) from the Thickness combination box.

2)	The Arrow at Start Check Box

Select this check box to display an arrow head at the first location clicked.

3)	The Arrow at End Check Box

Select this check box to display an arrow head at the last location clicked.

4)	The Set Default Button

Click this button to set the current arrow settings as the default settings for future arrows in all graph windows in the current project.

More:

Aligning Existing Lines and Arrows Vertically or Horizontally

Creating Vertical or Horizontal Lines at Specific X or Y Values

Adjusting the Arrow Heads


Aligning Existing Lines and Arrows Vertically or Horizontally

To align lines or arrows vertically or horizontally, select the desired objects (press SHIFT to select multiple objects) and click either the Vertical Alignment button or the Horizontal Alignment button on the Arrow toolbar (View:Toolbars).


Creating Vertical or Horizontal Lines at Specific X or Y Values

Origin provides a number of options for displaying vertical or horizontal lines at specific X or Y values.  One option is to create a line with the Line Tool on the Tools toolbar, align the line with the Vertical Alignment or Horizontal Alignment buttons on the Arrow toolbar, and then drag the line to the desired location.  For more accurate placement, you can name the line in the line's Label Control dialog box (ALT+double-click) and then assign an X or Y position using LabTalk script.

For example, if you create a line, align it vertically, and then name the line MyLine in the line's Label Control dialog box, you can type the following text in the Script window (Window:Script Window) to move the line to X=5.

myline.x=5  (ENTER)

One disadvantage of using this technique to draw a line at a specific X or Y location is the rough control you have over the length of the line.  Alternatively, you can use the LabTalk Draw command to create a vertical (or horizontal) line that is the length of the layer and is located at a specific X (or Y) axis value:

draw -l -v XAxisValue

draw -l -h YAxisValue

For example, to create a vertical line the length of the layer at X=5, type the following text in the Script window:

draw -l -v 5  (ENTER)

You can then double-click on this line and format it as you would any line object.  For more information on the draw command, see the LabTalk Help File.

If you require multiple vertical or horizontal lines in your graph, you can perform the previous steps multiple times.  Alternatively, you can display multiple lines by creating a new dataset which contains XY pairs at the locations that you require vertical or horizontal lines.  You can then add this data to your graph layer as a scatter graph, and then use the LabTalk Set command to display vertical lines for each XY pair.  The syntax for this script is:

set Worksheet_ColumnName -k 58

For example, if columns A(X) and B(Y) of the Data2 worksheet contain the XY pairs for your vertical lines and are plotted in your graph as a scatter graph, type the following text in the Script window:

set data2_b -k 58  (ENTER)

Note:  In addition to displaying vertical or horizontal lines in your graph, you can enable the display of vertical or horizontal drop lines for any data point in a data plot that includes symbols.  Press CTRL while double-clicking on a data point, then edit the (Plot Details) Drop Lines tab.

For more information on the set command, see the LabTalk Help File.


Adjusting the Arrow Heads

Origin provides control over the selected arrow(s) alignment and the display of the arrow heads from the Arrow toolbar (View:Toolbars).

The Arrow Toolbar

To format a single arrow, click on the arrow and then click the desired button on the Arrow toolbar.

To format multiple arrows, select the arrows by dragging a box around the arrows with the Pointer tool and then click the desired button on the Arrow toolbar.


Drawing Boxes and Circles

To add a rectangle, circle, or ellipse to the graph, click the respective button on the Tools toolbar.  Click-and-drag at the desired location in the graph window.  Release the mouse button and the rectangle or circle is displayed.

To format an existing rectangle or circle, select the Pointer tool (if not already selected) and double-click on the rectangle or circle to open the Shape Control dialog box.

The Shape Control Dialog Box

1)	The Border Group

Edit this group to control the color, line thickness, and line type.

Select the desired color and line type from the associated drop-down lists.  Type or select the desired thickness (in points) from the Thickness combination box.

2)	The Fill Group

Edit this group to control the color and fill pattern of the object.

Select the fill pattern from the associated radio buttons.  Select the desired color from the associated drop-down list.

3)	The Set Default Button

Click this button to set the current shape settings as the default settings for future shapes in all graph windows in the current project.


Pasting Graphics from the Clipboard

Graphic elements that are copied to the Clipboard from another Windows application can be pasted into an Origin child window.  To paste a graphic, click at the desired location and select Edit:Paste or press CTRL+V, or right-click at the desired location and select Paste from the shortcut menu.

Once a graphic element is copied into an Origin child window, it becomes an object.  The object is selected, moved, and resized like any Origin object.  To edit the object, double-click on the object to open the Image Control dialog box.

The Image Control Dialog Box

1)	The Scale Factor Group

Type a value in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to scale the object horizontally and vertically.  For example, type .5 to reduce the horizontal dimensions by 50%.

2)	The Background Check Box and Drop-down List

Select the Background check box to display a background behind the object.  Select the desired background from the associated drop-down list.

3)	The Use Picture Holder Check Box

This option is only functional for pictures in a layout page window.

4)	The Keep Aspect Ratio Check Box

Select this check box to restrict the object to proportional sizing in subsequent operations.


Working with Objects in Your Graph

Each Origin graph may contain a number of graphic elements.  In Origin, graphic elements are called objects.  Objects may be added, moved, sized, edited, and deleted from an Origin graph.

Because Origin graphs may contain multiple layers, objects added to the Origin graph necessarily exist within a layer.  When an object is added to a graph, it becomes a part of the current active layer.  If that layer is deleted, the object is necessarily deleted.

Furthermore, because layers may be moved or resized on the page, and axes within layers may be rescaled, the object has an association, or connection, within the page.  The object is said to be attached to the page, or a part of the page.  This feature enables you to automatically control scaling and positioning of the object if the layer is moved or resized, or if the axes are rescaled.  For more information on object attachment, see  Objects in Graph Windows.

More:

Selecting an Object

Grouping Objects

Moving and Sizing Objects

Proportionally Sizing Objects

Aligning Objects

Moving Objects to the Front or the Back

Hiding Objects

Advanced Control of Objects

Objects in Graph Windows


Selecting an Object

Click on an object to select it.  A highlighted boundary appears around the object.  Some objects also display control handles.  Menu commands that open an object's associated dialog box necessarily act on the currently selected object.  To de-select an object, click anywhere in the child window (off the object).

To make more than one object active, SHIFT+click on the desired objects.  Alternatively, drag a box around the desired objects using the Pointer tool from the Tools toolbar.


Grouping Objects

When you select multiple objects in a window, you can click the Group button  on the Object Edit toolbar to group the objects.  You can then drag the group of objects to a new location, or align the group of objects with other objects on the page.  To ungroup the objects, click the Ungroup button  on the Object Edit toolbar.


Moving and Sizing Objects

An object can be moved by clicking on the object and dragging to the desired location.  After releasing the mouse button the object displays at the new location.  To de-select the object, click anywhere in the child window (off the object).

The object's movement may be restricted if the object has an association, or connection, with part of its parent layer.  For more information on these connections, see  Objects in Graph Windows.

To resize an object, click once on the object to select it.  Control handles appear at the bounds of the object.  Click-and-drag on these control handles to change the object dimensions.  The horizontal and vertical control handles allow sizing in the associated direction while the diagonal control handles allow sizing both horizontally and vertically.  When dragging the control handles, an outline of the object sizes.  The object remains at its current size, shape and position until you release the mouse button.  Click off the object (but in the child window) to de-select the object.

Note:  Not all Origin objects expose control handles when selected.  Some objects can only be resized by editing their associated dialog boxes.  Still other objects have a fixed size when created.

To move multiple objects, hold down the SHIFT key and click on each of the desired objects.  Move the group by clicking and holding down the mouse button on one of the previously selected objects.  Drag the group to the desired location in the graph window.  Release the mouse button to fix the location of the group.  Click off the group but in the graph window to de-select the group.

If you are unable to move a group of objects (vertically, horizontally, or both) following the procedure above, one or more of the objects in the selected group has its movement restricted.  Object movement may be restricted in the object's associated Label Control dialog box (Format:Label Control).

To temporarily override object movement restrictions, enter Button Edit Mode by selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.  Re-select the desired objects by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the objects.  Now, move the group by clicking and holding down the mouse button on one of the previously selected objects.  Drag the group to the desired location in the graph window.  Release the mouse button to fix the location of the group.  Click off the group but in the graph window to de-select the group.  Exit Button Edit Mode by re-selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.


Proportionally Sizing Objects

Origin provides two methods of proportionally sizing objects:

•	Hold the ALT or CTRL key down while clicking and dragging on an object's control handles.  Alternatively, release the ALT or CTRL key after clicking on the control handle, maintaining the mouse button depression.

•	Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box in the object's Image Control dialog box.  Objects which are copied via the Clipboard have Image Control dialog boxes.  Additionally, pictures in the layout page window possess Image Control dialog boxes.  Pictures are a subset of Origin objects unique to the layout page window.  As such, they possess advanced proportional sizing.  For more information see,  Pasting Graphics from the Clipboard.


Aligning Objects

Origin provides two tools for aligning objects on the page:

•	The alignment tools on the Object Edit toolbar.

•	Snapping objects to a grid.

The Object Edit toolbar displays buttons that provide easy arrangement of objects.

The Object Edit Toolbar

Only selected objects are affected by clicking on buttons in the Object Edit toolbar.  Click on the desired object to select it.  To select multiple objects, SHIFT + click on the desired objects.  Alternatively, drag a box around the desired objects using the Pointer tool.  When you select multiple objects, Origin aligns the objects in respect to the first selected object.

Origin provides an object grid that facilitates object alignment in the child window.  To view the object grid, select View:Show:Object Grid.  This menu command is checked when the grid is displayed.

Objects on the page of the child window are automatically aligned with the grid by selecting Format:Snap Object to Grid.  This menu command is checked when selected.  Objects which are added to the page after selection of this menu command automatically align with the nearest grid upon placement.  Objects which are already located on the page align with the nearest grid when the object is moved.


Moving Objects to the Front or the Back

If your graph includes text labels or other annotations that are overlapping, you can move selected objects to the front or the back of the display.  To do this, select the objects that you want to move to the front or back and then click the Front button or the Back button on the Object Edit toolbar (View:Toolbars).


Hiding Objects

To reduce the screen redraw time, objects can be hidden in the graph window.  To hide all objects, de-select the View:Show:Labels menu command.  This menu command is checked when the labels are displayed.  To print a graph with objects, re-select the View:Show:Labels menu command before printing.


Advanced Control of Objects

Origin provides advanced control over objects used to annotate the graph.  In addition to editing the object's associated dialog box, Origin provides access to the Label Control dialog box.  Objects that possess associated Label Control dialog boxes include:  legends, text labels, shapes and arrows, and axis titles.

The advanced control provided in the Label Control dialog box includes five major areas:

•	Controlling the effect of sizing and moving the layer, and rescaling the axes, on the object.

•	Restricting the object's movement.

•	Controlling how the object updates and is displayed.

•	Associating a LabTalk script with the object and controlling the execution of the script.

•	Linking the object to data and variables (only applicable for objects containing text).

To open the Label Control dialog box associated with an object, perform one of the following:

•	Click on the object to create a highlighted boundary around the object and select Format:Label Control.

•	Hold the ALT key down and double-click on the object.

•	Right-click on the object and select Properties from the shortcut menu.

Note:  Even if you choose not to edit the Label Control dialog box of the legend, text labels, shapes, arrows, and axis titles, associated Label Control dialog boxes still exist for each of the objects.  In most cases only the Attach To group and the Visible check box are defined.


Objects in Graph Windows

Objects can be added to any of Origin's child windows.  Origin's graph window, however, is unique among the child windows in that it can possess multiple editable layers.  Consequently, when an object is added to a graph window, it becomes part of the current active layer in the graph window.  If the layer is deleted, the object is also deleted.  Manipulation of the layer, as well as the axis scales within the layer, may also have an effect on the display of the object in the layer.

When an object is placed on a graph page outside of the layer bounds (or frame), it still becomes part of the active current layer.  However, Origin, by default, "attaches" this object to the page.

Origin provides user-control of the size and position of an object in a layer when the layer is manipulated in the following ways:

•	Moving the layer.

•	Resizing the layer.

•	Rescaling the axes.

User-control over the effect of layer manipulation on the object is achieved by selecting the desired radio button in the Attach To group of the Label Control dialog box.  To open the Label Control dialog box, hold the ALT key down while double-clicking on the object.

Object Attachment and Layer Manipulation

	Move Layer	Resize Layer	Rescale Axis
	Object Size	Object Position	Object Size	Object Position	Object Size	Object Position
Attach to Page	no change	no change	no change	no change	no change	no change
Attach to Layer Frame	no change	moves with layer	changes with layer	moves with layer	no change	no change
Attach to Layer and Scales	no change	moves with layer	changes with layer	moves with layer	no change	moves with axis scale


Exchanging Graphics Between Graph Windows

The entire page in the active graph window, as well as Origin graphic elements (objects), can be copied to other graph windows using the Clipboard.

More:

Copying the Entire Page of the Active Graph Window (as an Active Layer) to another Graph Window

Copying the Entire Page of the Active Graph Window (as an Object) to another Graph Window

Copying Labels via the Clipboard


Copying the Entire Page of the Active Graph Window (as an Active Layer) to another Graph Window

You may want to copy the page in the active graph window to another graph window in the same project.  This can be accomplished using the Edit:Merge All Pages menu command.  In addition, use the Clipboard to copy the entire page of the active graph window to another graph window.  When a graph is copied in this way, it becomes an active layer in the new window.  You can edit the layer contents or plot details of this layer.


Copying the Entire Page of the Active Graph Window (as an Object) to another Graph Window

Origin provides the option of copying a graph, as an object, from one graph window to another graph window.  To add a graph, as an object, to a graph window, select the graph window containing the graph you want to copy, copy it to the Clipboard, and then select the destination graph window and paste the Clipboard contents.


Copying Labels via the Clipboard

Labels and other objects can be copied between child windows using the Clipboard.  Select the object by either clicking on the object, or by dragging a box around the object and then releasing the mouse button.  Both techniques result in a highlighted box displaying around the object.  Copy the selected object to the Clipboard and then click at the desired destination location and paste the Clipboard contents.


Setting the Page Orientation

Graphs can be viewed in landscape or portrait page orientation.  To change the page orientation of the active graph window, select File:Page Setup.  This menu command opens the Page Setup dialog box.  This dialog box provides a preview of the current selection from the Orientation group.  To change the orientation, select the desired radio button in this group.

Note:  When you change the page orientation from the Page Setup dialog box, Origin updates the page dimension settings on the Miscellaneous tab of the page's Plot Details dialog box.

Origin provides a "shortcut" to change the page orientation between portrait and landscape.  Select Edit:Rotate Page when the desired graph window is active.  Alternatively, right-click in the graph window but outside the page and select Rotate Page from the shortcut menu.

The Rotate Page menu command has no affect when the view mode is set to Draft View or Window View (View:Draft View or View:Window View).


Available Page Viewing Modes:  Speed vs. Accuracy

Origin offers different viewing modes for two major reasons:

•	Minimize screen redraw time.

•	Maximize accuracy of object placement on the page.

Minimizing the screen redraw time is desirable when you are working with very large datasets.  Though speed is also desirable when creating graphs which include multiple objects, verifying the accuracy of object placement on the page is essential.  Origin offers different view modes to facilitate the overall desire for speed and the final check of object placement.

More:

How Origin Generates Screen Images

Print View

Page View

Window View

Draft View

Full Screen


How Origin Generates Screen Images

Depending on the selected view mode, Origin uses either the screen driver or the printer driver to generate a graphic image on the screen.  When Origin uses the screen driver to generate the graphic image on the screen, the page layout information is received from the screen driver.  The screen driver has a fixed resolution which is generally lower than the printer driver resolution.  Thus, when Origin uses the printer driver for the page layout information, it is at a higher resolution and is closer to what you will see in the printed copy.

Note:  The view mode is set individually for each graph window and does not affect printing.  Printed output always shows the high quality, WYSIWYG Print View image.


Print View

To display the active graph window in the Print View mode, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select View:Print View.

•	Right-click in the graph window but outside the page and select Print View from the shortcut menu.

•	Select Format:Page to open the page's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select Print View from the View Mode drop-down list.

Print View is a true WYSIWYG (What You See is What You Get) view mode.  This view mode displays a page that corresponds exactly to the page from your hard copy device.  Font information is received directly from the current printer driver.  Exact font placement and size is guaranteed, at some sacrifice to screen appearance, as the printer driver fonts must be scaled to fit their positions on the page (this will not harm the appearance of true vector fonts).  This is a slow process, and screen refresh speed suffers as a result.  Thus, reserve the Print View mode for previewing your work prior to printing.


Page View

To display the active graph window in the Page View mode, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select View:Page View.

•	Select Format:Page to open the page's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select Page View from the View Mode drop-down list.

Page View provides faster screen updating than Print View, but does not guarantee exact text placement on the screen unless you are using typeface scaling software (such as Adobe Type Manager).  Page layout information is received from the screen driver, which provides faster screen redraw.  Therefore, use Page View mode until your application is ready for printing or copying to another application.  Change to Print View mode to check object placement before exporting, copying, or printing.


Window View

To display the active graph window in the Window View mode, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select View:Window View.

•	Select Format:Page to open the page's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select Window View from the View Mode drop-down list.

Window View expands the page to fill up the entire graph window.  Labels, buttons, or other objects in a graph window that reside in the gray area off the page are not visible in Window View mode.


Draft View

To display the active graph window in the Draft View mode, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select View:Draft View.

•	Select Format:Page to open the page's Plot Details dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab and then select Draft View from the View Mode drop-down list.

Draft View has the fastest screen update of the four view modes.  In Draft View, the page automatically sizes to fill the graph window.  This is a convenient mode to use when you are primarily interested in looking at on-screen data.

Page rotation is disabled in Draft View.  Additionally, text rotation and text formatting (for example, superscript, subscript, Greek symbols, and text styles and fonts) are not visible in Draft View.  All text displays in the system font only.  Text rotation and formatting reappear when you switch to Page View or Print View.


Full Screen

Select View:Full Screen to change the active window to Full Screen view mode.  To exit Full Screen view mode, double-click the mouse.

Full screen view mode expands the page in the active graph window to fill the entire screen.  This is a display-only view mode.  You cannot edit a graph in Full Screen mode.  Additionally, buttons are not visible in Full Screen view mode.


Other Ways to Increase Redraw Speed

Origin provides tools to increase the redraw speed of the graph window that you are currently customizing, as well as the redraw criteria of the non-active graph windows in your current workspace.  These tools are most helpful if you are customizing a graph window that displays a large amount of data or includes a large number of annotations, if your graph window contains a large number of layers, or if your workspace contains a large number of graph windows.

One way you can improve the redraw speed is to control the conditions which cause the non-active graph windows in your workspace to redraw.  For example, when you are customizing a graph window, you may want to make a number of changes to the graph window - without redrawing the other graph windows in your workspace.  For information on controlling the graph window redraw conditions, see  Controlling the Graph Window Redraw Conditions.

Another way to improve the redraw speed of the graph window you are editing is to hide graphic elements in your graph window.  For example, if your graph window contains multiple layers - but you are only editing one layer - you could hide the other layers to increase the graph window redraw speed.  For more information on this technique, see  Hiding Labels, Data, and Layers .

Origin also provides controls for increasing the redraw speed at the graph layer level:

•	Speed mode lets you specify the maximum number of data points that can display for each data plot in a layer.

•	Graphic image caching lets you use vector or raster buffering to display data plots in a layer, instead of having Origin redraw the data plots each time the graph window is made active, or when a dialog box is closed that was covering the data plots.

Speed mode and graphic image caching are controlled on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

More:

Controlling the Graph Window Redraw Conditions

Hiding Labels, Data, and Layers


Controlling the Graph Window Redraw Conditions

When you are making changes to a graph window, and your workspace includes additional graph windows, you can prevent the non-active graph windows from redrawing as you make changes to the active graph window.  For example, if you are editing the Plot Details dialog box for a graph window, and this dialog box obscures part or all of a non-active graph window, you may not want the non-active graph window to redraw after you close the Plot Details dialog box - even though the non-active graph window is not refreshed after the dialog box closes.  Preventing the non-active graph window from redrawing saves you time as you customize your active graph window.  Similarly, if your workspace includes a number of graph windows, and the active graph window is covering part or all of a non-active graph window, you may not want the non-active graph window to redraw when you move your active graph window in the workspace.

To control the redraw criteria of a graph window (when it is non-active), select Format:Page when the graph window is active.  Alternatively, double-click in the gray area outside of the graph page.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the graph page icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab on the right side of this dialog box.  The Percent of Page Uncovered to Redraw Page text box controls the redraw criteria of this graph window when it is non-active.  The text box is in units of % of page.  Type a redraw threshold value n, so that if more than n% of the graph page is uncovered, the graph window will redraw when:

•	The active graph window that is displaying on top of this graph window is moved.

•	A dialog box that was covering this non-active graph window is moved or closed.

The lower the number in the Percent of Page Uncovered to Redraw Page text box, the more often the graph window is redrawn.


Hiding Labels, Data, and Layers

In addition to controlling the redraw criteria of a graph window, you can hide labels (objects) and data plots in your graph window to reduce the graph window redraw time.

•	To hide labels on the page, de-select the View:Show:Labels menu command.  Labels display when this menu command is checked.  To view the labels, re-select the menu command.

•	To hide all data plots on the page, de-select the View:Show:Data menu command.  Data plots display when this menu command is checked.  To view the data plots, re-select the menu command.

Alternatively, right-click on a data plot and select Hide Data Plot or Hide Others from the shortcut menu.  The Hide Data Plot menu command hides the selected data plot.  The Hide Others menu command hides all data plots in the layer except the selected data plot.  To display the data plots, right-click in the layer and select Show All Data from the shortcut menu.

•	To hide the non-active layers on the page, de-select the View:Show:All Layers menu command.  The layers display when this menu command is checked.  To view the layers, re-select the menu command.

Alternatively, right-click on a layer icon and select Hide Layer from the shortcut menu.  This menu command hides the associated layer.  To display the layer, re-select the shortcut menu command.


Setting the Dimensions of the Graph Page

When you create a graph window based on a template, Origin sets the page dimensions of the new graph window based on the portrait or landscape setting saved with the template.  Additionally, Origin sets the page width and height dimensions based on your current printer driver settings.

You can, however, alter the default page dimensions in your graph window.  To do this, select Format:Page when the graph window is active.  Alternatively, double-click in the gray area outside of the graph page.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the graph page icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Miscellaneous tab on the right side of this dialog box.  The Dimensions group controls the page dimensions of the graph window.

Note:  If you open an Origin project file (*.OPJ) that was created using a different printer driver, you may need to manually update the graph to reflect your current printer driver settings.  To do this, select File:Page Setup.  Select Portrait or Landscape orientation and then click OK.  Origin updates your graph window based on your printer driver settings.

The (Page) Miscellaneous Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Dimensions Group

Specify the units for measurement of the page from the Units drop-down list.  Type the desired dimensions for page width and height in the associated text boxes.  The default page size is determined by the currently selected printer driver (File:Print).

Select the Set to Printer Dimension when Opened from a Template check box to automatically set the page to the correct dimensions for the currently selected printer driver (File:Print) when the graph window is opened from a template.  This is the default setting for Origin's templates.

If the Set to Printer Dimension when Opened from a Template check box is cleared and you save the active graph window as a template, when you open a graph window from this template the page dimensions are determined by the Width and Height text box values when the template was saved (independent of the currently selected printer driver).

Note:  When you print a graph window, Origin will update the page dimensions based on the default page size determined by the currently selected printer driver.  Thus, Origin will reset the values in the Width and Height text boxes.

2)	The Performance Group

Select the desired view mode from the View Mode drop-down list.  The view options include:  Print View, Page View, Window View, and Draft View.  This option is identical to selecting View:View Mode.  For more information, see  Available Page Viewing Modes:  Speed vs. Accuracy.

The Percent of Page Uncovered to Redraw Page text box controls the redraw criteria of the graph window when it is non-active.  The text box is in units of % of page.  Type a redraw threshold value n, so that if more than n% of the graph page is uncovered, the graph window will redraw when the active graph window displaying on top of it is moved, or when a dialog box that was covering the graph is moved or closed.  For more information, see  Controlling the Graph Window Redraw Conditions.

3)	The Set Active Layer by Layer Icon Only Check Box

Select this check box to ensure that a layer can be made active only by clicking on the layer icon.


Setting the Page Color and Other Page Display Preferences

To set a page color, or to enable the display of a data plot line connection across axis breaks and missing data, select Format:Page when the graph window is active.  Alternatively, double-click in the gray area outside of the graph page.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the graph page icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Display tab on the right side of this dialog box.

The (Page) Display Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Background Group

To display no page color, select None from the Base Color drop-down list.  When None is selected and the page is exported or copied to the Clipboard, the page is transparent and displays the background color of the host application.

To display a single color on the page, select the desired color from the Base Color drop-down list.

To display a gradient of colors on the page, select a start color from the Base Color drop-down list and a gradient color from the Gradient Color drop-down list.  After selecting the colors, select a location for gradually blending the base color into the gradient color from the Gradient Control drop-down list.  The blending begins at the specified location.

2)	The Connect Line Across Axis Break Check Box

Select this check box to display a line across the clipped ends of a line or a line+symbol data plot.

For information on adding an axis break, see Adding Deleting and Formattting an Axis Break in a 2D Graph.

3)	The Connect Line Across Missing Data Check Box

Select this check box to display a line across discontinuous data points in a line or a line+symbol data plot.


Controlling the Display of Graph Legends on the Page

The legend is a special text label that identifies each data plot in the associated layer by name and by graph type.  The data plot name is determined by the name of the worksheet column in which the dataset resides.  If the worksheet column includes a label, the label is used to create the legend.

Though each legend is associated with a particular layer, controls are provided on the Legends tab of the page's Plot Details dialog box to control specific properties of the legends in all the layers on the page.  To access these properties, select Format:Page when the graph window is active.  Alternatively, double-click in the gray area outside of the graph page.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the graph page icon selected on the left side of the dialog box.  Select the Legends tab on the right side of this dialog box.

The (Page) Legends Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

1)	The Full Dataset Name Check Box

The default legend displays only the column name for each dataset (or the column label, if it exists).  To display the full dataset name in the legend, select the Full Dataset Name check box.  The full dataset name has the syntax WorksheetName_ColumnName.

2)	The Auto Update Check Box

Select the Auto Update check box to automatically update the legend(s) whenever a data plot is added to, or deleted from, the associated layer on the page.  If this check box is cleared, you must manually update the legend for each layer by selecting Graph:New Legend when the desired layer is active.  Alternatively, right-click in the layer and select New Legend from the shortcut menu.

3)	The Indicate Active Dataset Check Box

Select the Indicate Active Dataset check box to denote the active dataset in the legend.  When this check box is selected, a black square surrounds the legend's data plot type icon for the active data plot in the layer.  Additionally, when this check box is selected, the active data plot can be selected by clicking on the data plot type icon associated with the desired data plot in the legend.

Note:  You can also select the active data plot from the Data menu or from shortcut menus.  If you change the active data plot by selecting a data plot from the data list or from a shortcut menu, you must refresh the graph window to reflect the change in the legend.

4)	The Symbol Width (% of Font) Text Box

The value in the Symbol Width text box determines the width of the data plot type icon(s) in the legend in % of the legend font size.


Changing the View of the Page

Origin provides the following features to change the view of the graph page:

•	The View:Zoom In and View:Zoom Out menu commands.

•	The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons on the Graph toolbar.

Note:  For information on rotating or changing the perspective of 3D graphs, see Controlling 3D Axis Length, Rotation and Perspective.

More:

Zooming In and Out

Displaying the Whole Page


Zooming In and Out

Select View:Zoom In or click the Zoom In button on the Graph toolbar to display an enlarged, close-up view of the page in the active graph window.  After selecting the menu command or clicking the button, you must click on the desired zoom location in the graph window.  Origin zooms the page, centering the zoom view at this location in the window (the axes are not rescaled).  To zoom in closer, re-select the menu command or re-click the button.

After zooming in on the page, Origin provides scroll bars along the bottom and right side of the graph window.  Drag on the scroll bar slide control to scroll up/down or right/left across the page.

To zoom out of the page, select View:Zoom Out.  This menu command is opposite in operation to the View:Zoom In menu command.  Alternatively, click the Zoom Out button on the Graph toolbar.

Note:  These page zooming features should not be confused with the Axis Zoom In and Axis Zoom Out shortcut menu commands available by right-clicking in the axis region.  The page zooming features change the view of the page.  This affect is different from Origin's scaling features (including Axis Zoom In and Axis Zoom Out) that change the display of the graph by rescaling the axis.


Displaying the Whole Page

After zooming in and out of the graph window, select View:Whole Page to fit the entire page to the graph window.  This menu command returns the page display back to the default, full page view.  Alternatively, click the Whole Page button on the Graph toolbar.


Duplicating the Page Layout in all Your Graph Windows

Origin provides the Master Page feature which duplicates the page display of a specified graph window in all the graph windows of the project.  Page color, page orientation, added text and other objects can be consistently displayed on all graph windows in the project.

The Master Page feature includes three options:

•	Master option:  Duplicate the display of a specified graph window on all graph windows in the project, independent of page orientation.

•	Portrait option:  Duplicate the display of a specified graph window on only portrait oriented graph windows in the project.

•	Landscape option:  Duplicate the display of a specified graph window on only landscape oriented graph windows in the project.

To use the Master Page feature, perform the following:

1)	Customize the page color and orientation of a graph window.  Add any text or graphic images.  Turn off the display of any object in the graph window that you will not want to duplicate the display of in other graph windows.  For example, you may want to turn off the display of the axes, ticks, tick labels, and axes titles.

2)	Right-click on the graph window title bar and select Rename from the shortcut menu.  This menu command opens the Rename dialog box.  Perform one of the following.

a.	To use the Master option, type master in the Name (Single Word) text box.

b.	To use the Portrait option, type portrait in the Name (Single Word) text box.

c.	To use the Landscape option, type landscape in the Name (Single Word) text box.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

4)	Open a new graph window.

5)	Select View:Show:Master Items.

•	If you renamed your "source" graph window master, then the page display from your source window displays in the newly created graph window.

•	If you renamed your "source" graph window portrait, then the page display from your source window displays in the newly created graph window only if the new window is portrait oriented.

•	If you renamed your "source" graph window landscape, then the page display from your source window displays in the newly created graph window only if the new window is landscape oriented.

Note:  Your "source" graph window and the graph window(s) that you want to display master items in can be in different Project Explorer folders.

To access your Master Page in other Origin projects, save the Master, Portrait, or Landscape graph window to a file (File:Save Window As).  You can then open the window in any Origin project by selecting File:Open.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select 'Graphs (*.OGG)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.  Select the saved graph window and click Open.

Printing, exporting, or copying graph windows in a project that includes a Master Page:

When a graph window in your project is named master, any graph windows in the project that you print, export to a file, or copy to the Clipboard will include the master items - even if the master items are not displayed in the graph (View:Show:Master Items is not selected).  If you do not want the master items included in the printout, export file, or Clipboard, perform the following steps before printing, exporting, or copying the graph.

1)	Click the Script Window button  on the Standard toolbar to open the Script window.

2)	Type the following in the Script window:

@PP = 0    (ENTER)

Now when you print, export, or copy a graph window when View:Show:Master Items is not selected, the master items are not included in the printout, export file, or Clipboard.

Similarly, if you want to view the master items in your graph window but you do not want the master items to be included in the printout, export file, or Clipboard, set @PP = 0 in the Script window.

To return the @PP variable to its default value, open the Script window and set @PP = 1.


Using the Layout Page Window

The layout page window acts as a "display panel" for worksheets and graphs which are created and edited in associated child windows.  The worksheets and graphs displayed in the layout page window are pictures, or objects.  Arrange the pictures in the layout page window to create a custom presentation to print from Origin or to export to the Clipboard or a graphic file.

Note:  To add a worksheet to the layout page window, make sure the worksheet is in the same Project Explorer folder as the layout page window.

More:

Shortcut Menus in the Layout Page Window

Opening a Layout Page Window

Adding a Graph or Worksheet Picture to the Layout Page Window

Working with Pictures in the Layout Page Window

Enhancing the Redraw Speed in a Layout Page Window


Shortcut Menus in the Layout Page Window

Layout page window shortcut menus are available by right-clicking in the following locations:

•	The layout page window title bar.

•	A graph or worksheet picture.

•	Any other object.

•	Outside the layout page area.

•	Inside the layout page area.


Opening a Layout Page Window

To open a layout page window, perform the following:

1)	Select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.

2)	Select Layout from the Window Type list box.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box and open the layout page window.

Layout page windows are named Layout1, Layout2, etc.


Adding a Graph or Worksheet Picture to the Layout Page Window

To add a graph or worksheet to the layout page window, perform the following:

1)	Select Layout:Add Graph or Layout:Add Worksheet when the desired layout page window is active.  This menu command opens the Select Graph (or Worksheet) Object dialog box.

2)	Click on the desired graph or worksheet window name in the list box provided.

3)	Click OK.

4)	Click in the layout page window to create a picture with a default size.  Alternatively, drag out a box in the layout page window to create a picture of the specified size.  Release the mouse button and a picture (object) of the associated graph or worksheet is displayed.

If the source window is a worksheet window, the worksheet grid and cell values display as a picture in the layout page window.  Text labels in the worksheet window will not display in the layout page window.

Note:  To add a worksheet to the layout page window, make sure the worksheet is in the same Project Explorer folder as the layout page window.

If the source window is a graph window, all graphics within the page display in the layout page window.  Thus, text labels and other objects display in the layout page window if the label at least partially displays inside the page of the graph window.  (The gray area in the graph window is outside of the page.)


Working with Pictures in the Layout Page Window

To enhance your graphic presentation, Origin provides tools to customize the display of pictures in the layout page window.  Pictures in the layout page are graphic objects.  Thus, they can be moved, sized, and have their backgrounds altered like other graphic objects.  However, layout page pictures differ from other graphic objects in that they provide a visual representation of the contents of selected windows in your project.

More:

Making Changes to the Contents of a Picture

Selecting Pictures

Sizing a Picture

Moving a Picture

Adding a Background to a Picture

Aligning Pictures


Making Changes to the Contents of a Picture

To alter the display of the picture in the layout page window, edit the source graph or worksheet in the associated child window.  To make the graph or worksheet window active, right-click on the picture in the layout page and select Go to Window from the shortcut menu.  After changing the display of the graph or worksheet, make the layout page window active to view the changes.  If the layout page window does not immediately display the changes, select Window:Refresh to update the window.


Selecting Pictures

Selecting One Picture

To select a picture in the layout page window, click on the picture.  Alternatively, drag a box around the picture with the Pointer tool (default mouse display).  Release the mouse button and a highlighted boundary with control handles displays around the picture.  To de-select the picture, click anywhere in the layout page window (off of the picture).

Selecting More than One Picture

To select more than one picture in the layout page window, SHIFT+click on the desired pictures.  Alternatively, drag a box around the desired pictures using the Pointer tool (default mouse display).


Sizing a Picture

To change the size of the picture in the layout page window, click on the picture to display its bounding box with control handles.  Drag on the control handles to resize the picture.  The horizontal and vertical control handles allow sizing in the associated direction while the diagonal control handles allow sizing both horizontally and vertically.  When dragging the control handles, an outline of the picture changes size.  The picture remains at its current size, shape, and position until you release the mouse button.  Click off the picture (but in the layout page window) to de-select the picture.

Note:  Reducing or expanding the size of a worksheet picture in the layout page window controls the display of the number of rows or columns in the picture.  The actual size of the worksheet picture grid remains unchanged.

Proportionally Sizing a Picture

If you changed the proportions of the picture when resizing, return the picture to its original proportions by pressing ALT while clicking and dragging on a control handle.  (You can release the ALT key after you click on the control handle.)  The picture returns to its original proportions and then sizes proportionally as you drag the control handle.  Release the mouse button to display the resized picture with the original proportions.

To ensure that the picture's proportions are not changed during future sizing, select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box in the picture's Image Control dialog box (double-click on the picture to open this dialog box).

To resize the picture maintaining the current proportions, press CTRL while dragging on a control handle.  (You can release the CTRL key after you click on the control handle.)  Drag the control handle to the desired location.  Release the mouse button to display the resized picture.


Moving a Picture

To move the picture in the layout page window, click on the picture and drag it to the desired location.  Click off of the picture (but in the layout page window) to de-select it.  To move multiple pictures, see  Selecting Pictures.


Adding a Background to a Picture

Like other objects, a background display can be added to the picture in the layout page window.  To add a background display to the picture, double-click on the picture to open the associated Image Control dialog box.  Select the Background check box and select the desired background from the associated drop-down list.

The Image Control Dialog Box

1)	The Scale Factor Group

Type a value in the Horizontal or Vertical text boxes to scale the picture horizontally or vertically.  For example, type .5 to reduce the horizontal dimensions by 50%.

2)	The Background Check Box and Drop-Down List

Select the Background check box to display a background behind the picture.  Select the desired background from the associated drop-down list.

3)	The Use Picture Holder Check Box

Select this check box to display the associated picture as a placeholder, increasing the redraw speed of the window.  This option is also accessible from the menu (Layout:Set Picture Holder and Layout:Clear Picture Holder) when the picture is selected, or from the picture's shortcut menu.

4)	The Keep Aspect Ratio Check Box

Select this check box to ensure that the original aspect ratio is maintained when sizing the picture.  If the aspect ratio was changed before selecting this check box, the picture returns to its original proportions during subsequent sizing.

This control is also available from the picture's shortcut menu.


Aligning Pictures

Origin provides two methods of aligning pictures in the layout page window:

•	Using the object grid to align pictures.

•	Using the Object Edit toolbar to align pictures.

Aligning Pictures with the Object Grid

Enable the display of the object grid by selecting View:Show Grid when the layout page window is active.  This menu command is checked when the object grid is displayed.  Use the grid lines to facilitate positioning of pictures in the window.  To ensure that the pictures position on a grid line, select Format:Snap to Grid when the layout page window is active.

Aligning Pictures with the Object Edit Toolbar

Use the Object Edit toolbar (View:Toolbars) to align pictures (or any other objects) in the layout page window.  The buttons on the Object Edit toolbar control the display of the active object(s) in the window.  Click on the desired picture to make it active.  To make more than one picture active, SHIFT+click on the desired pictures.  Alternatively, drag a box around the desired pictures to select the group.


Enhancing the Redraw Speed in a Layout Page Window

Origin provides two methods of increasing the redraw speed of the layout page window:

•	Show picture placeholders.

•	Display the pictures in Page View mode independent of the view mode of the associated child window.

More:

Displaying Picture Placeholders

Controlling the View Modes


Displaying Picture Placeholders

The pictures in the layout page window can be displayed with placeholders to increase the redraw speed of the window.  To display a picture placeholder, click to select the desired picture and then select Layout:Set Picture Holder.  This menu command is checked when a placeholder is displayed for the selected picture.  To disable the placeholder display, click to select the desired placeholder and then select Layout:Clear Picture Holder.  Alternatively, enable/disable the Use Picture Holder check box in the picture's Image Control dialog box to control the display of a picture placeholder.

The picture placeholders can be moved and sized following the same procedure for the pictures.  In addition, you can double-click on the placeholder to open the associated Image Control dialog box.  Changes made in the Background drop-down list are visible when you disable the picture placeholder display.

Note:  When printing the layout page window, the pictures print out independent of the display of picture placeholders.


Controlling the View Modes

Origin provides an option to display all pictures (and additional objects) in the layout page window in the Page View mode, independent of the view mode of the picture's child window.  The Page View mode provides faster screen updating than the Print View mode.  To display pictures (and objects) in the layout page window in the Page View mode, select Layout:Global Speed Control.  Alternatively, right-click in the layout page window but off the page and select Global Speed Control from the shortcut menu.  This menu command is checked when displaying pictures in Page View mode.  To disable this option, re-select the menu command.

Because the Page View mode uses the screen driver to generate the display instead of the printer driver, text placement may not be accurate in the layout page window when the Global Speed Control menu command is selected.  This is irrelevant, however, as all editing is performed in the associated child window.  Check text placement in the child window by selecting View:Print View when the child window is active.  Pictures in the layout page window print as displayed in the child window's Print View mode.


Sharing Your Origin Graph with Another Application

There are two methods to include Origin graphs in presentations developed in other applications:  importing your graph or sharing your graph.

•	When you import your Origin graph into another application, the application displays a picture of your graph.  The picture displayed in the application cannot be edited using Origin tools.

•	When you share your Origin graph with another application, the application displays an object which can be edited using Origin tools.  The object can also be linked and updated if the source Origin graph changes.

When sharing Origin graphs with other applications, Origin acts as an OLE server.  The following sections provide instructions on how to share Origin objects with OLE compatible applications.

More:

Should I Insert My Graph or Create a Link to My Graph?

Inserting Your Graph into Another Application

Editing an Inserted Graph in the Destination Application

Creating a Link to Your Graph in Another Application

Editing a Linked Graph in the Destination Application


Should I Insert My Graph or Create a Link to My Graph?

There are two methods of sharing Origin objects with OLE compatible applications:  inserting your graph or creating a link to your graph.  The major difference between inserting (or embedding) your graph into another application and creating a link to your graph in another application is where the data is stored.

•	When you insert your graph into another application, the data is stored in the destination application, not in Origin.

•	When you create a link to your graph in another application, the data is stored in the Origin file, not the destination application.  The destination application saves a link to the Origin file, and displays a representation of the linked graph.

Note:  The destination application is the OLE container application.

The following section provides a guide to help you decide if you should insert your graph or create a link to your graph.  For more detailed information, review the documentation associated with the destination application.

Inserting vs. Linking Your Graph

To reduce the destination document file size, link your graph to the destination application file.  See, Creating a Link to Your Graph in Another Application

To display your graph in more than one destination document, link your graph to the destination application file.  See Creating a Link to Your Graph in Another Application.

To maintain only one file that contains information on your graph, insert your graph into the destination application file.  See Inserting Your Graph into Another Application.


Inserting Your Graph into Another Application

Origin provides three methods to insert your graph into another application.

•	Insert your graph using the Clipboard.  The graph need not be saved to a graph window file or a project file.

•	Insert your graph window file (*.OGG).  The graph must already be saved to a graph window file.

•	Create and insert a new graph.

More:

Pasting Your Graph from the Clipboard into Another Application

Inserting an Existing Origin Graph Window File (*.OGG) into Another Application

Creating (and Inserting) a New Graph in Another Application


Pasting Your Graph from the Clipboard into Another Application

To insert the page of the active graph window as an object into another application, perform the following:

1)	In Origin, select Edit:Copy Page.

2)	In the destination application (such as Microsoft® Word), select Edit:Paste Special.  In Word, this menu command opens the Paste Special dialog box.

3)	Select Origin Graph Object from the As list box.

4)	Select the Paste radio button.

5)	Click OK.

Your graph displays as an object in the destination application.

To control the default size of the object in the destination application, edit the Copy Page group on the Page tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

Paste Special vs. Paste?  In many OLE compatible applications, the Edit:Paste menu command embeds (inserts) the Origin graph as an object into the application.  However, in some applications, the Paste menu command displays a metafile image or picture of the graph.  Thus, to be certain you are inserting the graph as an object, select the Paste Special menu command.  For more information, consult the destination application's documentation.


Inserting an Existing Origin Graph Window File (*.OGG) into Another Application

To insert the page of an existing *.OGG graph window file as an object into another application, perform the following:

1)	In the destination application (such as Word), select Insert:Object.  In Word, this menu command opens the Object dialog box.

2)	Select the Create from File tab.

3)	Click Browse.  This action opens the Browse dialog box.

4)	Select the desired *.OGG file.

5)	Click OK.

6)	In the Object dialog box, make sure the Link to File check box is not selected.

7)	Click OK.

Your graph displays as an object in the destination application.


Creating (and Inserting) a New Graph in Another Application

To create and insert the page of a graph window as an object in another application, perform the following:

1)	In the destination application (such as Word), select Insert:Object.  In Word, this menu command opens the Object dialog box.

2)	Select the Create New tab.

3)	Select Origin Graph from the Object Type list box.

4)	Click OK.  This action creates a new instance of Origin displaying a Graph in Documentn window.

5)	If the new instance of Origin isn't the active application, make it active.

6)	In the new instance of Origin, create the desired graph window.

7)	With the graph window active, select File:Update Documentn.

8)	Select File:Exit and Return to Documentn.  This menu command closes the new instance of Origin and returns activity to the destination application (in this example, Word).


Editing an Inserted Graph in the Destination Application

After an Origin object is inserted into a destination application, it can be edited using Origin's tools.  Double-click on the object to edit it.  This action opens an instance of Origin displaying the graph in a graph window.  Make changes to the graph in this instance of Origin.

To update the inserted object, select File:Update DestinationApplication.

To close the instance of Origin and return to the destination application, select File:Exit and Return to DestinationApplication.

More:

Using In-place Activation to Edit the Inserted Graph


Using In-place Activation to Edit the Inserted Graph

Origin objects that are inserted into a destination application can also be edited within the window of the destination application, using tools provided by Origin.  This editing method is called in-place activation.

To enable in-place activation, select the Enable OLE In-place Activation check box on the Graph tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).  Click OK to close the dialog box.  Click Yes when asked to "Save as Origin's startup options?".  Exit Origin.

To use in-place activation, double-click on the inserted (not linked) Origin graph in the destination application.  Origin's graph is activated "in-place" and ready for editing.

Note:  Though Origin supports in-place activation, this is not a recommended method to edit Origin graphs that are inserted in other applications.  When using in-place activation, you do not have access to many useful Origin features - in particular, to the worksheet windows that may contain data plotted in the graph.


Creating a Link to Your Graph in Another Application

Origin provides two methods to create a link to your graph in another application.

•	Create a link to your graph that is part of a saved project file (*.OPJ).

•	Create a link to your graph that is saved as a graph window file (*.OGG).

More:

Linking a Graph from a Saved Project File (*.OPJ) to Another Application

Linking a Graph from a Saved Origin Graph Window File (*.OGG) to Another Application


Linking a Graph from a Saved Project File (*.OPJ) to Another Application

To create a link to a graph in a saved Origin project file, perform the following:

1)	Open the project that includes the desired graph window.

2)	With the graph window active, select Edit:Copy Page.

3)	In the destination application (such as Word), select Edit:Paste Special.  In Word, this menu command opens the Paste Special dialog box.

4)	Select Origin Graph Object (or Picture) from the As list box.

5)	Select the Paste Link radio button.

6)	Click OK.

Your graph displays as an object in the destination application.

To control the default size of the object in the destination application, edit the Copy Page group on the Page tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Linking a Graph from a Saved Origin Graph Window File (*.OGG) to Another Application

To create a link to a graph in a saved Origin graph window file, perform the following:

1)	In the destination application (such as Word), select Insert:Object.  In Word, this menu command opens the Object dialog box.

2)	Select the Create from File tab.

3)	Click Browse.  This action opens the Browse dialog box.

4)	Select the desired *.OGG file.

5)	Click OK.

6)	In the Object dialog box, select the Link to File check box.

7)	Click OK.

Your graph displays as an object in the destination application.


Editing a Linked Graph in the Destination Application

After you have created a link to your graph in the destination application, you can edit your graph using Origin's tools.  Begin the editing process by opening the Origin project or graph window file that contains the source for the linked object.  Edit the graph using Origin's tools.  Alternatively, you can double-click on the linked object in the destination application.  This action opens an instance of Origin displaying the linked graph in a graph window.  Make changes to the graph in this instance of Origin.

After making changes to the graph in Origin, select Edit:Update Client from the Origin menu bar.  Alternatively, redirect window activity to the destination application.  Update the link within the destination application.  For instructions on updating the link, consult the destination application's documentation.


Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page

Graphs and layout pages can be exported to other applications by creating a graphics file or by using the Clipboard.  When you import your Origin graph or layout page into another application, the application displays a picture of your graph or layout page.  The picture displayed in the application cannot be edited using Origin tools.  Rather, use the importing application's tools to edit the picture.

More:

Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page Using the Clipboard

Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page to a File


Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page Using the Clipboard

To paste the page of the active graph or layout page window as a picture in another application, perform the following:

1)	In Origin, select Edit:Copy Page.

2)	In the importing application (such as Word), select Edit:Paste Special.  In Word, this menu command opens the Paste Special dialog box.

3)	Select Picture from the As list box.

4)	Select the Paste radio button.

5)	Click OK.

Your graph or layout page displays as a picture in the destination application.

To control the default size of the picture in the destination application, edit the Copy Page group on the Page tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page to a File

To export the page of the active graph or layout page window to a file, select File:Export Page.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  Select the desired file type from the Save as Type drop-down list.

Origin can export graphs in the following vector and raster image formats:

Supported Vector and Raster Image Formats

File:  Adobe Illustrator (*.AI)
Format:  vector

File:  Bitmap (*.BMP)
Format:  raster

File:  Computer Graphics Metafile (*.CGM)
Format:  vector

File:  AutoCAD Drawing Interchange (*.DXF)
Format:  vector

File:  Encapsulated PostScript (*.EPS)
Format:  vector

File:  JPEG, Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG)
Format:  raster

File:  Zsoft PC Paintbrush Bitmap (*.PCX)
Format:  raster

File:  Portable Network Graphics (*.PNG)
Format:  raster

File:  Truevision Targa (*.TGA)
Format:  raster

File:  Macintosh PICT (*.PCT)
Format:  vector

File:  Portable Document Format (*.PDF)
Format:  vector

File:  Adobe PhotoShop (*.PSD)
Format:  raster

File:  TIFF, Tag Image File (*.TIF)
Format:  raster

File:  Metafile (*.WMF)
Format:  vector

File:  X-Windows Pix Map (*.XPM)
Format:  raster

File:  X-Windows Dump (*.XWD)
Format:  raster

Vector formats are best used for graphs and layout pages with little detail and few colors.  Raster formats are best used for graphs and layout pages with much detail and many colors.

When exporting to most image formats, you have the option of setting the resolution and size.  These settings are available by selecting the Export Options check box in the Save As dialog box.  If the image will only be displayed on a computer screen, then keep the resolution set to 72 pels/in.  However, if the image will be used for desktop publishing, then increase the resolution to Printer.  It is important to remember that the higher the resolution, the more disk space the image will use.

When exporting graphs or layout pages for use on a web page, you should export in the JPEG format using 72 pels/in or lower.  A higher pels/in will not improve the quality when displayed on a computer screen.  JPEG has a very good compression because it actually alters the image to improve the amount of compression.  To increase the quality (and decrease the amount of altering), decrease the compression level.

Note:  To control the default size of the picture in the destination application, edit the Copy Page group on the Page tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

A Note About Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page to an EPS File using File:Export Page

When a graph or layout page is exported in EPS format from Origin, a TIFF preview is added to the export file.  This preview section is in low resolution and is in black and white.  When an EPS file produced by Origin is inserted in a document in programs such as Microsoft Word, the TIFF preview displays on the screen.  However, when the document is sent for output to a printer which is capable of handling PostScript language, the printer produces a printout with higher resolution and in color (if the original graph or layout page contained color elements).

An Alternative Method for Creating an EPS File

If your graph includes text labels with superscript or subscript formatting, or if your labels include characters from the Symbol font set, these labels may display incorrectly when you import your EPS file into another application.  If this problem occurs, use the following procedure to create your EPS file in Origin.

Note 1:  You must have a PostScript printer installed before completing these instructions.

Note 2:  This procedure is not available for Windows NT 4.0 users.

1)	Select File:Print.  This menu command opens the Print dialog box.

2)	Select a PostScript printer from the Name drop-down list in the Printer group.

3)	Click Properties.  This action opens the Printer Properties dialog box.

4)	Select the PostScript tab.

5)	Select Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) from the PostScript Output Format drop-down list.  A Warning dialog box may display reminding you to select the Print to File check box in the Print dialog box.

6)	Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

7)	Select the Paper tab.

8)	Select the paper size to set the size of the EPS bounding box.

9)	Click OK to close the Printer Properties dialog box.

10)	Select the Print to File check box in the Printer group of the Print dialog box.

11)	Click OK to close the Print dialog box.  This action opens the Print to File dialog box.

12)	Select the desired folder from the Save In drop-down list.

13)	Type the file name (*.EPS) in the File Name text box.

14)	Click Save to close the dialog box and create the EPS file.

To create an EPS file of the page in an additional graph window, make the desired graph window active.  Select File:Print and repeat steps 10 through 14.


A Note on Making Slides

To prepare an Origin graphic file for slide production, the computer running Origin must have a Postscript compatible printer driver installed as a local printer, and this printer driver must be properly configured for slide production.

To install a printer driver in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0

1)	Click Start and select Settings:Printers.

2)	Double-click on the Add Printer program icon.

3)	Click Next.

4)	Select the Local Printer radio button.

5)	Click Next.

6)	Select the printer manufacturer from the Manufacturers list box and select the printer model from the Printers list box.

The PostScript compatible printer that you select must have one of the following characteristics:  a paper size defined as 35 mm slide or the ability to use a custom defined paper size of 11" wide and 7.33" in length.

7)	Click Next.

8)	Select 'FILE:  Creates a file on disk' from the Available Ports list box.

9)	Click Next.

10)	Type 35 mm Slides in the Printer Name text box.

11)	Click Next.

12)	Click Finish.

13)	You will be prompted to insert the appropriate CD ROM or disk if the printer has not been previously installed.  If the driver has already been installed, choose the option to use the existing driver.

To configure the printer for a custom (slide) size

1)	Right-click on the 35 mm Slides printer driver program icon in the Printers window and select Properties.

2)	Select the Paper tab.

3)	Select 35 mm from the Paper Size list box (if it is available) and click OK.

4)	If 35 mm is not available in the Paper Size list box, select Custom.

5)	Select the Landscape radio button in the Orientation group.

6)	Click Custom to set the size of 7.33" width and 11" length.

Note:  Some drivers will allow you to change the "Custom" name to "35 mm".

7)	Click OK (twice).

To create an Origin graph file for slide production, set this printer driver as the default driver before you start Origin.  Before you print the graph in Origin, select View:Print View.

Select File:Print to print the graph.  You will be prompted for a file name.  Most service bureaus that make slides request a file name extension of .ps.


Checking Your Display Options Before Printing

Origin provides menu commands to control the display of elements within the graph window.  These display options are controlled by the View:Show:Element menu commands.  They are also accessible from shortcut menus associated with many graph elements (right-click on the element).  If an element is not displayed in the graph window, it will not display in the hard copy printout.  To print the element, select its display before selecting File:Print.


Previewing Before Printing

Before printing a graph, it is useful to check the placement of labels and other objects on the graph page to ensure that they are in the desired location.  To confirm object placement, Origin offers two viewing modes:  Print Preview and Print View.  Both these viewing modes use the current printer driver for the page layout information.  However, these viewing modes differ in the following ways:

•	Print View mode provides access to all of Origin's tools, including the menu commands and dialog boxes.  Print Preview mode is strictly a viewing mode - no Origin tools are available.  Thus, if you want to move objects on the graph page or customize the graph before printing, switch to Print View mode instead of Print Preview mode.

•	Print Preview mode provides a display of the entire graph page, including the margins, at a reduced size.  This view mode provides an accurate display of how the page will look when printed.  Page zooming tools are provided to enhance viewing.

To switch to Print View mode, select View:Print View.  Alternatively, right-click outside of the page of the desired graph window (in the gray area) and select Print View from the shortcut menu.

To switch to Print Preview mode, select File:Print Preview.

More:

Print Preview Mode


Print Preview Mode

Print Preview mode provides Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to examine the page before printing.  The Zoom In button is already selected when entering the previewing mode.  Click in the desired location of the page to zoom in on the display.  To return to the full page view, click the Zoom Out button.

To print from the previewing mode, click the Print button.  This action opens the Print dialog box.  Click OK to print one copy of the child window page.

To exit the previewing mode without printing, click the Close button.


A Note About Displaying and Printing Fonts

Scalable fonts are usually rotatable and resize proportionally when you change the size of an Origin graph.  For best results, we recommend that you use scalable fonts in your graphs whenever possible.

Windows contains two types of scalable fonts:  Vector fonts and True Type fonts.

•	Windows includes three Vector fonts:  Roman, Modern, and Script.  Vector fonts are created as needed by an application, based on a set of software instructions that define the characteristics of the font.

•	Windows also includes a number of True Type fonts, such as Arial, Times New Roman, and Symbol.  These are all scalable fonts, and provide a true "What You See Is What You Get" (WYSIWYG) display.  The screen display will always match the printed page.  For a complete list of the True Type fonts in your system, open the Windows Control Panel and double-click on the Fonts icon.  The Fonts dialog box opens, with a list of installed fonts displayed in the Installed Fonts list.  The font type (for example, True Type) is indicated by the icon.

Printer fonts are fonts that are built-in to your printer.  Printer fonts may be scalable fonts, or they may be bitmapped fonts, which are not scalable.  If you have a PostScript printer, all of your PostScript fonts are scalable.  All True Type fonts are scalable and rotatable on most printers that have True Type support.  Check your printer documentation to determine what type of fonts come with your printer.


Printing to the Printer

To print the active child window, perform one of the following operations:

•	Select File:Print.

•	Right-click on the title bar of the desired child window and select Print form the shortcut menu.

Both menu commands open the Print dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to select and configure the active printer, and set the printing options.

Note 1:  To print the active child window using the current settings in the Print dialog box, click the Print button on the Standard toolbar.

Note 2:  To print a child window or selected child windows from a Project Explorer folder, select the desired child window icons on the right side of Project Explorer and then right-click within the selection and select Print Window or Print Windows from the shortcut menu.  Like the Print button on the Standard toolbar, these shortcut menu commands use the current settings in the Print dialog box.

The Print Dialog Box

1)	The Printer Group

Select the printer from the Name drop-down list.  If the desired printer is not in the list of available printers, add the printer through the Windows Control Panel.

Click the Properties button to set options specific to the printer driver selected from the Name drop-down list.

Select the Print to File check box to print the selected window(s) to a file.  To create a PostScript file, this check box must be selected.

2)	The Print Graph, Print, or Print Range Group

•	When the Graph, Function Graph, or Layout Page Window is Active

The drop-down list in this group provides the options of printing the current, all open, or all graph, function graph, or layout page windows in the project.

Select the Draft Printing, Skip Points if Needed check box to control the number of data points displayed in the printed graph(s).  When this check box is selected, the Maximum Points Per Curve text box displays.  Specify the maximum number of points to print for each data plot in this text box.  Draft printing increases the printing speed of data plots containing large datasets.  If the dataset is larger than the specified limit, Origin excludes the necessary number of data points, distributed evenly through the dataset.  The draft printing option does not effect the worksheet or screen display of the dataset.  When this check box is selected, Origin also disables its high-quality dash lines and hatch patterns, converting them into printer supported forms.

By default, Origin interprets all non-white colors as black when a black and white printer is selected.  However, Origin provides the option to print non-white colors using a gray scale, when a black and white printer is selected.  Select the Use Color on Black and White Printer check box to use the gray scale option.

•	When the Worksheet or Matrix Window is Active

Select the Selection check box to print a range of data.  Type the desired column and row range in the associated text boxes.

Alternatively, highlight the desired worksheet or matrix data before opening this dialog box.  Select the Selection check box to display (and print) the selected range in the associated text boxes.

•	When the Notes Window is Active

If the text in a notes window extends beyond a page, select the All radio button to print all pages in the window.  To print specific pages of a notes window, select the Pages radio button and type the desired page values in the associated text boxes.

•	When the Excel Workbook is Active

The Print Range and the Print What groups offer two ways to print selected ranges of your workbook.  To print a range of pages, select the Pages radio button and then specify the page range in the From and To list boxes.  In the Print What group, select the desired radio button to print a sheet, a selected range, or an entire workbook.

3)	The Copies Group

Type or select the number of copies you want to print from the Number of Copies spin box.

Select the Collate check box when printing multiple copies of multiple windows.  When this check box is selected, multiple copies are collated.

4)	The OK Button

Click this button to print using the current Print dialog box settings.


Printing to a PostScript File

PostScript is a document-generation language developed by Adobe®.  A PostScript printer includes a driver which interprets PostScript code and provides the printer direction in printing the document.  If you send PostScript code to a non-PostScript printer, you will generate pages of literal PostScript code.

To print to a PostScript file, perform the following:

1)	With the desired child window active, select File:Print.  This menu command opens the Print dialog box.

2)	Select a PostScript printer from the Name drop-down list.  (You must have a PostScript printer driver installed.)

3)	Select the Print to File check box.

4)	Click OK.  This action opens the Print to File dialog box.

5)	To modify the default extension, select All Files (*.*) from the Save As Type drop-down list.

6)	Type the desired file name and extension in the File Name text box.

7)	Click Save.  A PostScript file is created for the active child window.

Note:  For information on printing to a PostScript file for slide production, see A Note on Making Slides.

More:

Printing Your PostScript File

How PostScript Files Differ from Encapsulated PostScript Files


Printing Your PostScript File

To print a PostScript file to the printer, perform the following:

1)	Go to the DOS prompt.  Change from the current directory to the directory that contains the PostScript file (or include a path in the next step).

2)	At the DOS prompt, type:

COPY FileName PrinterPort

where FileName is the PostScript file name and extension, and PrinterPort is an available printer port with a PostScript output device.  This command prints a hard copy of your PostScript file.

For example, to print the GRAPH1.PS file to a PostScript printer connected to LPT1, type the following at the DOS prompt:

COPY GRAPH1.PS LPT1


How PostScript Files Differ from Encapsulated PostScript Files

PostScript files (PS) contrast with Encapsulated PostScript files (EPS) in that EPS files are intended to be included in other documents (such as Microsoft PowerPoint®).  EPS files lack some of the "overhead" commands needed to produce hard-copy output on PostScript printers because it is assumed that the document in which the file is embedded will handle this.  Consequently, EPS files cannot be printed by themselves.  For information on creating an EPS file, see Exporting Your Graph or Layout Page to a File.


Troubleshooting Printing Problems

1)	The Layer Dimensions in the Printed Page are Incorrect

If you are printing a graph window and the layers in the printed page do not match the dimensions specified on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box, then modify the X Scale Factor and the Y Scale Factor combination box values on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

2)	The Graph Labels are Shifting Location when Printing

Origin's default viewing mode is Page View (View:Page View).  Page View provides fast screen updating, but does not guarantee exact text placement on the screen unless you are using a typeface scaling software (such as Adobe Type Manager).  To make sure your labels are correctly positioned before printing, switch to either Print Preview mode (File:Print Preview) or Print View mode (View:Print View).  Both view modes provide a true WYSIWYG display.

3)	A Graph Label Prints Partly off the Page

If a label in the printed graph is truncated, re-check the label position in the graph window.  Labels (or sections of labels) that extend beyond the page are not displayed in the printout.  The left and top border of the page are determined by the left and top edge of the graph window.  The right and bottom border of the page are determined by the gray region in the graph window.

4)	Changing Printer Drivers Alters Objects in Graph Windows

When Origin draws a graph on your computer screen it queries your printer driver for object sizing and positioning information.  If you create a graph using one printer driver and then change your default printer driver (or open the project on a second computer that has a different default printer driver), Origin may re-size and re-position objects in the graph window.  This is not a bug in Origin but rather a problem related to the fact that different printer drivers have different sizing and positioning characteristics.  The only solution to this problem is to always create and display/print graphs using the save printer driver, or simply to re-size and re-position the objects as desired after switching printer drivers.

5)	Opening a Project on a Different Computer Changes the Selected Font

If you open an Origin project file that was created on a different computer and the project file uses a font that was on the original computer but is not loaded on your computer, then Origin will choose a substitute font.  If you do not like the substituted font, the only solution is to manually pick a new font from the list of fonts loaded on your computer.  For example, to change the font of a text object in an Origin graph window, double-click on the text object and then select a new font from the Font drop-down list.  Most application programs, including Origin, can not display or print out fonts that are not loaded on your computer.

6)	Origin Doesn't Update the Graph Page Orientation when Opening a Project with a Different Printer Driver Active

If you open an Origin project file that was created with a different printer driver, you may need to manually update the graph to reflect your current printer driver settings.  To do this, select File:Page Setup.  Select Portrait or Landscape orientation and then click OK.  Origin updates your graph window based on your current printer driver settings.


Selecting the Active Data Plot for Analysis

When performing analysis on a data plot in a graph window, you must make the data plot you want to analyze the active data plot.  To make a data plot active, select the data plot from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  The data list includes all data plots in the active layer.  The currently active data plot is checked.

Many analysis menu commands and tool functions, when applied to a data plot, will also make changes to the associated worksheet dataset(s).  In addition, some analysis menu commands and tool functions add new datasets to existing worksheets.  The Subtract and Smoothing menu commands fall into this category.


Data Analysis - The Results Log
The Results Log

Origin automatically routes results from most commands on the Analysis menu as well as results from the Baseline, Linear Fit, Polynomial Fit, and Sigmoidal Fit tools to the Results Log.  Each entry in the Results Log includes a date/time stamp, the project file location, the dataset, the type of analysis performed, and the results.

The Results Log can display as a floating window, or it can be docked to the edge of the workspace.  If the Results Log is closed, it can be re-opened by selecting View:Results Log or by clicking the Results Log button on the Standard toolbar.

Origin allows you to view all your project results in the Results Log, or only those analysis results from your current Project Explorer folder, or subfolders.  To control the view, select View:View Mode:View Mode, or right-click in the Results Log and select the view mode from the shortcut menu.

You can not edit the contents of the Results Log.  However, you can clear the Results Log by right-clicking in the Results Log and selecting Clear from the shortcut menu.  You can also copy results from the log.


Data Exploration Tools

Origin offers a number of tools to select a region of a data plot, view coordinate values, and enhance the data plot display.  These tools are available from the Tools toolbar (View:Toolbars).

More:

The Data Display Tool

The Data Selector Tool

The Data Reader Tool

The Screen Reader Tool

The Enlarger Tool

The Zoom Tool


The Data Display Tool

Origin's Data Display tool simulates a display panel, providing a dynamic display of the selected data point's, or the screen's, XY coordinates.  The Data Display tool opens when the Screen Reader, Data Reader, Data Selector, or Draw tool from the Tools toolbar are selected.  Additionally, the tool opens when moving or removing data points, or when translating your data.

Resize the tool to enlarge or reduce its display.  As a floating tool, position it anywhere in Origin's workspace.  To dock the Data Display tool, right-click on the tool and select (check) Docking View from the shortcut menu.  The tool automatically docks to the toolbar region.  If the Docking View shortcut menu command was already checked, double-click on the tool to dock it to the toolbar region.  Alternatively, drag the tool to the edge of the workspace.  The docked tool remains available throughout your Origin session, as well as for future Origin sessions.

More:

The Shortcut Menus Available from the Data Display Tool

Customizing the Display of the Data Display Tool


The Shortcut Menus Available from the Data Display Tool

The following paragraphs list the shortcut menu commands available by right-clicking on the Data Display tool title bar, and the Data Display tool, respectively.

Shortcut Menu Commands Available from the Tool's Title Bar

Move:  Activates the tool so that it can be moved using the arrow keyboard keys.

Hide:  Hides the tool for the current data exploration routine.

Shortcut Menu Commands Available from the Tool

Fixed Size:  This shortcut menu command is only available when the Automatically Fit to Display check box in the Data Display Format dialog box is cleared.

Fixes the size of the text in the tool to the current size when this menu command is selected.  Resizing the tool horizontally or vertically has no affect on the text size.

Fit Horizontally:  This shortcut menu command is only available when the Automatically Fit to Display check box in the Data Display Format dialog box is cleared.

Displays the text in the tool so that it always displays in the full width of the tool.  Resizing the tool horizontally causes the text size to change accordingly.  Resizing the tool vertically has no affect on the text display.

Fit Vertically:  This shortcut menu command is only available when the Automatically Fit to Display check box in the Data Display Format dialog box is cleared.

Displays the text in the tool so that it always displays in the full height of the tool.  Resizing the tool vertically causes the text size to change accordingly.  Resizing the tool horizontally has no affect on the text display.

Docking View:  Automatically docks the tool to the toolbar region (if the shortcut menu command was not already selected).  If the docked tool is then dragged to a floating tool, double-click on the tool to restore its docked position.  Alternatively, drag the tool to the edge of the workspace.

Properties:  Opens the Data Display Format dialog box.


Customizing the Display of the Data Display Tool

To customize the tool's coordinate display including the font, font color, and tool background color, right-click on the tool and select Properties from the shortcut menu.  This shortcut menu command opens the Data Display Format dialog box.

The Data Display Format Dialog Box

1)	The Font Drop-down List

Select the tool's text font display from this drop-down list.

2)	The Font Color Drop-down List

Select the tool's text color display from this drop-down list.

3)	The Background Color Drop-down List

Select the tool's background color display from this drop-down list.

4)	The Automatically Fit to Display Check Box

Select this check box to ensure that all the text within the tool displays when the tool is resized.  The text font size changes to accommodate changes in tool size.

When this check box is cleared, the Fixed Size, Fit Horizontally, and Fit Vertically shortcut menu commands are available.  Select the desired command to control the text display in the tool.


The Data Selector Tool

To select a range of a data plot, click the Data Selector tool on the Tools toolbar.

Data markers display at both ends of the active data plot.  Additionally, the Data Display tool opens if it is not already open.

To mark the data segment of interest, click and drag the markers with the mouse.  You can also use the left and right arrow keyboard keys to select a marker.  The CTRL + left or right arrow keys move the selected marker to the next data point.  Holding both the SHIFT and CTRL keys while depressing the arrow keys moves the data markers in increments of five along the data plot.

The Data Display tool displays the X Y coordinate values for the current data point.  The tool also displays the currently selected marker (L=left, R=right), the dataset name, and the row index number of the data point.

Perform one of the following after you have positioned the data markers to enclose the data segment of interest:

•	Double-click anywhere in the graph layer.

•	Press ENTER.

•	Press ESC.

•	Click the Pointer tool.

Note:  To remove the data markers from the data plot, select Data:Data Markers, or double-click on the Data Selector tool on the Tools toolbar.


The Data Reader Tool

To determine the XY coordinates of a point on a data plot, click the Data Reader tool on the Tools toolbar.  This action opens the Data Display tool, if it is not already open.  Click on the desired data point to read its XY coordinates.

The name of the data plot's Y dataset, the data point index number, and its XY coordinates display in the Data Display tool.  To move the cross-hair to the next data point along the data plot, use the left and right arrow keyboard keys.  You can also move the cross-hair by clicking on a data point.

A Note on Improving the Search

When you click on a data plot using the Data Reader tool, Origin begins searching for the nearest point by one of two methods based on the number of points in the data plot and the Bisection Search Points combination box value on the Miscellaneous tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).

•	When the number of points is less than the bisection search value, then sequential search is used.

•	When the number of points is greater than the bisection search value, then bisection search is used.

Bisection search is designed to find the nearest point rapidly, but it only works if the X dataset is sorted.  The middle point of the dataset is tested first to determine which half contains the nearest point.  This half becomes the new search set.  If the X dataset is not sorted, then this search scheme fails and you get a 'beep error'.  (Actually a few points will be found this way purely by chance.)

If a search fails because bisection searching is being used on an unsorted (in X) dataset, then you can either:

•	Sort the source worksheet on the X column.

•	Set the Bisection Search Points combination box to a value larger than the number of data points to 'turn off' bisection search.


The Screen Reader Tool

To determine the X and Y coordinates of any point on the graph page, click the Screen Reader tool on the Tools toolbar.  This action opens the Data Display tool, if it is not already open.  Click on the desired screen location to read its XY coordinates.

The XY coordinates, as determined by the axes, display in the Data Display tool.  To move the cross-hair, use the left, right, up, and down arrow keyboard keys.  You can also drag the cross-hair to a new location using the mouse.


The Enlarger Tool

To magnify a portion of a data plot, click the Enlarger tool on the Tools toolbar.  The close-up of the data can be viewed in the current window or in a new window.  When a data plot is magnified using the Enlarger tool, the axes are rescaled to show an expanded view of the data.

To view the magnified data in the current window

1)	Click the Enlarger tool.

2)	With the mouse button held down, drag a rectangle around the portion of the data plot you want to enlarge.  When you release the mouse, the axes rescale to show only the selected data.

3)	To re-display the entire data plot, double-click on the Enlarger tool.  The axes revert to their original scale.

To view the magnified data in a new window

1)	Click the Enlarger tool.

2)	While holding down the CTRL key, use the mouse to drag a rectangle around the desired section of the data plot.  Release the mouse button, then release the CTRL key.  Origin opens a new graph window named Enlarged.  A rectangle object with sizing handles appears in the original graph window (if the sizing handles are not displayed, click on the object to select it).

3)	To change the data segment in the Enlarged window, resize the rectangular object or change its position by dragging.  The Enlarged window updates accordingly.

About the object in the original graph window

The rectangular object in the original graph window is an object named ZOOMRECT.  This object is "hard-wired" to place its zoomed image in a window named Enlarged.  If you change the name of the window, Enlarged, or if you close the window, the ZOOMRECT object will cease to function.  Also, if you invoke two instances of ZOOMRECT by using the Enlarger tool twice with the CTRL key, the two instances will "fight" over the Enlarged window with the most recently moved instance taking over control of the window.

To remove an instance of ZOOMRECT, but preserve the graph window

1)	Click on the ZOOMRECT object to select it.

2)	Select Format:Label Control to open the Label Control dialog box for the object.  Delete the LabTalk script in the text box.  Select None from the Script, Run After drop-down list.  Click OK to close the dialog box.

3)	Click on the ZOOMRECT object to select it.

4)	Press the DELETE key.


The Zoom Tool

To display a data plot and magnify a portion of the data plot in the same graph window, highlight the desired column(s) of data and click the Zoom button on the 2D Graphs toolbar.  A graph window with two layers opens.  The top layer displays the entire data range as a scatter data plot.  The bottom layer provides a zoomed-in view of your data plot.

The zoom view (bottom layer) is controlled by the rectangle object that appears in the top layer.  By moving this object around your data plot in the upper layer, you zoom in on a different area that is displayed in the bottom layer.  The zoom rectangle in the top layer can also be resized to expand the view in the bottom layer.  To change the size of the rectangle, click on the rectangle to display its control handles and then drag to the desired size.


Masking Data from Analysis

The Mask toolbar (View:Toolbars) allows you to exclude ranges of data or individual data points from analysis.  I t is most useful if you want to analyze only a specific section of you data, or if you have erroneous data points that you do not want included in your analysis.  The Mask toolbar is available for both worksheet and graph windows.

To Mask Data in a Worksheet

When a worksheet is active, select a range of data or a single cell and click the Mask Range button on the Mask toolbar.  The cell color will change to red and become masked.  The masked data will not be included in any fitting or analysis you do to your data.  Once the data is masked, you can change the color of the masked cells by clicking the Mask Color button on the Mask toolbar.  Each time you click this button the color increments through the color palette.

The Disable/Enable Masking button on the Mask toolbar toggles the masking on and off.

To Mask Data in a Graph

When a graph is active, you can mask a range of data or a single data point.  To mask a single data point, click the Mask Point Toggle button on the Mask toolbar.  This action activates the Data Reader tool.  Double-click on the data point that you want to mask.  The Data Reader tool closes and the point changes color to red and is masked.  To unmask a data point, click Mask Point Toggle and then double-click on the desired data point.  For tips on using the Data Reader tool, see  The Data Reader Tool.  For tips on selecting a range, see  The Data Selector Tool.

To mask a range of data in a graph, click the Mask Range button on the Mask toolbar.  Data markers display on both ends of the active data plot.  Select the desired data range and then press ENTER.  Once the data is masked, you can change the color of the masked cells by clicking the Mask Color button on the Mask toolbar.  Each time you click this button the color increments through the color palette.  To unmask a range of data points, click the Unmask Range button on the Mask toolbar.  You can now select a range to unmask (not necessarily the same range you masked).

The Swap Mask button on the Mask toolbar removes the masking from the masked data and applies it to the unmasked data.

The Hide/Show Masked Points button on the Mask toolbar toggles the display of the masked points in the graph.

The Disable/Enable Masking button on the Mask toolbar toggles the masking on and off.


Simple Math

Performing Math Operations

Subtracting Reference Data

Subtracting a Straight Line

Translating Vertically or Horizontally

Averaging Multiple Curves

Interpolating and Extrapolating

Differentiating

Differentiating using Savitzky-Golay Smoothing

Integrating


Performing Math Operations

To perform a math operation on, or between, two datasets, select Analysis:Simple Math.  This menu command opens the Math on/between Dataset dialog box.  Note that the Analysis:Simple Math menu command is only available when a graph window is active.  When the worksheet is active, similar results can be obtained by selecting Column:Set Column Values.

The Math on/between Dataset Dialog Box

1)	To perform a math operation, click to select the desired dataset from the Available Data list box.

2)	Click the upper => button to display this dataset in the Y1 text box.

3)	Type a numerical value, a variable, or an equation in the Y2 text box.  To display a dataset in this text box, select the dataset from the Available Data list box and click the lower => button.

4)	Type an arithmetic operator in the Operator text box.

5)	Click OK to perform the math operation.

For example, if you add the Data1_B dataset into the Y1 text box, the Data1_C dataset into the Y2 text box, and a subtraction operator (-) in the Operator text box, Origin subtracts each value in Data1_C from the corresponding value in Data1_B and saves and plots the result as Data1_B after clicking OK.

You can also type a numerical constant for the Y2 value.  For example, if Y2=35 and the operator is a minus sign (-), then Origin subtracts 35 from each value in the Y1 dataset and plots the result after clicking OK.

Note:  If the X coordinate points of Y2 do not correspond to the X coordinate points of Y1, Y2 is interpolated or extrapolated for each point in Y1.  The interpolation or extrapolation depends on the line connection type for the Y2 data plot.  For example, if the line connection type is spline, the interpolation is a spline interpolation.


Subtracting Reference Data

To subtract one data plot from another, select Analysis:Subtract:Reference Data.  This menu command opens the Math on\between Dataset dialog box with the (-) operator selected in the Operator text box.  Select and move the desired datasets into the Y1 and Y2 text boxes using the => buttons.  If the X values of the two datasets do not match, interpolation is automatically performed on the reference data.  Because this menu command changes the Y dataset in the worksheet, it affects all plot instances of the dataset.


Subtracting a Straight Line

To define a straight line and then subtract that line from the active data plot, select Analysis:Subtract Straight Line.  When this menu command is selected, the cursor changes to a cross-hair symbol (the Screen Reader tool).  The Data Display tool opens if it is not already open.  Click in the graph window to view the XY coordinates of the selected location in the Data Display tool.  Double-click at the desired location to set the endpoints of the line.  Origin subtracts the line you have drawn from the active data plot and plots the result.  Because this menu command changes the Y dataset in the worksheet, it affects all plot instances of the dataset.


Translating Vertically or Horizontally

Vertical Translation

Horizontal Translation


Vertical Translation

To move the entire active data plot vertically along the Y axis, select Analysis:Translate:Vertical.  This menu command opens the Data Display tool if it is not already open.  Double-click on the data plot (or click and press ENTER) to choose the initial data point.  The XY coordinates of the data point display in the Data Display tool.  Double-click again at any point on the page.  Origin calculates the difference in Y between the two selected Y-coordinates and adds this amount to the entire active data plot.  Because this menu command changes the Y dataset in the worksheet, it affects all plot instances of the dataset.


Horizontal Translation

To move the entire active data plot horizontally along the X axis, select Analysis:Translate:Horizontal.  This menu command opens the Data Display tool if it is not already open.  Double-click on the data plot (or click and press ENTER) to choose the initial data point.  The XY coordinates of the data point display in the Data Display tool.  Double-click again at any point on the page.  Origin calculates the difference in X between the two selected X-coordinates and adds this amount to the entire active data plot.  Because this menu command changes the X dataset in the worksheet, it affects all plot instances of the dataset.


Averaging Multiple Curves

To calculate the average Y value for all data plots in the active layer at each X coordinate of the active data plot, select Analysis:Average Multiple Curves.  The result is saved as a new dataset (in a new Average# hidden worksheet) and plotted in the active layer.  The new dataset is named average#_meanNcuv where # is the average curve number in the project (starting from 1) and N is the number of data plots used to calculate the average.  If necessary, Origin will interpolate or extrapolate data plots when calculating the average Y value.

Note:  Click the New Legend button on the Graph toolbar to update the legend after averaging the curves.


Interpolating and Extrapolating

To interpolate or extrapolate between the data points of the active data plot, select Analysis:Inter/Extrapolate.  This menu command opens the Make Interpolated Curve from Dataset dialog box.

Type the minimum and maximum values to set the length of the interpolated or extrapolated data plot in the Make Curve Xmin and Make Curve Xmax text boxes.  You are not limited to the original length.

Specify the number of points to draw in the interpolated or extrapolated data plot in the Make Curve # Points text box.

After clicking OK, the result is saved as a new dataset (in a new InterExtrap# hidden worksheet) and plotted in the active layer.  The new dataset is named InterExtrap#_wkscol where # is the inter/extrapolated curve number in the project (starting from 1) and wkscol is the concatenated worksheet and column name of the original dataset.

Note that the interpolation or extrapolation is dependent on the type of line connecting the data points in the original data plot.


Differentiating

To calculate the derivative of the active data plot, select Analysis:Calculus:Differentiate.  Origin calculates the derivative and adds this data as a new column in the data plot's worksheet.  Origin then opens an instance of the DERIV.OTP graph template and plots the derivative into this window.  Any subsequent derivative operation is plotted into this Deriv window.


Differentiating using Savitzky-Golay Smoothing

To find the first or second order derivatives for the active data plot, select Analysis:Calculus:Diff/Smooth.  This menu command opens two dialog boxes.  The first dialog box, the Smoothing dialog box, allows you to specify how many data points at a time to be considered in the smoothing routine.  The second dialog box, the Derivatives on Dataset dialog box, allows you to select first or second order derivatives.  Click OK to close the dialog box and open an instance of the DERIV.OTP graph template.  The derivative is plotted into this window.  The derivative data is saved in a new Smoothed# hidden worksheet, where # is the derivative curve number in the project (starting from 1).

The Diff/Smooth menu command uses the Savitzky-Golay smoothing method that performs a local polynomial regression around each point.  Enough information is thus provided to calculate the derivatives of the dataset up to an order equal to the order of the polynomial used (in Origin's case, this order is 2).  This "side-effect" (of the Savitzky-Golay smoothing) is used by the Diff/Smooth menu command to find either the first or second derivative of the active data plot.  The derivatives thus calculated are the coefficients of the local polynomials that approximate the data plot.


Data Analysis - Simple Math - Integrating
Integrating

To numerically integrate the active data plot from a baseline of zero using the trapezoidal rule, select Analysis:Calculus:Integrate.  The resulting area, peak height (maximum deflection from the X axis), peak position, and peak width are displayed in the Results Log.

The integrated result is stored in the dataset _integ_area.  Because this is a temporary dataset, it must be copied to a non-temporary dataset in order to be manipulated.  (All temporary datasets are deleted when the project is printed or saved.)  To copy the temporary dataset to a non-temporary dataset, and then view the new dataset in the worksheet, type the following script in the Script window (replace MyNewWks_b with the desired worksheet and column name):

copy -x _integ_area MyNewWks_b    (ENTER)

edit MyNewWks_b    (ENTER)

Note:  Origin also supports 3D integration.  To compute the volume beneath the surface defined by the matrix, select Matrix:Integrate when a matrix is active.  Origin performs a double integral over X and Y to compute the volume and reports the value in the Script window.


Statistics

Origin's statistical features include conducting simple statistical measurements such as mean, standard deviation, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, percentiles, and histograms, as well as more complex measurements such as t-tests for one or two populations, one-way ANOVA, and linear, polynomial, and multiple regression analysis.

More:

Descriptive Statistics

Creating Box Charts

Creating QC Charts

Creating Histograms

t-Tests

One-Way ANOVA


Descriptive Statistics

Statistics on Columns

To perform statistics on worksheet data, highlight the desired columns or range of cells, and select Analysis:Statistics on Columns.  This menu command opens a new worksheet that displays the mean, standard deviation, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, sum, and number of points for each of the highlighted columns (or ranges) in the active worksheet.  The standard deviation and standard error of the mean columns are automatically set as error bars to direct plotting.

(Note:  Columns that are set to Disregard from the Plot Designation drop-down list of the Worksheet Column Format dialog box as well as columns that are set to Text from the Display drop-down list of this dialog box are not used in the calculation.)

The new worksheet contains a Recalculate button to recalculate the statistics data if column values change.  Additionally, an Advanced Statistics check box is provided.  Select this check box and then click Recalculate to find the median, 25th and 75th percentiles (lower and upper quartiles), user-defined percentile (specified in the Percentile text box), Inter Quartile Range, variance, 95% confidence limits on the mean, and Kurtosis.

Statistics on Rows

To perform statistics on rows of data, highlight the desired cells (including columns of data) and select Analysis:Statistics on Rows.  This menu command creates a new worksheet displaying the row number, mean, standard deviation, standard error of the mean, minimum, maximum, range, and number of points for the selected data.

(Note:  Columns that are set to Disregard from the Plot Designation drop-down list of the Worksheet Column Format dialog box as well as columns that are set to Text from the Display drop-down list of this dialog box are not used in the calculation.)


Creating Box Charts

To create a box chart, highlight one or more Y worksheet columns (or a range from one or more Y columns) and select Plot:Statistical Graphs:Box Chart.

Each Y column of data is represented as a separate box.  The column names or labels supply the X axis tick labels.  By default, the box is determined by the 25th and 75th percentiles.  The whiskers are determined by the 5th and 95th percentiles.

More:

Customizing the Box Chart


Customizing the Box Chart

To customize the box chart display, double-click on the box chart, or right-click and select Plot Details.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the box chart data plot icon active on the left side of the dialog box.  The box chart controls are available on tabs on the right side of the dialog box.

The Box Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

By default, the box chart displays only the box - not the binned data.  You can, however, display the box and binned data, or only the binned data.  The binned data is saved in a Binn worksheet.  This worksheet contains the bin X values, counts, cumulative sum, and percentages.  (To access the Binn worksheet, right-click on the box chart and select Go to Bin Worksheet from the shortcut menu.)

To display the binned data with the box chart, or only the binned data, select the desired display from the Type drop-down list  When you select a display that includes the binned data, the Plot Details Data tab becomes available for editing the bins and overlaying a distribution curve.

The Box group and the Whiskers group control the display of the box and whiskers.  Select the desired percentiles or other values to represent the box or whiskers.

Outliers, diamond box, and box and whisker labels are activated by selecting the associated check boxes on the Box tab.

The Data Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

The Data tab is available when you select a box chart display that includes the binned data from the Type drop-down list on the Box tab.  Edit this tab to control the display of the binned data.

Select Dots, Bars, or Dots and Bars from the Type drop-down list.  Dots shows the individual binned data points and bars shows a histogram-like representation of the data, with bars of the specified bin size.

Select the Single Block Bar Plot check box to remove the lines between bins when Bars is selected from the Type drop-down list.  Select the Snap Points to Bin check box to align the binned data points horizontally in the bins.

Edit the bin limits by clearing the Automatic Binning check box and editing the associated text boxes.

Overlay a distribution curve on the binned data by selecting Normal, Lognormal, Poisson, Exponential, Laplace, or Lorentz from the Type drop-down list.  The Preview window displays your selection.  The shape of the distributions are determined by the statistics of the data (parameters such as the mean and standard deviation).  The curve is normalized arbitrarily to the highest bin value by default, but you can change the normalization factor from the Scale combination box.

The Percentile Tab on the Plot Details Dialog Box

The Percentile tab provides controls for customizing the symbols for various percentiles in the box chart.  Click the down arrow next to the symbol you want to change.  Select the desired symbol from the symbol gallery that opens.


Creating QC Charts

QC charts are used to study the fluctuation of data in a continuous process.  To create a QC chart, highlight at least one column of values (or a range from at least one column) and select Plot:Statistical Graphs:QC (X bar R) Chart.  Origin opens the X bar R Chart dialog box in which you specify the subgroup size for the selected dataset.  Origin then creates a worksheet and graph window displaying two layers.

The worksheet contains the mean, range, and standard deviation for each subgroup in the selected dataset.

The upper layer of the QC chart is the X bar graph.  This layer displays the mean value for each of the subgroups as a scatter graph with drop lines to the average of the mean for each group (X bar).  This layer also displays two limit lines that are positioned Num Sigma standard deviations away from the X bar.  Num Sigma is defined in the QC1 worksheet window and is three by default.

The lower layer of the QC chart is the R chart.  This layer displays the range for each of the subgroups as a column graph.  The range for each of the subgroups is plotted from the average line (or R bar).  This line represents the groups average range, or the average of the mean range within each subgroup.  This layer also displays two limit lines that are positioned Num Sigma standard deviations away from the R bar.  Num Sigma is defined in the QC1 worksheet window and is three by default.

To create a new QC chart based on the original worksheet, edit the desired text boxes in the QC1 worksheet and then click the Make QC Chart button.  To display multiple QC charts, type a new window name in the Plot text box.

Creating a QC Chart from Multiple Datasets

To create a QC chart from more than one dataset in the worksheet, highlight the desired worksheet columns and select Plot:Statistical Charts:QC (X bar R) Chart.  An Attention dialog box informs you that a group is defined for each row, which extends over the selected column range.


Creating Histograms

A histogram displays the number of times a data value in a selected column fell within a specified bin.  To create a histogram, highlight one or more Y worksheet columns (or a range from one or more Y columns) and select Plot:Statistical Graphs:Histogram.  Origin automatically calculates the bin size and creates a new graph from the HISTGM.OTP template.  The binned data is saved in a Binn worksheet.  This worksheet contains the bin X values, counts, cumulative sum, and percentages.  (To access the Binn worksheet, right-click on the histogram and select Go to Bin Worksheet from the shortcut menu.)

Note:  The Histogram menu command plots each selected dataset in the same layer.  The Stacked Histograms menu command plots each selected dataset in its own layer (using the same bin limit for each layer).

More:

Customizing the Histogram

Histogram with Probabilities


Customizing the Histogram

To customize the histogram display, double-click on the histogram, or right-click and select Plot Details.  Both actions open the Plot Details dialog box with the histogram data plot icon active on the left side of the dialog box.  The histogram controls are available on tabs on the right side of the dialog box.

For information on editing the Data tab, see  Customizing the Box Chart.


Histogram with Probabilities

To create a histogram with probabilities, highlight a single worksheet column (or a range from a worksheet column) and select Plot:Statistical Graphs:Histogram + Probabilities.  This menu command is nearly identical to the Histogram menu command, except that the template invoked by this command (HISTCUMU.OTP) also displays a cumulative sum of the data (layer 2).

Additionally, the Histogram + Probabilities menu command records the statistical results to the Results Log.  The statistical results include the mean, the standard deviation, the maximum and minimum values, and the total number of values.


t-Tests

One-Population

Two-Population (Independent)

Two-Population (Paired)


One-Population

With one column of sample data that follows a normal distribution, a one-population t-test can be employed to test whether or not the population mean is equal to a specified constant.

The one-population t-test is always two-tailed.

To perform a one-population t-test, highlight the desired worksheet column and select Analysis:t-Test (One Population).  This menu command opens the One Population t-Test on Dataset dialog box in which you specify the test mean and the desired significance level.  After clicking OK, the test results are output to the Results Log.  The results include the dataset's name, mean, variance, and size, as well as the t-value, p-value, and decision rule of the test.

Performing a One-Population t-Test

1)	To perform a one-population t-test, open a new worksheet and import the 1POPTTST.DAT file located in the Origin \TUTORIAL folder.  This data file contains 130 observations of normal body temperature (°F), gender (1=male, 2=female), and heart rate (beats/minute).

2)	Highlight the leftmost column of values and select Analysis:t-Test (One Population).

3)	Type 98.6 in the Test Mean text box and 0.05 in the Significance Level text box and click OK.

Thus, with the significance level set at 0.05, we conclude that the true population mean of the sampled temperatures is not 98.6°F.  The p-value tells us our probability of obtaining a more extreme t-value by chance alone when the sampled data is from the population with mean equal to 98.6°F.

Performing a One-Tailed t-Test

If an alternative hypothesis is concerned with only one side of the t-distribution, then type the value of alpha/2 in the Significance Level text box of the One Population t-Test on Dataset dialog box.


Two-Population (Independent)

With two samples of data, one X and one Y column, that are independent and that follow a normal distribution with constant variance, a two-population t-test can be employed to test whether or not the population means are equal.

The test is always two-tailed.

To perform a two-population (independent) t-test, highlight one Y column of values (or a range from one Y column) and select Analysis:t-Test (Two Population).  This menu command opens the t-Test on DatasetX and DatasetY dialog box.  Select Independent from the Test Type drop-down list.  Type the desired significance level in the associated text box.  After clicking OK, the test results are output to the Results Log.  The results include the name, mean, variance, and size of both datasets, as well as the t-value, p-value, and decision rule of the test.

Performing a Two-Population (Independent) t-Test

1)	To perform a two-population (independent) t-test, open a new worksheet and import the 2POP_IND.DAT file located in the Origin \TUTORIAL folder.  This data file contains 65 observations of male and female normal body temperature (°F).  (The X column is male, the Y column is female.)

2)	Highlight both columns of values and select Analysis:t-Test (Two Populations).

3)	Select Independent from the Test Type drop-down list, type 0.05 in the Significance Level text box, and click OK.

With our significance level set at 0.05, we conclude that male and female normal body temperature are different.  The p-value tells us our probability of obtaining a more extreme t-value by chance alone when the normal body temperatures of males and females are not different.  Therefore, if we had set our level of significance at 0.01 for this test, we would have concluded that male and female normal body temperature does not differ.


Two-Population (Paired)

With two samples of data, one X and one Y column, that are not independent and that follow a normal distribution with constant variance, a two-population t-test can be employed to test whether or not the population means are equal.

The test is always two-tailed.

To perform a two-population (paired) t-test, highlight one Y column of values (or a range from one Y column) and select Analysis:t-Test (Two Population).  This menu command opens the t-Test on DatasetX and DatasetY dialog box.  Select Paired from the Test Type drop-down list.  Type the desired significance level in the associated text box.  After clicking OK, the test results are output to the Results Log.  The results include the name, mean, variance, and size of both datasets, as well as the t-value, p-value, and decision rule of the test.

Performing a Two-Population (Paired) t-Test

1)	To perform a two-population (paired) t-test, open a new worksheet and import the 2POPPAIR.DAT file located in the Origin \TUTORIAL folder.  This data file contains observations of two types of percent body fat measurement techniques on 252 men.  (The X column uses the Brozek body fat technique, the Y column uses the Siri body fat technique.)

2)	Highlight both columns of values and select Analysis:t-Test (Two Populations).

3)	Select Paired from the Test Type drop-down list, type 0.05 in the Significance Level text box, and click OK.

With our significance level set at 0.05, we conclude that the Brozek and Siri percent body fat measurement techniques are different.  The p-value tells us our probability of obtaining a more extreme t-value by chance alone when the two percent body fat measuring techniques are not different.


One-Way ANOVA

One-Way Analysis of Variance is appropriate when making a single test to find out whether two or more populations have the same mean.  Assumptions of this test are that the data follow a normal distribution and have constant variance.

The null hypothesis is that the means are all equal.  The alternative hypothesis is that not all the means are equal.

If the p-value is smaller than the significance level alpha, the null hypothesis is rejected and the decision rule states that the means are significantly different.  In other words, at least one of the means significantly differs from the others.

If the p-value is larger than the significance level alpha, the null hypothesis is accepted and the decision rule states that the means are not significantly different.

To test whether two or more populations have the same mean, highlight two or more columns of values (or a range from two or more columns) and select Analysis:One-Way ANOVA.  This menu command opens the One-Way ANOVA dialog box.  Type the desired significance level in the associated text box.  After clicking OK, the test results are output to the Results Log.  The results include the name, mean, variance, and size of the datasets, as well as the F value, p-value, and decision rule of the test.

Performing an Analysis of Variance

1)	To perform an analysis of variance, open a new worksheet and import the ANOVA.DAT file located in the Origin \TUTORIAL folder.  This data file contains 20 test results from three different classes, each of which were presented the same material using different teaching methods.

2)	Highlight the three columns of values and select Analysis:One-Way ANOVA.

3)	Type 0.05 in the Significance Level text box and click OK.

The p-value is the probability of obtaining a greater value for F by chance alone.  Because the p-value is smaller than the significance level alpha, we conclude that at least one of the means is significantly different than the others.


Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

To perform a fast Fourier transform (FFT) on highlighted data in the worksheet, or on the active data plot, select Analysis:FFT.  This menu command opens the FFT tool that allows you to prepare the data and choose the real, imaginary, and time components for the calculation.  Origin's FFT assumes that your independent variable (X dataset) is time and that your dependent variable (Y dataset) is some sort of amplitude.  Once the FFT calculation is complete, the results are copied to a new FFT worksheet and graph window.

More:

Sampling Resolution Errors

Using the FFT Tool

The FFT Tool Results

Performing a Backward FFT

Correlation using the FFT

Convolution using the FFT

Deconvolution using the FFT


Sampling Resolution Errors

After selecting Analysis:FFT, an Attention box may open displaying the message "Sampling resolution test failed!  Please check your data and set the sampling interval in FFT settings."  This error message displays when the sampling rate (interval between each X or time value) changes.  Among its other restrictions, the FFT requires that sampling data be equally spaced.  Although the FFT algorithm will operate on data not equally spaced, it will produce incorrect results.

A small change in sampling rate could be due to instrument instability during data collection.  This kind of fluctuation will not have a significant effect on the results of the FFT.  However a larger change in sampling rate, such as a data spike, will produce incorrect results.

The sampling interval used to perform the FFT is calculated using only the first few cells of X data.  If there is a spike in this data range, it can result in the sampling rate being set incorrectly on the FFT tool's Settings tab.  If this is the case, type the correct sampling rate value in the Sampling Interval text box on the Settings tab before performing the FFT.  This will allow for accurate results to be calculated.


Using the FFT Tool

The FFT tool opens when you select Analysis:FFT from the worksheet or graph window menu bar.

The FFT Tool

1)	The Operation Tab

Select this tab to access the Operation options.

a.	The FFT Group

Select the Forward radio button to perform a forward FFT calculation when you click OK.

Select the Backward radio button to perform a backward FFT calculation when you click OK.

b.	The Spectrum Group

Select the Amplitude radio button to plot amplitude and phase data.

Select the Power radio button to plot the power spectrum and phase data.

c.	The OK Button

Click OK to perform an FFT.  The resulting data is displayed in a new worksheet and graph window.

d.	The Cancel Button

Click Cancel to close the tool.

2)	The Settings Tab

Select this tab to access the Settings options.

a.	The Sampling Text Box

Type a dataset to be used for time or frequency information.  By default, the X dataset of the active data plot (or the worksheet's X column) is selected as the sampling dataset.

b.	The Real Text Box

Type a dataset to be used as the real component for the FFT calculation.  By default, the Y dataset of the active data plot is selected as the real dataset.

c.	The Imaginary Text Box

Type a dataset to be used as the imaginary component for the complex FFT calculation.  If no dataset is specified, a real FFT will be performed.

d.	The Sampling Interval Text Box

Type the time or frequency interval to be used in the FFT calculation.  Increase this value if a Time Resolution error occurs.

e.	The Window Method Group

Select the window method to be used in the FFT calculation.  For a mathematical description of the methods, see the Origin User's Manual.

f.	The Output Options Group

•	Select the Normalize Amplitude check box to perform amplitude normalization.  The effect on the FFT result is to divide the amplitudes of the DC and AC components by N and N/2 respectively, where N is the number of data points.  This will reveal the true amplitudes in the original dataset.  This occurs because we know that cos(x)=[exp(-ix)+exp(ix)]/2.  Thus, when a time domain dataset is transformed into the frequency domain by FFT, each AC component splits into two frequencies, a positive one and its negative image.  The amplitude of each of these frequencies is N/2 times that of its original AC component.  For the DC component, however, the positive and negative frequencies overlap and become one frequency at the center (zero frequency).  The amplitude is thus N times that of the original DC component in the time domain dataset.

•	The Shift Results check box determines how the transformed data will be presented.  If the check box is cleared, the transform is displayed for positive frequencies only, similar to displaying the phase in the range of 0° to 360°.  This is in better agreement with the normal definition of DFT.  If the check box is selected, the transform is shifted around to be displayed with both positive and negative frequencies centered at zero, similar to displaying the phase in the range of –180° to +180°.  There is one extra frequency point involved in this presentation.  Some symmetrical properties of FFT can be better seen in this form.

•	Select the UnWrap Phase check box to keep the phase unwrapped, to maintain the true phase data.  By default, phase data is wrapped so that it is defined in the range of –180° to +180°.

g.	The Exponential Phase Factor Group

Select the Electrical Engineering or Science convention to set the sign of the Exponential Phase factor for the FFT operation.  If you select the Science option, the phase factor will be set according to the formulae listed in page 503 of Numerical Recipes in C, 2nd edition.  If you select the Electrical Engineering option, the phase factor will be of opposite sign compared with the Science option.  The two definitions give the same real components, but their imaginary components and the phase angle will have opposite signs.


The FFT Tool Results

After clicking OK on the Operation tab of the FFT tool, Origin performs the FFT and appends the results to two new windows:  a graph and worksheet window.

The FFTPlotn graph window displays the amplitude and phase information for the transformed data.  Because Origin's FFT assumes that the independent variable (X dataset) is time and that the dependent variable (Y dataset) is some sort of amplitude, the X axis for the FFT graph window will be scaled in units of Hz.  If your data is not time-series data, you will need to re-label your axis.

The FFT worksheet window contains the frequency data, the real and imaginary parts of the transformed data, the polar form of the transformed data, and the power spectrum data.

The frequency column is obtained from the time dataset as follows:  If the time separation between successive abscissas is deltat, then the nth frequency datum is:

fn = n / N deltat

If the time data are given by the row index, then deltat is simply unity.

If there are N input data points, the frequency domain will also have N points with the maximum frequency, fmax equal to 1/deltat (1-1/N) where deltat is the time step between points.  If the Shift Results check box on the Settings tab of the FFT tool has been cleared, the unshifted transform displays from 0 to fmax.  Otherwise, the shifted transform displays from -fmax/2 to fmax/2.


Performing a Backward FFT

Origin allows you to apply a backward (or inverse) FFT on the FFT result to transform back the original dataset.  Thus, you can apply a backward FFT on the Freq(X), Real(Y), and Imag(Y) datasets in the FFT results worksheet.  In principle, this should transform the FFT result back to its original dataset.  However, this claim is valid only for the FFT results when both the Normalize Amplitude and Shift Results check boxes are cleared when first applying FFT to the (original) dataset.  Otherwise, if the Normalize Amplitude check box is selected when performing the FFT, the amplitude ratio between AC and DC components will be distorted by a factor of 2.  Additionally, if the Shift Results check box is selected when performing the FFT, the FFT results will be in a computationally wrong order and, furthermore, the total number of frequency points is incorrect.  Consequently, in this situation the backward FFT will not get the FFT result back to its original data.


Correlation using the FFT

To measure the correlation between two columns of data, highlight the desired data (independent of column designation) and select Analysis:Correlate.  Origin adds two columns to the rightmost position in the worksheet.  The left column holds the resultant lag or index variables, and the right column holds the correlation result.

The absolute value of the correlation result will be large when the leftmost dataset is exactly shifted to the right or to the left of the second dataset by the lag value.


Convolution using the FFT

The convolution of two datasets is a general process that can be used for various types of data smoothing, signal processing, or edge detection.  The leftmost dataset, the signal dataset, is convolved by the second dataset, the response dataset.  The response dataset should meet the following requirements:

•	The response dataset should consist of an odd number of points.  (The response is normally a symmetrical function.  To simplify the calculation, Origin expects only one-half of the function including the center value.)

•	The number of points, r, in the response dataset must be less than half the number of points, s, in the signal dataset.  (The last r points, and, to a lesser extent, the first r points, of the s points in the result are of no value.  Therefore, 2*r should be much less than s.)

•	The integrated area under the response curve should be unity in order to retain the amplitude of the original dataset.  Otherwise the convolution result will be scaled by a factor equal to the area.

To convolve a dataset with a response dataset, highlight both datasets and select Analysis:Convolute.  Origin adds two columns to the rightmost position in the worksheet.  The left column holds the index variables, and the right column holds the convolution result.


Deconvolution using the FFT

Deconvolution is a process that can undo the "blurring" obtained after convoluting data.  While convolution is the product of the signal and response datasets, deconvolution is achieved by dividing the known convolution by the response dataset.

Deconvolution includes the same restrictions on the response dataset as reviewed in  Convolution using the FFT.

To deconvolve a dataset with a response dataset, highlight both datasets and select Analysis:Deconvolute.  Origin adds two columns to the rightmost position in the worksheet.  The left column holds the index variables, and the right column holds the deconvolution result.


Data Smoothing and Filtering

Origin provides the following data smoothing and filtering options:

•	Smoothing using Savitzky-Golay filtering.

•	Smoothing using adjacent averaging.

•	FFT filter smoothing.

•	Digital filtering using low pass, high pass, band pass, band block, and threshold filters.

For a mathematical description of the smoothing and filtering methods in this section, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., listed in the Reference section.

The three smoothing methods are available from the Analysis:Smoothing menu, or from the Smoothing tool (Tools:Smooth).  The smoothed data is placed in a newly created (hidden) worksheet named Smoothedn.  The window label reports the type of smoothing that was performed.  Additionally, the smoothed data plot is added to the active layer of the graph.  The Smoothing tool allows you to replace the original data instead of creating a new worksheet.

More:

Smoothing using Savitzky-Golay Filtering

Smoothing using Adjacent Averaging

FFT Filter Smoothing

Using the Smoothing Tool

Digital Filtering


Smoothing using Savitzky-Golay Filtering

To smooth the active data plot using the Savitzky-Golay filter method, select Analysis:Smoothing:Savitzky-Golay.  This menu command opens the Smoothing dialog box.  The degree of the underlying polynomial has a default value of 2, with an upper limit of 9.  This parameter allows you to improve the fitting/differentiation.  To alter this value, select the desired value from the drop-down list.  (For an illustration of the effect of this parameter on smoothing, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., Second Edition, Fig. 14.8.2, page 654.)  Origin includes a function to calculate a large number of Savitzky Golay coefficients, allowing you to have large windows ( ~ 100 points).  Further, you can make the windows asymmetric about a particular data point.  For example, the number of points to the left of the point of interest can be different from the number to the right.  Make your selection from the associated drop-down lists.

The Savitzky-Golay filter method essentially performs a local polynomial regression to determine the smoothed value for each data point.  This method is superior to adjacent averaging because it tends to preserve features of the data such as peak height and width, which are usually 'washed out' by adjacent averaging.


Smoothing using Adjacent Averaging

To smooth the active data plot by averaging adjacent data points, select Analysis:Smoothing:Adjacent Averaging.  This menu command opens the Smoothing dialog box.  Specify a number that controls the degree of smoothing.  If you enter an odd number n, then n points are used to calculate each averaged result.  If you enter an even number m, then m+1 points are used to calculate each averaged result.  The smoothed value at index i is the average of the data points in the interval [i-(n-1)/2, i+(n-1)/2], inclusive.


FFT Filter Smoothing

To smooth the active data plot by FFT filtering, select Analysis:Smoothing:FFT Filter.  This menu command opens the Smoothing dialog box in which you specify how many data points at a time to be considered by the smoothing routine.

The smoothing is accomplished by removing Fourier components with frequencies higher than:

1/n deltat

where n is the number of data points considered at a time, and deltat is the time (or more generally the abscissa) spacing between two adjacent data points.

Note:  The function used to clip out the high-frequency components is a parabola with its maximum of 1 at zero frequency and falling to zero at the cutoff frequency defined above.  The parameters of this parabolic clipping function are determined by the total number of points and the number of points considered at one time.  The more points considered at one time, the greater the degree of smoothing.  A value of zero for this parameter will leave the data unsmoothed.


Using the Smoothing Tool

To open the Smoothing tool, make the desired data plot active and select Tools:Smooth.

The Smoothing Tool

1)	The Settings Tab

Click this tab to access the Settings options.

a.	The Results Group

Select the Replace Original radio button to replace the raw data plot with the smoothed data.

Select the Create Worksheet radio button to create a new hidden worksheet containing the smoothed data.

b.	Additional Controls

The degree of the underlying polynomial (Polynomial Degree) has a default value of 2, with an upper limit of 9.  This parameter allows you to improve the fitting/differentiation.  Select the desired value from the associated control.  (For an illustration of the effect of this parameter on smoothing, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., Second Edition, Fig. 14.8.2, page 654.)

Origin includes a function to calculate a large number of Savitzky Golay coefficients, allowing you to have large windows ( ~ 100 points).  Further, you can make the windows asymmetric about a particular data point.  For example, the number of points to the left of the point of interest can be different from the number to the right.  Make your selection from the Points to the Left (and Right) controls.

For adjacent averaging and FFT filter smoothing, specify the number of data points at a time to be considered by the smoothing routine in the associated text box.

2)	The Operations Tab

Click on this tab to access the Operations options.

a.	The Savitzky-Golay Button

Click this button to perform Savitzky-Golay filter smoothing calculations on the active data plot.  The settings on the Settings tab control the degree of smoothing.

b.	The Adjacent Averaging Button

Click this button to smooth the active data plot using adjacent averaging.  The Number of Points text box value controls the degree of smoothing.

c.	The FFT Filter Button

Click this button to smooth the active data plot using FFT filter smoothing.  The Number of Points text box value controls the degree of smoothing.


Digital Filtering

Origin provides five filters for digitally filtering data in the Fourier domain: low pass, high pass, band pass, band block, and threshold filters.  The low and high pass filters allow you to eliminate noise at high and low frequencies, respectively.  The band pass filter allows you to eliminate noise above and below a specified frequency range.  The band block filter allows you to eliminate noise within a specified frequency range.  The threshold filter allows you to eliminate noise corresponding to frequency components that are below a specified threshold.

More:

Low and High Pass Filters

Band Pass Filter

Band Block Filter

Threshold Filter


Low and High Pass Filters

To apply a low or high pass filter to the active data plot, select Analysis:FFT Filter:Low Pass (High Pass).  Both menu commands open the Frequency Cutoff dialog box.  Origin calculates a default cutoff frequency (Fc) using the equation Fc=10*(1/period) where period is the X dataset range.  Type the desired cutoff frequency in the Fc text box.  After clicking OK, if you selected Low Pass, Origin filters out frequencies above the cutoff frequency.  If you selected High Pass, Origin filters out frequencies below the cutoff frequency.  Additionally, to display the high pass filtered data with the DC offset stored in F0, select the Apply F0 Offset check box.

Origin creates a new hidden worksheet containing the X and Y components of the filtered data.  Origin also displays the filtered data in the graph window.


Band Pass Filter

To eliminate noise above and below a specified frequency range (band pass filter) in the active data plot, select Analysis:FFT Filter:Band Pass.  This menu command opens the Frequency Range dialog box.  Origin calculates a default low cutoff frequency (Fl) using the equation Fl=10*(1/period) where period is the X dataset range.  Origin calculates a default high cutoff frequency (Fh) using the equation Fh=20*(1/period).  Type the desired cutoff frequencies in the Low and High text boxes.  To display the filtered data with the DC offset stored in F0, select the Apply F0 Offset check box.  After clicking OK, Origin filters out frequencies outside of the specified frequency range.

Origin creates a new hidden worksheet containing the X and Y components of the filtered data.  Origin also displays the filtered data in the graph window.


Band Block Filter

To eliminate noise within a specified frequency range (band block filter) in the active data plot, select Analysis:FFT Filter:Band Block.  This menu command opens the Frequency Range dialog box.  Origin calculates a default low cutoff frequency (Fl) using the equation Fl=10*(1/period) where period is the X dataset range.  Origin calculates a default high cutoff frequency (Fh) using the equation Fh=20*(1/period).  Type the desired cutoff frequencies in the Low and High text boxes.  To display the filtered data with the DC offset stored in F0, select the Apply F0 Offset check box.  After clicking OK, Origin filters out frequencies within the specified frequency range.

Origin creates a new hidden worksheet containing the X and Y components of the filtered data.  Origin also displays the filtered data in the graph window.


Threshold Filter

To eliminate noise corresponding to frequency components that are below a specified threshold level in the active data plot, select Analysis:FFT Filter:Threshold.  This menu command first performs a forward FFT on the active data plot, and displays the frequency component spectrum with a moveable threshold level line.  Drag the line to the desired level, or type an amplitude value for the threshold directly in the Threshold text box.  Click the Filter Threshold button to filter out all frequency components below the set threshold level.  Additionally, an inverse FFT is performed on the filtered frequency spectrum to yield a new hidden worksheet containing the original data with the noise removed.


Baseline and Peak Analysis

Origin provides a number of options to perform baseline and peak analysis.

•	Fitting a Data Plot with Multiple Peaks.

•	The Pick Peaks Tool.

•	The Baseline Tool.

More:

The Pick Peaks Tool

The Baseline Tool


The Pick Peaks Tool

The Pick Peaks tool is available when a graph window is active.  To open the tool, select Tools:Pick Peaks.  This tool operates on the active data plot in the graph window.  It enables you to find peaks when the data do not seem to have a definable baseline (for example, when the peaks appear to follow or overlap each other without intervening flat regions).  The method of peak picking used for this tool does not rely on the smoothness of the data, and is, therefore, somewhat more robust than the Baseline tool.

The Pick Peaks Tool

1)	The Pick Peaks Group

This tool can locate both positive and negative peaks in your data plot.  Select the desired radio button from this group.

2)	The Search Rectangle Group

The method for peak picking uses a moving rectangle.  If a peak is to be found inside a rectangle, the difference in height between the local data maximum inside the rectangle and the data values at both rectangle ends has to be no less than the rectangle height.  The height of the rectangle is the percentage, as specified in the Height text box, of the total amplitude of the data in the range (the amplitude is defined as the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the data).  The width of the rectangle is the percentage, as specified in the Width text box, of the total number of points in the data range.  Generally, the smaller the Height and the Width text box values, the more peaks are likely to be found.  The width should not be too small, however, since the rectangle must include at least a few points.

3)	The Minimum Height Text Box

The minimum height is the percentage, as specified in the Minimum Height text box, of the total amplitude of the data in the range, that the peak must have, as determined relative to the minimum of the data.  The smaller the Minimum Height text box value, the more peaks are likely to be found.

4)	The Display Options Group

Select the Show Center check box to mark the center of the plotted peak.

Select the Show Label check box to label the data plot with the X coordinate of the center of each peak.

5)	The Find Peaks Button

Click this button to perform the peak search based on the specified settings.  The peak results are stored in a hidden Peaks# worksheet, where # starts from 1 and increments each time a new data plot is processed.


The Baseline Tool

The Baseline tool is useful for analyzing peak areas when the data plot has a definable baseline.  In addition to picking peaks, it enables you to determine the extent of the peaks and the underlying baseline, as well as to integrate the data from the baseline or from the Y=0 line.

The tool consists of the Baseline tab, the Peaks tab, and the Area tab.  The tool is optimally used by first finding the baseline by editing the Baseline tab, and then finding both positive and negative peaks in the data plot by editing the Peaks tab.  Finally, areas under the peaks or the entire data plot can be obtained using the Area tab.

To open the Baseline tool, click on a graph window to make it active.  Select Tools:Baseline to open the tool.

The Baseline Tab on the Baseline Tool

1)	The Number of Points Text Box

Type the number of points to be used in creating the baseline in this text box.  This number applies to the Automatic and User Defined Equation options for the baseline.

2)	The Create Baseline Group

Click the Automatic button to calculate the baseline automatically for the active data plot.  The X and Y coordinates for the baseline data are stored in a hidden worksheet named Base# (where # starts from 1 and increments each time a new data plot is processed).  The algorithm to find the baseline is as follows:  The data plot if first smoothed with a large window size, approximately one-tenth of the total number of points.  A baseline is constructed by interpolation on the set of points common to the smoothed data plot and the original data plot.  This process is extremely sensitive to the distribution of the data points.  For instance, if the number of points on the baseline is not very large compared to the number of points that fall on the peaks, the baseline will not be well defined.  In such cases, you may need to adjust the baseline using the Modify button.

Click the User Defined Equation button to create a baseline for the data plot based on a user-defined equation.  Type the equation in the associated text box before clicking this button.  The X and Y coordinates are stored in a hidden worksheet named Base#.

If the baseline data is available in a separate data set, you can type the name of that data set in the Dataset text box, and then click the Existing Dataset button to define the baseline.

3)	The Edit Baseline Group

Click on the Subtract button to subtract the calculated or user-specified baseline from the data plot.

Click the Undo Subtraction button to undo a baseline subtraction.

Click the Modify button to manually modify the baseline with the Data Reader tool.  Click on a baseline point and drag it to a new position.  If the baseline was created automatically or based on a user-defined equation, the modification to the baseline is stored in the worksheet Base#.  If the baseline was chosen to be an existing data plot, the associated datasets are modified.

The Peaks Tab on the Baseline Tool

1)	The Peak Properties Group

The minimum width of the peak is the percentage, as specified in the Minimum Width text box, of the total number of points in the data range that the peak must have in order to be recognized as a peak.  Generally, the smaller the Minimum Width text box value, the more peaks are likely to be found.

The maximum width of the peak is the percentage, as specified in the Maximum Width text box, of the total number of points in the data range that the peak must not exceed in order to be recognized as a peak.

The minimum height of the peak is the percentage, as specified in the Minimum Height text box, of the total amplitude of the data in the range, that the peak must have (the amplitude is defined as the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the data).  The smaller the Minimum Height text box value, the more peaks are likely to be found.

2)	The Display Options Group

Select the Labels check box to label the data plot with the X coordinates of the center of each peak.

Select the Center Markers check box to mark the center of the peaks found.

Select the Base Markers check box to display markers at the boundaries (bases) of each peak.

3)	The Find Peaks Button

Click this button to find both positive and negative peaks in the current data plot.  This button should be clicked after the baseline has been defined.  (The baseline should be defined prior to performing this operation.)  The values under the Peak Properties group are used to determine the peak positions in the data plot.  A peak is defined as a point where there is a change of sign in the first derivative, which (1) is above a user-defined distance from the baseline and (2) is flanked by a neighborhood of at least two points on each side where the first derivative is monotonic.  The feet of this peak are the points where it meets the baseline.

The peak values are stored in a hidden worksheet name BsPeak#, where # starts from 1 and increments each time a new data plot is processed.

The Area Tab on the Baseline Tool

1)	The Integral Curve Group

Select the Not Created radio button to find the area under the curve after clicking either the Use Baseline or From Y=0 buttons.

Select the Add to Graph radio button to find the area under the curve and plot the area data in the current layer after clicking either the Use Baseline or From Y=0 buttons.  Rescale the Y axis of the layer to view the area data.

Select the Make New Graph radio button to find the area under the curve and plot the area data in a new default graph window after clicking either the Use Baseline or From Y=0 buttons.

The integration results are sent to the Results Log.

•	The Area column contains the area size under each peak.

•	The Center column contains the center position of the peak.

•	The Height column contains the height of the peak.

2)	The Use Base Markers Check Box

Select this check box to include only the region between the base markers when integrating.  When this check box is selected, the Add to Graph and Make New Graph radio buttons are unavailable.

3)	The Integrate Group

Click the Use Baseline button to find the area between the active data plot and the baseline.  If the Use Base Markers check box is selected, find the area between the base markers only.

Click the From Y=0 button to integrate to find the area between the active data plot and Y=0.  If the Use Peak Markers check box is selected, find the area between the markers only.


Other Utilities

Sorting the Data

Determining a Frequency Count

Normalizing the Data


Sorting the Data

Origin can sort individual columns, multiple selected columns, a highlighted range of the worksheet, or entire worksheets.  Origin offers simple sorting as well as nested sorting.

In simple sorting, the specified data is sorted using one "sort by" column and a selected sort order.  To perform a simple sort of the selected data, select Analysis:Sort Columns.  Specify Ascending or Descending from the associated submenu.  If you have highlighted a range of worksheet columns, or a range of values in multiple columns, Origin sorts only the selected data based on the leftmost selected dataset and the chosen sort order.  If you have highlighted one column, or a range from one column, Origin sorts only the selected data.  Note that if you highlight a range of rows, and not the entire column(s), the sort menu command which is enabled will be Analysis:Sort Range.

To perform a simple sort on the entire worksheet, select Analysis:Sort Worksheet.  Specify Ascending or Descending from the associated submenu.  Origin sorts the entire worksheet based on the leftmost column of the worksheet and the chosen sort order.

To perform a nested sort on the selected data, select Analysis:Sort Columns:Custom or click the Sort button on the Worksheet Data toolbar.  To perform a nested sort on the entire worksheet, select Analysis:Sort Worksheet:Custom or select all the worksheet data and click the Sort button.

The Nested Sort Dialog Box

First select the column for the primary sort from the Selected Columns list box and click the Ascending or Descending button.  Then select the column for the secondary sort from the Selected Columns list box and click the Ascending or Descending button.  Select additional columns as required.

After clicking OK, Origin sorts the selected data so that the primary column is in ascending or descending order, as specified.  If there are multiple rows with the same value in the primary column, the values in the corresponding rows of the secondary column, and the sort order chosen for the secondary column, are used to determine the ordering. This nesting process is continued down to the last column in the Nested Sort Criteria list box.


Determining a Frequency Count

To determine a frequency count for a column or range of values, select Analysis:Frequency Count.  This menu command opens the Count Dataset dialog box in which you specify the minimum and maximum values and the step increment.  From this information, Origin creates a set of bins, beginning at the minimum value and based on the step size.  Origin then searches each bin, and records the number of times a value is encountered that falls within each bin.  If a value falls on the upper edge of the bin, it is included in the next higher bin.

Origin then creates a worksheet with four columns.  The first column displays the mid-point value in each bin, the second column displays the number of "hits" observed for each bin, the third column displays the end point of each bin, and the fourth column displays the cumulative count.  The Results Log displays the mean, standard deviation, size, and median value for the selected data.  The median value is calculated by sorting the data.


Normalizing the Data

To normalize a dataset or a range of values in a dataset, highlight the desired column and select Analysis:Normalize.  This menu command opens the Normalizing Dataset dialog box.  The dialog box displays minima and maxima for the selected values, and provides a text box to enter a factor value.  When you click OK, Origin divides all values in the selected range by the factor value.


Before You Begin

Selecting the Active Data Plot

When performing linear or nonlinear fitting when the graph window is active, you must make the desired data plot the active data plot.  To make a data plot active, select the data plot from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  The data list includes all the data plots in the active layer.  The currently active data plot is checked.

The Results Log

Origin automatically routes results from most fitting operations to the Results Log.


Linear Fitting From the Menu

Origin's linear and polynomial fit menu commands are located in the Analysis menu.  Parameter initialization and linear least squares fitting is carried out automatically when fitting from the menu.  A worksheet is created for the fit data, and a fit curve is displayed in the graph window.  The fitting parameters and statistical results are recorded in the Results Log.

More:

Linear Regression

Polynomial Regression

Multiple Regression


Linear Regression

To fit a straight line to the active data plot, select Analysis:Fit Linear.  With the X data, the independent variable, and the Y data, the dependent variable, the estimated linear regression model is stated:

Yi=A+BXi

where the parameters, A and B, are estimated by the method of least squares.

After the fitting, Origin creates a new (hidden) worksheet containing the fitted data, and plots this data in the active graph window.  Additionally, Origin copies the following parameters to the Results Log.

Parameter Descriptions for Linear Regression

A:  Intercept value and its standard error.

B:  Slope value and its standard error.

R:  Correlation coefficient.

p:  value - Probability (that R is zero).

N:  Number of data points.

SD:  Standard deviation of the fit.


Polynomial Regression

To perform a polynomial fit on the active data plot, select Analysis:Fit Polynomial.  This menu command opens the Polynomial Fit to Dataset dialog box in which you specify the order (1 through 9), number of points drawn in the fit curve, and minimum and maximum X values for the fit curve.  To display the fit equation in the graph window, select the Show Formula on Graph check box.

With the X data, the independent variable, and the Y data, the dependent variable, a polynomial regression model of the kth order is stated:

Y=A+B1X+B2X^2+B3X^3+...+BkX^k

After the fitting, Origin creates a new (hidden) worksheet containing the fitted data, and plots this data in the active graph window.  Additionally, Origin copies the following parameters to the Results Log.

Parameter Descriptions for Polynomial Regression

A, B1, B2, etc:The parameter estimates and standard errors.

R-square:  R-square = (SYY-RSS)/SYY.

p-value:  Probability (that R-square is zero).

N:  Number of data points.

SD:  Standard deviation of the fit.


Multiple Regression

To perform a multiple regression on worksheet data, highlight the independent variable columns and select Analysis:Multiple Regression.  This menu command opens an Attention dialog box confirming the dataset selection and automatic designation.  Click OK to perform the multiple regression.

With the first column in the worksheet assumed to contain the dependent variable values (Y), and the highlighted columns assumed to contain the independent variables (X), the multiple regression model is stated:

Y=A+B1X1+B2X2+...+BkXk

Origin copies the regression results and the ANOVA table to the Results Log.

Parameter Descriptions for Multiple Regression

A, B1, B2,  etc:  The parameter estimates and standard errors.

t-value:  The t-values for testing if the parameter equals zero, where t = the parameter estimate/standard error of the estimate.

p-value:  The corresponding p-values.

R-square:  R-square = (SYY-RSS)/SYY.

Adj. R-square:  Adj. R-square = 1-[(1-R-square)*(N-1)/(N-k-1)].

Root-MSE:  Root-MSE = estimated standard deviation.

ANOVA for Multiple Regression

	Degree of Freedom	Sum of Squares (SS)	Mean Squares (MS)	F
Regression	k	SSreg=SYY-RSS	MSreg=SSreg/k	MSreg/MSE
Residual	n-(k+1)	RSS	MSE=RSS/(n-k-1)
Total	n-1	SYY
The variable F=MSreg/MSE will follow an F distribution F(k,df).  The P-value can be obtained from the F distribution.


Linear Fitting Using the Tools

Origin provides two tools to facilitate linear and polynomial fitting:  the Linear Fit and Polynomial Fit tools.  These tools provide controls not available from the associated menu commands.

More:

The Linear Fit Tool

The Polynomial Fit Tool


The Linear Fit Tool

To open the Linear Fit tool, select Tools:Linear Fit.

If a worksheet is the active window, you must select a Y column to carry out linear regression.  The Y column is used as the dependent variable and the associated X column is used as the independent variable.  For weighted fitting, the error bar column must be selected along with the Y column.  Note that the data columns must be either of type Numeric or Text & Numeric.

If the graph window is active, the regression is performed on the active data plot.  To set the active data plot, select it from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  For weighted fitting, the error bars must be plotted.

The Linear Fit Tool

1)	The Settings Tab

Select this tab to access the Settings options.

a.	The Fit Curve Options Group

Type the number of points to be used in the fit curve dataset in the Points text box.

Type the percent outside of the data plot's X value range to create the fit curve (left and right) in the Range Margin text box.

Type the confidence level for calculating confidence and prediction limits in the Confidence text box.

Type the fixed slope for the fit curve in the associated text box.  To use this fixed slope you must select the Fix Slope check box on the Operations tab.

Select the Apparent Fit check box to use the apparent values for fitting, according to the current axis scales.

Select the Span X Axis check box to calculate a fit curve that spans the entire X axis.  The graph is redrawn after fitting to display the entire fit curve over this range.

Select the Residual Data check box to create two columns in the associated dataset worksheet.  Column Fit(Y) contains the fitting values.  Column Residual(Y) contains the residual values.

Select the New Curve check box to create a new fit curve without overwriting existing fit curves.

b.	The Statistics Output Group

Select the Simple radio button to output simple fitting statistics to the Results Log, including intercept and slope values and standard errors, R (Correlation Coefficient), Standard Deviation, number of points in the raw data curve, and P (the P value for the t-test of the slope = 0).

Select the Advanced radio button to output all fitting statistics to the Results Log, including the t-test values and the ANOVA table.

2)	The Operation Tab

Select this tab to access the Operation options.

Select the Through Zero check box to perform a linear regression through the origin when the Fit button is clicked on.  When cleared, a standard linear regression is performed.

Select the Fix Slope check box to restrict the slope to the value specified in the Fixed Slope text box on the Settings tab.  When cleared, a standard linear regression is performed.

Select the Error as Weight check box to use error bars as weights (1/error^2).  If the worksheet is active, a Y error bar column (select Column:Set as Y Error) must be selected in addition to the Y column when the Fit button is clicked.  If the graph window is active, the error bars must be plotted.

Select the Scale Errors with SD check box to multiply the error on parameters A and B with the reduced chi-square value.  This check box should be selected when fitting with no errors (the Error as Weight check box will be cleared in this case).  This check box should be cleared when fitting with errors (the Error as Weight check box is selected in this case).

Select the Confidence Bands check box to plot upper and lower confidence band datasets with the fitting curve.

Select the Prediction Bands check box to plot upper and lower prediction band data plots with the fitting curve.

Click Fit to perform a linear regression on the selected data plot according to the tool settings.  If a worksheet is active, the highlighted Y column is used as the dependent variable.  The associated X column is used as the independent variable.  If a graph window is active, the regression is performed on the active data plot.  After the fitting, Origin creates a new (hidden) worksheet containing the fitted data, and plots this data in the active graph window.  If the dataset has not yet been plotted, a new default graph window opens with the selected Y dataset (and its associated X dataset, row number, or incremental X value) and fitting data plotted in layer 1.  Additionally, Origin displays the fitting results in the Results Log.

The following paragraphs provide a complete list of the fitting results displayed in the Results Log when the Simple radio button is selected on the Linear Fit tool.

Parameter Descriptions for Linear Regression

A:  Intercept value and its standard error.

B:  Slope value and its standard error.

R:  Correlation coefficient.

p:  value - Probability (that R is zero).

N:  Number of data points.

SD:  Standard deviation of the fit.

Additional results are provided when the Advanced radio button is selected.  These include the t-values for testing if the parameter equals zero, where t= the parameter estimate/standard error of the estimate, and their corresponding p-values.  Additionally, the results include R-square= (SYY-RSS)/SYY, adjusted R-square= 1-[(1-R-square)*(N-1)/(N-2)], and the ANOVA table.

ANOVA for Linear Regression

	Degree of Freedom	Sum of Squares (SS)	Mean Squares (MS)	F
Regression	1	SSreg=SYY-RSS	MSreg=SSreg/1	MSreg/MSE
Residual	n-2	RSS	MSE=RSS/(n-2)
Total	n-1	SYY
ANOVA for Linear Regression Through the Origin

	Degree of Freedom	Sum of Squares (SS)	Mean Squares (MS)	F
Regression	1	SSreg=SYY-RSS	MSreg=SSreg/1	MSreg/MSE
Residual	n-1	RSS	MSE=RSS/(n-1)
Total	n	SYY
The variable F=MSreg/MSE follows an F distribution F(1,n-2).  The P-value can be obtained from the F distribution.


The Polynomial Fit Tool

To open the Polynomial Fit tool, select Tools:Polynomial Fit.

If a worksheet is the active window, you must select a Y column to carry out polynomial regression.  The Y column is used as the dependent variable and the associated X column is used as the independent variable.  For weighted fitting, the Y error bar column must be selected along with the Y column for fitting.  Note that the data columns must be either of type Numeric or Text & Numeric.

If the active window is a graph window, the regression is performed on the active data plot.  To set the active data plot, select it from the data list at the bottom of the Data menu.  For weighted fitting, the error bars must be plotted.

The Polynomial Fit Tool

1)	The Settings Tab

Select this tab to access the Settings options.

a.	The Fit Curve Options Group

Type the number of points to be used in the fit curve dataset in the Points text box.

Type the percent outside of the data plot's X value range to create the fit curve (left and right) in the Range Margin text box.

Type the confidence level for calculating confidence and prediction limits in the Confidence text box.

Select the Span X Axis check box to calculate a fit curve that spans the entire X axis.  The graph is redrawn after fitting to display the entire fit curve over this range.

Select the Residual Data check box to create two columns in the associated dataset worksheet.  Column Fit(Y) contains the fitting values.  Column Residual(Y) contains the residual values.

Select the New Curve check box to create a new fit curve without overwriting existing fit curves.

b.	The Statistics Output Group

Select the Simple radio button to output simple fitting statistics to the Results Log, including the intercept and B1, B2, etc. values and errors, R-Square (Coefficient of Determination), Standard Deviation, number of points in the raw data curve, and P (the P value for R-square = 0).

Select the Advanced radio button to output all fitting statistics to the Results Log, including the t values and the ANOVA table.

2)	The Operation Tab

Select the Error as Weight check box to use error bars as weights (1/error^2).  If the worksheet is active, a Y error bar column (select Column:Set as Y Error) must be selected in addition to the Y column when the Fit button is clicked.  If the graph window is active, the error bars must be plotted.

Select the Scale Errors with SD check box to multiply the error on parameters A and B with the reduced chi-square value.  This check box should be selected when fitting with no errors (the Error as Weight check box will be cleared in this case).  This check box should be cleared when fitting with errors (the Error as Weight check box is selected in this case).

Select the Confidence Bands check box to plot upper and lower confidence band datasets with the fitting curve.

Select the Prediction Bands check box to plot upper and lower prediction band data plots with the fitting curve.

Set the order for the regression, ranging from one to nine, using the Order spin buttons.

Click Fit to perform a polynomial regression on the selected data plot according to the tool settings.  If a worksheet is active, the highlighted Y column is used as the dependent variable.  The associated X column is used as the independent variable.  If a graph window is active, the regression is performed on the active data plot.  After the fitting, Origin creates a new (hidden) worksheet containing the fitted data, and plots this data in the active graph window.  If the dataset has not yet been plotted, a new default graph window opens with the selected Y dataset (and its associated X dataset, row number, or incremental X value) and fitting data plotted in layer 1.  Additionally, Origin displays the fitting results in the Results Log.

Parameter Descriptions for Polynomial Regression

A, B1, B2, etc:The parameter estimates and standard errors.

R-square:  R-square = (SYY-RSS)/SYY.

p-value:  Probability (that R-square is zero).

N:  Number of data points.

SD:  Standard deviation of the fit.

Additional results are provided when the Advanced radio button is selected.  These include the t-values for testing if the parameter equals zero, where t= the parameter estimate/standard error of the estimate, and their corresponding p-values.  Additionally, the results include R-square= (SYY-RSS)/SYY, adjusted R-square= 1-[(1-R-square)*(N-1)/(N-k-1)], and the ANOVA table.

ANOVA for Polynomial Regression

	Degree of Freedom	Sum of Squares (SS)	Mean Squares (MS)	F
Regression	k	SSreg=SYY-RSS	MSreg=SSreg/k	MSreg/MSE
Residual	n-(k+1)	RSS	MSE=RSS/(n-k-1)
Total	n-1	SYY
The variable F=MSreg/MSE will follow an F distribution F(k,df).  The P-value can be obtained from the F distribution.


Nonlinear Curve Fitting from the Menu

The Analysis menu includes commands which use nonlinear least squares fitting to generate a fit curve in the graph window.  The fitting parameters, as well as related statistics, are displayed in a notes window named Results.

More:

First Order Exponential Decay

Second Order Exponential Decay

Third Order Exponential Decay

Exponential Growth

Gaussian

Lorentzian

Sigmoidal

Fitting a Data Plot with Multiple Peaks


First Order Exponential Decay

Select Analysis:Fit Exponential Decay:First Order to fit a curve to the active data plot, using the equation:

y=y0+A1exp(-x/t1), where

y0	Y offset

A1	amplitude

t1	decay constant

When you select this menu command, Origin makes the necessary initialization for the parameters.  Origin also sets y0 to an appropriate fixed number which is close to the asymptotic value of the Y variable for large X values.  To obtain full control of these parameters, see  The Nonlinear Least Squares Fitter.


Second Order Exponential Decay

Select Analysis:Fit Exponential Decay:Second Order to fit a curve to the active data plot, using the equation:

y=y0+A1exp(-x/t1)+A2exp(-x/t2)

This menu command opens the Verify Initial Guesses dialog box in which you specify initial values for the fitting parameters.

Note:  Fitting to multiple exponentials is more difficult than fitting to a single exponential.  You must make good guesses for the fitting parameters.  You may need to enter the nonlinear fitting session to get better control for the fitting.


Third Order Exponential Decay

Select Analysis:Fit Exponential Decay:Third Order to fit a curve to the active data plot, using the equation:

y=y0+A1exp(-x/t1)+A2exp(-x/t2)+A3exp(-x/t3)

This menu command opens the Verify Initial Guesses dialog box in which you specify initial values for the fitting parameters.


Exponential Growth

Select Analysis:Fit Exponential Growth to fit a curve to the active data plot, using the equation:

y=y0+A1exp(x/t1), where

y0	Y offset

A1	amplitude

t1	"time" constant


Gaussian

Select Analysis:Fit Gaussian to fit a curve to the active data plot using a Gaussian model.  The Gaussian model describes a bell-shaped curve like the normal (Gaussian) probability distribution function.

To review the mathematical model for this menu command, see the Origin User's Manual.


Lorentzian

Select Analysis:Fit Lorentzian to fit a curve to the active data plot using a Lorentzian model.

To review the mathematical model for this menu command, see the Origin User's Manual.


Sigmoidal

Select Analysis:Fit Sigmoidal to fit a curve to the active data plot using either the Boltzmann or Logistical equation.  When the X axis is set to a linear scale, this menu command using the Boltzmann equation for fitting.  When the X axis is set to a logarithmic scale, the Logistical equation is used.

To review the mathematical models, see the Origin User's Manual.

More:

Using the Sigmoidal Fit Tool


Using the Sigmoidal Fit Tool

To open the Sigmoidal Fit tool, select Tools:Sigmoidal Fit.  The Sigmoidal Fit tool provides an intermediate level of sophistication for Sigmoidal fitting that is more advanced than the Analysis:Fit Sigmoidal menu command and simpler than the Analysis:Non-Linear Curve Fit menu command.  The fitting function used depends on the X axis scale type and the selected radio button in the Logged Data Fit Function group on the Settings tab.

The Sigmoidal Fit Tool

1)	The Settings Tab

Select this tab to access the Settings options.

a.	The Fit Curve Options Group

Specify the number of points to create for the fit curve, the percent outside of the X value range to create the fit curve (left and right), and the number of iterations of the fitting to perform in the associated text boxes.  You can also select the Fit All Curves check box to fit all the data plots in a layer.

b.	The Logged Data Fit Function Group

Select either the Boltzmann or Dose Response function to fit logged data (e.g. 107 plotted as 7).  If you are fitting data that is plotted on a log scale, then a logistic function is used for the fitting and this group has no effect on the function being used.

c.	The Weighting Group

Select the None, Error Bars, or Inverse Y weighting radio button.  If you select the Error Bars radio button, you must have selected a Y error bar column with your Y column in a worksheet, or plotted your data with error bars in a graph.

2)	The Operation Tab

Select this tab to access the Operations options.

a.	The Asymptotes Group and Associated Fix Check Boxes

Specify the parameters A1 and A2 in the Upper and Lower text boxes to be used as the initial values for fitting.  Select the associated Fix check boxes to lock in the entered value as a constant rather than allowing it to vary during fitting.

b.	The Parameters Group and Associated Fix Check Boxes

Specify the initial value for the parameter x0 in the Center text box.  Specify the initial value for the parameter dx or p in the Rate text box.  Select the associated Fix check boxes to lock in the entered value as a constant.

c.	The Fit Button

Click Fit to execute the fitting routine and update the variables that have not been set to fixed.

d.	The Simulate Button

If you have specified the values for the parameters and a graph window is active, click Simulate to create a function that can be used like any other function.  This can also help you to better determine the initial parameter values for the fit.  You can double-click on the function curve or select the function in the data list at the bottom of the Data menu (select the function from the data list twice, as the first action simply makes the function the active dataset).  Both actions open the Function tab of the Plot Details dialog box.


Fitting a Data Plot with Multiple Peaks

Origin includes a number of options for peak analysis including the Baseline tool, the Pick Peaks tool, and the Analysis:Fit Multi-peaks menu command.

More:

Multiple Gaussian

Multiple Lorentzian


Multiple Gaussian

Select Analysis:Fit Multi-peaks:Gaussian to fit a curve with multiple Gaussian peaks to the active data plot.  This menu command opens the Number of Peaks dialog box in which you type a value for the number of peaks.  Click OK to close the dialog box.  This action opens the Initial Half Width Estimate dialog box.  Additionally, Origin estimates the overall half-width through integration, and then divides by the number of peaks to arrive at the half-width estimate.  Modify or accept the estimated value in the Initial Half Width Estimate dialog box.  Click OK to close the dialog box.  The Data Display tool opens if not already open.  To read the XY coordinates of a data point in the Data Display tool, click on the desired point.  To determine a peak position, double-click (or click + ENTER) on a data point.  When complete, the fitting parameters, as well as related statistics, are displayed in the graph window and the Results Log.  Additionally, the fit data is copied to a new (hidden) worksheet.


Multiple Lorentzian

Select Analysis:Fit Multi-peaks:Lorentzian to fit a curve with multiple Lorentzian peaks to the active data plot.  This menu command is similar to the Multiple Gaussian menu command as it allows you to specify the number of peaks, and then invokes fitting to multiple Lorentzian functions.


The Nonlinear Least Squares Fitter

One of the most powerful and complex components of Origin is its nonlinear least squares fitting (NLSF) capability.  Using the nonlinear least squares fitter you can fit a function, or a set of functions, to your data, depending on one (or several) independent variables and up to 200 fitting parameters.  Essentially, the only limitation is the memory of your computer.  Origin provides nearly 200 built-in functions selected from different areas of research and development.  Should you be unable to find the function you require among the built-in functions, define a function and Origin will fit it to your data.

Origin's nonlinear regression method is based on the Levenberg-Marquardt (LM) algorithm and is the most widely used algorithm in nonlinear least squares fitting.  The Simplex minimization method is provided as well.

Origin's nonlinear least squares curve fitter is very flexible.  It enables you to take almost full control of the fitting process:

•	Select the best initial parameter values by plotting the curve before the actual fitting and comparing it to the data.

•	Impose linear constraints on the values of parameters.

•	Monitor the relevant quantities during the iterative process which may indicate ill-behaving functions.

•	Select the weighting method.

•	Easily set the fitting data range, etc.

Note:  Even though the LM algorithm is the most powerful algorithm for this kind of problem, the LM method may still need your help, especially when the data and the function you want to fit to the data appear to have very different profiles.  It is important that you be aware of the limitations of the method and use various features of Origin's curve fitter to circumvent potential problems.

More:

Entering the Nonlinear Least Squares Curve Fitting Session

Using the Fitter in the Basic Mode:  Examples

The Dialog Boxes of the Basic Mode

Using the Fitter in the Advanced Mode

Before you Start:  The Chi-Square Minimization

Selecting a Model

Selecting the Datasets

Starting the Fitting

The Fitting Results

Controlling the Fitting Procedure

Setting the Parameter Constraints

Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters

Simulation of Data

Customizing the Fitting Output Report and Controlling the End of the Fitting Session

Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function

Initializing the Fitter


Entering the Nonlinear Least Squares Curve Fitting Session

To enter the nonlinear least squares curve fitting session, select Analysis:Non-linear Curve Fit when either the graph or worksheet window is active.  Everything that you may need to do during a fitting session is performed inside the fitting window.

More:

Two NLSF Modes:  Basic and Advanced


Two NLSF Modes:  Basic and Advanced

To help you master the power of Origin's nonlinear least squares fitter,  two NLSF modes are available:  Basic and Advanced.  While both modes allow you to fit your data, they differ substantially in the options they provide as well as in the degree of complexity they entail.

The Basic mode is much simpler to use and understand.  Use this mode to:

•	Select a function from a reduced set of built-in functions.

•	Select datasets for fitting.

•	Perform an iterative fitting procedure.

•	Display the results on the graph.

The Advanced mode includes more options.  Use this mode to:

•	Define a script to initialize parameters.

•	Impose linear constraints.

•	Define your own fitting functions.

•	Specify a weighting method and termination criteria.

•	Display confidence and prediction bands, residue plot, parameter worksheet, and the variance-covariance matrix.

•	Fit multiple datasets with a choice of shared parameters.

•	Change parameter names.


Using the Fitter in the Basic Mode:  Examples

By default, when you select Analysis:Non-linear Curve Fit from the menu when a graph or a worksheet window is active, Origin's nonlinear least squares fitter starts in the basic mode.  When the fitter is in the basic mode, it does not have its own menu bar.  Switch from the basic to the advanced mode at any time by clicking on the More button.

Fitting a First Order Exponential Decay Function using the Fitter's Basic Mode

Opening a Project File

1)	Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar to open the Open dialog box.  Select 'Project (*.OPJ)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.

2)	In the Origin 6 TUTORIAL folder, double-click on FITEXMP1.OPJ in the list of files.  This action opens the Fitexmp1 project with a Graph1 window displaying sample data.

Starting the Basic Mode of the NLSF

1)	With the graph window active, select Analysis:Non-linear Curve Fit.  This menu command opens the Select Function dialog box of the NLSF.  If the advanced mode is displayed instead, select Options:Basic Mode from the fitter's menu to display the basic mode.

Selecting a Function

1)	If the Select Function dialog box is not displayed, click Select Function to display it.

2)	In the Functions list box, click on ExpDec1 to select the First Order Exponential Decay function.

Starting the Fitting

1)	Click Start Fitting.  An Attention message opens informing you that you have not selected a dataset for fitting.  You can choose to fit either the current active dataset (data1_b) or select another dataset.  Select the active dataset.  The Fitting Session dialog box replaces the Select Function dialog box.

Fixing Parameters

Suppose that you want to fit the data to the exponential decay function but with a fixed value of the vertical offset y0 (=4).

1)	Type 4 in the Value text box for the y0 parameter.  Clear the Vary check box for this parameter.

2)	Type 8 in the Value text box for the A1 parameter.  This is the initial value for this parameter.  Leave the initial value for the t1 parameter at 1.

3)	Make sure that the Vary check boxes for the A1 and t1 parameters are selected.  They may thus vary during the iterative procedure.

Performing Iterations

1)	Click 1 Iter to perform one iteration.  New values of the parameters A1 and t1 are displayed together with the current value of chi-square.  Notice that the parameter y0, which we fixed in the previous step, remained unchanged.  The theoretical curve corresponding to the current parameter values is displayed in Graph1.

2)	Click 10 Iter to perform (at most) 10 iterations.  Notice the improvement of the fit.

Finishing Fitting

1)	Click Done.  The fitter's dialog box closes.  The parameter values are displayed on the graph.


The Dialog Boxes of the Basic Mode

The basic mode includes five dialog boxes:  the Select Function, Define New Function, Edit Function, Select Dataset, and Fitting Session dialog boxes.  Open any of these dialog boxes by clicking on the corresponding buttons within the active dialog box.

More:

Basic Mode:  The Select Function Dialog Box

Basic Mode:  The Select Dataset Dialog Box

Basic Mode:  The Fitting Session Dialog Box


Basic Mode:  The Select Function Dialog Box

By default, this dialog box is displayed when you invoke the curve fitter.  You can also access it from the remaining two basic mode dialog boxes by clicking on the Select Function button.

The Select Function Dialog Box (Basic Mode)

1)	The Functions List Box

This list box provides the list of fitting functions available in the basic mode.  In addition to a set of built-in functions, all user-defined functions are displayed.  Select a function by clicking on its name.

2)	The View Box

If you have selected a built-in function, the view box to the right of the Functions list box displays either the function's definition (equation) or a curve which shows the function's profile.  Switch between the two by selecting the corresponding radio buttons at the top of the view box.  If you have selected a function which you had previously defined, then the view box contains the definition of the function.

3)	The Start Fitting and Select Dataset Buttons

Click these buttons to open the Fitting Session and Select Dataset dialog boxes, respectively.

4)	The More Button

Click this button to switch from the basic to the advanced mode.

5)	The New Button

Click this button to open the Define New Function dialog box.  For information on this dialog box, see  Creating a New Function.

6)	The Edit Button

Click this button to open the Edit Function dialog box.  For information on this dialog box, see  Selecting an Existing Function.


Basic Mode:  The Select Dataset Dialog Box

Edit the Select Dataset dialog box to select the datasets for fitting.

The Select Dataset Dialog Box (Basic Mode)

1)	The Variables:Datasets List Box

Each line in this list box includes the following information:

VariableName, Indep. or Depend., DatasetAssignment, Range

VariableName is the name of the variable.  Indep or Depend specifies whether the variable is independent or dependent.  DatasetAssignment is the name of the dataset to which the variable is assigned.  Range is the dataset range used in fitting.

If no dataset assignment has been made, the associated section of the line displays question marks.  This field updates during dataset assignment.

2)	The Available Datasets List Box

This list box displays the names of all the datasets in the project.

3)	The Assign/Assign X Buttons

You must assign all the variables to datasets.

The way in which you assign variables to datasets differs depending on whether you are assigning a dependent or an independent variable.

To assign dependent variables to datasets:

Click on the dependent variable you want to assign in the Variables:Datasets list box.  The row becomes highlighted.  Additionally, the Assign X button becomes unavailable.

Click on the dataset name you want the variable assigned to in the Available Datasets list box.  The dataset becomes highlighted.

Click Assign to assign the variable to the dataset.

To assign independent variables to datasets:

Click on the independent variable you want to assign in the Variables:Datasets list box.  The Assign X button becomes available.

Click on a dataset name in the Available Datasets list box.

There are now two options.  If you want the variable assigned to the dataset which you highlighted in step b, click Assign.  If you want the variable assigned to the 'x of' the dataset which you highlighted in step b (rather than to the dataset itself), click Assign X.  The 'x of' a dataset may have three different meanings:  another dataset; the datasets associated row numbers, or a defined starting value and a step increment.

4)	Fitting Step Size Text Box

Specify whether you want to skip some points in fitting in this text box.  For example, type 3 to use every third point in the dataset.  Type 1 to use all the data points.

5)	The <= and <= Text Boxes

If a dependent variable is highlighted in the Variables:Datasets list box, use '<= Row <=' text boxes to specify the interval of dataset rows to be used in fitting.

If an independent variable is highlighted in the Variables:Datasets list box, then the space between the two '<=' signs turns into a button.  You can toggle the words 'Row' or '<name of variable>' on this button.  If Row is selected, the meaning is the same as for dependent variables.  If the name of the independent variable is displayed on the button, specify the interval in units of the independent variable to be used for fitting.  For example, if you have specified 3.1<=x<=9.7, this means that only the points with the value of the independent variable X between 3.1 and 9.7 will be used in fitting.


Basic Mode:  The Fitting Session Dialog Box

Access this dialog box by clicking the Start Fitting button from the other two dialog boxes in the basic mode.

The Fitting Session Dialog Box (Basic Mode)

1)	The Parameter Value Text Boxes

These text boxes list the fitting parameters and their current values.  Use them to specify what parameter values you want the iterative procedure to start from.  Additionally, change the parameter values at any time to enable the iterations to proceed from these new values.

2)	The Vary Check Boxes

Each parameter contains a Vary check box.  Select this check box to vary the parameter value during the iterative procedure.  Otherwise, the parameter remains fixed at its current value.

3)	The Error List Boxes

If at least one iteration has been done, these list boxes contain the estimates of the standard errors.  For details on standard errors, see  The Fitting Session Concept.

4)	The Dependency List Boxes

These list boxes display the parameter dependency.  If the equation is overparameterized, there will be mutual dependency between parameters.  If this value is close to one, there is strong dependency.  For the definition of this quantity, see  The Fitting Session Concept.

5)	The Chi-Sqr Button

Click Chi-Sqr to display the chi-square value for the current parameter values.  The display of this value is automatically updated after each iteration.  You may use this button if you have manually changed some parameter values and want to know what the chi-square value is before proceeding.

6)	The 1 Iteration Button

Click 1 Iter to perform one iteration.  The new parameter values are displayed in the Parameter Value text box, together with the error and dependency values.

7)	The n Iterations Button

Click n Iter to cause the fitter to perform, at most, n iterations.  The number n can be changed in the advanced mode.  The fitter may perform less than n iterations if it detects that further iterations will not improve the fit.  Stop the iterations at any time by pressing the ESC key.

8)	The < and > Buttons

These buttons enable you to retrieve the values of parameters which the fitter has already gone through.  For example, click the < button to display the parameter values that were current before the last iterations.


Using the Fitter in the Advanced Mode

Access the advanced mode from the basic mode by clicking on the More button.

More:

Some General Notes on the Advanced Mode of the Nonlinear Least Squares Curve Fitter


Some General Notes on the Advanced Mode of the Nonlinear Least Squares Curve Fitter

The fitting menu bar includes four menus:  Function, Action, Options, and Scripts.  Each of these menus contain several commands.  In most cases, when a menu command is selected, the dialog box associated with the menu command is displayed in the fitting window.  In addition, a fitting toolbar containing twelve buttons displays below the menu bar.  Each button is associated with a menu command and can be clicked on to open the respective dialog box.  You can toggle the toolbar on and off by (de)selecting Options:Toolbar from the fitter's menu.

Menu commands (and the corresponding toolbar buttons) may be temporarily disabled.  For example, you cannot select the Action:Fit menu command unless you have already selected or defined a fitting function.

The menu command corresponding to the dialog box currently displayed in the fitting window is checked.

The fitting dialog boxes contain buttons, text boxes, drop-down lists, check boxes, and list boxes.  Settings in one dialog box often reflect settings in other dialog boxes.  For example, you can initialize parameters in the Initializations dialog box.  If you then select Action:Fit, the parameter values displayed in the Fitting Session dialog box reflect those set in the Initializations dialog box.

An Example Defining your own Function of Two Variables in the Advanced Mode

This tutorial teaches you how to define your own function of two variables to fit sample datasets using the advanced mode of Origin's NLSF.  The function to be defined is:

act = vm * substr / (km + (1 + inhib / k) * substr);

Opening a Project File

1)	Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar to open the Open dialog box.  Select 'Project (*.OPJ)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.

2)	In the Origin 6 TUTORIAL folder, double-click on FITEXMP3.OPJ in the list of files.  This opens the Fitexmp3 project with the Graph1 window displaying sample data.

Starting the Fitter

1)	Select Analysis:Non-linear Curve Fit to open the NLSF window.

2)	If the basic mode of the fitter is displayed, click More to proceed to the advanced mode.

Defining a Function

1)	Select Function:New from the fitter's menu.  This menu command opens the Define New Function dialog box.

2)	Type Tutorial in the Name text box.

3)	Select the User Defined Param. Names check box to enable arbitrary parameter names.

4)	Select Y-Script from the Form drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box.

5)	Type the following in the Parameter Names text box:  ki,km,vm. Origin will fit these parameters during the fitting session.

6)	Type substr,inhib in the Independent Var text box.  You must use these names for the independent variables when entering the function definition.

7)	Type act in the Dependent Var text box.  You must use this name for the dependent variable when entering the function definition.

8)	In the Definition edit box enter the following two commands which define the function:

mix = inhib / ki;

act = vm * substr / (km + (1 + mix) * substr);

9)	Click Save to save the function for future use.

Assigning Variables to Datasets

1)	Select Action:Dataset from the fitter's menu.  This menu command opens the Select Dataset dialog box.

2)	In the Variables:Datasets list box, click on the Act dependent variable to highlight it.

3)	In the Available Datasets list box, click on data1_activity to highlight it.

4)	Click Assign to assign the dependent variable Act to the dataset data1_activity.

5)	In the Variables:Datasets list box, click on the Substr independent variable to highlight it.

6)	In the Available Datasets list box, click on data1_substrate to highlight it.

7)	Click Assign to assign the independent variable Substr to the dataset data1_ substrate.

8)	In the Variables:Datasets list box, click on the Inhib independent variable to highlight it.

9)	In the Available Datasets list box, click on data1_inhibitor to highlight it.

10)	Click Assign to assign the independent variable Inhib to the dataset data1_inhibitor.

Entering a Fitting Session

1)	Select Action:Fit from the fitter's menu.  This menu command opens the Fitting Session dialog box.

Initializing the Parameters

1)	Type 0.01 in the Value text box for the parameter ki.

2)	Type 1 in the Value text box for the parameter km.

3)	Type 100 in the Value text box for the parameter vm.

4)	To enable all three parameters to vary during fitting, make sure that the Vary check boxes are all selected.

Fitting the Data

1)	Click 10 Iter.  The actual number of iterations performed is likely to be less than 10 because a satisfactory fit can be reached with fewer than 10 iterations.  You can convince yourself that this is the case by clicking on the 1 Iter button to perform one more iteration.  If you do that, the Chi^2 value changes very little.

Pasting the Parameter Values to the Graph and Exiting the Fitter

1)	Click Done.

An Example Fitting Multiple Datasets to a Function in the Advanced Mode

This tutorial teaches you how to fit multiple datasets to a function using the advanced mode of the NLSF.  The function used is Gaussian:

y=y0 + (A/(w*sqrt(PI/2)))*exp(-2*((x-xc)/w)^2) .

Opening a Project File

1)	Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar to open the Open dialog box.  Select 'Project (*.OPJ)' from the Files of Type drop-down list.

2)	In the Origin 6 TUTORIAL folder, double-click on FITEXMP4.OPJ in the list of files.  This opens the Fitexmp4 project with the Graph1 window displaying sample data.

Starting the Fitter

1)	Select Analysis:Non-linear Curve Fit to open the NLSF window.

2)	If the basic mode of the fitter is displayed, click More to proceed to the advanced mode.

Selecting a Function

1)	Select Function:Select to open the Select Function dialog box.

2)	Click on Origin Basic Functions in the Categories list box.

3)	Click on Gauss in the Functions list box.  This action selects a Gaussian function.

Selecting Multiple Datasets

1)	Select Action:Dataset to open the Select Dataset dialog box.

2)	Select the Fit Multiple Datasets check box.

3)	Click twice on the Add Data button to indicate that you want to fit simultaneously three datasets to the same function.

4)	Click on the x(1) independent variable in the Datasets:Variables list box at the top of the dialog box to highlight it.

5)	Click on the data1_a dataset name in the Available Datasets list box to highlight it.

6)	Click Assign to assign the independent variable x(1) to the data1_a dataset.

7)	Repeat the same procedure with the independent variables x(2) and x(3) to assign them to the same data1_a dataset.

8)	Click on the y(1) dependent variable in the Datasets:Variables list box at the top of the dialog box to highlight it.

9)	Click on the data1_b dataset name in the Available Datasets list box to highlight it.

10)	Click Assign to assign the dependent variable y(1) to the data1_b dataset.

11)	Repeat the analogous procedure for the dependent variable y(2) to assign it to the data1_c dataset and for the dependent variable y(3) to assign it to the data1_d dataset.

Specifying Parameter Sharing

1)	Double-click on the w and A parameters in the Parameter Sharing list box to tag them as shared.  This causes only one "version" of each of these two parameters to be used for all three datasets, whereas each dataset will have its own "version" of the remaining two parameters.

Fitting the Data

1)	Select Action:Fit to open the Fitting Session dialog box.

2)	Specify the following initial values in the Value text boxes for the parameters:

a.	For the parameters that are not shared:

xc = 20  and y0 = 0 (for the data1_b dataset)

xc_2= 20 and y0_2 = 2.5 (for the data1_c dataset)

xc_3= 20 and y0_3 = 5 (for the data1_d dataset)

b.	For the parameters that are shared:

w = 5 and A = 10 (common for all three datasets).

3)	Make sure that all the parameters have their Vary check boxes selected to allow them to vary during fitting.

4)	Click 10 Iter.

Pasting the Results to the Graph and Exiting the NLSF

1)	Click Done.

An Alternative Method for Fitting Multiple Datasets

1)	Assume that you have already selected a function.

2)	Make the worksheet that contains the fitting datasets active.

3)	Highlight the range of datasets that you want to fit.

4)	Select Analysis: Non-linear Curve Fit.  Datasets are assigned automatically.  You can now start fitting.


Before you Start:  The Chi-Square Minimization

Two building blocks of any fitting procedure are:

•	The data which represent the results of some measurements in which one or several independent (input) variables (x1, x2, x3,...) were varied over a certain range in a controllable manner so as to produce the measured dependent (output) variable(s) y1, y2, y3, ....

•	The mathematical expression (a function or a set thereof) in the form
y1=f1(x1, x2, x3, ... ; p1, p2, p3, ...)
y2=f2(x1, x2, x3, ... ; p1, p2, p3, ...)
y3=f3(x1, x2, x3, ... ; p1, p2, p3, ...)  which represents the theoretical model believed to explain the process that produced the experimental data.  The model usually depends on one or more parameters p1, p2, p3, ....

The aim of the fitting procedure is to find those values of the parameters which best describe the data.  The standard way of defining the best fit is to choose the parameters so that the sum of the squares of the deviations of the theoretical curve(s) from the experimental points for a range of independent variables is at its minimum.

Four different weighting methods are supported by Origin:

•	No weight:  wji=1, where wji represents the weights of each experimental point.

•	Instrumental weights:  wji=1/σji ^2, where σji are the error bar sizes stored in error bar columns.

•	Statistical:  wji=1/yji

•	Any dataset:  The weights are determined by any user-specified dataset so that wji=1/cji^2, where cji are the values of arbitrary datasets.

•	Direct:  wji=cji

The LM algorithm, starting from some initial parameter values, minimizes chi-square by performing a series of iterations on the parameter values and computing chi-square at each stage.  In order to do that, Origin internally calculates partial derivatives for all the values of the input variables.  For built-in functions, all the derivatives are computed using analytic expressions.  For user-defined functions, the partial derivatives are computed numerically.  The computation is thus faster for built-in functions than for user-defined functions.

You can limit the set of the allowed values which the fitting parameters can take during the iterative procedure by imposing linear constraints.  Origin internally implements the constraints by means of the Lagrange multiplier method.  To set linear constraints, see  Setting the Parameter Constraints.


Selecting a Model

Before a fitting can be performed on the active data plot, you must select or create a fitting model.  The nonlinear curve fitter provides many editable built-in functions to use as models for fitting.  In addition, you can define your own fitting function.

More:

Selecting an Existing Function

Creating a New Function


Selecting an Existing Function

Select Function:Select to select a built-in or previously saved user-defined function for fitting.  This menu command opens the Select Function dialog box.

The Select Function Dialog Box

1)	The Categories List Box

Select the desired category in this list box.  Origin provides a variety of built-in functions.  Functions are grouped into several categories based on the area of primary use.

2)	The Functions List Box

Functions belonging to the selected category are displayed in this list box.  The listed functions include both built-in and user-created functions.  Click to select the desired function.

Select Function:Add to add a function to the selected category.

Select Function:Delete to remove the highlighted function from the list.

3)	The Equation Radio Button

Select the Equation radio button to display the function in the lower view box.  The radio button is unavailable if a user-defined function is selected.

4)	The Sample Curve Radio Button

Select the Sample Curve radio button to display a sample curve of the currently selected function.  The curve is displayed in the lower view box.

5)	The Function File Radio Button

Select the Function File radio button to display the function definition file associated with the function.  The function definition file contains all the information about the function and the current fitting session.  It is not necessary to view this file.  In fact, most of the contents of this file can be changed using other dialog boxes.  For an explanation of the file's contents, see  The Function Definition File.

Editing the Function

Select Function:Edit to edit the selected function.  This menu command opens the Edit Function dialog box.  This menu command is not available if you have not selected or defined a function.

The Edit Function dialog box is primarily designed for editing user-defined functions.  However, you can use this dialog box to change the names of parameters of built-in functions.

The Edit Function Dialog Box

1)	The Name Text Box

Change the name of the built-in (or user-defined) function in the Name text box.  If you save the function definition file, the name in this text box saves with the function.  Also, this function name displays in the Functions list box in the Select Function dialog box.

2)	The Type Drop-Down List

The function type is selected (by default) from the Type drop-down list.

3)	The Number of Parameters Drop-Down List

Select the number of fitting parameters from this drop-down list.  This drop-down list is not available if the selected function is a built-in function.

4)	The User Defined Param. Names Check Box

Select this check box to define new names for the function parameters.

5)	The Parameter Names Text Box

The names of the parameters are displayed in this text box.  If the User Defined Param. Names check box is selected, you can edit your own parameter names in this text box.  Otherwise, the parameter names are set by default to:  P1, P2, etc.  When entering parameter names in this text box, separate the names by commas.

The number of parameters selected from the Number of Parameters drop-down list must correspond with the number of names in this text box.

For built-in functions, changing the names for parameters has no bearing on the fitting.  For example, if the third parameter, w, represents the width and the fourth, xc, represents the center of a Gaussian, this relationship will not change even if you interchange their places in the Parameter Names text box.  The only effect will be that w will now be the center, and xc will be the width.

6)	The Independent Var. Text Box

Specify the names of the independent variables in this text box.  Separate parameters by commas.

7)	The Dependent Var. Text Box

Specify the names of the dependent variables in this text box.  Separate the parameters by commas.

For the user-defined functions, if you change the parameter names you must also change the function definition in the Definition text box.

8)	The Description/Definition Text Box

For built-in functions, the Description text box contains the description of the function.  Though you can edit this text box, it will have no effect on the fitting since the function's definition is internally implemented in Origin.

For user-defined functions, alter the definition of the function in the Definition text box.

9)	The Form Drop-Down List (user-defined functions only)

Select a form for the user-defined function from the Form drop-down list.  The drop-down list includes:  Expression, Y-Script, and Equations.

10)	The File/Form Button

Click File to display (and edit) the function definition file associated with the function.

When the function definition file is displayed in the text box, the Form button is available.  Click this button to exit the viewing mode of the function definition file.

11)	The Save Button

Click Save to save the function modifications in a disk file.  The file is named using the text in the Name text box.

12)	The Cancel Button

Click Cancel to discard the function modifications in the Edit Function dialog box.


Creating a New Function

Select Function:New to define a new function.  This menu command opens the Define New Function dialog box.  This dialog box is similar to the Edit Function dialog box with a few exceptions.

The Define New Function Dialog Box

1)	The Name Text Box

Type the name of the function in this text box.  If you save the function, this name becomes the name of the function definition file.

If saved, this function is accessible from the Select Function dialog box.  The function is included in the function group which was selected in the Categories list box when the function was created (the default category is Origin Basic Functions).  When this category is selected, the function name appears in the Functions list box.

2)	The Type Drop-Down List

Select User-Defined or External DLL from this drop-down list.

3)	The Number of Parameters Drop-Down List

Select the number of fitting parameters from this drop-down list.

4)	The User Defined Param. Names Check Box

Select this check box to define new names for the function parameters.

5)	The Parameter Names Text Box

The names of the parameters are displayed in this text box.  If the User Defined Param. Names check box is selected, you can edit your own parameter names in this text box.  Otherwise, the parameter names are set by default to:  P1, P2, etc.  When entering parameter names in this text box, separate the names by commas.  The number of parameters selected from the Number of Parameters drop-down list must correspond with the number of names in this text box.

6)	The Independent Var. Text Box

Specify the names of the independent variables in this text box.  Separate parameters by commas.

7)	The Dependent Var. Text Box

Specify the names of the dependent variables in this text box.  Separate the parameters by commas.

8)	The Definitions Text Box

Specify the definition of your function in the Definitions text box.  The function(s) can be defined in three different forms.  Select a form from the Form drop-down list.

9)	The Form Drop-down List

The available function forms include:  Expression, Y-Script, and Equations.

•	Expression:  The function is an expression such as:

a*x+b*x^2+exp(c*x)

The Expression form cannot be used if you have more than one dependent variable.

•	Y-Script:  Select this option if you want to use LabTalk script to define your function.  You can use loops, temporary variables, and everything else that LabTalk permits.  This is the most flexible way of defining a function.  Each dependent variable listed in the Dependent Var. text box must have a corresponding line in the function definition script in the form y=..., where y is the dependent variable.

•	Equations:  Select this option if you have one or more dependent variables, but you do not need to introduce loops, if-else statements, etc. to define your function.  The advantage of this form over the Y-Script form is a somewhat higher speed at which Origin reads your definition.  The disadvantage is that it is less flexible.  A sample syntax of the Equations format follows:

y_1=...

y_2=...

etc.

where y_1, y_2, are the names of the dependent variables as set in the Dependent Var. text box.  Do not include any loops or if-else clauses. Each line must be in the form y=..., where y is the name of a dependent variable.  You can use temporary variables.

If your function definition contains any constants other than the parameter names (listed in the Parameters text box), independent variables (listed in the Independent Var. text box), dependent variables (listed in the Dependent Var. text box), and the values of those constants are not specified in the function definition script, these constants must be assigned values in the Constants text box of the Initialization dialog box.

10)	The File/Form Button

Click File to display (and edit) the function definition file associated with the function.

When the function definition file is displayed in the text box, the Form button is available.  Click this button to exit the viewing mode of the function definition file.

11)	The Save Button

Click Save to save the function modifications in a disk file.  The file is named using the text in the Name text box.

12)	The Cancel Button

Click Cancel to discard the function modifications in the Define New Function dialog box.

Editing the New Function

After exiting the Define New Function dialog box, a new function can be edited by selecting File:Edit.  This menu command opens the Edit Function dialog box.  For more information, see  Selecting an Existing Function.


Selecting the Datasets

After selecting a model for fitting, you must select the datasets for fitting and assign the function variables to the datasets.  Select Action:Dataset to open the Select Dataset dialog box.  Because the number of both the dependent and the independent variables must be known to perform the dataset assignments, you must select or define function(s) prior to entering the Select Dataset dialog box.

The Select Dataset Dialog Box

1)	The Variables:Datasets List Box

Each line in this list box includes the following information:

VariableName, Indep. or Depend., DatasetAssignment, Range

VariableName is the name of the variable.  Indep or Depend specifies whether the variable is independent or dependent.  DatasetAssignment is the name of the dataset to which the variable is assigned.  Range is the dataset range used in fitting.

If no dataset assignment has been made, the associated section of the line displays question marks.  This field updates during dataset assignment.

2)	The Available Datasets List Box

This list box displays the names of all the datasets in the project.

3)	The Assign/Assign X Buttons

You must assign all the variables to datasets.

The way in which you assign variables to datasets differs depending on whether you are assigning a dependent or an independent variable.

To assign dependent variables to datasets:

Click on the dependent variable you want to assign in the Variables:Datasets list box.  The row becomes highlighted.  Additionally, the Assign X button becomes unavailable.

Click on the dataset name you want the variable assigned to in the Available Datasets list box.  The dataset becomes highlighted.

Click Assign to assign the variable to the dataset.

To assign independent variables to datasets:

Click on the independent variable you want to assign in the Variables:Datasets list box.  The Assign X button becomes available.

Click on a dataset name in the Available Datasets list box.

There are now two options.  If you want the variable assigned to the dataset which you highlighted in step b, click Assign.  If you want the variable assigned to the 'x of' the dataset which you highlighted in step b (rather than to the dataset itself), click Assign X.  The 'x of' a dataset may have three different meanings:  another dataset; the datasets associated row numbers, or a defined starting value and a step increment.

4)	Fitting Step Size Text Box

Specify whether you want to skip some points in fitting in this text box.  For example, type 3 to use every third point in the dataset.  Type 1 to use all the data points.

5)	The <= and <= Text Boxes

If a dependent variable is highlighted in the Variables:Datasets list box, use '<= Row <=' text boxes to specify the interval of dataset rows to be used in fitting.

If an independent variable is highlighted in the Variables:Datasets list box, then the space between the two '<=' signs turns into a button.  You can toggle the words 'Row' or '<name of variable>' on this button.  If Row is selected, the meaning is the same as for dependent variables.  If the name of the independent variable is displayed on the button, specify the interval in units of the independent variable to be used for fitting.  For example, if you have specified 3.1<=x<=9.7, this means that only the points with the value of the independent variable X between 3.1 and 9.7 will be used in fitting.

6)	The Fit Multiple Datasets Check Box

This check box allows you to fit multiple datasets to the same function.  This check box, as well as the Add Data and Remove Data buttons, and the Parameter Sharing list box, are not available if your function contains more than one dependent variable.

To fit to multiple datasets:

a.	Select the Fit Multiple Datasets check box.  The Parameter Sharing list box and the Add Data and Remove Data buttons become available.  The Parameter Sharing list box displays all the parameters.  If you have not clicked on the Add Data button before, the Variables:Datasets list box still lists all the variables only once.

b.	Click Add Data.  This action allows you to fit your function to two datasets, which is reflected in the updated Variables:Datasets list box.  There are now two entries for each variable, with each entry being indexed, such as, y(1), y(2), x(1), x(2).  Each time you click Add Data, you enable one more dataset to be fitted.  You can remove them one-by-one by clicking on the Remove Data button.

c.	Assign the variables to datasets.  You must assign all the variables in the Variables:Datasets list box to datasets.

d.	To share a parameter among all the datasets, double-click on one or more parameters in the Parameter Sharing list box.  "Shared" is displayed next to the parameter name.  If a parameter is not tagged as "Shared", then there will be a separate "version" of the parameter for each dataset.  If a parameter is tagged as "Shared", there will be only one, common, "version" for all the datasets.  For example, suppose your function has three parameters:  c, d, and e.  You tag only the parameters d and e as "Shared".  Suppose that you want to fit two datasets.  In this case you will have the total of four parameters to fit:  one "version" of d and one "version" of e (since d and e are shared) and two (one for each dataset) "versions" of c (since c is not shared).


Starting the Fitting

To begin fitting, select Action:Fit.  This menu command opens the Fitting Session dialog box.

More:

The Fitting Session Concept


The Fitting Session Concept

The concept of a fitting session is important for your understanding of how Origin's nonlinear curve fitter works.  At each iteration, the fitter computes the Variance-Covariance matrix using its value from the previous iteration.

This matrix depends on:

•	The fitting function.

•	The number of parameters.

•	The dataset assignments.

If any of these properties are altered, the current Variance-Covariance matrix is unusable for the altered properties, which means that the fitting session has to end.  When a fitting session ends, all the actions that you have selected or defined in the After Fitting dialog box are executed.  Additionally, when a fitting session starts, all the actions that you have selected or defined in the Initializations dialog box are executed.  To make sure that you do not inadvertently end a fitting session, Origin's nonlinear fitter prompts you for the confirmation of your action by opening an Attention dialog box.

The Fitting Session Dialog Box

1)	The Parameter Value Text Boxes

These text boxes list the fitting parameters and their current values.  If you are fitting multiple datasets and you have some parameters which are not shared, the different versions of these parameters are denoted with a_#, where a is the parameter.  For details on fitting multiple datasets and parameter sharing, see Selecting the Datasets

Edit the parameter values in the associated text boxes.  If you have not entered an initialization script in the Initialization dialog box, then initialize the parameters in this dialog box.  Every new iteration (or set of iterations) starts from these values.  To utilize an initialization script, see  Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters.

2)	The Vary Check Boxes

Each parameter contains a Vary check box.  Select this check box to vary the parameter value during the iterative procedure.  Otherwise, the parameter remains fixed at its current value.

3)	The Error List Boxes

If at least one iteration has been done, these list boxes contain the estimates of the standard errors.  The error is σi=(Cii⋅chi-square)^1/2, where Cii is the diagonal element of the variance-covariance matrix.  For details on how to select a weighting method, see  Controlling the Fitting Procedure.

The variance-covariance matrix is defined as C=(F'⊗F)^-1, where F is the Jacobian Fi,j=∂f(x1i, x2i, ...;p1, p2, ...)/∂pj (here f is the fitting function for the dataset values of the independent variables x1=x1i, x2=x2i, ...).

4)	The Dependency List Boxes

These list boxes display the parameter dependency.  If the equation is overparameterized, there will be mutual dependency between parameters.  The dependency for the ith parameter is defined as:
1-1/CiiCii^-1.  If this value is close to one, there is strong dependency.

5)	The Chi-Sqr Button

Click Chi-Sqr to display the chi-square value for the current parameter values.  The chi-square value is displayed in the view box at the bottom of the dialog box.

6)	The 1 Iteration Button

Click 1 Iter to perform one Levenberg-Marquardt (LM) iteration.  The new parameter values are displayed in the Parameter Value text box, together with the error and dependency values.

7)	The n Iterations Button

Click n Iter to cause the fitter to perform, at most, n LM iterations.  Set the n value from the Max. Number of Iterations drop-down list in the Control Parameters dialog box.

If the tolerance is reached or an error occurs before n iterations have been performed, less than n iterations will be performed.  Sometimes the actual number of iterations performed may be zero.  This happens if the parameter values cannot be improved any more.  The number of iterations actually performed (which improved the fit by decreasing chi-square) is displayed in the view box at the bottom of the dialog box.  For more information on tolerance, see  Controlling the Fitting Procedure.

Stop the iterations at any time by pressing the ESC key.

8)	The n Simplex Iter. Button

Click this button to perform n Simplex iterations.  Normally, you will not need to do this because the Simplex method is much less robust and reliable than the LM method.  However, if the LM method for a set of data behaves poorly, try the Simplex method.

9)	The < and > Buttons

These buttons enable you to retrieve the values of parameters which the fitter has already gone through.  For example, click the < button to display the parameter values that were current before the last iterations.

10)	The View Box

This view box displays various quantities which change during a fitting session, including:  chi-square, the parameter values, the error estimates, and the actual number of iterations performed (before the current iteration).


The Fitting Results

Select Action:Results to open the Generate Results dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to create additional curves describing the results of your fitting, as well as to control the display of the fitting results.  This dialog box is usually edited after you have found the best parameter values using the Fitting Session dialog box.

The Generate Results Dialog Box

1)	The Create Fit Curves Group

This group enables you to create three supplemental curves for each dependent variable.

a.	Confidence Band Curves

Select a dependent variable from the Dependent Var. list box.  Specify the desired confidence level in the At Confidence text box.  Generate the confidence band curves for the selected dependent variable by clicking the Conf. Band button.

The confidence interval for the fitting function says how good your estimate of the value of the fitting function is at particular values of the independent variables.

b.	Prediction Band Curves

Select a dependent variable from the Dependent Var. list box.  Specify the desired confidence level in the At Confidence text box.  Generate the prediction band curves for the selected dependent variable by clicking the Pred. Band button.

The prediction interval for the desired confidence level a is the interval within which 100a% of all the experimental points in a series of repeated measurements are expected to fall at particular values of the independent variables.

c.	The Residue Plot Button

Click this button to generate the residue plot for the selected dependent variable.  Residue points represent the difference between the theoretical function and the actual data points.

2)	The Param. Worksheet Button

Click this button to create a separate worksheet containing all the results of your fitting session (parameter values, chi-square, errors, etc.).  Type the desired worksheet name in the associated text box.

The first n rows of the worksheet list information on the n parameters that were involved in the fitting process. For each parameter, the quantities listed in successive columns are:

a.	Name:  parameter name

b.	Value:  Parameter value obtained in the fitting process

c.	Err:  Error on the parameter value

d.	Vary:  whether the parameter was allowed to vary (floating) or was fixed by the user (fixed)

e.	LLimit:  Lower confidence limit on the parameter:

f.	ULimit:  Upper confidence limit on the parameter
LLimit and ULimit are calculated by searching for the values of each parameter p that give an SSR(p) (minimized over the remaining parameters) greater than SSR by a factor (1+F/(N-P).

SSR(p) = SSR * (1+F/(N-P))

g.	Where F = Ftable(Confidence, 1, N-P) and SSR is the minimum SSR found during the fitting session.

h.	Depend:  dependency of the parameter ( a value very close to 1 indicates strong dependency, and therefore, over parametrization)

i.	ConfIntv:  Confidence interval.  Calculated based on a linear approximation and is given by
Standard Error * t,
where t is the critical value of the t distribution for the given confidence level.

The n rows of parameter information are followed by:

a.	ChiSquare:  chi square value of fit

b.	SSR:  sum of squares of difference between data and fit values

c.	Correlation:  correlation coefficient (R)

d.	COD(R^2):  Coefficient of Determination (R^2)

e.	MuFinal:  final value of diagonal magnification of the curvature matrix

f.	MuMin:  smallest value of Mu that was ever reaching during fitting

g.	DerivStep:  parameter change amount for calculating derivatives (Derivative Delta)

h.	ParaChange:  the number of parameters that were allowed to vary during fitting.

i.	Tolerance:  tolerance value to stop iterations

j.	Confidence:  value for deciding confidence bands

k.	Iterations:  the number of iterations performed in the last fitting operation

l.	Range1:  beginning index of data range used in fitting

m.	Range2:  ending index of data range used in fitting

n.	Step:  incremental step size used when only a subset of data points were used in the fitting process (Ex. Step =4 means every fourth data point was used)

o.	DataPoints:  number of data points considered in the fitting process

p.	DOF:  no. of degrees of freedom = No. of data points considered – no. of floating parameters (parameters that were not fixed)

q.	Constr:  the number of constrains that the user enters in the "General Linear Constrains" window under the Options->Constrains tab. The "Enabled" checkbox has to be selected for the constraints to be counted.

r.	ConstrEff:  the number of effective constraints. If the user types in constraints on a parameter and then fixes the parameter value (unchecks 'vary?' under the Fit menu), those constraints will not be counted.

3)	The Var-Cov Matrix Button

Click this button to create a separate window containing the variance-covariance matrix.  Type the desired window name in the associated text box.

4)	The Paste Parameters to Plot Button

Click this button to create a label on your graph, and paste the fitting results into the label.

5)	The Display Parameters in Results Log Button

Click this button to copy the results to the Results Log.


Controlling the Fitting Procedure

Select Options:Control to open the Control Parameters dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to specify several quantitative properties of the fitting procedure.  These properties directly affect the way the fitter performs iterations.

The Control Parameters Dialog Box

1)	The Tolerance Text Box

Type a value for the tolerance in this text box.

When you click n Iter in the Fit Session dialog box, this causes the fitter to try to perform, at most, n LM iterations of chi-square.  If the relative change of the value of chi-square between two successive iterations is less than the value in the Tolerance text box, less than n iterations are performed.  If you want the fitter to perform still more iterations, click on either the n Iter or the 1 Iter button in the Fitting Session dialog box.  The n value is specified in the Max. Number of Iterations text box.

2)	The Max. Number of Iterations Drop-down List

Specify the value for the maximum number of iterations performed when the n Iter button is clicked on in the Fitting Session dialog box.

3)	The Derivative Delta Group

This group determines how the fitter will compute the partial derivatives with respect to parameters for user-defined functions during the iterative procedure.  The Derivative Delta group is unavailable for built-in functions as Origin's curve fitter uses analytical expressions.

For the user-defined functions, the derivative with respect to the parameter, p1, is computed as (for simplicity, written for a function which has one independent variable):

derivative = [f(x ; p1+Delta, p2, ...)-f(x ; p1, p2, ...)]/Delta

where Delta is the increment.  If the Fixed Delta check box is selected, the value of Delta used in the computations is the value entered in Delta text box and is the same for all the parameters.  The Maximum and Minimum text boxes are then disabled.  If the Fixed Delta check box is cleared (unchecked), then the actual value of Delta for a particular parameter is equal to the current value of the parameter times the value specified in the Delta text box.  In this case, use the Maximum and Minimum text boxes to specify the limiting values of the actual Delta in case a parameter value becomes too large or too small.  It is recommended, at least when you start fitting your new function, not to select the Fixed Delta check box.

4)	The Parameters Significant Digits Group

Select values for the display of significant digits for each parameter from the associated drop-down list.  Select Free from the drop-down list to use the current Origin setting.

5)	The Weighting Method Drop-Down List

The bottom part of the Control Parameters dialog box enables you to select how different dataset points are to be weighted when computing chi-square during the iterative procedure.  Select the desired weighting method from the Weighting Method drop-down list.  The choices are:  No weighting, Instrumental, Statistical, Arbitrary dataset, and Direct Weighting.  If you select the Arbitrary dataset method, specify the dataset which contains the weighting values for each dependent variable from the Available Datasets list box.

6)	The Scale Errors with Standard Deviation Check Box

This check box is unavailable (gray) and is selected when the weighting method is set to No Weighting.  The check box becomes available when a weighting method other than No Weighting is selected.  In this case, the default setting is that the check box is cleared.  For reference information, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., 2nd Edition, Chapter 15, page 656.

7)	The Dependent Var. List Box

If you selected the Arbitrary dataset method from the Weighting Method drop-down list, highlight a dependent variable in this list box.  Click on the desired dataset name in the Available Datasets list box.

8)	The Available Datasets List Box

Click on the dataset name in this list box after selecting the dependent variable in the Dependent Var. list box (for Arbitrary dataset weighting method only).


Setting the Parameter Constraints

Select Options:Constraints to open the Parameter Constraints dialog box.  Impose linear constraints on the parameter values in this dialog box.  If the constraints are selected, the fitter chooses only those combinations of parameter values which satisfy the constraints during the iterative procedure.

Use the constraints if the fitting procedure is unstable causing the parameters to wander into wrong parameter regions.  For example, in the exponential growth model y=Aexp[(x-x0)/t] the values of the parameter t close to zero may cause instabilities.  A constraint such as t³0.1 may remedy the problem.

The Parameter Constraints Dialog Box

1)	The Lower and Upper Bounds Group

Simple constraints such as lower and upper bounds on the parameters are set in this group.  The parameter names are listed in the middle of each row.  The Lower Bounds and Upper Bounds text boxes contain the lower and the upper bounds.  If you have not set a particular bound, the corresponding text box is empty.  Edit the bounds by selecting the associated check boxes.  Click the <= buttons to toggle between <= (less than or equal to) and < (less than).  Type the desired value in the text box.  Disable a bound by clearing (unchecking) the associated check box.

2)	The General Linear Constraints Edit Box

Impose general linear constraints in the associated text box using the following format (assuming a, b, c, and d are parameters):

a>b;

a+2*b>=c*2-d;

a<b<c;

a/3<9

The following constraints are invalid as they are nonlinear:

a^2>c;

a*b>3;

1/b>c+2;

sin(a)<c

Five relational operators are supported:  =, <, <=, >, and >=.  The curve fitter treats < and <= the same.  Likewise > and => are treated the same (this is not true for simple constraints, see above).

You can place multiple operators in a single sentence, such as:

4<a<b<6

which is equivalent to:

4<a; a<b; b<6

Coefficients need not be numeric constants.  However, they must evaluate to valid numbers.  For example, if the function has two parameters, P1 and P2, you can use a linear constraint such as P1+qw*P2 assuming that you have previously given qw a numeric value.

Temporarily disable constraints by clearing (unchecking) the Enabled check box.  Constraints take effect only if the Enabled check box is selected.


Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters

Select Scripts:Initialization to open the Initializations dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to define what you want Origin to do when entering a fitting session.  You are most likely to use this feature of Origin's nonlinear curve fitter if you want to automatically initialize parameters.

The Initializations Dialog Box

1)	The Parameter Group

Edit the initial parameter values in the Init. Value text box.  The Vary check box determines how you want the parameters to be treated upon entering a fitting session.  Select the Vary check box to vary the parameter during the iterative procedure.  Clear the check box to keep the parameter fixed.  If you only need to edit the initial parameter values, do this when entering the fitting session.  See  Starting the Fitting.

2)	The Constants Text Box

If your function contains constants other than the parameter names and the independent or dependent variables, and the values of those constants are not specified in the function definition script or outside the fitter (for example, in the Script window), define these constants in the Constants text box.  When you define the constants in this field, you will never have to set them as fixed, because they are automatically set.

The proper procedure to follow when using the Constants text box is to first define your function with the constant parameter names in it using the fitter's Define New Function dialog box.  When you type your parameter names in the Define New Function dialog box, do not include the constant parameter names.  Instead, define the constant parameters in the Constants text box (in the Initializations dialog box).  Enter the constant parameters in this field as follows:  c0=2; <Enter> c1=3; <Enter> and so on.  In other words, each constant term and its associated value should be separated by a semicolon (;).  When the fitting process is performed the constants terms will automatically be figured into the calculation, but will not show up in the parameter list for initialization since they are already initialized and set as fixed by entering them into the Constants Field.

3)	The Initialization Scripts Text Box

The most likely reason for you to use the Initializations dialog box is to define a script which will be executed when entering a fitting session.  Enter an initialization script in the Initialization Scripts text box.  For example, in your initialization script you can analyze the datasets to which you have assigned the variables, and then initialize parameters accordingly.

The initialization script entered in the Initialization Scripts text box is executed when entering a fitting session only if the Enabled check box is selected.


Simulation of Data

Select Action:Simulate to open the Simulate Curves dialog box.  Features provided in this dialog box are useful when you are uncertain about the initial values of parameters for fitting.  You can plot the theoretical function for any parameter values in order to compare the curve with the data.  This enables you to get an understanding of which parameter values produce curves that "look like the data".  This is important because reasonably good starting parameter values are in most cases a precondition for the success of the fitting.

The Simulate Curves Dialog Box

1)	The Func Dataset Name Text Box

This text box displays the name of the dataset which will contain the theoretical data points to be generated.

2)	The Dependent Variables List Box

All the dependent variables are displayed in this list box.  Click to select a variable to be plotted.

3)	The Parameter Group

The names of all the parameters are displayed in the list box.  Set the parameter values used for plotting the theoretical curve in the associated text box.  Click the < and > buttons to browse through the sets of parameter values for which you have already created curves.  If you select Action:Fit, the last set of parameter values selected in this dialog box are carried over to the Fit Session dialog box, which enables you to start fitting from these values.

4)	The Begin/End Group

Determine how to plot the theoretical curves for the simulation in the Begin/End group.  All independent variables are listed in this view box.  Set the lower and the upper limit of the independent variable values by editing the associated Begin and the End text boxes.  Select the number of theoretical points in the associated # Points text box.  If there is more than one independent variable, than the # Points text boxes for different independent variables must contain the same number.  Origin's fitter generates theoretical curves as follows:

a.	One dataset (or column in a worksheet) is created for each independent variable.  The number of rows is the same for all of the datasets (columns).

b.	The fitter takes the independent variable values from a row, computes the values of the dependent variable(s), and displays them.  The process is repeated for each row.

5)	The Create Curve Button

Click Create Curve to generate the curve.

6)	The Matrix Form Check Box

This check box applies only if there is more than one independent variable.  If the check box is selected, the theoretical curve will be simulated on a grid.  Note that this way of simulating curves requires much more computer memory (for example, if you have specified 60 points for each of the three independent variables, the use of Matrix Form will create 60x60x60 values, rather than only 60).


Customizing the Fitting Output Report and Controlling the End of the Fitting Session

Select Scripts:After Fit to open the After Fitting dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to define what you want Origin's nonlinear curve fitter to do when ending a fitting session.

The After Fitting Dialog Box

1)	The Fit Curve Group

Select the Generate Fit Curve check box to create a new dataset which contains the theoretical curve points and display the curve on the graph.  Select the X dataset source from the associated radio buttons.

Select the Uniform X radio button to plot a fit curve so that the number of points is determined by the Number Points value in the Simulate Curves dialog box.  These points are uniformly spaced in X.

Select the Same X as Fitting Data radio button to plot a fit curve that is calculated only for the X values in the original dataset.  Additionally, this option adds a column to the worksheet that lists the fitted values for each X of the original dataset.

Select the Curves for Each Replica check box to create a separate curve for each replica.  The number of replicas is set in the Replicas dialog box.  For more information, see Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function

Note:  If you clear the Generate Fit Curve check box and later end the fitting session, the fitting curve that is displayed during the iterative process will be erased.

2)	The Write Parameters to Results Log Check Box

Select this check box to send the fitting results to the Results Log when ending a fitting session.

3)	The Paste Parameters to Plot Check Box

Select this check box to create a label on your graph and paste the fitting results onto it when ending a fitting session.

4)	The After Fitting Scripts Text Box

Type a script in this text box for execution when ending a fitting session.  For example, if you want the fitting results displayed or stored in a particular manner, write a script which performs the task and enter it in this text box.

The script entered in the Scripts After Fitting text box is executed when ending a fitting session only if the Enabled check box is selected.


Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function

Select Options:Replicas to open the Replicas dialog box.  Edit this dialog box to fit your data to some of the built-in peak functions by replicating the function into several "copies", each of which may have different parameters.  Use this feature if you believe that your data contain multiple peaks of the same sort (say, Lorentzian) but different centers and/or widths.  If the function you have selected does not support replications, this dialog box is disabled.

Edit this dialog box to fit your data to some of the built-in peak functions by replicating the function into several "copies", each of which may have different parameters.

The Replicas Dialog Box

1)	The Replicas Group

Select the number of replicas ("copies") of the function that you want to use in fitting from the Number of Replicas drop-down list.  You must set the number to n - 1, where n is the number of peaks you believe are present in your data.

The Replicate From value shows which parameters are used for fitting multiple peaks for the particular function.  For example, in the case of a Gaussian function the parameters are ordered as:  y0, xc, w, and A in the function definition file.  If the value of Replicate From is two, that means that the parameters, beginning with the second one (xc), will be used in replicas, whereas there will be only one value of the first parameter (y0).

The Replica Size is the number of parameters used in replicas.

2)	The Parameter Sharing List Box

Specify if you want some of the parameters in the replicate unit to have the same value for all the peaks by tagging those parameters as shared.  Tag a parameter as shared by double-clicking on its name in the Parameter Sharing list box.  The meaning of parameter sharing (here) is the analogous to the same feature when fitting multiple datasets.

3)	The Generate Peak Curves During Each Iteration Check Box

Select this check box to display the peak curves for each replica after every iteration.

4)	The Peaks with Baseline

Select this check box if you want each peak curve to be plotted from the common vertical offset.


Initializing the Fitter

Select Action:Initialize to initialize the fitter.  This action should be performed after you are done fitting the current dataset and before starting a new fitting process in another dataset.  The initialization resets all settings under the various menu options to the default values.  You need not perform this operation if you are fitting subsequent datasets with the same fitting function, and would like to retain your settings under various menu options.


Using the Fitter with the Network Version of Origin

An Origin client can modify or create a fitting function as described in Selecting an Existing Function and  Creating a New Function.  If the created function has the same name as a server fitting function, the client function is used for fitting.

To define a new fitting function on an Origin server so that clients can use it, perform the following:

1)	Run the server and create the new fitting function.

2)	On the server, rename the created *.FDF file (in the \FITFUNC folder) from User#.FDF to NewName.FDF where NewName is descriptive of the function.

3)	In the server's NLSF.INI file, change the default FDF file name for the newly created fitting function from User# to NewName, where NewName is the same descriptive file name.

4)	Copy this line you just modified:

New Function Name = NewName

from the server's NLSF.INI file to the client's NLSF.INI file, under the same [FunctionGroup] section.

The client can now use this server-defined fitting function.


Fitting Strategies

Do I need NLSF?

Using the Built-in Functions

Parameter Initialization

When the Fitting Procedure Does Not Converge


Do I need NLSF?

Before even starting Origin's nonlinear least squares fitter (NLSF), you must determine if you actually need it.  If you want to fit a function, such as:

y=p1sin(x)+p2x

you may be tempted to use NLSF since the function is obviously nonlinear.  However, Origin's NLSF is primarily intended for use with functions which depend nonlinearly on at least one of its parameters.  Since the above function is linear in the parameters, you may be better off trying (multiple) linear regression, which is also supplied with Origin.


Using the Built-in Functions

Before deciding to define your own function, make sure that the function you need is not already among the built-in functions.  This is very important because of the way the Levenberg-Marquardt chi-square minimization is implemented in Origin's NLSF.  For user-defined functions, in each iterative step the NLSF computes partial derivatives of the fitting function(s) with respect to parameters in all the dataset points.  For built-in functions, Origin's NLSF uses built-in analytical derivatives for the computation of the derivatives, which is more reliable than straightforward numerical computation of the same derivatives.


Parameter Initialization

An indispensable part of any fitting procedure is a good choice of initial parameter values.  Origin's NLSF enables you to select good initial parameter values in the easiest possible way by means of the Simulate Curves dialog box.

Use the Simulate Curves dialog box to plot your theoretical function for any choice of parameters.  Thus, you can easily compare your data with the theoretical function for any choice of parameter values.  When you find a set of parameter values that generates the curve which closely resembles the data, start the iterative procedure from those values.


When the Fitting Procedure Does Not Converge

Nonlinear least squares fitting is essentially the minimization of a function of several variables (in this case, the variables the chi-square function depends on are the parameters of the fitting function).  The aim of the minimization procedure is to find the absolute minimum of chi-square.  There are several reasons for the minimization procedure to have problems reaching the absolute minimum.

•	Relative Minimum Reached

It is not uncommon for the iterative procedure to find a relative, rather than absolute, minimum.  In this case, the procedure actually converges in the sense that further decrease of chi-square seems impossible.  The biggest problem is that you do not even know if the routine has reached an absolute or a relative minimum.  The only way that you can "make" the iterative procedure get to an absolute minimum is to try to start fitting from several different initial parameter values and see what happens.  If you always get the same final result, the result is less likely to represent a local minimum.

•	Parameter Values Keep Changing

The most common problem that arises in nonlinear fitting is that no matter how you choose the initial parameter values, the iterations cannot seem to converge in the sense that some, or all, parameter values keep changing with each iteration and eventually diverge producing arithmetic overflow or underflow.  This should be a signal for you to do something about the fitting function and/or data you are using.  There is simply no one set of parameter values which fits the data best, but rather a continuum of the values.

•	Overparameterized Function

Here is a typical example:

y=A*exp(x-x0);

No matter what kind of data you have, the iterative procedure will never be able to find a minimum because you have too many parameters!  Rewrite your function as:

y=B*exp(x);

where B=A*exp(-x0).  In other words, if, during the fitting procedure, the values of A and x0 change so that the combination B=A*exp(-x0) remains the same, the chi-square value will not change.  Any attempt to further improve the fit is a waste of time.  There are two simple indications that something is wrong:

a.	The parameter error, as displayed in the parameter list in the Fitting Session dialog box, is very large relative to the parameter value.  For example, if the width of the Gaussian is 0.5 while the error is 10, the result for the width is meaningless since no convergence has been reached.

b.	The parameter dependence (for one or more parameters) is very close to one.  This is a certain indication that you have to remove (or fix) one of the parameters whose dependency is close to one since the fit does not depend on the parameter (or a combination thereof) very much.

•	Bad Data

Even when the function is not theoretically overparameterized, the iterative procedure may behave as if it were, due to the fact that the data do not contain enough information for some or all of the parameters to be determined.  This usually happens when the data are available only in a limited interval of the independent variable(s).  For example, if you are fitting a nonmonotonous function such as Gaussian to the data which are monotonous, the NLSF will have a difficult time determining the position of the center, or the width of the peak, since the data obviously describe only one side of the Gaussian peak.

More:

Using Constraints


Using Constraints

When trying to reach the chi-square minimum, the Levenberg-Marquardt method carefully chooses the path in the parameter space which should lead to the minimum.  However, there are situations when good initial parameter values are hard to find and a small departure can cause the fitter to wander away from the minimum without being able to come back.  To prevent that, you may impose linear constraints on the parameters.  For example, if you believe that the chi-square minimum for a particular case of Gaussian fit corresponds to the Gaussian width being greater than 0.1, you can prevent the fitter from trying too small values of the width w by imposing a constraint w>0.1.  Since too small values of the width can easily cause an arithmetic underflow, you may improve the stability of the iterative procedure.


The Function Definition File

The function definition files are read by Origin when the fitter is started.  The files have a standardized form consisting of several sections, each beginning with a heading enclosed in square brackets.  The explanations of various items in the function definition file follow:

[GENERAL INFORMATION]

Function Name:  The name of the function as it appears in the Functions list box.

Function Source:  It is usually in the form dllname.fname, where dllname is the name of the DLL that contains the function's implementation, and fname is the function name within the implementation.  In the case of user defined functions, this field reads N/A or in the form dllname.fname if the user has supplied her/his own DLL.

Function Type:  The function is either built-in or user-defined.

Function Form:  This is N/A for the built-in functions.  For user-defined functions, this field describes the way in which the function is defined, as determined in the Form drop-down list of the Define New Function dialog box (for the discussion of various function forms, see Creating a New Function).

Number of Parameters:  This is the total number of parameters that may be subject to variations during the iterative fitting procedure.  Which parameters will actually vary is determined by the Vary check boxes in the Initializations and Fitting Session dialog boxes (see Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters and Starting the Fitting for discussions of this topic).

Number of Independent Variables:  This is self-explanatory.

Number of Dependent Variables:  This is self-explanatory.

[FITTING PARAMETERS]

Naming Method:  This determines whether the parameter names are user-defined or default (P1, P2, ...), as determined by the "User Defined Names" check box in the Edit Function and/or Define New Function dialog boxes.

Names:  The parameter names.

Meanings:  This additionally describes the function parameters (for example, for the "Gaussian in Spectroscopy" function, the meanings of the parameters in the order in which they appear in the Names field are:  offset, center, width, area).

Initial Values:  These are the currently set initial values.  Next to each value there is either a letter V (the parameter is currently set to vary) or a letter F (the parameter is currently set to be fixed).  See Starting the Fitting and Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters for discussions of this topic.  If some of the initial values are not currently set, two dashes are displayed in lieu of the parameter values.

Lower Bounds:  If any lower bounds for the parameters are set in the Parameter Constraints dialog box (see Setting the Parameter Constraints), they are displayed together with the word "On" (the bound is enabled) or "Off" (the bound is disabled) and the letters X (the value at the bound is excluded) or I (the value at the bound is included).

Upper Bounds:  If any upper bounds for the parameters are set in the Parameter Constraints dialog box (see Setting the Parameter Constraints), they are displayed together with the word "On" (the bound is enabled) or "Off" (the bound is disabled).

Number of Significant Digits:  It shows how many significant digits will be displayed for each parameter, as determined in the Parameters Significant Digits text box of the Control Parameters dialog box (for the discussion of this feature, see Controlling the Fitting Procedure).

[FORMULA]

This is the formula for the fitting function.  If the function is a user-defined function, Origin reads this formula and uses it for the fitting.  In this case, the formula has the same form as defined in the New and/or Edit Function dialog boxes (see Selecting an Existing Function).

[CONSTRAINTS]

All the constraints set in the General Linear Constraints text box of the Parameter Constraints dialog box are displayed here (for the discussion of the constraints, see Setting the Parameter Constraints).

[CONSTANTS]

The values of all the constants that enter the function definition are displayed here (for the discussion of this feature, see Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters).

[INITIALIZATIONS]

An initialization script, as defined in the Initialization Scripts text box of the Initializations dialog box, is displayed here (the initialization scripts are discussed in Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters).

[AFTER FITTING]

A script, as defined in the "Scripts after Fitting" text box of the After Fitting dialog box, is displayed here (for the discussion of these scripts see Customizing the Fitting Output Report and Controlling the End of the Fitting Session).

[INDEPENDENT VARIABLES]

These are the dataset assignments for the independent variable(s) that are set when the fitter is started.  They can be in the form x=datasetname, where datasetname is the name of a particular dataset.

[DEPENDENT VARIABLES]

These are the dataset assignments for the dependent variable(s) that are set when the fitter is started.  They can be in the form y=datasetname, where datasetname is the name of a particular dataset.

[CONTROLS]

General Linear Constraints:  It can be On or Off depending on whether the linear constraints set in the General Linear Constraints text box of the Parameter Constraints dialog box are selected or cleared (for the discussion of the constraints, see Setting the Parameter Constraints).

Initialization Scripts:  It can be On or Off depending on whether the initialization script defined in the Initialization Scripts text box of the Initializations dialog box, is selected or cleared (the initialization scripts are discussed in Writing Script to Automatically Determine the Initial Parameters).

Scripts after Fitting:  It can be On or Off depending on whether the "After Fitting" script defined in the "After Fitting Scripts" text box of the After Fitting dialog box, is selected or cleared (for the discussion of these scripts see Customizing the Fitting Output Report and Controlling the End of the Fitting Session).

Number of Replicas:  It displays the number of replicas used in the fitting of multiple peaks, as set in the Replications group of the Advanced Options dialog box, see  Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function.

Replicate From:  It displays the offset of the parameters used in replications, see  Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function.

Replica Size:  It displays the number of the parameters used in replications, see  Fitting Multiple Peaks with Replicas of the Function.


Starting Origin with a Specific File

To display a specific child window or project when starting Origin, you can drag a supported file type onto your Origin program icon or Origin executable file.  The supported file types include: graph templates (*.OTP), graphs (*.OGG), worksheets (*.OGW), matrices (*.OGM), projects (*.OPJ and *.ORG) and Excel files (*.XLS).


Adjusting How Origin Starts by Modifying the Command Line

When Origin is started, it reads the Command Line text box in the icon's Program Item Properties dialog box in Windows NT 3.5, or the Target text box in the Origin 6 Properties dialog box in Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows NT 4.0.

By default, the Command Line and Target text boxes start Origin by executing ORIGIN60.EXE - without any switches.  Switches can be added to modify Origin's startup sequence.

Note:  In general, the initialization switch (-i) should precede other switches if more than one switch is used.  However, use of the additional switches can have complex interactions with Origin and their use is intended for advanced users only.

Available Switches for Origin's Command Line

Switch	Argument	Function
-i	filename	Specifies an initialization file to use in place of ORIGIN.INI.  See  Using a Different Initialization File When Starting Origin.
-l	number	Specifies at which menu level to start the software.  See  Specifying a Menu Level When Starting Origin.
-c	filename	Specifies a new configuration file to override the specification in the INI file.  See  Adding a New or Additional Configuration File.
-a	filename	Specifies a configuration file to add to the list specified in the INI file.  See  Adding a New or Additional Configuration File.
-tw	TemplateName	Specifies the default worksheet template.  See  Directing Origin to Start by Opening a Worksheet Based on a Specific Template.
-p	full path	Directs the network version of Origin to look for client-specific files in the specified folder.  See  Network Switches.
-w	none	Directs the network version of Origin to look for client-specific files in the Start In folder or Working directory.  See  Network Switches.
More:

Using a Different Initialization File When Starting Origin

Specifying a Menu Level When Starting Origin

Adding a New or Additional Configuration File

Directing Origin to Start by Opening a Worksheet Based on a Specific Template

Network Switches

Directing Origin to Start by Opening a Specific File

The Origin Start Up Sequence


Using a Different Initialization File When Starting Origin

Origin's default initialization file, ORIGIN.INI, presets a number of Origin options that remain active until you close the Origin session.  These options include the menu configuration and some display settings.  Because Origin automatically uses ORIGIN.INI as the default initialization file, no Command Line or Target text box switch is needed to specify it.  To use an initialization file other than ORIGIN.INI, specify the replacement initialization file by using the -i filename switch.  If ORIGIN.INI is not found and no replacement INI file is specified, default values are used for initialization.

The following command line with the -i switch specifies that Origin use the MYINIT.INI file to preset Origin options:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60.EXE -i MYINIT

Note that the INI file must be in the same directory as the Origin executable file.


Specifying a Menu Level When Starting Origin

The menu level determines which menus are available when Origin is open.  To specify the menu level at which Origin starts, use the -l number switch.  The number must be valid for the lists of menus contained in the ORIGIN.INI file.  If a -l switch is not included in the Command Line or Target text box, then a default menu level of 1 is used unless overridden by assignment within the INI file.

The following command line with the -l switch specifies that Origin use menu level 2 when starting Origin:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60.EXE -l 2


Adding a New or Additional Configuration File

Configuration files are text files that contain LabTalk script commands.  The configuration files define variables, menus, macros, and functions that remain active until you close the Origin session.  Configuration files execute when Origin starts as specified by the menu level in the ORIGIN.INI file.

Use the -c filename switch to specify a new configuration file to override the configuration files that are specified by the menu level in the INI file.

Use the -a filename switch to specify a configuration file to add to the list of configuration files that are specified by the menu level in the INI file.

The following command line with the -c switch specifies that Origin use a new configuration file, MYCONFIG.CNF, to override the current configuration files specified in the ORIGIN.INI file:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60.EXE -c MYCONFIG

Note that the configuration file must be in the same directory as the Origin executable file.


Directing Origin to Start by Opening a Worksheet Based on a Specific Template

By default, when Origin starts it opens a new project displaying a single worksheet created from the ORIGIN.OTW worksheet template.  To start Origin displaying a worksheet created from a different template, use the
-tw templateName switch.  In addition, templateName will become the default worksheet template used by the New Worksheet button on the Origin Standard toolbar.

For example, to start Origin and create a worksheet based on the CONVANALYSIS.OTW worksheet template, type the following in the Command Line or Target text box:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60.EXE -tw CONVANALYSIS.OTW

Note that the specified template must be in the same directory as the Origin executable file.


Network Switches

The -p and -w command line switches tell a client installation of the network version of Origin where to look for client-specific files.  These switches are not needed and do not work with non-network versions of Origin.  Client-specific files are files that are modified by a particular client for customization purposes.  These files contain such things as user preferences, settings, options, and templates.  Configuration files (*.CNF), initialization files (*.INI), tool related files (*.OGI and *.OGO), and template files (*.OTP, *.OTW and *.OTM) are commonly modified by individual users and need to be saved separately from the Origin server and other clients.

Use the -p full path switch to direct a client installation of Origin to look for client-specific files in the folder specified by full path.

Use the -w switch (with no argument) to direct a client installation of Origin to look for client-specific files in the folder specified in the Start In text box of an Origin shortcut's Properties window.

Note that the folder specified by full path and the Start In folder are normally the folder in which the client is installed.

The following command line with the -p switch directs Origin to look for client-specific files in the folder C:\ORIGIN60CLIENT\.

\\SERVER\ORIGIN\ORIGIN60.EXE -p C:\ORIGIN60CLIENT\


Directing Origin to Start by Opening a Specific File

To open a graph window template, an Origin child window, or a project when starting Origin, you can specify the path and file name of any supported file type in the Command Line or Target text box.  The supported file types include:  graph templates (*.OTP), graphs (*.OGG), worksheets (*.OGW), matrices (*.OGM), projects (*.OPJ and *.ORG) and Excel files (*.XLS).  No extension to the file name is required if it is a *.OPJ file.

For example, to open a project named MYPROJECTFILE.OPJ that is located in the Origin software folder, type the following in the Command Line or Target text box:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60EXE MYPROJECTFILE

To open a graph window named MY GRAPH.OGG that is located in the folder D:\MY OGGs, type the following in the Command Line or Target text box:

C:\ORIGIN60\ORIGIN60.EXE "D:\MY OGGs\MY GRAPH.OGG"

Note that, unlike files specified with the command line switches, you can specify files not located in the same directory as the Origin executable file.  However, if the specified file is not in the Origin software folder, you must specify the complete path and file name.  Long path and file names with spaces must be enclosed in double quotation marks.  In general, the file name should be the last command line option listed when using more than one switch.


The Origin Start Up Sequence

When Origin is started by executing text contained in a Command Line text box or a Target text box, a predictable and orderly sequence of start up events takes place.  Changing this sequence by the use of command line switches or by altering the contents of the ORIGIN.INI file can have complex interactions with Origin and is intended for advanced users.  This section outlines the normal start up sequence followed by Origin.

1)	The command line is read.

2)	The ORIGIN.INI (or replacement INI file) and ORIGIN60.INI files are read.  The ORIGIN.INI and ORIGIN60.INI files are self documented text files that can be opened using any text editor such as NotePad.

3)	If specified, the SYSVAR file is loaded.  The SYSVAR file name is specified in the ORIGIN.INI file (or in a replacement INI file) by the line:

SYSVAR=filename

where filename is the name of a text file located in the Origin software folder.  The SYSVAR file is a mechanism for providing permanent storage of LabTalk variables whose current values are saved at the close of each project (when selecting File:New:Project, File:Open, or File:Exit).  The SYSVAR file is a text file that can be created or opened with any text editor and should consist of lines of the form variable=value.

4)	The files SYSTEM.CNF, OPTION.CNF, and ORGSYS.CNF are executed.  Configuration files are text files that contain LabTalk script commands.  The files SYSTEM.CNF and OPTION.CNF contain settings for many LabTalk system object properties.  The file ORGSYS.CNF contains settings for several object properties and system variables as well as a number of macro definitions.

5)	The file MACROS.CNF and the menu level CNF files (or an overriding CNF file) are executed.  The file MACROS.CNF contains definitions for several system macros and should normally be included along with the menu level CNF files.  Caution is advised if not including this file.

The menu level can be specified by the -l number command line switch or by the LEVEL=number line in the ORIGIN.INI file (if not specified, it defaults to 1).  The menu level CNF files are specified by the line:

File#=Macros filename1 filename2 filename3 etc...

in the ORIGIN.INI file where File is literal, # equals number (the menu level), Macros is literal, and filename1, filename2, filename3, etc... are the menu level CNF files located in the Origin software folder.  Menu level CNF files create different Origin menu arrangements depending on the value of the menu level setting.  An example taken from the ORIGIN.INI file is:

File1=Macros FullMenu

6)	The additional CNF file is executed.  If specified (with the -a command line switch), the additional CNF file is executed.

7)	If a file to be opened is not specified at the end of the command line and the AutoExec macro is defined, then the AutoExec macro is executed.  If both conditions are met then Origin is opened with an empty workspace and the AutoExec macro is executed.  The AutoExec macro is generally used to override internal default settings.  A minimal and commented out definition of the AutoExec macro can be found in the MACROS.CNF file.  Not defining this macro is the normal and recommended start up sequence.  If the AutoExec macro is not executed then internal defaults are set and the default worksheet template is opened by Origin.

8)	If a graph template (*.OTP), a child window (*.OGG, *.OGW, *.OGM), or an Excel file (*.XLS) is specified at the end of the command line, then the template, child window, or workbook is opened by Origin.  If defined, the macro DocEnd is executed when the newly created project file is closed.  Origin creates a new project and opens the specified template, child window, or workbook.  If defined, Origin executes the DocEnd macro when the new project is closed.  A definition statement for the DocEnd macro can be found in the MACROS.CNF file.

9)	If a project file (*.OPJ or *.ORG) is specified at the end of the command line, the file ORGSYS.CNF is executed again and Origin opens the specified project file.  If defined, the macros DocBegin, EndOpen, and DocEnd are executed.  Origin executes the file ORGSYS.CNF a second time and then opens the specified project file.  The DocBegin macro is executed just prior to the project file being opened, the EndOpen macro is executed immediately after the project file is opened, and the DocEnd macro is executed when the project file is closed.  A definition statement for the DocBegin macro can be found in the ORGSYS.CNF file.  Definition statements for the EndOpen and DocEnd macros can be found in the MACROS.CNF file.


Controlling the Default Window Type when You Open a New Project

Origin allows you to control the type of child window that displays when you open a new project.  This includes opening a new project from the File:New menu command, the New Project button on the Standard toolbar, and the new project that opens when you start Origin.

By default, Origin displays a worksheet window when you open a new project.  To display either an Excel workbook window, graph window, matrix window, or no window at all, or to display a worksheet and a graph window, perform the following:

1)	Select Tools:Options when any window other than an Excel workbook window is active.  If an Excel workbook window is active, select Window:Origin Options.

2)	Select the Open/Close tab.

3)	Make a selection from the Start New Project drop-down list.  To display both a worksheet and graph window when you open a new project, select ORIGIN.OPJ from the drop-down list.


Setting Your Preferences with the Options Dialog Box

A number of control options can be modified during an Origin session in the Options dialog box.  These settings can be saved for the current, and future, Origin sessions.

More:

Opening the Options Dialog Box

Saving the Settings in the Options Dialog Box for Future Origin Sessions

Reference Section:  The Options Dialog Box


Opening the Options Dialog Box

To open the Options dialog box, select Tools:Options.  If you are working with Excel in Origin and the workbook is the active window, open the Options dialog box by selecting Window:Origin Options.


Saving the Settings in the Options Dialog Box for Future Origin Sessions

Origin provides two methods for saving your settings in the Options dialog box for use in future Origin sessions.  Which method you use is determined by the current settings on the Open/Close tab of the Options dialog box.

•	Select the Prompt for Save on Options Dialog Close check box (default).

After customizing the settings in the Options dialog box, save the settings for future Origin sessions by clicking OK to exit the Options dialog box and clicking Yes at the "Save as Origin's startup options?" prompt.

•	Select the Save Settings on Close check box (the Prompt for Save on Options Dialog Close check box must be cleared).

After customizing the settings in the Options dialog box and clicking OK, automatically save the settings for future Origin sessions when you exit Origin.

Origin saves the Options dialog box settings by updating the associated parameters in the OPTION.CNF file, which is read automatically when Origin starts.


Reference Section:  The Options Dialog Box

The Restore, Reset, OK, and Cancel buttons are located at the bottom of the Options dialog box:

•	Restore Button

Click Restore to restore the Options dialog box settings to the current settings in the OPTION.CNF file.

•	Reset Button

Click Reset to return the Options dialog box settings to the factory default values.

•	OK Button

Click OK to close the dialog box and establish the current settings for the current Origin session.

Click Yes at the "Save as Origin's startup options?" prompt to save the dialog box settings as the current settings in the OPTION.CNF file.  Click No to use the current dialog box settings for the current Origin session only.

•	Cancel Button

Click Cancel to exit the Options dialog box without implementing any changes to the dialog box.

After making changes to the Options dialog box, view the changes in the active window by selecting Window:Refresh.

More:

The Numeric Format Tab

The File Locations Tab

The Axis Tab

The Graph Tab

The Text Fonts Tab

The Page Tab

The Miscellaneous Tab

The Open/Close Tab

The Excel Tab


The Numeric Format Tab

1)	The Convert to Scientific Notation Group

Type or select the upper threshold for conversion from decimal to scientific notation from the Upper Threshold Power combination box.

Type or select the lower threshold for conversion from decimal to scientific notation from the Lower Threshold Power combination box.

2)	The Number of Decimal Digits Combination Box

When Default Decimal Digits is selected from the Numeric Display drop-down list in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box, then this combination box value controls the number of decimal digits displayed in the cell.  However, when Default Decimal Digits is selected and the worksheet cell value exceeds the Upper Threshold Power combination box value (Options dialog box), then Origin displays five digits after the decimal place.

3)	The Separators Drop-down List

Type or select the desired numeric value separator from this drop-down list.  Select Windows Settings to use the separator specified in the system's Regional Settings Properties dialog box, accessed by double-clicking on the Regional Settings program icon in the Control Panel window.

4)	The Angular Unit Group

Select the desired angular unit from this group.


The File Locations Tab

1)	The Track Within Origin Session Check Box

Select this check box to update the default path in the associated list box as you search for the specific file types within an Origin session.

2)	The Track Between Origin Sessions Check Box

Select this check box to use the settings in the associated list box that are current when you exit Origin as the default settings when you restart Origin.

3)	The Files List Box

When saving or opening a file, this list box determines the default folder and the default file extension for the file types used in Origin.  To modify the default path or the default type, double-click on the file type (or click Modify) to open the File Extension Group Defaults dialog box.

4)	The ASCII File Type List Box

This list box displays the ASCII file descriptions that display in the Files of Type drop-down lists when importing and exporting files, as well as the file extensions that will display in the associated Look In view box.

To add a file type, press Add.  This action opens the Add File Extension Type dialog box.  Type a string in the Description text box that will display in the Files of Type drop-down list when importing and exporting files.  In the Specification(s) text box, type the file specifications for the files that will display in the Look In view box when importing and exporting files.

Example:

Suppose you have a third party program that outputs data to an ASCII formatted file.  This formatted file is given a name with an extension .XYZ.  You can have Origin display only these XYZ files in the import and export ASCII file dialog boxes by adding an ASCII File Type.

In the Description text box, you might type the name of the third party program.  You might also type (*.XYZ) after the name to show what file types are associated with this third party program.

In the Specification(s) text box, you would type *.XYZ.  Multiple specifications can be specified by separating them with a semicolon.  Example:  *.XYZ;*.XY;*.ZZ.  Also, both wild cards "*" and "?" can be used.

Now when importing or exporting ASCII files, you can select your new file type from the Files of Type drop-down list and see only the files associated with this program in the Look In view box.


The Axis Tab

1)	The Max. Number of Ticks Group

The Numeric Scales combination box value determines the maximum number of major ticks that can be displayed in a graph window when Numeric is selected from the Type drop-down list on the Tick Label tab of the Axis dialog box.

If the # Major Ticks radio button is selected on the Scale tab of the Axis dialog box and the value in the associated text box exceeds the Numeric Scales combination box value, then Origin displays a maximum of six major ticks in the graph window.

The Text/Date Time Scales combination box value determines the maximum number of major ticks that can be displayed in a graph window when Text from Dataset, Time, Date, Month, or Day of Week is selected from the Type drop-down list on the Tick Label tab of the Axis dialog box.

If the # Major Ticks radio button is selected on the Scale tab of the Axis dialog box and the value in the associated text box exceeds the Text/Date Time Scales combination box value, then Origin displays a maximum of six major ticks in the graph window.

2)	The Distance from Tick Labels (%) Group

a.	The To Inside Ticks Combination Box

Type or select the default distance of an "inside tick" from the tick label, in a percentage of the tick length.

b.	The To Outside Ticks Combination Box

Type or select the default distance of an "outside tick" from the tick label, in a percentage of the tick length.

c.	The To Axis Title Combination Box

Type or select the default distance of the axis title from the tick label, in a percentage of the tick length.

3)	The Display 1 as 10^0 in Log Scale Check Box

This check box controls the format of tick labels that use Scientific notation on a logarithmic axis scale.

Clear this check box to display a logarithmic axis scale using Scientific (1E3) format as follows.

Select this check box to display a logarithmic axis scale using Scientific (1E3) format as follows.


The Graph Tab

1)	The Origin Dash Lines Group

The Dash Definition drop-down list and its associated text box are used to customize the appearance of the line type specified in the Plot Details dialog box for Line, Line + Symbol and Scatter graphs.  Select a dash definition from the Dash Definition drop-down list.  Configure the default length of the line and the space, and the size of the period, in the associated text box.  For example, select Dash Dot Dot from the Dash Definition drop-down list.  The default values of 18 12 5 12 5 12 display in the associated text box.  These values specify that the dash is 18 units in length, the following space is 12 units in length, the following dot is 5 units in length, the following space is 12 units in length, etc.  Modify these values as desired.

Select the Use Origin Dashes in Page View check box to view the settings in the Dash Definition drop-down list and associated text box for graph windows in Page View mode.  If this check box is not selected, Origin uses settings that are determined by the device driver, which are not adjustable.

Additionally, when selected, this check box ensures that dashes display when zooming in Page View mode.  Origin overrides the Window's controls, which enable the pixels to redraw as dashes.  This does, however, cause a slight increase in the redraw time.

Select the Scale Dash Pattern by Line Width check box to ensure that Origin keeps the length and height of a dash congruent with the space that follows it.

2)	The Line Symbol Gap (%) Combination Box

Type or select the desired value from this combination box to determine the gap between a symbol and line in a line+symbol data plot.  Enter a value n to set the line and symbol gap to n% of the symbol diameter.  Enter 0 to display no gap.  The maximum allowable value is 256.  (Note that the Gap to Symbol check box on the Line tab of the Plot Details dialog box must be selected to display a line and symbol gap.)

3)	The Symbol Border Width (%) Combination Box

Type or select the desired value from this combination box to determine the border width of hollow or open symbols in a scatter or line+symbol data plot.  Enter n to specify the width of the symbol border as n% of the symbol's half diameter.

4)	The Default Symbol Fill Color Drop-down List

Select the fill color that displays when Automatic is selected from the Fill Color drop-down list on the Symbol tab of the Plot Details dialog box.

5)	The Drag and Drop Plot Drop-down List

Select the data plot type that displays when you create a data plot by dragging data from a worksheet window or Excel workbook to a graph window.  Select Current to use the current data plot style holder of the graph layer.  For more information on data plot style holders, see  Attributes Saved with a Graph Template.

6)	The Bar Graph Show Zero Values Check Box

Select this check box to display a line at Y=0 for zero bar (and column) values in a bar (and column) graph.

7)	The Log Scale Use 1 as Floor Check Box

Select the Log Scale Use 1 as Floor check box to establish Y=1 as the "floor", or Y value which alters the direction of bar (and column) graphs displayed on a logarithmic scale.  This option enhances the display of logarithmic values less than one in a bar (and column) graph.

8)	The Percentile Interpolate Check Box

If this check box is selected, Origin will perform interpolation for determining percentile values in statistical analyses.  If this check box is cleared, the percentile calculations will be rounded off.  The percentile value will be rounded up to the next member of the dataset for calculations below the 50 percentile mark, and will be rounded down for calculations above the 50 percentile mark.  The percentile value for the 50 percentile mark is rounded down.  The status of this check box will affect the percentile lines drawn on statistical graphs such as box charts, and also the percentile values reported in results of statistical analyses such as Analysis:Statistics on Columns.

9)	The Enable OLE In-place Activation Check Box

Select this check box to activate in-place activation.  In-place activation allows you to edit an Origin object that is embedded in a destination application within the window of the destination application.  Origin's tools are available within the destination window.

10)	The Symbol Gallery Displays Characters Check Box

Select this check box to display alphanumeric characters in the symbol gallery on the Symbol tab of the Plot Details dialog box.

11)	The User-defined Symbols Grid

You can display bitmaps that you have created in other programs as symbols in your graph.  The bitmaps must be less than or equal to 16 x 16 pixels.  If a bitmap is larger than this, Origin will display only the upper-left corner of the bitmap.  These bitmaps will display in the symbol gallery on the Symbol tab of the Plot Details dialog box.  They will also be available from the Show Construction controls on the same tab.

To add a bitmap to the grid, copy your bitmap to the Clipboard.  Click with the left mouse button to select a cell in the grid area, then press CTRL+V to paste the bitmap into the cell.


The Text Fonts Tab

1)	The Text Tool Group

From the Font drop-down list, select the default font that displays when you create a text label with the Text tool.

From the Greek drop-down list, select the font to be used when you highlight text and click the Greek button in the Text Control dialog box.

From the Color drop-down list, select the default color that displays when you create a text label with the Text tool.

From the Size combination box, select or type the default point size used when you create a text label with the Text tool.

2)	The Default Drop-down List

Select the font to be used when Default is selected from the font drop-down list in the Text Control dialog box.

Note:  Should you open a co-worker's project which contains text labels displayed in the default font, Origin displays the text labels using the default font set in your version of Origin.

3)	The Align Fonts with Baseline Check Box

This check box applies to all text labels using multiple fonts.  When this check box is selected, the bottom of the letters and symbols in a line of a text label align horizontally (for most fonts).  This is useful when using several different fonts in the same line of a text label, particularly when using Greek symbols.

4)	The WYSIWYG in Page View Mode Check Box

This check box applies only to text objects that are displayed in the graph window.  If selected, Origin uses the device driver to display the text labels in the graph window when Page view is selected (View:Page View).  The text labels will be displayed in the graph window exactly as they will appear in the printed graph.  The other objects in the graph window are still displayed using the screen driver.

5)	The In Percent of Current Font Group

a.	The Line Spacing Combination Box

This combination box value controls the space between lines in a text label, as a percentage of the current font size.

For example, with a 20 point font size and 10% spacing, the lines in a text label will display 22 points apart.

b.	The Subscript Size Combination Box

This combination box value controls the size of a subscript in a text label, as a percentage of the current font size.

c.	The Subscript Offset Combination Box

This combination box value controls the offset of a subscript from the baseline of a text label, as a percentage of the current font size.  The subscript displays the specified percent below the baseline.

d.	The Superscript Offset Combination Box

This combination box value controls the offset of a superscript from the upper "baseline" of a text label, as a percentage of the current font size.  The superscript displays the specified percent above the upper baseline.

6)	The Tab Width Text Box

This text box value controls the number of characters that comprise a tab when you press CTRL+TAB in the Text Control dialog box.


The Page Tab

1)	The Copy Page Group

a.	The Ratio Combination Box

This combination box value controls the size of the page when pasted into another application, or when exported to a graphic file.  The units are as a percent of the page size in Origin.  Set to 100 for 100%, etc.

b.	The Margin Control Drop-down List

This drop-down list value controls the amount of the page in the graph window that is copied when selecting Edit:Copy Page, as well as when exporting the graph to a file.  The "bounding box" used in the Border and Tight modes is page specific.  The bounding box is determined by the smallest rectangular box required to completely encompass all objects on the graph page.

Select Border to copy the page (or export the graph) within the bounding box plus add the border that is specified in the Clip Border Width combination box.

Select Tight to copy the page (or export the graph) within the bounding box.

Select Page to copy the entire page (or export the graph) in the graph window.

c.	The Clip Border Width Combination Box

This combination box is only available if Border is selected from the Margin Control drop-down list.  This value determines the border that is included when selecting Edit:Copy Page, or when exporting the graph to a file.  The value is in percentage of the width of the bounding box.

2)	The Grid Spacing in Pixels Group

a.	The Axis Combination Box

Type or select the desired value from this combination box to set the spacing of the axis grid lines in pixels.

b.	The Object Combination Box

Type or select the desired value from this combination box to set the spacing of the object grid lines in pixels.


The Miscellaneous Tab

1)	The Printing Options Group

The X Scale Factor combination box value determines the X scale adjustment for printing.  Modify the default value if your printer does not produce a graph with the width specified in the Width text box on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.  For example, if you specify a width of 6 inches in the Width text box, but your graph prints 6.0625 inches wide, set the X Scale Factor combination box value to 1010, because (6.0625*1000)/6=1010.

The Y Scale Factor combination box value determines the Y scale adjustment for printing.  Modify the default value if your printer does not produce a graph with the height specified in the Height text box on the Size/Speed tab of the layer's Plot Details dialog box.

2)	The Custom Dates Formats Group

This group allows you to define your own custom date formats.  These custom date formats will display in the Format drop-down list in the Worksheet Column Format dialog box when Date is selected from the Display drop-down list (in the same dialog box).

When you specify a custom data format, there should be no more than 60 characters in the custom date string.  "Sandwich" format strings such as TIME-DATE-TIME or DATE-TIME-DATE are not allowed.

Use the following elements to construct a custom date string.

Elements for a Custom Date Format

Type in text box	Meaning	Displays in Origin
M	Month	M = number of month (for example, January = 1).  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. MM = 2 digit number of month (for example, January = 01). MMM = three letter abbreviation (for example, Jan).  MMMM = full month name (for example, January).  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element.
d	Day	d = day of month (for example, 1).  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. dd = two digit day of the month (for example, 01).  ddd = three letter abbreviation of day (for example, Mon).  dddd = full day name (for example, Monday).  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element.
y	Year	y = last 1 or 2 digits of year (for example, 1901 = 1).  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. yy = last 2 digits of year (for example, 1901 = 01). yyy = full year (for example, 1901 = 1901).
h	Hour	h = hours with no leading zero for single-digit hours; 12-hour clock.  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. hh = hours with leading zero for single-digit hours; 12-hour clock.
H	Hour	H = hours with no leading zero for single-digit hours; 24-hour clock.  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. HH = hours with leading zero for single-digit hours; 24-hour clock.
m	Minute	m = minutes with no leading zero for single-digit minutes.  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. mm = minutes with leading zero for single-digit minutes.
s	Seconds	s = seconds with no leading zero for single-digit minutes.  Separators (enclosed in single quotes) must follow this element. ss = seconds with leading zero for single-digit seconds.
#	Decimal after seconds	# = one digit after the decimal point for seconds. ## = two digits after the decimal point for seconds. ### = three digits after the decimal point for seconds. #### = four digits after the decimal point for seconds.
t	Time marker	t = one character time marker string, such as A or P. tt = multi-character time marker string, such as AM or PM.
For example, to create a custom 1 date selection that displays the format:

Saturday, September 5, 1998

type:

dddd', 'MMM' 'd', 'yyyy

The elements in the custom date string must be in uppercase or lowercase as shown in the previous table (for example, "MM" not "mm" for months).  Elements in the custom date string may be separated by any alphanumeric character not listed in the previous table (separator).  If an element does not clearly specify how many characters should be expected on input, it must be followed by a separator enclosed in single quotes.  If the element is last in the format string, the separator does not have to be in single quotes.  Separators will appear in the same location in the worksheet display.  However, the single quotes will not be displayed.  You can not have two separators in single quotes adjacent to each other.  For example, "ddd '|' '-'MMM" is forbidden.

When a space is enclosed in single quotes, it is used as a parser.  This means that the data that is put in the cell must have the same number of characters between data values as are enclosed in the single quotes.  If you want to add space to data that does not already have it, use unquoted separators in the custom date string.  These spaces, however, will be used only for display purposes, not for parsing an input date/time string.  See the following table for examples.

Custom Date Input Examples

Custom Date	Input	Output	Notes
MM dd	0416	04 16	The unquoted space was ignored by the parser.  Therefore, the input was strictly according to the format.
MM' 'dd	02     12	02 12	The format expected just one space separator, but it is acceptable to have extra spaces in the string.
MM' 'dd	0212	-	A space separator was expected, so the parser failed.
3)	Additional Controls

The No Redraw (% Covered) combination box value controls the updating of child windows.  Origin will not update a child window if it is more than this percent covered by another window(s).

The Bisection Search Points combination box value speeds up the search process when using the Data Reader tool or when double-clicking on a data plot.  When you click on a data plot using the Data Reader tool, Origin begins searching for the nearest point using a sequential or bisection search.  If the number of data points is less than the bisection search value, then sequential search is used.  If the number of points is greater than the bisection search value, then bisection search is used.  (Note that the bisection search requires a sorted X dataset.)

The Delete Empty Columns After Worksheet Transpose combination box controls whether or not Origin deletes empty columns after transposing worksheet columns and rows.

The Default Multi-ASCII Import Template drop-down list controls the default worksheet template used when importing multiple ASCII files into multiple worksheets.

The Use Numeric as Preferred Column Type check box controls whether all columns in all new worksheets are of Numeric or of Text & Numeric type (default).  If you are planning on sharing your Origin project with a colleague who has Origin 4.1, you should select this check box.  Failing to do this could cause a loss in data when the project is opened in Origin 4.1.

Select the Use Toolbar Spacer check box to display a toolbar spacer below the menu bar.  The toolbar spacer ensures that the toolbar area remains at a fixed width when changing the active child window.  The height of the toolbar spacer is determined by the maximum height required to display all the selected toolbars for any of the child windows in the project.

(To hide the toolbar spacer, right-click in the toolbar spacer region and select Hide Toolbar Spacer from the shortcut menu.)


The Open/Close Tab

1)	The Window Closing Options Group

Select whether you want a prompt to display when closing a child window in a project.  To hide a window instead of deleting it, select Hide Only from the drop-down list.

Select the Prompt for Save on Script Window Close check box to display a prompt when closing the Script window (if it has been modified).  This prompt also displays when exiting Origin if the Script window has been modified.

2)	Additional Controls

The Start New Project drop-down list allows you to select the child window or project you want to have displayed when you open a new project.  You can select from worksheet, Excel workbook, empty graph, matrix, ORIGIN.OPJ, or none.  The ORIGIN.OPJ file includes a worksheet and a graph window.  The layer contents of the graph window is configured to display the column B dataset.

Select the Backup Project Before Saving check box to automatically create a backup of the currently saved file before re-saving.  Origin renames the saved file BACKUP.OPJ, and then saves the altered file using the specified file name.

The When Opening Minimized Windows drop-down list allows you to select how windows that are saved as minimized in pre-version 6 projects open in Origin 6.  Opening minimized windows as hidden windows improves the loading time of your project.  Hidden windows can be accessed from the Project Explorer.

The Project Explorer/Workspace View drop-down list controls how the workspace view is effected by the folder selection in the Project Explorer.  Select Active Folder Only to show only the windows that are in the active Project Explorer folder in the workspace.  Select Active and Subfolders to show all the windows in the active folder and all the windows in the subfolders of the active folder in the workspace.

Select the Prompt for Save on Options Dialog Close check box to open an attention dialog box after the Options dialog box is closed, asking if you want to save the changes as Origin's startup options.

When the Prompt for Save on Options Dialog Close check box is cleared, then the Save Settings on Close check box becomes available.  Select this check box to automatically save the changes to the Options dialog box as Origin's startup options.  Clear the check box to restore the default options when you exit Origin.


The Excel Tab

1)	The Plotting Selection Group

a.	The Default Plot Assignments Check Box

Select this check box to plot by highlighting the workbook data and assuming column designations appropriate to a selected graph type.  If no workbook data is highlighted when the graph type is selected, Origin opens the Select Data for Plotting dialog box.

b.	The Scan Data for Legend Check Box

Select this check box to create a graph legend by automatically searching the associated workbook for text.  For each data plot, Origin begins searching for legend text in the cell immediately above the cell that contains the first Y data values.  Origin continues to search upward in the column until it finds text values.

c.	The Plot Into Drop-down List

When selecting multiple datasets for plotting, control the display of the data plots from this drop-down list.

Select Single Layer to plot the selected datasets into a single layer in a graph window.

Select Multiple Layers to plot each selected dataset into its own layer.  All layers display in the same graph window.

Select Multiple Pages to plot each selected dataset into its own layer.  Each layer displays in its own graph window.

2)	The Prompt Before Group

a.	The Opening Excel Files Check Box

Select this check box to provide a dialog box that determines how Excel files are opened in Origin.

When this check box is selected, the Open Excel dialog box opens when you select File:Open Excel, or when you click the Open Excel button on the Standard toolbar (and select a file and click Open).  The Open Excel dialog box provides the option of opening the Excel file as an Excel workbook or as an Origin worksheet(s).

When this check box is cleared, Origin opens the Excel file as an Excel workbook.

b.	The Saving Excel Workbooks Drop-down List

This drop-down list controls the display of a dialog box that determines how internal and external Excel workbooks are saved when you save a project that contains the workbook.

Select Never to prevent Origin from opening the Save Excel Workbooks dialog box under all circumstances.  By default, external Excel workbooks are automatically updated when the project that includes the workbook is saved.

Select Before Saving to direct Origin to open the Save Excel Workbooks dialog box whenever you select File:Save Project (or whenever you click the Save button on the Standard toolbar), assuming the project includes an Excel workbook.  The Save Excel Workbooks dialog box allows you to determine which (external) Excel workbook files to update when the project is saved.  By default, all external Excel workbooks are updated.

Select Before Saving Project As to direct Origin to open the Save Excel Workbooks dialog box whenever you select File:Save Project As, assuming the project includes an Excel workbook.  (See the previous drop-down list option.)


Customizing the Color Palette

Origin provides a number of options for using color to present your data.  These options are available from color buttons and color drop-down lists in the Plot Details dialog box, and from color drop-down lists in other dialog boxes.  The color drop-down lists display the colors from Origin's color palette.  The color buttons provide a number of color control options, including selecting a color from the color palette, or incrementing through the colors in the color palette.

To customize the colors in the color palette, select Format:Color Palette.  This menu command opens the Color Palette dialog box.  After making changes to this dialog box and clicking OK, Origin displays a prompt asking if you want to save the color settings for future use.  Click Yes to have your customizations available in future Origin sessions.  Click No to access your customizations in the current Origin session only.

The Color Palette Dialog Box

To change the order of colors in the color palette

To move a color up or down in the palette, select the desired color and then click the Move Color Up or Move Color Down button in the dialog box.

To customize a color in the color palette

To customize a color, double-click on the desired color.  This action opens the Color dialog box.  Select a color from the Basic Colors gallery or click Define Custom Colors to define a custom color.  After making your changes, click OK to close the Color dialog box.  Your custom color displays at the same location in the palette.  To associate a custom name with this color, double-click on the text in the Name column and type the desired text.

To add a color to the color palette

To add a color to the palette, click the New Color button in the dialog box.  This action opens the Color dialog box.  Define your new color in this dialog box and click OK.  Your new color displays at the bottom of the color palette with the associated text "New Color".  Double-click to edit this text.

To delete a color from the color palette

To delete a color from the palette, select the color and then click the Delete Color button.  All the colors below this color move up one index level in the palette.

To reset the color palette to the default settings

To reset the color palette to its default settings, click the Load Default button in the Color Palette dialog box.


Creating Custom Colors from the Color Buttons

To create a custom color as you edit an element in the Plot Details dialog box, click the color button and select Custom from the button's submenu.  This action changes the button text to "Custom".  Right-click on the Custom button to open the Color dialog box.  Select a color from the Basic Colors gallery or click Define Custom Colors to define a custom color.  After making your changes, click OK to close the Color dialog box.  Your custom color now displays in the Custom button.


Customizing Templates

A key component of Origin's customizable features is the ability to create custom templates.  Templates are "blueprints" for the creation of Origin child windows.  They provide Origin instructions on building associated child windows.

Each of the three child window types have default file extensions.

Default Template Extensions

Worksheet:  TemplateName.OTW

Graph, Layout Page, Function Graph:  TemplateName.OTP

Matrix:  TemplateName.OTM

More:

Creating a Custom Template

Creating a Child Window Based on a Custom Template

Attributes Saved with a Worksheet Template

Attributes Saved with a Graph Template

Attributes Saved with a Matrix Template


Creating a Custom Template

To create a custom template, you can modify an existing template or create a new template.  The procedure is similar in both cases.  You must first open the desired child window type (for example, a graph window), customize the child window, and then save the window as a template.  The instructions on re-building the child window are saved with the template.  However, any data in the child window is not saved with the template.

To create a custom template, first open a child window based on an existing template.  For example, if you want to modify the LINE.OTP graph template (or if you want to create a new graph template similar to LINE.OTP), open a graph window based on this template by selecting File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.  Select Graph from the Window Type list box.  Select Line from the Template drop-down list.  Click OK.

Once the desired child window is open, customize the "look" of the child window.  For tips on customizing the child window, see  Attributes Saved with a Worksheet Template,  Attributes Saved with a Graph Template, and  Attributes Saved with a Matrix Template.

After customizing the child window, save the child window as a template by selecting File:Save Template As.  This menu command opens the Save As dialog box.  To modify the existing template, save your customizations to the default file name (for example, LINE.OTP).  To create a new template, type a new name in the File Name text box.  Click Save to close the dialog box and save the custom template.


Creating a Child Window Based on a Custom Template

To open a child window based on a custom template, select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.  Select the appropriate child window type in the Window Type list box.  Select the custom template from the Template drop-down list.  Click OK.

To plot data directly into a graph window based on a custom template, select Plot:Template when the worksheet is active.  This menu command opens the Open dialog box.  Select the custom template and click Open.


Attributes Saved with a Worksheet Template

The features of a worksheet that can be saved to a template are accessible from the following dialog boxes:

•	The Worksheet Display Control dialog box.

•	The Page Color dialog box.

•	The Worksheet Column Format dialog box.

•	The ASCII Import Options for Worksheet dialog box.

•	The Data Import Options for Worksheet dialog box.

•	The Import Verification dialog box.

•	The ASCII Export Into dialog box.

•	The Set Column Values dialog box.

•	The Extract Worksheet Data dialog box.

•	The Worksheet Script dialog box.

The Worksheet Display Control and associated Page Color dialog boxes provide customization of the color, style and size of font, and the colors and dimensions of various elements.  To open the Worksheet Display Control dialog box, select Format:Worksheet when the worksheet is active.  To open the Page Color dialog box, click the Page Color button in the Worksheet Display Control dialog box.

The Worksheet Column Format dialog box sets the name, column type, format options, column width, and column label for the active column.  To open this dialog box, select Format:Column when a worksheet column is selected.

The ASCII Import Options for Worksheet, Data Import Options for Worksheet, and Import Verification dialog boxes set the default import behavior for a worksheet.  To open these dialog boxes, select File:Import:ASCII Options or File:Import:Other Options.

The ASCII Export Into dialog box sets the default export behavior for the worksheet, including controlling the export of column names and labels, and the data separator.  To open this dialog box, select File:Export ASCII.  After clicking Save in the Export ASCII dialog box, Origin opens the ASCII Export Into dialog box.

The equations in the Set Column Values and Extract Worksheet Data dialog boxes, as well as the script in the Worksheet Script dialog box, are saved with the template.  To open these dialog boxes, select Column:Set Column Values, Analysis:Extract Worksheet Data, and Tools:Worksheet Script, respectively.


Attributes Saved with a Graph Template

The graph window, with its many graphic objects, is a rich area for customization.  The page, each layer on the page, the axes, the tick labels, the axes labels, and text or object annotations, as well as the data plots, all have properties that can be saved in a template.  These features are accessible from the following dialog boxes:

•	The page tabs of the Plot Details dialog box.

•	The layer tabs of the Plot Details dialog box.

•	The data plot tabs of the Plot Details dialog box.

•	The function, data point, error, and label tabs of the Plot Details dialog box.

•	The Axis dialog box.

•	The dialog boxes that control any annotations on the graph.

The tabs of the Plot Details dialog box control all the display properties of the graph page, layer, and all the data plot elements in the layer.  To open the Plot Details dialog box, double-click on the desired graph element.  The left side of the Plot Details dialog box displays a tree with icons representing the elements in your graph.  Select the icon you want to edit and its controls become available on tabs on the right side of the dialog box.

The details (or data plot styles) of each of the data plots in your graph window are saved in data plot style holders.  Data plot style holders contain information about the type of data plot (for example, scatter, line, or column) and the settings for the data plot (for example, the settings on the Plot Details Symbol tab).  When you save a graph window as a template, each data plot in each layer of the graph window has an associated data plot style holder.  Thus, when you create a graph based on this custom template, for each layer in your graph, the first data plot in the layer will display according to the information stored in the first data plot style holder for that layer.  The second data plot in the layer will display according to the information stored in the second data plot style holder for that layer, and so on.  As you add data plots to the layer, Origin searches for a data plot style holder that is not currently in use (for example, if you removed a data plot from the layer contents), and displays the data plot using the first data plot style holder found.  If you add more data plots to the layer than there are style holders, Origin will display the data plot using the information in the last data plot style holder.

The Axis dialog box provides options for the customization of the axis, axis labels, axis scaling, grid lines, axis breaks, and tick label font and formatting.  To open this dialog box, select Format:Axes:AxisType.

Additional annotations can be added to the graph window using the Text tool or other graphic tools from the Tools toolbar.


Attributes Saved with a Matrix Template

The matrix window is customized by editing its associated dialog boxes.  These dialog boxes include:

•	The Matrix Properties dialog box.

•	The Matrix Dimensions dialog box.

•	The Set Matrix Values dialog box.

•	The Matrix Display Control dialog box.

•	The Page Color dialog box.

•	The ASCII Import Options for Matrix dialog box.

•	The Data Import Options for Matrix dialog box.

•	The ASCII Export Into dialog box.

The Matrix Properties dialog box provides controls to specify the data type and display.  The Matrix Dimensions dialog box provides options for customizing the matrix dimensions and the XY mapping relationship.  The Set Matrix Values dialog box allows you to specify a formula to fill the matrix.  Each of these dialog boxes are available from the Matrix menu.

The Matrix Display Control and the associated Page Color dialog boxes provide options for customizing the text color, style, and heading and grid display in the matrix, as well as the background color.  To open the Matrix Display Control dialog box, double-click in the matrix window, but outside of the grids.  To open the Page Color dialog box, click on the Page Color button in the Matrix Display Control dialog box.

The ASCII Import Options for Matrix and Data Import Options for Matrix dialog boxes set the default import behavior for a matrix.  To open these dialog boxes, select File:Import ASCII and click the Options button in the Import ASCII dialog box.  To open the Data Import Options for Matrix dialog box, click the Other Options button in the ASCII Import Options for Matrix dialog box.

The ASCII Export Into dialog box sets the default export behavior for the matrix, including controlling the export of column names and controlling the data separator.  To open this dialog box, select File:Export ASCII.  After clicking Save in the Export ASCII dialog box, Origin opens the ASCII Export Into dialog box.


LabTalk Programming

Introduction to LabTalk

Elements of the Language

A Tutorial On Variables, Datasets, Operators, and Functions


Introduction to LabTalk

The Origin software is written so that it can be used successfully without ever writing a LabTalk script.  The majority of data analysis and plotting functions can be accessed through Origin's point-and-click interface.  However, the LabTalk language provides a greater degree of automation, customization, and flexibility when developing an application.

LabTalk allows you to control every aspect of Origin, from the number of significant digits used in calculations to the color of data points in a data plot.  Use LabTalk scripts to create sophisticated data analysis routines, or modify basic Origin procedures.  Additionally, LabTalk can be used to produce a customized user interface, or to develop an entirely new application using Origin as a development environment.


Elements of the Language

LabTalk's syntax and structure are similar, but not identical, to C.  It incorporates DOS-style commands with option switches and arguments.  It also includes object properties and methods comparable to those in Visual Basic.

More:

Script Execution

Data Types

Operators

Command Statements

Object Methods and Properties

Functions

Macros


Script Execution

Most LabTalk script is executed from a button, a script file, or from the Script window.  To open the Script window, select Window:Script Window.  To execute a single statement of script from the Script window, type the statement without a semicolon and press ENTER.  To execute more than one statement, disable Script Execution by selecting Edit:Script Execution from the Script window menu bar.  Type in the script with semicolons after each statement.  When complete, select Edit:Script Execution to enable Script Execution.  Click and drag to highlight the entire script, and press ENTER.


Data Types

There are two basic data types:  variables and datasets.  Variables are used for storing single numeric values or alphanumeric text strings.  Datasets are used for storing a one-dimensional array that can contain numeric or text strings.

Variables

FRED=5; is an example of a numeric variable assignment.  %K=Hello World; is an example of a string variable assignment.  Variables do not need to be declared before values are assigned.  Any word may be used to define a numeric variable, but there are only 26 allowed string variables:  %A through %Z.

Origin uses some variables itself.  These variables are called system variables and should not be used to store your values or strings.  Avoid using %C - %J and %X - %Z.  For example, the system string variable %H contains the name of the active window and the system numeric variable X1 contains the starting value of the X axis in the current graph.

Datasets

Individual values in a dataset are referred to as elements.  Each element is associated with an index number.  When a dataset is displayed in a worksheet, the index number of an element directly corresponds with its row number.

When a dataset is created in a worksheet, the data displayed in the worksheet column is a copy of the dataset held in memory.  When the dataset is plotted, the data plot is also a representation of the actual dataset held in memory.  Whenever a dataset is modified in a worksheet or graph window the actual dataset and all other representations of the dataset are affected as well.


Operators

The LabTalk interpreter recognizes the following operators:

The assignment operator is an equal sign (=).  Additionally, the interpreter recognizes the arithmetic operators add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), and 'to the power of' (^); the relational operators 'greater than' (>), 'less than' (<), 'less than or equal to' (<=), 'greater than or equal to' (>=), and 'equal to' (==); and the logical operators 'not equal to' (!=), and (&&), and or (||).

Use these operators to assign variables, calculate values, perform operations on datasets, and check relations between values and variables.


Command Statements

LabTalk commands are used to perform many actions in Origin, such as plotting data, opening a window, saving a project or window, and printing to the Script window.

The general form of a command statement is:

command option argument(s);

Spaces separate the command, option, and argument(s).  An option is generally a letter preceded by a dash.  Options affect the operation of a command.  Arguments are passed to and may be modified by the command.

For example, the following script closes the Data1 window:

window -c Data1;


Object Methods and Properties

Other functions in Origin are carried out in object-oriented form, with object methods and properties.

Object properties are used to get and set properties of the object.  They take the form:

Object.property=;

For example, the following script sets, and then returns, the column width of columns in the active worksheet:

wks.colwidth=12;

wks.colwidth=;

Object methods perform immediate actions related to the object.  They take the form:

Object.method(argument);

For example, the following script adds a column called Voltage to the active worksheet:

wks.AddCol(Voltage);


Functions

You can use a function in Origin anywhere a mathematical expression is used.  Each function returns a value, or range of values, depending on the function used and the arguments supplied.  To see the result of a function that returns a range, assign the range to a dataset.  For example:

Data1_D=sort(Data1_A);

Built-in Functions

Origin provides a wide variety of built-in functions to facilitate numeric, trigonometric, statistical, and other calculations.

A few of the most common functions are listed below:

abs(x):  Finds the absolute value of x.

ave(dataset, size):  Breaks the dataset into groups of size, and returns the average for each.

nint(x):  Returns the nearest integer to x.

User-Defined Functions

Origin allows you to define your own functions of the form y=f(x).  Once defined, you can refer to these functions by name and use them as you would built-in functions.  There are three ways to define a new function:

•	Click the New Function button on the Standard toolbar.  Enter the desired function on the Function tab of the Plot Details dialog box.

•	Select Graph:Add Function Graph.  Enter the desired function in the Function Details dialog box.

•	Use a LabTalk assignment statement, of the form:

FuncName(x)=xExpression

where xExpression is a mathematical expression involving x.


Macros

A macro is a defined shortcut that can execute any combination of operations, commands, object methods, and object properties.  Macros take numbers, variables, or strings as arguments.  Origin provides a number of built-in macros.  Define your own macros with the define command.  This command uses the following syntax:

define MacroName {script};

Arguments are specified within the script as %1, %2, etc.  When the macro is used, type arguments after the macro name, separated by spaces.

For example, the following code defines a macro that multiplies two numbers passed to it as arguments and then types the result to the Script window:

define mult2 { type %1 times %2 is $(%1*%2); };

To execute the macro type the following text into the Script window and press ENTER:

mult2 3 4

Origin responds with 3 times 4 is 12 in the Script window.


A Tutorial On Variables, Datasets, Operators, and Functions

The following tutorial lesson uses the Script window as the environment in which to issue LabTalk commands.

Using the LabTalk Interpreter as a Calculator

1)	Select Window:Script Window to open the Script window.

2)	Type the following in the Script window and press ENTER:

1+1=

Origin adds a semicolon after the "=" to indicate that the line has been interpreted and responds with 1+1=2.

Defining a Variable

1)	Type the following in the Script window and press ENTER:

Beta=4.18

A new variable, Beta, is defined (case insensitive).

2)	Enter Beta+1=;

Origin responds with BETA+1=5.18.

Evaluating More Complex Expressions

Arithmetic operators include:  +, -, *, /, and ^.  Expressions can be enclosed in parentheses ( ).

Arithmetic functions include:  sin, cos, tan, exp, sqrt, ln, log, abs, nint, rnd, and mod.

1)	Type the following in the Script window and press ENTER.  You may leave spaces in the expression, except between a function name and the opening parentheses:

sin( (beta/2) * 3.14 )^2.1=

Origin responds with SIN( (BETA/2) * 3.14 )^2.1=0.06687.

Using System Variables in Calculations

System variables can be used to access information about many different objects in Origin including worksheets.  This information can be used in calculations.

1)	Click the New Worksheet button on the Standard toolbar to open a new worksheet.

2)	Enter some numeric data in the first column.

3)	Click on the first column heading to select the entire column.  This action sets the selected column as the active dataset.

4)	Type the following assignment statement in the Script window and press ENTER:

%(%H, 2)=3*%C;

The cells in the second column of the active worksheet are set equal to 3 times the value of their associated cells in the first column of  the worksheet (the one you had selected).

%H is a system variable that holds the name of the active worksheet.

%C is a system variable that holds the name of the active dataset.

%(WorksheetName, ColumnNumber) is interpreted as the name of the dataset displayed in the given column number of the named worksheet.  For this example, you could also have used %H_B=3*%C.  However, %(%H, 2) will always work even if the column name of the second column is changed.


Making a Custom User Interface

Label Buttons

A Tutorial to Create a Button that Displays the Nearest Data Point

User Defined Toolbar Buttons

A Tutorial to Create a Toolbar Button that Finds the Limits of Datasets


Label Buttons

Label buttons are a unique and powerful feature in Origin.  A label button is a label (such as an arrow, a text label, or imported graphic) that is associated with a LabTalk script.  When you move, resize, click on, or otherwise manipulate the button, Origin executes the associated script.

Origin provides several templates that contain buttons.  In this section, you copy a button from a template and place it into a new graph window.  You also learn how to create a new button.  Reference information on the Label Control dialog box and label properties and methods are provided as well.

To realize the full potential of buttons, review the LabTalk scripting language.  Refer to the LabTalk Help File for a complete discussion of LabTalk.

More:

Copying and Pasting a Button

Creating a Button

The Label Control Dialog Box

Label Properties

Label Methods


Copying and Pasting a Button

Origin provides several graph window templates that include buttons.  These are called functional templates, and are located in the Origin BUTTONS folder.

To Copy a Button

1)	Select File:New.  This menu command opens the New dialog box.

2)	Select Graph from the Window Type list box.

3)	Click Directory.  This action opens the Modify Location dialog box.

4)	Make BUTTONS the active folder and click OK.

5)	Select SIMPLE from the Template drop-down list.

6)	Click OK.  A new graph window opens from the SIMPLE.OTP template.  This template contains buttons that perform a variety of functions, including opening windows, saving a project, and printing.

7)	Select Edit:Button Edit Mode to enter Button Edit Mode.  This menu command is checked when in Button Edit Mode.  Also, w hen in Button Edit Mode, buttons are no longer "active", and can be selected and edited.

8)	Click on the Import ASCII File button to select it.

9)	Click the Copy button on the Edit toolbar.  The button is copied to the Clipboard.

Pasting a Button into a New Graph Window

1)	Click the New Graph button on the Standard toolbar to open a new graph window.

2)	Click anywhere in the gray area of the window to establish the paste destination.

3)	Click the Paste button on the Edit toolbar.  The button pastes into the new graph window.  The button is not yet active, though, because you are still in Button Edit Mode.

Exiting Button Edit Mode

1)	Select Edit:Button Edit Mode to exit the editing mode.

The buttons in this graph window are now active.  If you click on the Import ASCII File button, the Open dialog box opens, prompting you to select an ASCII file.


Creating a Button

Buttons can be created from any label.  In the following example, you create a button from a text label and define the button to open a dialog box containing the message "Hello World!".

Creating the Text Label

1)	Click the New Graph button on the Standard toolbar to open a new graph window.

2)	Open the Tools toolbar by selecting View:Toolbars.  Select the Toolbars check box and click Close.

3)	Select the Text tool from the Tools toolbar.

4)	Click in a blank area of the graph window.  This action opens the Text Control dialog box.  Type Hello in the text box.

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box.  The Hello text label displays on the screen.

Changing the Label into a Button

1)	Select Edit:Button Edit Mode to enter Button Edit Mode.  This menu command is checked when in Button Edit Mode.

2)	Click once on the Hello text label to select it, then select Format:Label Control.  This menu command opens the associated Label Control dialog box.

3)	Click in the text box at the bottom of the dialog box and type in the following text (this is the script for the control):

type -b "Hello World";

Selecting the Script Execution Option

1)	Select Button Up from the Script, Run After drop-down list.

The Button Up option informs Origin that the script is executed when the button is clicked.  Each of the options from the Script, Run After drop-down list establish a different method for script execution.  For example, select Moved to execute the associated script when the text label is moved.

2)	Click OK to close the dialog box.  If you are in Button Edit Mode, select Edit:Button Edit Mode to exit the editing mode.  The Hello text label now displays on your screen as a button.  When you click the button, an Attention dialog box opens and displays "Hello World!".

3)	Click OK to clear the Attention dialog box from the screen.


The Label Control Dialog Box

All labels (text labels, arrows, rectangles, etc.) have associated Label Control dialog boxes.

To open the Label Control dialog box associated with a label, perform one of the following operations:

•	Enter Button Edit Mode by selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.  Click on the label to create a highlighted boundary around the label and select Format:Label Control.

•	Enter Button Edit Mode by selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.  Right-click on the label and select Label Control from the shortcut menu.

•	Hold the ALT key down and double-click on the label.  This method is not available for labels that are set as invisible or not selectable.

The Label Control Dialog Box

1)	The Object Name Text Box

The label may be named, enabling Origin to identify the label during execution of built-in or user-defined programming scripts.  Unnamed labels are not affected by any script other than within the Label Control dialog box.  Enter the desired name in the text box provided.

Warning:  Some labels, such as the legend and the axis titles, are already named by Origin.  These labels should not be renamed!  If you rename these labels, menu commands that update the labels will no longer work, will create a duplicate label, or will over-write the modified label.

2)	The Attach To Group

To control the effect of layer manipulation and axis rescaling on the label's size and position, select one of the following radio buttons:

a.	Page

When attached to the page, the label is both position and scale independent of its layer.  The label position and size are not affected by moving or resizing the layer, or by changing the axis scale.  The label is still a part of the layer, however, and is deleted if the layer is deleted.

b.	Layer Frame

When attached to the layer frame, the label is position dependent on its layer.  When you move the layer, the label moves with the layer.  If you resize the layer, the label changes dimensions proportionally and moves with the layer.  If you rescale the axes, however, the label does not change size or position.

c.	Layer and Scales

When attached to the layer and scales, the label is connected to the layer in terms of size and position.  If you move the layer, the label moves with the layer.  If you resize the layer, the label changes dimensions proportionally and moves with the layer.  If you rescale the axes, the label size does not change, but the label moves so that it maintains the same XY coordinate value.

3)	The Link to Variables (%,$) Check Box

This check box is only useful in the Label Control dialog box of a text label.  Select this check box if data or variables will display in the message displayed by the text label.  Each time Origin redraws the label, the label is updated to reflect any changes made to the data or variables signified within.

When this check box is selected, proper notation conventions must be followed in the associated text label.

4)	The Mouse Click Group

Select the No Vertical Movement check box to prevent movement of the label in the vertical direction.  When the No Horizontal Movement check box is selected, the label cannot be moved in the horizontal direction.  Select the Not Selectable check box to restrict selection or movement of the label entirely.  This option is useful when using a label as a backdrop to a page or layer.  When the Not Selectable check box is selected, you cannot use the ALT+double-click shortcut to edit the dialog box.  Instead, enter Button Edit Mode, click on the label, and select Format:Label Control.

5)	The Visible Check Box

When the Visible check box is selected, the label's associated Text Control dialog box, as well as the Label Control dialog box, are accessible by double-clicking on the label, or ALT+double-clicking on the label, respectively.  The label can also be moved and resized.

When this check box is cleared, the label is not visible and its associated dialog boxes cannot be accessed by double-clicking (or ALT+double-clicking) on the label.  To display and edit the label, enter Button Edit Mode by selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.  Exit Button Edit Mode after editing the label by re-selecting Edit:Button Edit Mode.  (When in Button Edit Mode, the Button Edit Mode menu command is checked.)

6)	The Real-Time Check Box

Select the Real-Time check box to update the label in real-time whenever there is a real-time plotting event.

7)	The Script, Run After Drop-down List

The option selected from this drop-down list defines the circumstances required for script execution.  Enter the script to be executed in the associated text box beneath this drop-down list.

Script Execution Methods

None:  Do not execute script.

Button Up:  Execute script when button is clicked.

Moved:  Execute script when button is moved.

Sized:  Execute script when button is resized.

Moved or Sized:  Execute script when button is moved or resized.

Redrawn:  Execute script when button is redrawn.

Real-Time:  Execute script when a real-time event occurs.   These events are typically generated through DDE data transfer or from a Data Acquisition module.

Window Create:  Execute script when the button's window first opens.

Window Close:  Execute script when the button's window closes.

Window Activate:  Execute script when the button's window becomes active.

Window Deactivate:  Execute script when the button's window becomes inactive.

New Selection:  Execute script when unselected button is clicked.

Before Save:  Execute script immediately before saving the project.

Axes Rescale:  Execute script when graph axes rescale.

All Events:  Execute script when any one of the previous events occur.

8)	The (Script) Text Box

Type the desired script directly in this text box or copy it from any text editor.  Every LabTalk statement in the script must end with a semicolon.  ENTER is a simple carriage return.  To add a tab within the text box, use CTRL + TAB.


Label Properties

Label properties can be used on any button or named label.  Most of the properties can be read or assigned using the assignment operator, =.  Label property syntax is as follows:

[winName!]name.property=

or

this.property=

WinName! is optional.  It specifies the window that the named label resides in.  This option is useful when there are several objects with the same name in a project.

Name is the object's name, as typed in the Object Name text box in the Label Control dialog box.

Property is one of the available label properties.

The this. notation can only be used in the Label Control dialog box.  Script which is written in the Label Control dialog box of a label can reference the properties and methods of its label object by using this in place of LabelName.

To set the value of a property, type the new value after the =.  To return the value of the property, press ENTER after the =.

For example, the following script moves the Point label in the Graph1 window to the X coordinate of 12.

Graph1!Point.x=12;

When typed into the Point label's Label Control dialog box, the following script has the same effect.

this.x=12;


Label Methods

Label methods can be used on any button or named label.  These methods induce an immediate action.  The syntax of the methods is as follows:

[winName!]LabelName.method(argument)

or

this.method (argument)

WinName! is optional.  It specifies the window in which the named label resides.  This option is useful when there are several objects with the same name in a project.  Not all methods require an argument.  Even if there is no argument, the ( ) must always be included after the method name.

Name is the label's name, as typed in the Object Name text box in the Label Control dialog box.

Method is one of the available label methods.

The this. notation can only be used in the Label Control dialog box.  Script which is written in the Label Control dialog box of a label can reference the properties and methods of its label object by using this in place of LabelName.

For example, the following script executes the script associated with the Now button in the Test7 window.

Test7!Now.run( );


A Tutorial to Create a Button that Displays the Nearest Data Point

This tutorial lesson shows you how to create a label button that is placed on a graph.  When the button is moved, the index number of the nearest data point is displayed in the status bar.

Creating the Label on a Graph Window

1)	Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar, navigate to the TUTORIAL folder in the Origin 6 folder, and then double-click on the project file FITEXMP1.OPJ to open it.

2)	Select the Arrow tool from the Tools toolbar.

3)	Position the mouse pointer just above the X axis and just to the right of the Y axis in the Graph1 window.  Press and hold down the left mouse button.  Drag out a vertical arrow releasing the mouse button near the top of the Y axis (same X location).

Altering the Appearance of the Arrow

1)	Hold down the CTRL key and double-click on the arrow to open the Arrow Control dialog box.

2)	Select the Arrow at Start check box.  This action makes the arrow double-headed.

3)	Click OK to close the dialog box and alter the arrow.

Making the Arrow a Button that Finds the Nearest Data Point

1)	Hold down the ALT key and double-click on the arrow.  This action opens the associated Label Control dialog box.

2)	Select the No Vertical Movement check box.  This allows the arrow to move horizontally, disabling vertical movement.

3)	Select Moved from the Script, Run After drop-down list.  In this mode, the script in the text box executes whenever the button is moved.

4)	Type the following script into the text box.  The statements starting with // are comments.  They are present to clarify the code and do not need to be included.

// Get index of data point to left of button

Index=xindex(this.x,%C);

// Get X values of left and right data points

LeftX=xvalue(Index,%C);

RightX=xvalue(Index+1,%C);

// Check to see which point the button is closer to

// and set PtIndex to the index of that point

if (abs(this.x-LeftX)<abs(this.x-RightX))

{  PtIndex=Index;  } // closer to the left one

else

{  PtIndex=Index+1;  }; // closer to the right one

// Type -q types the statement to the status bar.

type -q " Closest data point is point #$(PtIndex)";

5)	Click OK to close the dialog box.

Using the New Button

1)	Click on the arrow button and drag it horizontally along the graph.  The status bar updates with the nearest X data point index number.


User Defined Toolbar Buttons

User Defined toolbar buttons provide a quick and easy method of customizing the Origin user interface to run tailor made LabTalk scripts.  User Defined toolbar buttons can be added to any pre-existing Origin toolbar or to a newly created User Defined toolbar.  User Defined toolbars and toolbar buttons possess all the features and capabilities of pre-existing Origin toolbars and toolbar buttons.  Once created, a User Defined toolbar can be opened, closed, docked, or floated.  The availability of a User Defined toolbar button can be programmed to be window type dependent.  Most importantly, the script associated with a User Defined toolbar button can be executed with the single click of a mouse!

User Defined toolbar buttons are created and modified on the Commands tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog box.  Select View:Toolbars from the Origin main menu, click on the Commands tab, and then select User Defined from the Categories list box.  Click here to review a tutorial on this topic..


A Tutorial to Create a Toolbar Button that Finds the Limits of Datasets

The following example shows you how to create a User Defined toolbar button on a new toolbar that runs script from a specified section of a script file.

Customizing buttons to call a LabTalk script file:

1)	Select View:Toolbars, then select the Commands tab of the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

2)	Select User Defined in the Categories list box.  The default buttons are displayed in the Buttons group.  These buttons are not yet associated with any script.

3)	Select the first button.  Click the Modify Button button to open the Button Settings dialog box.

4)	Click the Browse button next to the File Name text box.  Navigate to the TUTORIAL folder in the Origin 6 folder.

5)	Double-click on the LIMITS.OGS file.

6)	Type Main in the Section text box.

7)	In the Context group, leave the window radio button selected and clear all the check boxes except for the Graph check box.  This will make the new button available only when a graph window is active.

8)	Type Find Dataset Limits in the Tool Tip text box.

9)	Type Finds the limits of the selected dataset in the Status Bar text box.

10)	Click OK.

11)	Drag the first button from the Buttons group to the Origin workspace.  A toolbar titled Toolbar1 is added to the workspace with the new button on it.

12)	Click Close in the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

13)	Plot some data into a graph window.  Click the button on the new toolbar.  You will see that Origin runs the Main section of LIMITS.OGS.  The LIMITS.OGS file is programmed to find the limits of the selected dataset and output the results to the Script Window.

More:

Modifying the Bitmaps of User Defined Buttons


Modifying the Bitmaps of User Defined Buttons

To change the bitmaps of the User Defined buttons you can use any program that will create or modify a bitmap file (for example, Window's Paint).  Click on the Window's Start button and then select Programs:Accessories:Paint.  Once inside Paint, open the file USERDEF.BMP which is located in your Origin 6 folder.  This bitmap file is the default bitmap file for the ten User Defined buttons.  Each User Defined button requires a 16 x 16 block of pixels from this bitmap.  Because there are ten User Defined buttons and they are arranged side by side, the USERDEF.BMP bitmap must be 16 x 160 pixels.

To change the bitmaps for the User Defined buttons modify the USERDEF.BMP bitmap file and then save it with a different file name.  Alternatively, you can create your own 16 x 160 pixel bitmap file from scratch.  Then, on the Commands tab of the Customize Toolbar dialog box, click once on the first bitmap button.  Click the Browse button and select your newly created bitmap file.  This procedure changes the bitmaps for all ten of the User Defined buttons.


References - References
References

1)	"A simplex method for function minimization", Nelder and Mead, Computer Journal, Vol. 7, p 308 (1965).

2)	Mathematical Handbook, Spiegel, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York (1990).

3)	Nonlinear Regression, Seber and Wild, John Wiley & Sons (1989).

4)	Numerical Recipes in C, The Art of Scientific Computing, Press et. al., Cambridge University Press, New York (1988).

5)	"Quadratic Programming for Nonlinear Regression", Shrager, R.I., Communications of the ACM, 15, p 41-45 (1972).


Link to Microcal Software Web Site

Click Here to start your web browser and display links to the Microcal Software web site.


The integer modulus function is a built-in LabTalk function.  For more information, see the LabTalk Help File.


For more information on this dialog box, see  Saving the Project with Links to External Excel Workbook Files.


This check box is only available when the External radio button is selected.


Select Never from the Saving Excel Workbooks drop-down list to disable the display of this dialog box.


For a mathematical description of this method, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., listed in the References.


The resultant worksheet will look like the original matrix, but the XYZ coordinate mapping information is lost.


This method retains the relationship between the Z values and the mapping information.


To determine the delimiter, use a text editor to view the file.


Each time you save an ASCII file, Origin automatically adds the file extension DAT.


You can set different X values for each data plot.


Control the angular unit on the Numeric Format tab of the Options dialog box (Tools:Options).


Select View:Show:Layer Icons to control the display of the icons.


Graphic image caching is also available from the layer's shortcut menu.


These commands are also available by right-clicking on the graph page (outside the layer).


This feature is not functional for your 3D graphs.


The order of grouped data plots is determined by the Layer Contents list in the Layer n dialog box (double-click on the layer icon).


When you edit a data point, the left side of the Plot Details dialog box displays the data point row number next to the icon.


The object grid need not be disabled before selecting File:Print.  The object grid will not appear in the printed copy.


The View:Show:Labels menu command is page specific.


To include the labels, data, and layers in a printout, enable their display before printing.


When you print a graph, Origin updates the page dimensions based on the default page size determined by the currently selected printer driver.


The Master Page feature is particularly useful when creating watermarks or displaying a company logo.


You must select this menu command for each graph window you want to display the master items in.


You cannot edit the graph in the layout page window.  Edit the graph in its associated child window.


Pictures can also be sized by editing their Image Control dialog boxes.


For additional editing methods, review the destination application's documentation.


For additional editing methods, review the destination application's documentation.


This option is useful for slide making.


The data plot must have evenly spaced X data!


For a mathematical description of the statistics in this section, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., listed in the References.


For a mathematical description of FFT, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., listed in the References.


For more information, see page 545 of Numerical Recipes in C, 2nd edition.


For more information, see page 538 of Numerical Recipes in C, 2nd edition.


To smooth a data plot using this method, the data plot's X dataset must be evenly spaced.


This method implicitly assumes that the data is equally spaced in X.


A baseline must be created before this integration is performed.


A linear regression cannot be performed if both the Through Zero check box and the Fix Slope check box are selected.


For more information on this method, see Numerical Recipes in C by Press et. al., listed in the References.


When the fitter is in the advanced mode, you can switch to the basic mode by selecting Options:Basic Mode from the fitter's menu.


All the parameters must be initialized before Origin's nonlinear fitter can begin iterating.


Origin's implementation of linear constraints is based on I. R. Shrager, Quadratic Programming for Nonlinear Regression, listed in the References.


The term "multiple" refers to several datasets being assigned to the same function variable.


All the parameters must be initialized before Origin's nonlinear fitter can begin iterating.


If there is more than one constraint, separate constraints by a semicolon.


We do not recommend in-place activation as you do not have access to the worksheets containing the data plots.


The toolbar spacer is particularly useful when working with Excel workbooks in the project.


The template stores information necessary to re-build the child window.  It does not, however, store the data.


Origin includes a Customize Routine button on the Standard toolbar.  Edit the [Main] section of the CUSTOM.OGS file, and then click this button to execute the script!


Label buttons do not display in printouts of the window they reside on.


Except in the Script window, every LabTalk statement must end with a semicolon.


Use the built-in absolute value function, abs(x), to determine which data point is closer.